GA22 6822 19_System_360_and_System_370_Bibliography_Aug72 19 System 360 And 370 Bibliography Aug72

GA22-6822-19_System_360_and_System_370_Bibliography_Aug72 GA22-6822-19_System_360_and_System_370_Bibliography_Aug72

User Manual: GA22-6822-19_System_360_and_System_370_Bibliography_Aug72

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 292

DownloadGA22-6822-19_System_360_and_System_370_Bibliography_Aug72 GA22-6822-19 System 360 And 370 Bibliography Aug72
Open PDF In BrowserView PDF
GA22-6822-19

IBM System/360 and System/370
Systems

Bibliography
This bibliography identifies and describes all technical publications
and related materials needed by those who plan, program, install,
and operate the IBM System/360 (Model 25 and above) and the
System/370.
Titles, order numbers, current status, Technical Newsletter numbers,
an abstract of each item, and graphic library charts are included.
This bibliography is updated regulady to include new pUblications,
revised publications, and abstracts pertaining to this system library.
System/360 Model 20 publications and abstracts are provided in a
separate bibliography, order number GA26-3568.

Twentieth Edition (August 1972)
This is a mojor revision of, and supersedes, GA22-6822-18 and all associates SRL Newsletters.
The abstract section has been completely updated. The publications selector charts (Library
charts) have been updated, renamed, and moved to the back.
Requests for copies of IBM publications should be made to your IBM representative or to
the IBM branch office serving your locality.
A form for readers' comments is provided at the back of this pUblication. If the form has
been removed, comments may be addressed to IBM Corporation, Dept. 77A, 1133
Westchester Avenue, White Plains, N.Y., 10604. Comments and suggestions become the
property of IBM.

Contents

Part 1. Subject Code Listings . . • . . . • • • • • • • • • . • • • . . • . • . . . • • • • . . • . • . . • .• II
Table of Subject Code definitions. • . . • • . • . . • • • . . . • • • . • • • . • • • • • • • . • • • • .• II
Machines ••.•••••.••.•••••••••••••••••..•••••••.•••••••.•.•••••• 1
Programming - General . . . • • . . . • • . • • • . . • • • . • . . • • • . • . • • • • • • . • • • . . • • •• 5
OS (Operating System) - Release Dependent Publications. . • . • • • . • • • • • • • • . • . • • • 7
OS - Release Independent Publications •••.•.••••••••.••.••••••.•••.••.... 16
ASP (Attached Support Processor/Asymmetric Multiprocessing System) •••.•••.•.• 16
Call-OS •••••.•••••••••••••••.•••.•••.....••. ; •...••••.••.•••. 16
Real Time Monitor ••••••.•••.•••.•••••••••..••••.•.•.••••..••••. 16
Other ••.••••.••••••.•••.••.•....••.•...•.•••.•••.•.•.•.•.••• 17
DOS (Disk Operating System) - Release 26 and General ••••.•••••..••••••••.•• 17
DOS for System/370 - Release 27 •••••••.•••••••.•••.•.•.••••..•••••.•• 20
TSS (Time Sharing System) .••••••.•••.••...•.•..••..••.•.•.••.•.•.•.• 21
44PS (Model 44 Programming System) • • . • . • • . . • • • . • • • • • • • . • • • . • • • • • • • • . • 23
TOS (Tape Operating System) • • . • • . . • • • • • • • • . • • • • • . • • • • • • • • • . • • • • • • • • • 23
BOS (Basic Operating System) •.•••••.•••••••••.••.••••••••••• ; •••••••• 25
BPS (Basic Programming Support) • . • • . • . . • . • . • . . • . . . . . . . . • • • • . • • • • • • • •• 25
Program Products and Other Licensed Programs (Subject Codes 20 through 40) • . • • • • . 27
ITF (Interactive Terminal Facility) - Program Product ••••.•.••.•••••.•.•••..•• 34
TSO (Time Sharing Option) - Program Product Publications • . • • . • • . . • • • • • • . • . • . 36
Application Program Products and Other Licensed Application Programs •..••••.•.•• 37
Type II Programs ••••.•.••••.•••..••••••..•••••.•.•.•.•••••.••••.•. 51
Type III Programs •••.••••••.•.•.••••.•.•.•.•.••..••••.••...••..•.. 58
Other Supplementary Information ••••••••••.••.•.••.••...•••••..•••.•.• 59
Data Processing - Introductory Manuals and Texts ..••••.•••••.•••.••••.•• 59
Education - Course Catalogs • . • • • • • . • . . • • • • . . • • • • • • • . . • • . • . . • . • . . . • 60
Installa!ion Forms and Supplies ••••.•.•..••.••.•...•••...•.•••..••... 60
EWS (Early Warning System) ... '.' • • • • • . . . • • . • • • • . . • • . . . • • . . . • • • • • • . 60
PTF (Program Temporary Fix) Listings . . • • . . • . • • • • • • . • • . • • • • • . • . • • • • • • 60
Program Listings •••••••••••.•••.•.•••••••••••.•.••••••••••••.••• 61
Part 2. Abstracts.................................................. 64
Part 3. Current Editions by Order Number •••••••••.•.•.•....••.••.••••••• 229

Part 4. Library Charts •..•••...•.••••..••.•.•••••••••••••••••••...•• 275
Machine System and Models .•.•..••••••.•.•••..••.••.•••..•.••.••••.• 275
I/O Equipment .••••••••••••..•••••.•••..••...•.••••••••••••.••••• 276
BPS .•••••.••••••••.•.•••..•• , .• , .•••••.••.•••.•••••••.•••••••• 277
BOS .••••.••••••••••••.•••••.•••••••••••••.•••••••.•••.••••••• 278
TOS .••.•.•.•••••.•••••••.•••.•.••.•••.•••••••.•••.•••..•.•••• 279
TSS •••.•••••••••••.•.•••••••••••••.••••••••••••••.•••.•.•••••• 280
DOS •••.•••.••••••••••.•••.•••••.•••.•.••.••.••••••••••..•.••. 282
OS ...•..••.•.•••••.•.•...•.•••••••••.•..••.••••••••••••.•••.• 283

I

Part 1. Subject Code Listings
TABLE OF SUBJECT CODE DEFINITIONS

00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
13
14
15
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
60
62
63
64
65
66
67
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
78
79
80
81
82
83
85
87
89
95
97
99
II

(Ameral System Information (System Summaries, Bibliographies, Configurators)
Machine System (CPU, Storage, Channels, Console)
Card Readers and! or Punches, Control Units
Printers, Control Units
OCR, MCR (Optical and Magnetic Character Readers), Control Units
Magnetic Tape Units, Control Units
Display Equipment
DASD (Direct Access Storage Devices), Control Units
Other I/O Devices, Control Units
Teleprocessing Equipment
Auxiliary Equipment (devices normally off-line)
Special Features Information
Custom Features and Supporting Programs
Physical Planning Information
Programming Systems - General Information
Assembler
APL
BASIC
COBOL
FORTRAN
ALGOL

RPG
PL/I
Access Methods, Data Management, I/O Control Programs
Support Programs (e.g., Link Edit, Loader)
Utilities
Sort/Merge
System Planning, Generation, Installation, System Management Facility (includes Storage or Performance
Estimates,Release Guides)
Simulation or Emulation (catalogued by host system)
Control Program (e.g., Supervisor, Monitor, JCL, Job Management, IPL, Data Areas, Checkpoint/Restart)
RAS (Reliability, Availability, Serviceability): testing; service aids, problem determination
Remote Job Entry (RJE, CRJE, RAX, CRBE)
Time Sharing, Interactive Facilities (e.g., OS with TSO)
System Operation
Industries - General Information (Industry Bibliographies, etc.)
Airlines (see Transportation)
Business and Management Services
Communications: see Public Utilities (e.g., telephone, communication control) or Media (e.g., text processing)
Distribution (e.g., apparel, food, agribusiness)
Education
Engineering (see also 82 and 83 Cross-Industry)
Exploratory
Finance
Government, Federal
Government, State and Local
Insurance
Manufacturing
Mathematics (see 82 Cross-Industry)
Media
Medical
Process (e.g., forest products, petroleum, plastics, textiles)
Public Utilities (Utilities and Communications)
Securities (see Finance)
Transportation
Cross-Industry (see also 80·83 for selections)
Cross-Industry - Information Management
Cross-Industry - Management, Planning, Project Control
Cross-Industry - Mathematics and Science
Cross-Industry - Simulation
Data Processing - Introductory Manuals and Texts
Education - Course Catalogs
Installation Forms and Supplies
EWS (Early Warning System)
PTF (program Temporary Fix) Listings
Program Listings

Preface
For each major IBM data processing system, publications useful in planning, programming, installing and
operating that system are assembled in a system
library.

Subject Identification and Filing
Where a file number (e.g., 5360-33) appears on a
publication, it identifies the system library in the prefix (5360) and the subject classification in the suffix
(33, i.e., sort/merge).
Prefix of File Number
Publications associated with two system libraries
have both in the prefix. Publications applying to
more than two libraries have component type if one
or two components, GENL if involving no one or two
specific components, or TP in the case of generalized
teleprocessing.
SUbject Code
The suffix of the file number identifies the subject
classification or code, such as 22 for APL or 15 for
physical planning manuals and templates. The subject code indicates the filing sequence for machine
publications, or within operating system, in those
libraries organized by file number.
The subject code is also used alone (i.e., independently of the file number prefix) for the identifying
and grouping of associated publications. The complete list of subject codes and their definitions is given in a table at the beginning of Part 1 of this bibliography.

Organization of Bibliography
The system bibliography has four parts. Part 1 lists
publications by subject. It is organized as shown in
the table of contents -- with the publications under
most headings being listed, in groups, by subject
code.
Part 2 contains abstracts describing each item listed in Part 1.
Part 3 consists of a second listing, in order-number
sequence, of all items listed by subject sequence in
Part 1.
Part 4 consists of a series of graphic library charts
that help to show the associations among publications.

name for program pUblications; or alphameric by
title for installation forms and supplies.
In Part 1, the basic eight-position order number of
each publication is given. Where it is necessary to
distinguish between publications that support different releases of a programming system, order-number
suffixes (which identify specific editions of that publication), or the order numbers of supplements to
that publication, are also given.

Part 2
Before ordering copies of publications, check the
abstract, in Part 2, to be sure that your installation
will require the information. Abstracts are listed in
order-number sequence.

Part 3
Part 3, the list of current editions by order number,
shows all recent supplements (Technical Newsletters) as well as all current editions. This part of
the bibliography enables you to easily locate and
verify the currency of any publication listed, through
its edition suffix and any TNLs issued since the latest
edition. (For more information on the Technical
Newsletter (TNL), see "Updating," below.)
Some publications may exist in several current editions; all are listed, because an early current edition,
regularly updated, is exactly the same as the latest
current edition.

Part 4
The library charts in Part 4 provide a graphic aid for
quickly finding publications related to specific configurations and programming systems. As a consolidated method of showing various associations among
publications or different paths for different requirements, they reduce the time required to chart or
check out an appropriate individual library.

Order Number
The publication order number has eight positions,
plus one or two positions for the edition suffix. The
order number identifies various facts about a publication -- including those described below.

Part 1

Identification of Availability

In Part 1, the subject code listing, only one subject
code is assigned to a publication; however, a publication is listed under more than one heading if, for
example, it applies to more than one programming
system.
Items under the same subject code heading are listed in one of several proper sequences, as necessary.
Basic sequences include: numeric by machine type
for machine publications; alphabetic by program

The first character of the order number is the use
key, which governs the availability of the document.
Use key G means that the item is available to users,
through their IBM representative, without charge for
relevant items in quantities that meet their ~ormal
requirements. Use key S means that the item is for
sale through IBM branch offices. Use key L means
that the item is available only to licensees for the
IBM Program Product or other licensed program.
Preface

III

Identification of Logic Manuals
Publications that explain program logic normally
have a "Y" as the second character of the order
number: e.g., SY28-1234-5. (They also include "PLM,"
"System Manual," "Logic," or similar wording in the
title.) Such manuals are intended for use by persons
involved in program maintenance or alteration of the
program design; they are not required for normal use
of operation of the program described.
Bill of Forms
An order number in the form of GBOF-1234 is a Bill
Of Forms -- a single order number for a package of
several separately-order-numbered documents.
Identification of Microfiche
An alphabetic character in the third position of an
order number identifies a document on microfiche:
e.g., S2CO-0301 or LYB0-5432-1. The only exception is a
bill of forms, in which the third character is also alphabetic (not zero).
Identification of Back-Release Support
A "T" or "Q" in the second position is a temporary
order number for a publication that supports a release or version of a programming system that is prior to the latest release. E.g., GTOO-OOI2-1 or
ST28-1234-4.

Extra Symbols (Flags)
A double asterisk preceding the order number indicates a change in the associated title or order number (such as a new edition) or an additional item.
When more than one edition of a publication is
current, the order number suffix is followed by a
number sign (#).
A single asterisk following the order number indicates that the item is for IBM World Trade use only.
A plus sign following the order number indicates
that the item is for U.S.A. use only.
In a the abstract section (Part 2), *N identifies a
new abstract and *M identifies a modified abstract.

IV IBM System/360 and System/370 Bibliography

Updating
To keep publications current, changes and additions
are distributed in the form of Technical Newsletters
(TNLS). When the changed pages released in a TNL
are inserted in the manual to which it applies, the
base publication is brought up to date. The next reprint of the base publication incorporates the TNLs,
and is assigned the next higher suffix number, but
need not be ordered as it is the same.

TNL Masthead
The masthead of the TNL cover page includes the
order number of the base publication to which the
TNL applies. Also, all previously issued TNLs are
listed in the masthead so that you may verify receipt
of all changes. (Each TNL is separately orderable.)

Bibliography Revision Schedule
Between revisions, TNLs are issued to update the bibliography. Each TNL will include pages to be added or replaced wherever necessary to reflect the addition, change, or deletion of publications. At regular intervals, the bibliography will be revised to incorporate and merge all new information with that in
the previous bibliography edition.

References
Specialized bibliographies and other supplemental
items are listed in Part 1 under appropriate subject
codes. Check the following items, and the abstracts
that describe them:
Bibliography Supplement -- Teleprocessing and
Data Collection (GA24-3089), subject code 00.
Bibliography of Data Processing Techniques
(GF20-8173), subject code 00.
Bibliographies of application publications that pertain to specific industries (Medical, Media, Finance, State and Local Government, Insurance and
others), subject code 60.
IBM Marketing Publications KWIC Index
(G320-1621), subject code 85.
IBM Data Processing Glossary (GC20-1699), subject
code 85.

OROER
NUMBER

G'24-3089
GF20-8172
GA 22- 6 810
G'22-7001
G'24-3511
G'24-3232
G'22-6813
GA22-6874
GA22-6814
G'22-6887
G'27-2713
GA22-6888
GA22-6920
G'33-3006
G'22-6957
G'22-6956
G'22-6944
G'22-6872
G'22-6823
G'22-7002

G'22-6821
G'22-7000
SR20-1078
GX20-1103
GX20-1187
GX20-1850
G'24-3572
G'24-3574
G'24-3579
G.24-3510
GA24-3538
G'24-3523
G'24-3 23 1
G'24-3411
G'24-3373
G'22-6881
"G. 22-6911
G'22-6875
G'22-6910
G'22-6898
GA22-6908
G'22-6884
G.27-2728
G'27-2719
GA22-6889
GA22-6909
G. 22-691 6
GA22-6927
G'22-6907
GA22-6943
GA22-6954
G'33-3005
GC38-3335
G'33-3310
GC20-1738
GC38-0015
G'24-3557
G.24-3573
GC20-1734
G. 22-6942
GA22-6962
G'22-6966
GC20-1729
G'22-6935
GA22-6969
GC20-1730
GX22-6984
GA22-6877

GA 24-3552
G'24-3550
GX26-1587
GX 26- 1 566

GA21-9025
GA21-9026
GA21-9027
GA21-9033
GA21-9144

TITLE

TELE-PROCESSING AND DATA COLLECTION BIBLIOGRAPHY
BIBLIOGRAPHY OF DATA PROCESSING TECHNIQUES
IBM SYSTEM/360 SYSTEM SUMM.RY
IBM SYSTEM/37'" SYSTEM SUMMARY
IBM SYSTEM/363 MODEL 25 CONFIGU RATOR
IBM SYSTEM/360 MODEL 30 CONFIGURA TOR
IBM - SYSTEM/363 MODEL 40 CONFIGURATOR
IBM SYSTEH/360 HODEL 44 CONFIGURATOR
IBM SYSTEM/363 MODEL 50 CONFIGU RATOR
SYSTEM/363 MODEL 65 CONFIGURATOR
IBM SYSTEM/360 MODEL 67 CONFIGU RATOR
IBM SYSTEM/360 MODEL 75 CONFIGURATOR
IBM SYSTEM/360 HODEL 85 CONPIGURATOR
18H SYSTEt!/360 MODEL 135 CONFIGORATOR - SYSTEMS LIBBARY
PUBLICATION
IBM SYSTEM/379 HODEL 155 CONFIGORATOR
IBM SYSTEM/370 MODEL 165 CONFIGURATOR
SYSTEH/360 MODEL 195 CONFIGURATOR
IBM 1 827 DATA CONTROL UNIT - CONFIGURATOR
SYSTEM/360 INPOT/OUTPUT CONFIGURA TOR
SYSTEM/370 INPUT/OUTPUT CONFIGURATION

IBM SYSTEM/363 PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
SYSTEMS REFERENCE LIBRARY
IBM SYSTEM/370 PRINCIPLES OF OPERATIOII
SYSTEM/363 - 370 OPERATOR'S REFERENCE GUIDE
IBH SYSTEM/363 REFERENCE DAT A CARD
DEBUGGING AID
DIRECT EVALUATION OF FLOATING POINT NUMBERS IN HEXADECIMAL
SYSTEK/3?B REFERENCE SOtll1ARY
IBM SYSTEM/360 MODEL 22 FUNCTIONAL CHARACTERISTICS
SYSTEM.s MANUAL
IBM SYSTEM/369 MODEL 22 OPERATOR'S GUIDE
IB8 SYSTEM/363 MODEL 22 CHANNEL CHARACTERISTICS AND
FUNCTIONAL EVALUATION - SYSTEMS LIBRARY MANUAL
IBM SYSTEAj360 MODEL 25 FUNCTIONAL CHARACTERISTICS
IBM SYSTEH/363 MODEL 25 CHANNEL CHARACTERISTICS AND
FUNCTIONAL EVALUATION
IBH SiSTEM/369 HODEL 25 OPERATING PROCEDURES
IBM SYSTEM/363 MODEL 30 FUNCTIONAL CHARACTERISTICS
IBM SYSTEM/363 MODEL 30 CHANNEL CHARACTERISTICS AND
FUNCTIONAL EVALUATION
IBM SYSTEM/360 MODEL 33 OPERATING GUIDE
IBM SYSTEHj360 MODEL 43 FUNCTIONAL CHARACTERISTICS
IBM SYSTEHj360 MODEL 40 OPERATING PROCEDURES
IBM SYSTEH/360 MODEL 4q FUNCTIONAL CHARACTERISTICS
IBM SYSTEH/363 HODEL 44 OPERATING PROCEDURES
IBM SYSTEM/363 MODEL 53 FUNCTIONAL CHARACTERISTICS
IBn SYSTEH/36.0 MODEL 5.3 OPERATING PROCEDURES
IBM SYSTEM/36a MODEL 65 FUNCTIONAL CHARACTERISTICS
IBM SYSTEM/363 MODEL 65 OPERATING PROCEDURES
IBM SYSTEMj363 MODEL 67 FUNCTIONAL CHARACTERISTICS
IBM SYSTEM/360 MODEL 75 FUNCTIONAL CHARACTERISTICS
IBM SYSTEM/360 MODEL 75 OPERATING PROCEDURES
IBM SYSTEM/36a MODEL 85 FUNCTIONAL CHARACTERISTICS
IBM SYSTEM/360 MODEL 85 OPERATING PROCEDURES
IBM SYSTEM/363 MODEL 91 FUNCTIONAL CHARACTERISTICS
IBM SYSTEH/363 HODEL 195 FUNCTION AL CHARACTERISTICS
IBM SYSTEM/369 HODEL 195 OPERATING PROCEDURES
IBM SYSTEH/373 MODEL 135 FUNCTIONAL CHARACTERISTICS
IBM SYSTEM/373 HODEL 135 OPERArING PROCEDURES - SYSTEM
LIBRARY MANUAL
IBM SYSTEH/373 HODEL 135 CHANNEL CHARACTERISTICS
SYSTEM LIBRARY MANUAL
A GUIDE TO' THE SYSTEM/370 MODEL 135
OPERATOR'S LIBRARY: IBM SYSTEM/37a MODEL 145 OPERATING
PROCEDURES
IBM SYSTEH/313 MODEL 145 FUNCTIONAL CHARACTERISTICS
IBM SYSTEM/370 MODEL 145 CIIANNEL CHARACTERISTICS
A GUIDE TO THE IBM SYSTEH/373 MODEL 145
IBM SYSTEM/373 MODEL 155 FUIICTIONAL CHARACTERISTICS
IBM SYSTEM/373 MODEL 155 CHANNEL CHARACTERISTICS
IBM SYSTEH/313 MODEL 155 OPERArING PROCEDURES
A GUIDE TO THE IBM SYSTEM/373 MODEL 155
IBM SYSTEM/373 MODEL 165 FUNCTIONAL CHARACTERISTICS
IBM SYSTEM/373 MODEL 165 OPERATING PROCEDURES
SYSTEM LIBRARY MANUAL
A GUIDE TO THE IBI1 SYSTEH/31.0 HODEL 165
IBM SYSTEH/373 MODEL 165 OPERATORS REFERENCE CARD
IBH S YSTEM/363 COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS AND OPERATING
.
PROCEDURES IBH 1052 PRINTER-KEYBOARD MODEL 7 WITH
IBM 2150 CONSOLE
IBM 3213 CONSOLE PRINTER-KEYBOARDS
IBM 3215 CONSOLE PRINTER-KEYBOARD COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
IBM REFERENCE CARD, DECIMAL/HEXADECIMAL INTEGER
CONVERSION CHART
IBM REFERENCE CARD, DECIMAL/HEXADECIMAL FRACTION
CONVERS ION CHART

IBM 14q2-Nl AND N2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION AND OPERATING
PROCEDURES
IBM 2531 HODELS Bl AND B2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION AND
OPERATING PROCEDURES
IBM 2520-81 r 82. AND B3, COMPONENT DESCRIPTION AND OPERATING
PROCEDURES
IBM SYSTEft/363 COMPONENT DESCRIPTIOIl AND OPERATING
PROCEDURES IBM 2540 CARD READ PUNCH
IBM 2596 CARD READ PUNCH PROGRAMMEB'S REFERENCE MANUAL
AND OPERATOR- S GUIDE - SYSTEMS REFERENCE LIBRARY

ORDER
NUMBER
GA21-9124

TITLE
3505 CARD READER 3525 CARD PUNCH
SYSTEMS REFERENCE LIBRARY MANU AL

!!.~ E£~nt!!£~ £QJlt£Q~ ~nH~

GA24-3873
GA24-1446
GA24-3120
GA24-3543
GA24-3488

G124-1499
GA19-88B4
GA21-9831
GA24-3542
GA24-3588
GA19-B836
GA19-8834
GA24-3256
G121-9864
GA21-9139
GX2B-1741
GX28-1759
GA21-9881
GX21-9186
G124-1421
GA24-1452
GA24-1473
GA 19-8823
GA21-9827

GC2B-1751

GA22-6866
GX22-6837
GX35-5S01
GA32-9086
Gl32-un
GA27-2726
GA32-0B15
GA32-SS2S
GA22-6828

f~

IBM 1483 PRINTER COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
SYSTEMS REFERENCE LIBRARY MANUAL
IBM 1404 PRINTER
IBM 1443 PRINTER MODELS 1 TO 4 AND Nl
IBM 1445 PBINTER MODELS 1 AND Nl COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
IBM 3211 PRINTER 3216 INTERCHANGEABLE TRAIN CARTRIDGE AND
3811 PRINTER CONTROL UNIT COMPONENT DESCRIPTION AND
OPERATOR'S GUIDE
FORM DESIGN REFEBENCE GUIDE FOR PRINTERS

IBM 1219 READER SOSTER IBM 1419 MAGNETIC CHARACTER READER
IBM 1219 READER SORTER, MODEL 32
IBM 1419 MAGREUC CHABACTER READER, MODEL 32
SYSTEMS REFEBENCE LIBRARY MANUAL
IBM SYSTEM/368 COMPONENT DESCRIPUON AND OPEBATING
PROCEDORES: 1231-Nl
IBM 1255 MAGNETIC CHARACTER BEADER MODELS I, 2, AND 3
COMPONENT DESCBIPTION
IBM 1259 MAGNETIC CHARACTER READER COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
PAPER AND PRINT QOALITY REQUIREMENTS FOR IBM 1278 AND 1275
OPTICAL READER SORTERS
IBM 1275 OPTICAL READER SORTER FOR SYSTEM/360 AND
SYSTEM/378
IBM 12B5 OPTICAL READER COMPONENT DESCRIPTION AND OPERATING
PROCEDURES
IBM SYSTEM/368 COMPONENT DESCRIPUON AND OPERATING
PROCEDORES IBM 1287 OPTICAL READER
GENERAL INFORMATION MANUAL IBM 1287 MODEL V
IBM 12B7 OPTICAL READER DOCOMENT TRACING GUIDE
IBM 1287 OPTICAL READER DESIGN FORMATS
IBM SYSTEM/360 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION IBM 128B
OPTICAL PAGE READER MODEL 1
IBM 1288 DOCUMENT GAUGE FOR MACHINE SETUP
IBM 1412 MAGNETIC CHARACTER READER MODEL I
PRINT QUALITY CONSIDERATIONS IBM 141B AND IBM 142B
IBM 141B OPTICAL CHARACTER READER
IBM 142B ALPHAMERIC OPTICAL READER
IBH 1419 MODEL 32 ATTACHED TO IBH SYSTEM/360
MODEL 25, 30, 40, 50, AND 65
SYSTEMS REFERENCE LIBRARY MANOAL
IBM 2520-Bl, B2, AND B3, COMPONENT DESCRIPTION AND OPERATING
PROCEDURES
IBM 3BBI OPTICAL MARK READER SYSrEMS DESIGN GUIDE

IBM SYSTEH/360 COHPONENT DESCRIPTION 2400 SERIES MAGNETIC
UPE ONITS 2803/2804 TAPE CONTROLS AND 2B16 SWITCHING UNIT,
MODEL 1
24Bl - 2404 AND 2415 MAGNETIC UPE UNITS
IBM SYSTEM/36e/370 REFERENCE DATA 2401-2404, 2415, 2420,
AND 3420 MAGNETIC TAPE UNITS
TAPE SPECIFICATIONS FOR IBH ONE-HALF INCH TAPE DRIVES AT:
556 AND BB0 BPI AND 320e FCI
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION IBH 2429 MODEL 5 MAGNETIC TAPE ONIT
IBM SYSTEM/360 ·COMPONEHT DESCRIPTION IBM 2495 TAPE
CARTRIDGE RBADER
IBM 3410/3411 MAGNETIC TAPE SUBSYSTEM COMPONENT SUMMARY
SANUAL
3803/3420 MAGNETIC TAPE SOBSYSTEMS
IBM SYSTEM/360 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION IBM 734e MODEL 3
HYPERTAPE DRIVE

!l.!l!J2!n !!!Il!!ll.!!!!!nt
GA27-2791
GA27-2782
GA27-2721
GC20-1688
GA27-270S
GA27-2731
GA27-273S
GA27-2739
GA27-2742
GA27-2749

•• GA27-2758

G126-3633
GA26-5756
GA22-6895
GX29-171B

IBM SYSTEH/36S COMPONENT DESCRIPTION IBM 2250
DISPLAY ·OHIT MODEL 1
IBM SYSTEM/36B COMPONENT DESCRIPTION IBM
2259 DISPLAY ONIT HODEL 2 IBM 2849 DISPLAY CONTROL MODEL
IBM SYSTEU/360 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION IBM 2259 DISPLAY UNIT
HODEL 3 IBM 2840 DISPLAY CONTROL HODEL 2
IBM 2260 DISPLAY STATION OPERATOR HANUAL
IBH SYSTEM/368 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION:
IBM 2260 DISPLAY STATION
IBM 2848 DISPLAY CONTROL
IBM SYSTEM/360 COHPONENT DESCRIPTION
IBM 2265 DISPLAY STATION IBM 2845 DISPLAY CONTROL
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION IBH 2285 DISPLAY COPIER
AN INTRODUCTION TO THE IBM 3270 INFORMATION DISPLAY SYSTEM
OPERATOR'S GOlDE FOR IBH 3270 INFORMATION DISPLAY SYSTEM
IBM 3278 INFORMATION DISPLAY SYSTEM COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
SYSTEM LIBRARY MANUAL
IBM 3278 PROBLEM DETERMINATION GUIDE - SYSTEM LIBRARY
MANOAL

DATA CELL HANDLING GUIDE
IBH DISK PACK AND CARTRIDGE HANDLING PROCEDURES
IBM SYSTEH/360 COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS - 2828 STORAGE
CONTROL AND 2301 DRUB STORAGE
IBM 2314 DIRECT ACCESS STORAGE FACILITY CAPACITY AND
TRAHSHISSIOH TIME REPERENCE CARD

GI28-1717
GI28-1705
GA26-3599
GX28-1710

IBH 2301 DRUM STORAGE
IBM 2311 DISK CELL DRIVE REFERENCE CARD
IBM SYSTER/360 COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS - 2314 DIRECT ACCESS
STORAGE FACILITY AND 2B44 AUXILIARY STORAGE CONTROL
IBM 2314 DIRECT ACCESS STORAGE FACILITY CAPACITY AND
TRANSMISSION TIME REFERENCE CARD

ORDER
NU ~BER
GA26-16B6
GX2B-1194
GA26-1569
GA26-5968

GA26-1592

GA22-6668
GA24-3366
GA24-3312
GA33-45aB
GA36-BBB2
GA36-BBB3

GA22-6864
GA22-6646
GA27-27B3
GA27-27B4
GA24-3426
GA27-3029
GA27-3B39
GA27-3B11
GA27-3948
GA27-3B50

TITLE
IB~

2319 DISK STORAGE - A-SERIES, CO~PONENT DESCRIPTION
IB~ 2321 DATA CELL DRIVE
CO~PONENT SnMARY-2635 STORAGE CONTROL
23B5 PIXED HEAD STORAGE
IB~ SYSTEM/369 COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS--2841 AND
ASSOCIATED DASD
2311 DISK STORAGE DRIVE MODEL 1, 2321 DATA CELL DRIVE,
23B3 DRUM STORAGE
REFERENCE MANUAL FOR IBM 282B STORAGE CONTROL AND IBM 3339
DISK STORAGE - SYSTEMS REPERENCE LIBRARY

IBM SYSTEM/369 - COMPONENT DESCRIPTION, IBH 1827 DATA
CONTROL UNIT
IBM 2671 PAPER TAPE READER,
IBM 2822 PAPER TAPE READER CONTROL - COHPONENT DESCRIPTION
IBM 2821 CONTROL UNIT
IBM SYSTEM/369 COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS - 2826 PAPER UPE
CONTROL UNIT 1B17 PAPER TAPE READER 1918 PAPER TAPE PUNCH
IBM 4481 FILM READER/RECORDER
4461 PILM READER/RECORDER PROGRAMMER'S GUIDE

IB~ 2791 DATA ADAPTER UNIT COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
IBM SYSTEM/369 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
IBM 2792 TRANSMISSION CONTROL
IBM 27B3 TRANSMISSION CONTROL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
IB~ SYSTEM/36 B COMPONENT DESCRI PT ION IBM 2711 LINE
ADAPTER UNIT
IBM 2712 REMOTE MULTIPLEXOR
2721 PORT ABLE AUDIO TERMINAL
IBM 2721 PORTABLE AUDIO TERMINAL OPERATOR'S HANDBOOK
IBM 2769 OPTICAL IMAGE UNIT CONPONENT DESCRIPTION
IBM 3679 BROKERAGE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM CONCEPTS AND CONPIGURATOn
IBM 3679 BROKERAGE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM COMPONENT

DESCRIPTION fUNDAL

GA27-3B51
"GC39-3004
GA27-3943
GA27-3963
GA19-0B1B
GA27-2712

INTRODUCTION TO THE 37B5 COMHUNICATIONS CONTROLLER
IBM 37e5 COMMUNICATIONS CONTROLLED PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION SYSTEH LIBRARY MANUAL
IBM 3735 PROGRAMHABLE BUFFERED TERHINAL CONCEPT
AND APPLICATION
COMPONENT INPORMATION FOR THE IBM 3780 DATA COMHUNICATION
TERMINAL
IBM 3944 DIAL TERMINAL
SYSTEHS REFERENCE LIBRARY MANUAL
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION: IBH 7770 AUDIO RESPONSE UlliT HODEL 3

MODEL 1, 2, AND 3
GA27-271 B
G&27-2711

IBH 7772 AUDIO RESPONSE UNIT VOCABULARY
IBM SYSTEH/369 COHPONENT DESCRIPTION IBM 7772 AUDIO
RESPONSE UNIT

GA22-6951
GA27-2725

IBM 5B MAGNETIC DATA INSCRIBER OPERATOR'S GUIDE
IBM 5B MAGNETIC DATA INSCRIBER COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

GA22-6692
GA22-6963

IBM SYSTEM/369 SPECIAL FEATURE CHANNEL-TO-CHANNEL ADAPTER
SYSTEH/37 B SPECIAL FEATUR E: CHA NNEL-TO-CHANNEL ADAPTER
SYSTEM LIBRARY MANUAL
IBM SYSTEH/369 MODEL 25 14B1/1460 AND 1440 COMPATIBILITY
PEATURES
IBM SYSTEH/36e MODEL 25 MODEL 29 MODE FEATURE
IBH SYSTEM/36e MODEL 25 INTEGRATED COMMUNICATIONS
ATTACHMENT FEATURE
IBM SYSTEM/36e MODEL 3B 1ij01/1440/1469 COMPATIBILITY PEATURE
INV ERTED PRINT EDIT AND STERLING SUB-FEATURES
SYSTEMS REFERENCE LIBRARY MANUAL
IBM SYSTEH/36B HODEL 39 1401/1ijij9/146B COMPATIBILITY FEATURE
IBM SYSTEH/36B HODEL 39 162B COHPATIBILITY PEATURE
IBM SYSTEM/36e MODEL 39 14B1 COHPATIBILITY SODE
OPERATOR'S MANUAL
IBM SYSTEM/369 HODEL 3B 1ij01/14ij0/1460 COMPATIBILITY
PEATURE REFERENCE CARD
DATA ACQUISITION SPECIAL FEATURES POR THE IBS SYSTEM/369
MODEL 44
IBM SYSTEM/36e SPECIAL FEATURE DESCRIPTION 7074
COMPATIBILITY FEATURE POR SYSTEH/360 MODELS 59 AND 65
IBM SYSTEM/369 SPECIAL FEATURE DESCRIPTION 7069
COUATIBILITY PEATURE POR SYSTEH/369 MODEL 65
IBH SYSTEM/36B SPECIAL FEATURE DESCRIPTION
7B9/7e49/7944/799B/1994/1994 I I COMPATIBILITY PEATURE POR
SYSTEH/369 MODELS 65 AND 67
IBM SYSTEM/369 SPECIAL FEATURE DESCRIPTION
709/799B/7e94/7B94 I I COSPATIBILITY FEATURE FOR
IBM SYSTEH/36B MODEL 65
IBM SYSTEMl370 MODEL 135 - TERMINAL ADAPTER TYPE I MODEL II,
FOR INTEGRATED COMMUNICATIONS ADAPTER: SPECIAL FEATURE
DESCRIPTION MANUAL
IBM SYSTEM/37B MODEL 135 - TERMINAL ADAPTER TYPE I l l , POR
INTEGRATED COMMUNICATIONS ADAPTER: SPECIAL FEATURE
DESCRIPTION MANUAL
IBM SYSTEM/379 HODEL 135 SYNCHRONOUS DATA ADAPTER TYPE II,
(FOR ICA): SPECIAL FEATURE DESCRIPTION
SYSTEM LIBRARY HANUAL
IBM SYSTEM/379 SPECIAL PEATURE DESCRIPTION:
799/7999/7994/1e9q I I
COMPATIBILITY FEATURE POR IBM SYSTEH/379 HODEL 165
IBM SYSTEH/37B SPECIAL FEATURE DESCRIPTION: 7979/1B74
COHPATIBILITY FEATURE POR 10M SYSTEH/379 HODEL 165
IBM SYSTEM/37B SPECIAL PEATURE DESCRIPTION
7989 COMPATIBILITY FEATURE POR IBH SYSTEH/379 HODEL 165
BATCH NUMBERING FEATURE POR IBM 1241 AND 1419 MAGNETIC INK
CHARACTER RECOGNITION READERS
HARK READ STATION (SLANTED HARK) FOR IBM 1418 AND IBM 1ij28

GA24-3512
GA24-3524
GA24-3526
GA19-BB19
GA24-3255
GA24-3365
GC2B-16SB
GX2e-1758
GA22-69B0
GA27-2717
GA27-2716
GA27-2715
GA27-2733
GA33-3007
GAl3-3998
GA33-3B99
GA22-6955
GA22-6958
GA22-6963
GA24-33q2
GA2q-3B61

ORDER
NU~BER

GA24-3547
GA 24-3 564
GL22-69B2
GL22-69B3
GL22-69B4
GA21-9a7B
GA21-3B4B
GA26-3699
GA24-359B
GA26-5714
GL21-9a71
GC5B-aaBl
GC26-3767
GL27-3B22
SY26-3766
GL21-30B9
GA21-2131
GL22-6811
GL22-6931
GL24-3591
GL24-3591
GL22-689B
GL22-6991
GA 24-3 519
GL24-3519
GCB8-6796
GCB8-6791
GC28-6681
GL22-6919
GCB8-6798
GCB8-6799
GY28-6688
GA24-3551
GA26-1599
GA26-1593
GL22-694B
GC28-67B9
Ge28-6711
SY28-6746
GL 19-BOB3
GA26-5993
GA26-1583
GA27-274B
GL22-696B

GC22-682"
GCI9-"""1
GX26-5598
GX22-6835

TITLE

IBM SYSTEII/36B MODEL 25, HIGH-SPEED CHANNEL-3414 ATTACHMENT
FEATURE BPQ E69199
IBM SYSTEM/36" MODEL 3" STORAGE EXPANSION PEATUBB ftABUAL:
RPQ'S EA3897, EA1521; OR RPQ'S 191283 AND 191325 (VORLD
TRADE)
IBM SYSTEM/36" MODEL 4B SUft OF PRODUCTS INSTRUCUON RPQ W12561 SPECIAL SYSTEftS FEATURE
IBM SYSTEH/36" MODEL 4B, HALFWORD TRANSLATE IBSnOCTION RPQ V13462 SPECIAL SYSTEftS FEATURE
IBM SYSTEM/36B MODEL 4B, TABLE ADDRESS CHUBIHG RPQ W13518 SPECIAL SYSTEKS FEATURE
IBH 1959 SPECIAL FEATORES DESCRIPTION, IBK ASCII DATA
COMKUNICATION SYSTEM WITH
RPQ PEATURES F18589, 82027, 842"28, ABD 842"29
COSTOK ONIT DESCRIPTION - 19711- 1 REMOTE AODIO RESPONSE ONIT
IBH 1971-1989 COSTOM TERMINAL FOHCTIONAL CHARACTERISTICS,
OPERATING PROCEDURES, AND PHYSICAL PLANNING
IBM 1972 MODEL 3 PRODUCTION TERMINAL 1912 MODEL
INSTRUCTION CONSOLE OPERATOR'S GUIDE
IBM 2314/2844 MULTIPLEX STORAGE CONTROL FEUURE - AIRLINES
BUFFER
IBH 2591 CARD READER, BODELS A ANB B RPQ FEATURES
ISS 2791 DATA ADAPTER UNIT AND ASCII AUTODIB ADAPTER
(RPQ PI6124): PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
IBM 274B/2968 AUDIO-VISOAL CONTROL USER'S GUIDE
RPQ NUMBER F3"209
CUSTOM SYSTEM DESCRIPTION:
IBH 274"-1/295"-2 BATCH BOFFER TERMINAL SYSTEftS REFERENCE
LIBRARY HANOAL
IBM 274"/2968 AODIO-VISOAL CONTROL PROGRAft LOGIC BANOAL
RPQ NunBER F3"209
29"5 REnOTE nOLTIPLEXER conpONENT DESCRIPTION
IBM 29"9-3 ASYNCHRONOUS DATA CHANNEL RPQ F13299
CUSTOM FEATORE DESCRIPTION
f.
IU SYSTEM/36" 2911 MANUAL SWITCHING ONIT KODELS 1. 2, aDd 5
AND 2989 REnOTE SWITCHING CONSOLE SPECIAL SYSTEMS FEATORE
IBH SYSTEK/36B CUSTOft FEATURE DESCRIPTION
2914 SVITCHING ONIT MODEL 1 - RPQ 88"882
IBH 2922 PROGRAKnABLE TERMINAL (RPQ 81"563, 818564
AND 81B565) COMPONENT DESCBiPTION AND OPERATING PROCEDORES
AND 81B565) COMPONENT DESCRIPTION AND OPBRUIHG PROCBDORES
lOft 2927 TAPE-TO-PRINTER UNIT RPQ 812390 & 812391
COftPONENT DESCRIPTION
SPECIAL SYSTEMS PEATURE BULLETIJI, IBM 2939 MODEL 801,
rAPR INTERSYSTEM CONNECTING UNIT - RPQ ft22146
IBft 2937 MODELS I, 2, AND 3, MULrIPLIER-SOftftlTION PROCESSOR,
SPECIAL SYSTEft FEATORE, RPQ 88"626'
IBft SYSTEM/36B COSTOM EQIJIPMEHT DESCRIPTION: 2938 ARRAY
PROCESSOR (MODEL I, RPQ W24563; 1I0DEL 2, RPQ 815188)
SYSTEftS REPERENCE LIBRARY MANOAL
IBft 2946 TERMINAL CONTROL SOBSYSTEft
COftPONENT DESCRIPTION AND OPERATING GOlDE
10ft 2947-4 CHECK COLLECTION CONTROLLER [RPQ '888264)
SEQUENTIAL ACCESS ftETHOD (CSAM) MUN ftODULE-DOS
MICROFICHE LISTING
10M 2947-4 CHECK COLLECTION CONTROLLER (RPQ '888264)
SEQUENrIAL ACCBSS METHOD (CSAn) ERR ftODOLE-DOS
MICROFICHE LISTING - PROGRAft NUMBER 5799-&AF
USER' 5 GOlDE FOR THE IBII 2947-4 CHECK COLLECTIOR CONTROLLER
SEQOENTIAL ACCESS KETHOD PROGRAM SOPPORTING RPQ 888264
PROGRAM NOMBERS 5799-WAF, 5799-WAG
lOft 2947 MODEL 4 CHECK COLLECTION CONTROLLER (RPO 888264)
FUNCTIONAL CHARACTERISTICS - REFERENCE ftANO AL
lOft 2947-4 CHECK COLLECTION CONTROLLBR (RPO' '888264)
SEQOENTIAL ACCESS METHOD [CSAn) ftUN MODOLE-oS
ftICROFICHE LISTING - PROGRAM NOKBER 5799-WAG
10M 2947-4 CHECK COLLECTION CONTROLLER (RPQ '8B8264)
SEQOENTIAL ACCESS IIETHOD (CSU) ERR ftODULE-OS
MICROFICHB LISTING - PROGRAft NunBER 5799-WAG
I NrERNAL LOGIC ftANUAL FOR THB IBM 2947-4 'CHECK COLLECTION
CONTROLLER SEQUENTIAL ACCESS KETHOD - PROGRAft SOPPORT
BPQ 888264 - PROGRAM NonBBRS 5799-WlF 5799-WAG
IBn 2956-5 KULTI-POCKeT nCR READER SORTER COSTOK UBIT
DESCRIPTION: BPQ V 19976
10M 273" KODEL 1 TRANSACTION VALIDATION TERftIBAL. IBM 296,8
ftODEL 9 AND MODEL 12 RECEIVER-TERftI.AL CONTROL UNIT
10M 2968 KODEL 11 AUDIO/VISUAL CONTROL:
conpONENT DESCRIPTION AND OPBRATING PROCEDURES
RPO P3"2"9
10M 2969 PROGRAMftABLE TERftINAL INTERCHANGE
MODEL l--RPQ888117
10M 2969 PROGRAMftABLE TERMINAL IRTERCHAJIGE MODEL 1
CONTROL PROGRAM OPERATOR'S GOlDE SUPPORTING RPQ 888117
Ion 2969 PROGRAnMABLE TERnINAL INTERCHANGE nODEL 1
CONTROL PROGRAM OSER'S GOlDE SOPPORTING RPQ 888117
IBM 2969 PROGRAftMABLE TERMINAL INTERCHANGE 1I0DEL 1
CONTROL PROGRU DESIGN SPECIFICATIONS SOPPORTING
RPQ 888117
CUSTOM SYSTEM DESCRIPTION: IBB 297B MODEL 8 BANK TERftINAL,
RPQ 85823B
10M SISTEft/36B COSTOM PEATORE, 2972 LINE
CONTROL ONIT, MODEL 1
10M SYSTEM/36B cUSTon FEATURE DESCRIPTION - 2913 nODEL 2
FILE SWITCH HPQ F132B9
IBft 7412 nODEL 1 CONSOLE, CUSTOft SISTEftS RPQ AA2846,
COSTOM FEATORE DESCRIPTION
IBM RESERVATION SYSTEM CUSTOM FEATORE DESCRIPTION

IBK SISTEft/36B INSTALLATION MANUAL - PHYSICAL PLAHNING
IBM SYSTEM/36B INSTALLATION MANUAL - PHYSICAL PLANNING
IBH WORLD TRADE 59-HERTZ REQUIREMENTS
IBM PHYSICAL PLANNING TEftPLATE SYSTEM/36"
PROCESS I/O DEVICBS
PHYSICAL PLANNING TEMPLATE IU SISTEM/36" HYPERTAPB

ORDER
ROBBER
GX22-6855

TITLE

GX22-7S18

I8B PHYSICAL PLAHHING TE8PLATE:
SYSTBB/360 AND SYSTEII/370
ftAGRETtC TAPE UNITS AND CONTROLS
PHYSICAL PLANNING TEftPLATE SYSTEK/360 PROCESSOR
ftODEL 915
IBft PHYSICAL PLARHING TE8PLATE: SYSTEK/36ll ABD SYSTE8/37B
COftftUNICATIONS EQUIPUn
I8B PHYSICAL PLANNING TEBPLATE: SYSTE8/36ll ABD SYSTEB/3711
DATA STORAGE DBVICBS
IB8 PHYSICAL PLANNING TEBPLITB: SYSTEII/360 UD S!STBB/37B
CONSOLBS AND TEB8IHlLS
IBB PHYSICAL PLANNING TEftPLATB: S!STEB/36B AHD SYSTEft/37ll
UGHETtC AND OPTICAL CHARACTBR READERS
IBft PHYSICAL PLANNING TEftPLATB: SYSTEB/360 ftODELS 22. 25.
3B. AND 4B
PHYSICAL PLUNING TBftPLATE SYSTEH/360 ftODEL 67
PHYSICAL PLAHNIHG TBftPLATB SYSTEft/36B PROCBSSORS
ftODELS 44 AN D 58
PHYSICAL PLANNING TBftPLlTE SYSrBft/360 ftODBL 85
PHYSICAL PLlHRING TBftPLATB SYSTEft/360 ftODBL 65 HULTIS!STBft
IBft PHYSICAL PLlHRING TBftPLATE: SYSTEft/36B AND SYSTBft/378
PIELD BNGINBBRIHG PURNITURB ABD TEST EQUIPftEHT
SYSTE5/36ll SYSTEH/378 TEST EQUIP8EBT AHALYZER PUJlHITURE
BASIC STORAGB RODULB DATA ADAPTER UNIT
IBB PHYSICAL PURRING TB8PLATE SYSTEK/36B 80DEL 195
IBft SYSTBB/370 lIORLD TUDB INSTALLATION ftAHUAL--PHYSICAL
PLANNING - SYSTBHS RBPERBNCE LIBRARY
IBH SYSTBB/370 IHSTALLATION UNUAL--PHYSICAL PLANBIBG
SYSTERS REPEBNCE LIBRARY
IBft PHYSICAL PLABNIHG TEHPLATE: SYSTBH/368 AND SYSTEft/370
CHUNELS:
2860. 2878, UD 2880
IBB PHYSICAL PLAHBING TEftPLATB SYSTER/370 ftODEL 145
IBft PHYSICAL PLANBING TE8PLlTB SYSTEB/370 BODEL 155
IBB PHYSICAL PLlHNIHG TBftPLATE: SYSTEB/370 ftODBL 165
IBB PHYSICAL PLlBNIHG TBftPLATB: SYSTBft/370 ftODEL 135
IBft AIRLINES RESERVATION SYSTER. REBOTE EQUIPHEHT
INSTALLATION ftUnL - PHYSICAL PLAHBING
IBft 1925 ftODEL 18 INTERFACE SUTCH UUT RPQ 811301
INSTALLATION BAHUAL-PHYSICAL PLAHH:ING
18ft 1970 BODBL 1 REftOTE AUDIO RESPOHSB UNIT
INSTALLATION BANOAL - PHYSICAL PLANHIBG
IBB 1972 BODEL 3 PRODUCTIOB TERBINAL
I Dft 1972 BODEL 4 INSTRUCTION CORSOLE INSTALLATION BANOAL
PHYSICAL PLANNING COBPORERT DESCBIPTION
IBH SYSTEft/366 SPECIAL PEATORE: 2689 CRT PRINTER
INSTALLATION UNOAt PHYSICAL PLABBING
2738 BODEL 1, 2968 ftODBL 9. UD 2968 BODEL 12: IBSTALLATION
UNOAL - PHYSICAL PLlHH:ING
IBB 2748-1/2950-2 BlTCR BOPPER TERBIBAL
INSTALLATION ftANUAL - PHYSICAL PLlHNIBG
IBK SYSTBft/36B CUSTOft SYSTEKS URIT,
2905 REKOTE ftULTIPLEXER. 2906 TRAHSBISSION CONTROL,
INSTALLATION KUUAL - PHYSICAL PLANNING
IBft SYSTER/36ll COSTon SYSTERS ONIT 2989 ftODEL 3 ASYNCHRONOUS DATA CBlNHEL RPQ P13299 RPQ 882845
INSTALLATION BOLLBTIN-PHYSICAL PLANNIHG
IBft 2911 ftODILS 1. 2. ABD 5 AND IBft 2989 BODBL 8.
;[8STALLATION BANDAL - PHYSICAL PLUHIBG
IBft 2911 KODEL lq IBTERPlCB SWITCH OBIT RPQ 8115113
INSTALLATION BlHOAL-PHYSICAL PLAHBIHG
IHK 2914 SlIITCHIRG ONIT ftODEL 1. RPQ 880882. COSTon PEATURE:
INSTALLATION BAHOAL - PHYSICAL PLlHNIBG
IBB SYSTEK/368 COSTOB SYSTEBS ONIT 2916 LOBG LIBB ADAP!BR.
BUDELS 3 UD q INSTlLLATIOH BULLETIN - PHYSICAL PLlHNIHG
IDS 2922 PROGRABHABLB !ERBIUL REQIS 810563. 810564, 818565
INSTALLATIOR BANOAL-PHYSICAL PLAHHING
IBft 2927 TAPE-TO-PRIHTER UUT. RPQ 812390 AND 812391:
USTALLATION ftlBUAL - PHYSICAL PLAnING
IBK 2938 ARRAY PROCESSOR RODEL 1 RPQ W24563. BODBL 2
RPQ 815188 IBSTALLAUOH BANUAL - PHYSICAL PLAnIBG
IBB 2944 DATACHlRNEL REPEATER IHSTALLATIOB BANUAL-PHYSICAL
PLAHHING
I n 2946 TERBIHAL COBTROL SOBSYSTER INSTALLATION RANUAL
PHYSICAL PLANNING
IBB 2947 CHECK COLLECTIOH CONTROLLER HODBL 4 (RPQ 8882641
INSTALLATION ftAHOAL PHYSICAL PLlBNING
IBH 2956-5 BOLTI-POCKET READER SORTER IHSTALLATIOH KANOAL
PHYSICAL PLABHING
IBH 2969 PROGRAKKABLB TERBINAL IHTBBCHlHGE KODBL 1.
RPQ 888117 - IBST&LLAUON UNOAL - PHYSICAL PLANNING
IBK SYSTEK/36ll COST OK SYSTBBS OBIT 2972 BODEL 7
SCIBNTIFIC IBTBRPlCE CONTROL OBIT RPQ E46181'
INSTALLATION BOLLETIN - PHYSICAL PLlHBIHG
IBB 2973 BODEL 2 PILE SlIITCH INSTALLATION BAHOAL PHYSICAL PLUNING RPQ P13209
I n 3676 BROKERAGE COBllUBICATIOB SYSTEB
INSTALLATION UBUAL-PHYSICAL PLlHBING
INSTlLLATIOB BULLETIN PHYSICAL PLANHING POR IBK 7412
CONSOLE KODEL 1 COSTOB SYSTEBS RPQ 1A2846
IBft PHYSICAL PLUBIHG TEBPLlTE SYSTEft/368 ABD SYSTEII/370

GC2B-1619

CATALOG OF PROGRABS paR IBB SYSTEB/360 BODELS 25 lHD ABOVE

GX22-6856
GX22-6857
GX22-6858
GX22-6859
GX22-6860
Gp2-6894
GX22-6905
GX22-6914
G122-6923
GX22-6924
GX22-6925

GX22-6981
GC19-BSS4
GC22-7004
GX22-6985
GX22-7005
GX22-70B6
G122-7091
GX22-7U8
GL22-6928
GA24-3561
GA27-3B41
"GA24-3566
GC22-6939
GA26-160B
GL27-3S25
GL27-3S10
GA27-2727
GC22-6922
GA24-3562
GL22-6936
GA27-2724
GL24-3596
GL24-3592
GA24-3516
GA24-3509
GL24-3571
GL22-6982
GA24-3545
GL22-6945
GA27-2729
GA26-1582
GA27-U49
"GA27-2741

UJ!!lli
GC28-6837

BASIC LANGUAGE RBPERENCE BANOAL

GC28-6395

IBft SYSTBII/36B COBOL DIFFERENCES OSA STlHDARD COBOL
CONVERSION
IBB SYSTER/360 CONVERSION AIDS: COBOL LUGUAGE
CONVERSIOB PROGBAH POR THE IBH 1401,
PROGRAB NOftBER 1401-C8-701

GC28-6559

ORDER
NUMBER
GC2B-6579
GX2B-1529
"GY27-719B

Gc2B-6569

~2

TIUE
IBM SYSTEM/369 TRANSITION AIDS COBOL LANGUAGE DIFFERENCES
IBM REFERENCE CARD - COBOL
IBM SYSTEM/369 TRANSITION AIDS:
COBOL LANGUAGE
CONVERSION PROGRU (1491-CB-7811 FOR THE IBM 1481
PROGRAM LOGIC MANUAL

GX2B-63B4

IBM SYSTEM/369 TRANSITION AIDS:
FORTRAN I I LANGUAGE
CONVERSION PROGRAM (1491-FO-7921 FOR THE IBM 1491
IBM FORTRAN IV REFERENCE CARD

GC21-7514
GC26-5999

INTRODUCTION TO RPG I I
IBM SYSTEM/368 RPG TRANSLATOR

HL!
GY33-6993

IBM SYSTEM/368 PL/I LANGUAGE SPECIFICATIONS

IBM SYSTE6/378 MODEL 155 SORT/MERGE TIMING ESTIMATES
PLANNING GUIDE
PROGRAM NUMBER 368S-SM- 823

GC26-3564

GY 27-7126
GC2B-6561

GC2B-6563

GY27-7183
GC2B-6BI6
GY 2B-6 56 4
GY2B-6BI6

GC2B-656B

GC27-699B

GY2B-6569

"GC2B-65B5
GC27-6911

GC2B-6565

GC27-6929

GC33-2893

GY27-7115

GC2B-6529

GY27-7116

GC2B-6539

GY27-7117

GY2B-6599

GY2B-6566
GY27-7111

GC2B-6531

IBM SYSTEM/368 CONVERSION AIDS:
THE 1481/1448/1469
TAPE OVERLAP EMULATOR PROGRAM FOR IBM SYSTEM/369
MODEL 39, PROGRAM NOMBER 368C-EO-897
IBM SYSTEM/369 MODEL 38 1629 EMULATOR PROGRAM
PROGRAM LOGIC MANUAL PROGRAM NUMBER 369C-EU-731
IBM SYSTEM/369 CONVERSION AIDS:
THE 1481/1468 EMULATOR
PROGRAM FOR IBM SYSTEM/368 MODEL 48,
PROGRAM NUMBER 369C-EU-874
SYSTEMS REFERENCE LIBRARY
IBM SYSTEM/368 CONVERSION AIDS:
THE 1418/7919
EMULATOR PROGRAM FOR IBM SYSTEM/368 MODEL 48,
PROGRAM NOMBER 368C-EO-72B
IBM SYSTEM/369 CONVERSION AIDS: THE
1481/1468 EMULATOR PROGRAM FOR IBM SYSTEM/369 MODEL 49
PROGRAM LOGIC MANUAL
IBM SYSTEM/368 CONVERSION AIDS:
1629 SIMOLATOR FOR IBM
SYSTEM/368 MODEL 44 PROGRAM NOMBER 368C-SI-755
IBM SYSTEM/368 CONVERSION AIDS: THE 1419/7918
EMULATOR PROGRAM FOR IBM SYSTEM/368 MODEL 48
PROGRAM LOGIC MANOAL - PROGRAM NOMBER 369C-EO-72B
IBM SYSTEM/368 CONVERSION AIDS 1629 SIftOLATOR FOR IBM
SYSTEM/369 MODEL 44 PROGRAM LOGIC UNOAL 369C-SI-755
IBM SYSTEM/369 CONVERSION AIDS:
THE 1419/1919 EMOLATOR
PROGRAM FOR IBM SYSTEM/368 MODEL 5B
PROGRAM NOMBER 36BC-EO-726
IBM SYSTEH/369 CONVERSION AIDS:
THE 7874 EMOLATOR PROGRAM
FOR IBM SYSTEM/368, 1I0DELS 58 AND 65,
PROGRAM NO~BER 36BC-EO-725
SYSTEMS REFERENCE LIBRARY
IBM SYSTEM/369 CONVERSION AIDS: THE 1418/7819
EMOLATOR PROGRAM FOR IBM SYSTEM/369 MODEL 58
PROGRAM LOGIC MANUAL - PROGRAM NOMBER 36BC-EV-726
IBM SYSTEM/368 CONVERSION AIDS:
THE 784B/1844
EMULATOR PROGRAM FOR IBM SYSTEM/36B MODEL 65
PROGRAM NOMBER 368C-EU-733.
IBM SYSTEM/368 CONVERSION AIDS:
THE 79B9 EMOLATOR PROGRAM
FOR IBM SYSTEM/369 MODEL 65, PROGRAM NUMBER 369C-EU-727
SYSTEMS REFERENCE LIBRARY
IBM SYSTEM/369 CONVERSION AIDS:
THE 789/7896/1894/7994 I I
EMOLATOR PROGRAM FOR IBM SYSTEM/368 MODEL 65,
PROGRAM NOMBER 368C-EO-729
SYSTEMS REFERENCE LIBRARY
IBM SYSTEM/368 CONVERSION AIDS:
SAMPLE PROBLEMS FOR IBM
SYSTEM/36B EMOLATOR PROGRAMS
PROGRAM NOMBERS:
368C-EO-B74
368C-EO-726 369C-EO-729
369C-EO-997
368C-EO-727
369C-EU-731
368C-EO-725
369C-EU-728
369C-EO-733
IBM SYSTEM/36B CONVERSION AIDS:
THE 1419/7818 SIMULATOR
FOR IBM SYSTEM/36B, PROGRAM NOMBER 368C-SI-754
SYSTEMS REFERENCE LIBRARY
IBM SYSTEft/368 CONVERSION AIDS:
THE 1418/1818 SIftOLATOR FOR
IBM SYSTEM/368, PROGRAM NUMBER 369C-SI-754
PROGRU LOGIC MANOAL
IBM SYSTEM/368 CONVERSION AIDS:
THE 1629 SIMOLATOR FOR
IBM SYSTEM/369, PROGRAM NOMBER 368C-SI-752
SYSTEMS REFERENCE LIBRARY
IBM SYSTEM/368 CONVERSION AIDS:
THE 1629 SIMOLATOR FOR
IBM SYSTEM/369, PROGRAM NUMBER 368C-SI-752
PROGRAM LOGIC MANOAL
IBM SYSTEM/368 CONVERSION AIDS: THE 7878/1874 SIMOLATOR
FOR SYSTEM/36B - SYSTEMS REFERENCE LIBRARY
PROGRAM NOMBER 369C-SI-753
IBM SYSTEM/36B CONVERSION AIDS:
THE 7978/1874 SIftOLATOR FOR
IBM SYSTEM/369, PROGRAM NOMBER 368C-SI-753
PROGRAM LOGIC MANOAL
IBM SYSTEM/368 CONVERSION AIDS: THE 7848/7844
EMULATOR PROGRAM FOR IBM SYSTEM/369 MODEL 65
PROGRAM LOGIC MANUAL - PROGRAM NOMBER 369C-EU-733
IBM SYSTn/368 CONVERSION AIDS: THE 799/7899/7994/1994 I I
EMULATOR PROGRAM FOR IBM SYSTEM/368 MODEL 65
PROGRAM LOGIC MANOAL - PROGRAII NOMBER 369C-EV-729
IBM SYSTEM/368 CONVERSION AIDS: THE
7974 EMOLATOR PROGRAM FOR IBH SYSTEII/369 MODELS 59 AND 65
PROGRAM LOGIC MANOAL PROGRAM NOMBER 369C-EO-725
IBM SYSTEM/369 SIMULATOR FOR THE IBM 7989 PRELIMINARY
SPECIFICATIONS MANUAL

OBDBR
BOftBER

TITLE

GC28-6S32
GY27-7118
GY27-7119

!!!

IBft SYSTEft/369 COnBRSIOB lIDS: THE 799917994 SIIIOLATOB POB
IU SYSTEft/369 PROGBlII ROftBER 369C-SI-7S9
SYSTEftS BEFEBENCE LIBBlRY
IBft SYSTU/369 CORVBRSIOH AIDS: THE 79S9 SIIIOLUOR POR
IBII SfSTEft/369, PROGR&! HOIIBER 369C-SI-7S1
PROGRlII LOGIC IIANUAL
IBII SYSTEII/36B CORVERSIOB, AIDS: THE 799917994 SIKOLATOR
FOR IBII SYSTEII/36a, PROGRAK HOIIDER 36aC-SI-7S9
PROGHAft LOGIC KAROAL

~ DEPENDENT PUBLICATIONS (2lf-4lf)

RELEASE STATUS
ORDER NO.
20 GENERAL INFORMATION
GC28-6644-6
GT28-6644-5

X'

X

SiU. Master Index
X

GC28-6534-3
GN28-2512
GT28-6534-2
GN28-2450
GN28-2458

Introduction

X
X.
X
X
X

GC28-6535-8
GN28-2459
GT28-6535-7
GN28-2436

X
X

Concepts and Facilities
(Sub by GC28-653Q)

X
X
X

GlC28-6717-3
GT68-6717-2
GN28-2441

X

X
X
X

Master Index PLM

21 ASSEMBLER
GC28-6514-8
GTOO-OOO6-0
GT28-6514-6
GN33-8072

X

GC28-6595-2
GN33-8084

X
X

X
X

X
X

X
X

Assembler (E) Programmers Guide

GC33-4014-0

X

X

X

X

Assembler (E) Installation Guide

GC26-3756-6
GTOO-OD03-0
GN33-8100
GT26-3756-4
GN33-S075

X
X
X

X

GlC26-3598-0

X

X

X

X

Assembler (32K) PLM

GY26-3700-2
GN33-8102
GN33-8127
GT66-3700-1
GY33-8028

X
X
.X

X
X

X

X

Assembler (64K) PLM

Assembler Language
X

X
X
X

Assembler (F) Programmer·s Guide
X
X

X
X

~
GC28-6516-8
GN28-0266
GN28-0427
GN28-0465

X
X
X
X

X
X
X

X
X
X

X
X

CODOL Lanquage - COBOL (E)

GC24-5029-3
GN28-0247
GN28-0248
GN28-0264
GN28-0426

X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X

X
X
X

COBOL (E) Programmer's Guide

GC28-6380-3
GN28-0249
GN28-0250
GN28-0265
GN28-0425
GN28-0464

X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X

X

X

COBOL (F) programmer's Guide

X

X
X
X

GC28-6395-1
GN28-0271

X
X

GC28-6396-2
GN28-0428
GN28-0439
GN28-0418

X
X

GC28-6399-2
GTOO-0067-0
GN28-0408
GN28-0422
GN28-0437
GN28-0473
GC28-6400-0
GN28-0262
GN28-0467

x

X
X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X
X
X
X

X

X
X

COBOL Differences American National Standard COBOL conversion

X

X

X

X

X
X

X
X

X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X

X
X
X

FUll American National standard COBOL programmer's Guide

X
X

X
X

X

Conversion Aids - COBOL to American National Standard COBOL
Language Conversion

Full American National Standard COBOL

X
X
X
X

X

7

RELEl\SE STATUS
ORDER RO.

~

21.0 20.1 20.0!!

~

GC33-2001-1
GN33-7009
GlC211-5009-1

X
X
X

Conversion Aids - COBOL to pIJJ: Language

GlC28-6385
GY28-6393
GY28-6398

X
X
X

X

GlC33-7007-0
GN33-7010

X
X

X
X

X

X

GlC28-6382-2

X

X

X

X

GlC28- 6395-1
GN28-0499
G'l'OO-0046-0
GN28-0400
GN28-0416

X

X
X

X
X
X

X

X
X
X
X
X
X

X
X

COnversion PZOgram for OS

X

COBOL (E) PLM

X
X
X

COBOL to l'LJ'J: Language Conversion for OS PLM
COBOL (P) PLM
American National Standard COBOL

X

X

X

:x
:x

X

:x

X
X

X

25 FORTRAN
GC28-6629- 2

X

X

X

X

Basic FORTRAN IV Language

GC28-6515-8

X

X

X

:x

FORTRAN J:V Language

GC28-6430-0

X

X

X

X

FORTRAN IV (E) Compiler Installation Reference Material

GC28-6817-2
GN28-0590
GN28-0591

X
X
X

X
X

:x

X
X

FORTRAN J:V (G) and (8) Programmer's Gnide

:x

X
X

GC28-6603-3

X

X

X

X

FORTRAN J:V (I;) Programmer's Gnide

GC27-6937-1
GN27-1316

X
X

:x

X

X

X

S/360 and 1130 Disk Monitor System
FORTRAN IV Subroutines for Data Transmission
between 8/360 and a 1130 System

GN30-2534

X

X

X

GC28-6819-0

X

:x

:x

X

Language Handbook for conversion from 7090n094 l'OR'nilIR IV

GC28-6818-0
GN28-0589

X
X

X
X

X
X

X
X

FORTRAN IV Library-Mathematical and Sezvice Subprograms

GC33-2002-1
GN33-7002
GN33-7004
GN33-7007

X

X
X
X

:x

X

X
X

conversion Aids: FORTRAN IV to PIJI
Language Conversion Program for OS

X
X

X
X

GY27-7152-2
GN27-1334

X

X

X

Graphic Subrontine Package for FORTRAN IV. COBOL and l'LJ'J: PLM
S/360 and 1130 Disk Monitor System Data Transmission for
FORTRAN PLM

X

X
X

X

:x
:x

:x

X

GY27-7161-0

X

X

X

X

GY27-7194

X

X

X

X

X

X
X
X

:x

X

X

X
X
X

GY28-6601-2
GlC28-6383
GlC28-6819
GlC28-6827
GY28-6828

X
X
X

:x

X

X
X

X

X

GlC33-7000-0
GN33-7008

X
X

X
X

X
X

X

FORTRAN IV to PIJJ: Language Conversion for OS PLM

GY28-6638-1
GlC28-6826
GY28-6829
GlC28-6847

X

X
X
X
X

X
X

X
X

FORTRAN J:V (G) compiler PLM

X

X

X
X

GlC28-6642-4
GN28-0594

X

X

X
X

:x
:x

X
X

X

:x
X

X

GY28-6831- 2
GT68-6831-0

X

X
X

X

FORTRAN J:V (E) compiler PLM

FORrRAN J:V (H) compiler PLN
FORTRAN IV Syntax Checker PLM

~

GC33-2001-1
GN33-7001
GN33-7003

X
X
X

GC28-6615-3
GTOO-0013-0

X

X

X

X
X

X

X
X

X

X

X

X

X

conversion aids - lILGOL TO PIJI Language
conversion program for as
l\LGOL Language

RELEASE STATUS
ORDER 110.

.u.s l!...2

GC33-4000-3
GTOO-OO37-0
G1I33-0091

X

GY33-0000-0
G1I33-8129
GY33-0001
GY33-8003

X
X

GY33-7006-0

X

20.1 20.011

:ll!!!L
ALGOL

X
X

X
X

Pro9rammer~s

Guide

X

X

X

X

X
X

X
X

X
X

X

X

X

ALGOL (F) Compiler PLM

ALGOL to PL/I Language Conversion for OS PLM

~

GC24-3337-5
GY26-3704-0
GY21-0006
GY21-0011

X

X

X

X

Report Program Generator Program

X
X
X

X
X
X

X
X
X

X
X
X

RPG - PLII

X

X

X

X

PL/I Subroutine Library computational Subroutines

X
X

X
X

X

~
GC28-6590-2
GC20-6594-8
GTOO-0060
G1I33-6020
GT28-6594-6
G1I33-6016
GC28-8201-3
G1I33-6019
G1I33-6021

PL/I (P) programmer's Guide

X

X
X
X
X

PL/I (F) Language Reference Manual

X

X

PL/I (F) Compiler PLII

X
X
X

X
X

PL/I SUbroutine Library PLII

X

X

PL/I Syntax Checker PLM

X
X
X

X
X
X

X
X
X

GY28-6000-5

X

X

GY20-6001-5
G1I33-6017
GY33-6010

X
X
X

X
X
X

GY33-8009-0
G1I33-0109

X
X

X
X

30 ACCESS MEl'HODS « DATA MAIIAGEMEIIT « I/O COIITROL PROGRAMS

GY28-6617-6
GTOO-0054-0
GT60-6617-4
G1I26-0007

X

GY20-6606-3
GTOO-0049-0
G1I26-0006
GY35-0002
GY35-0007

X

GC26-3794-0

X

X
X

X

X
X

X
X

Cataloq Mgmt PLM
X
X
X

X

GC26-3746-1
GTOO-OOO2-0
G1I26-0624
G1I26-0631
GC20-6550-10

Basic Direct AcceS9 Methods PLM
X

OS Data Management Macro Instructions
X
X
X
X

Data Management services
X

Data Management for system Programmers

X

GY20-6607-0
GTOO-0050-0
GT60-6607-6
GII26-0012

Direct Access Device space Mqmt PLM

X
X
X
X

X

GC27-6950-0
GII27-1336

X
X

X
X

X
X

X
X

Planning for Display Operator Consoles

GC27-6933-3
G1I27-1371

X
X

X

X

X

User's Guide for Job Control from the IBM 2250 Display Unit

GC27-6930-1
GN27-1315
G1I27-1330
G1I27-1370

X
X
X
X

X
X
X

X
X
X

X
X
X

S/360 & 1130 Disk Monitor System, User's Guide
for Job control from a 2250 Display Unit attached

GY27-7113- 6

X

to an 1130 System with a fixed number of Tasks MFT

Graphic Access Method PLM

REr.EASE STATUS
ORDER NO.

~

.ll:.Q 20. 1

GTOO-0040-0

~

12

TITLE

X

X

X

Gl!27-7110-1

X

X

X

X

Graphics problem Orient.ed Routines PLM

GC27-6909-5
GN27-1328
GN27-1366

X
X
X

X
X

X
X

X
X

Graphic Proqra11lllling services for 2250 Display Unit

GC27-6912-8
GTOO-0004-0

X
X

X

X

station (Local Attachment)

GC27-6927-0

X

X

X

X

Graphic Programming services for 2280 , 2282 File units

GC27-6932-3
GN27-1313
GN27-1331

X
X
X

X
X

X
X

X
X

Graphic Subroutine Package for FORTRAN IV, COBOL and PL/I

Gl!28-6618-5
GTOO-0055-0
GT68-6618- 3
GN26-8001

X
X
X

X
X

Gl!28-6616-9
GTOO-0053-0
GT68-6616-7
GN26-8013

X
X
X

X

Gl!28-6609-6
GTOO-0051-0
GN26-8015
GT68-6609-4

X

Gl!28-6604-5
GTOO-0048-0
GT68-6604-3
GN26-8009

X

GC28-6680-4
GTOO-OOI9-0
GN26-0625
GT28-6680-2
GN30-2551

X

Graphic programming services for 2260 Display

Indexed Sequential Access Methods PLM
X

Input/Output suprv. PLM
X

S/360 Input/Output Support Open/Close/EOV PLM
X
X

X
X

sequential Access Method PLM
X
X
X

X

Tape Labels
X
X

X
X

GC30-2004-5
GN30-2551
GN30-2563
GH30-2568

X
X
X
X

Gl!30-2001-5
GN30-2569
GN30-2570
GN30-2571
GTOO-0069-0
Gl!30-2552
Gl!30-2564

X
X
X
X

X

X

X
X
X
X

X
X

BTAM
X

BTAM PLM

X
X

X
X
X

X
X

X

X
X
X
X

X
X
X

X
X
X

GC30-2005-3
GT30-2005-2
GN30-2526
GH30-2556

X

GC30-2003-4
GT30-2003-3
GN30-2S32

X

X
X
X

X
X
X

X
X
X

QTAM Message Processing Programs

Gl!30-2002-2
Gl!30-2S27

X
X

X
X

X
X

X
X

QTAM PLM

GC30-2022-0
GN30-2561

X
X

X

X

X
X
X

X

X

Ge30-2020-0
Ge30-2024-2
GTOO-OO70-0
GC30-2024-0
GN30-2SS8

X

QTAM Message Control Proqram

TCAM Concepts , Facilities

Planning for

~

TeAM Programmer' 9 Guide

and Reference Manual

X
X

GC30-2028-0

Planning for TeAM with the 370·S Communications Controller

X

X

X
X

X

Gl!30-2027-0

X

X

X

TeAM serviceability Aids PLM

GC30-202S-0

X

GC30-2026-0
GN30-2S62

X
X

X
X

X
X

OS conversion GUide from Q'l'AM or BTAN to '!'CAM

GC26-S929-6

X

X

X

GC21-5004-2

X

Gl!30-2029-2
GTOO-0065-0
GN30-2S66
GT60-2029-0

X

TeAM PLM

X

X

TeAM User's GUide

X

1130 subroutine Library
IBM 128S, 1287, and 1288 optIcal Readers

10

RELEASE STATUS
ORDER NO.

£bE. Ih.Q.

GTOO-0001-1
GN21-5124
GN21-5154
GY21-0013-1
GTOO-0039-0
GN21-5123
GN21-5136
GN21-5155

X

GC21-5006-1
GN21-5125
GN21-5127
GN21-513q
GN21-5137
GN26-0636

X
X
X
X

x

~

20.0

II

~

X
X
X

X
X

X
X

Data Management Macros , Services

X
X
X
X

X
X
X

X
X

X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X

X
X

1 ~ 19 Magnetic Character Reader ,
1275 Optical Reader/Sorter Device Dependent
BSAM PLM

1285, 1287, 1288 Optical Readers PLM

IBM 1419/1275 Data Management Macro Instructions

and services

X

x

X

X

X
X
X

X

X
X

GC27-6918-3

X

X

X

X

Maintenance Program

GC28-6429-0

X

X

X

X

Linkage Editor (E).. IRM

GC28-6538-9
GTOO-0007-0
GN28-0272
GN28-0423
GN28-0435
GN28-0474

X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X

X
X

GY21-0012-0
GN21-5128
GN21-5135
GN21-5156

X
X

31 SUPPORT PROGRAMS

Linkage Editor and Loader

X

GX20-1739- 3
GY21-7155-2
GN27-1333
GN27-13q3
GN27-1369

X
X
X

X
X
X

X
X
X

X

X

X

Linkage Editor and Loader Reference Summary

X
X

Machine Check Handler for S/360 Model 65 PLM

X

GY27-7184-1
GN27-1368
GT67-7184-0
GN27-1332

X
X

GY27-7198-1
GTOO-0042-0

X

GY27-7237-1
GTOO-0045-0

X

GY28-6610-2
GY28-2301
GY28-2356
GY28-6400

X
X

Machine Check Handler for S/360 Model 85 PLM
X
X

Machine Check Handler for 5/370 Model 155, 165 PLM
X

X

OS Machine Check Handler for 5/370
Models 135 and 145

X

X
X

GY28-6667-2
GTOO·0060-0
GN28-043q
GT6B-6667-0
GY28-2357
GY2B-6Q01
GY2B-6Q04

X

GY28-6714-1
GN28-0475
GT6B-671Q-0
GY28-2401
GY28-6405

X

GY2B-7106-0

X

X

X

X
X
X

X
X
X

X

X

X
X
X

Linkage Edi tor (EI PLM

X
Linkage Editor (PI PLM

X

X
X
X
X

X

Loader PLM

X

X

X
X
X
X

X

X

X

X

Update Analysis Program PLM

32 UTILITIES
GC28-6586-13
GN35-0004
GTOO-OO12-0
GN35-0001
GN35-0003
GT68-6586-11

X
X

GY28-661Q-B

X

Utilities
X
X
X

Utilities PLM

11

RELElISE STATUS
ORDER NO.

~

1b.!!

GTOO-0052-0
Glr35-0001
GT68-661Q-6
Glr35-0006

~ 20.0

X
X

!2

~

X
X
X

33 SORT/MERGE
GC28-6543-7
GTOO-0008-0
GN33-8096
GT28-6543-5
GN33-8054
GN33-8070

X

GC28-6662-1

X

Glr28-6597-4
GTOO-0047-0

X

Sort/Merqe
X
X

X
X
X
X

X

X

X

Sort/Merge Timing Estimates
sort/Merge PLM

X

X

X

34 SlrSTEM PLANNING. GENERATION. INSTALLATION, SMF

Glr33-8030
GC27-6939-10
GTOO-0005-0
GQ27-6939-8
GC28-6551-14
GN28-2533
GTOO-0010-0
GN28-2495
GN28-2499
GN28-2517
GQ28-6551-12
GN28-2455
GT28-6551-11
GN28-2438

X

MJ!'T Guide
X

X
X

Storage Estimates

X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X

system Generation

X
X
X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X
X

GC28-6712-5
GTOO-0024-0
GN35-0002

systems Management Facilities
X
X

GC28-6716-0

X

GC28-6720-q
GTOO'-0026-0
GQ28-6720- 2
G828-2Q60

X

X

X

X

Feature Guide
!lIlT Guide

X
X
X

Release 21. 6 Guide

X
X
X
X
X

Release 20. 1 Guide

X
X
X
X
X

GT28-6730-0
GN28-2465
GC28-6733-1
G828-2432
G628-2434
GN28-2453
G628-2466
G628-2449

X

X

GC28-6554-11
GN26-0637
GTOO-OO 11-0
GN26-0627
G826-0629
GN26-0634
G826-0635
GT28-6554-9
GN26-0613
GN26-0628
GN28-2439

GC28-673O-Q
GTOO-0071-0
GTOO-0072-0
G628-2530
G628-2532
GTOO-0027-0
GR28-2496
G628-2498
GN28-2514
G628-2516

X

X

Release 20 Guide

X
X

X

X

X

12

X
X
X
X
X
X

Rel.ease 19 Guide

IlELEllSE STATUS
ORDER NO.

1!..! l!...!! 1Q.l 1lh9. l!

m!!L.

li~~
GC27-69Q2-2

X

X

X

GC28-6632-5
GN28-2382
GN28-2399
GN28-2418

X
X
X
X

GC28-6628-8
GTOO-0014-0
GQ28-6628-6
GN28-2464
GT28-6628-5

l:ntro to Main Storage Hierarchy SUpport for 2361 Models 1 , 2
Job Contro1 Language Charts

System Contro1 B10cks
X
X
X
X

GC28-66"-6
GTOO-0016-0
GQ28-6646-4
GN27-1350
GT28-6646-3

X

supervisor services and Macro J:nstructlons

x
X
X
X

GC28-6647-5
GN26-0622
GN26-0630
GT28-6647-4
GC28-6670-5
GN28-2520
GTOO-0018-0
GN28-2457
GN28-2472
GT28-6670-3

.11.

X
X
X

supervisor , Data Mgmt Macro l:DBtructions

X
X

Programmer' B Guide to Debo.gging

X
X
X
X
X

X
X

GC28-6703-2
GQ28-6703-1
GT28-6703-0

Job contro1 Language User's Guide

X
X
X

GC28-6704-2
GTOO-0022-0
GT28-6704-0

X

GC28-6708-4
·GTOO-0023-0
GN26-0620
GN26-0623

X

Job Contro1 Language Reference
X

X
X
X

GTOO-0009-0
GN28-2494
GT28-6550-8
G1I28-2437
GN28-2452
G1I28-2456
GN28-2451

X

X

X
X

X

X
X
X

X
X

Advanced Checkpoint/Restart

System PX09'raaaer' 8 Guide

X
X

X
X

GY27-7128-7
GTOO-0041-0
G1I28-2468

X

GY27-7159-1
GY27-7166-0
GY27-7192
GY27-7236-1
GTOO-0044-0
GN27-1349
GN27-1364

X

Job Management with MPT. PLM
X
X

X

X

X

X

X

Graphic Joh Processor Support PLM

X
X

X
X

X
X

X
X

S/360 , 1130 Disk Monitor System Job Processing frail a remote
11301'2250 SUbsystem PLM

X
X
X

X

MPT supervisor PLM

GY28-660S-I&
G1I28-2422
GY28-2392
GY28-6612-4
GN27-1337
GY27-7188
GY27-7189

X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X

GY28-6613-5

X
X
X

l:ntroduction to Contro1 PLM

X
X
X
X

PCP supervisor PLM

lI.

GY28-6659-6
GTOO-OO57-0
GN27-1354
G1I27-1363

X

GY28- 6660- 9
GTOO-OO58-0
GQ68-6660-6

X

GY28-6661-5
GTOO-OO59-0
GN27-134Q
GN27-1353
GT68-6661-3

X

PCP Job Management PLM
IIV'1' supervisor PLM

X
X
X

X

MIlT Job Management PLM
X
X

l:n1tial Prog Loader , Nucleus l:nitializatlon prograa PLM
X
X
X

X
X

13

RELEASE STATUS
ORDER NO.

ll:..2 £.hQ. £Q....1 lQ.J! 11

GX28-6783-0

~

X

Job Control Language syntax Ref SUlO1llary

X

OS Problem Determination Aids , Msgr , Codes for GPS , GSP

ll...Me
GC27-6970
GC28-6648-1

X

GC28-6650-6
GTOO-OO17-0
GQ28-6650-4
GT28-6650-3

X

GC28-6719-2
GTOO-OO25-0
GN28-2478
GT28-6719-0

X

GC28-6747-2
GTOO-OO29-0

X

GX28-6749-3
GTOO-OO38-0

X

X

X

TESTRAN

on-line Test Executive Program
X
X
X

service Aids
X
X

X
X

Reliability Data Extractor (ROE) Guide
X

service Aids - Reference Card
X

GY28-6611-0
GN26-8018
GY28-2371

X
X
X

X
X
X

X
X
X

TESTRAN PLM

GC26-3796-0

X

TESTRAN System Information

GY28-6651-S
GTOO-OO56-0
GQ28-6651-3
GT68-6651-2

X

Online Test Executive Program PLM

GY28-6721-0

X

X
X
X

Service Aids

38 REMOTE JOB ENTRY
GC30-2006-5
GN28-0602
GTOO-OO32-0
GN30-2543
GN30-2547
GN30-2555

X
X

Remote Job Entry

X

GC30-2010-0
GN30-2529
GN30-2531
GN30-2536
GC30-2012-1
GTOO-OO33-0

X

GC30-2014-1
GTOO-OO34-0
GN30-2549

X

GC30-2016-1
GTOO-OO35-0
GN30-2548

X

GYJO-2005-4
GY30-2542
GYJO-2557

X
X
X

GYJO-2011-1
GTOO-OO62-0
GYJO-2550
GY30-2553

X

X
X
X
X

X
X
X

X

X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X

X

X

X

X
X

X
X

X

X
X

X
X

X

X
X

X
X

X

X
X
X

X
X
X

X

Planning for Conversational RJE

Conversational RJE Concepts , Facilities
conversational RJE Terminal User's Guide

conversational RJE system programmer"s Guide

RJEPLM

Conversational RJE PLM

39 TIME SHARING

GC28-6698-4
GN28-2519
GTOO-OO21-0
GN28-2497
GN28-2502
GT28-6698-2
GX28- 6 781- 0
GY28-6745-0

X
X

TSO Guide

X
X
X
X
X

TSO Command Lan911age Ref summary

X
X

TSO Catalog Management PLM

X

14

RELEASE STATUS
ORDER NO.

~

ll.:.l!

~ 20.0

X

X

X
X

X

GN28-2481
GC28-6732-2
GN28-2521
GTOO-OO28-0
GN28-2q80
GN28-2503

.!2

:ll!!.L

TSO command Language Reference
X
X
X

GY28-6771-0
GN28-2q89
GY28-6772-0
G!II28-2q90
GN28-2513

X

X
X
X
X

TSO Command Processor PLM. Vol

X
X
X
X

TSO Command processor PLM. Vol

TSO Command Processor PLM.. Vol 3

GY28-6773-1
GTOO-0063-0
GN28-2q85
GY28-2q85

X

GY28-677q-0
GN28-2q91

X
X

X
X

TSO conmand Processor PLM. Vol q

GY28-6775-0
GN28-2486
GN28-2511

X
X
X

X
X

TSQ Coaunand processor PLM. Vol 5

GY28-6776-0
G!II28-2q92

X
X

X
X

TSO conanand Processor PLM. Vol 6

GY28-6777-0
GN28-2q88

X
X

X
X

TSD command Processor PLM. Vol 7

X
X
X

GY27-7199-2
GN27-1277
GTOO-OOQ3-0

X
X

GC28-626Q-2
GTOO-OO73-0
GN28-2523
GTOO-0031-0
GN28-248Q

X
X

GY28-6770-2
GTOO-OO74-0
GN28-252Q
GTOO-OO61-0

X

TSQ Control Program PLM

X
X

TSO Guide to W-=iting a Terminal Monitor
X
X

x
TSO Terminal Monitor Program and

X
X
X
X

GC28-6762-0
GN28-2487

X
X

GC28-6763-1
G!II28-2522
GTOO-0030-0
GN28-2483

X
X

service Routines PLM

TOO Terminals

X
X

TSO Terminal User's Guide
X
X

40 SYSTEM OPERATION

GC27-6949-1
GTOO-0063-0
GN27-1356
GN27-1362

X

GC28-6691-3
GTOO-0020-0
GN28-2463
GN28-2473
GN28-2500
GT28-6691-1
GN28-2433
GN28-24QQ

X

GC28-6692-1
GN28-2474
GN28-2508
GC28-6631-12
GTOO-0015-0
GH28-2501
GQ28-6631-10
GN28-2Q61
G'I28-6631-9
GN28-2429
GN28-2440

X
X
X
X

Operator's Guide t;or Display consoles
X
X
X

X
X
X

X
X
X
X

X

X

X
X
X
X
X

X

X

Operator's Procedures
Messages and Codes

X
X
X
X

X
X
X

15

GH29-9322

GH20-0321

GH29-9323

**GH29-1173

GX29-1827
GYBO-OS98
GY20-039S

Gr69-039S

IBM SYSTEM/369 AND SYSTEM/379 ATTACHED SUPPORT PROCESSOR
SYSTEM (ASP) VERSION 2, APPLICATION PROGRAMMER'S MANUAL
PROGRAM NUMBER 36aA-CI-1SX
IBM SYSTEM/369 AND SYSTEM/379 ATTACHED SUPPORT PROCESSOR
SYSTEM (ASP) VERSION 2 CONSOLE OPERATOR'S MANUAL
PROGRAM NUMBER 369A-CX-1SX
IBM SYSTEM/369 AND SYSTEM/379 ATTACHED SUPPORT
PROCESSOR SYSTEM (ASP) VERSION 2, SYSTEM PROGRAMMER'S
MANUAL PROGRAM NUMBER 36BA-CI-15X
IBM SYSTEM/369 AND SYSTEM/379 ASP VERSION F 3 ASYMMETRIC
MULTIPROCESSING SYSTEM GENERAL INFORMATION MANUAL
APPLICATION - PROGRAM NUMBER 36BA-CI-1SX
SYSTEM/360/379 ASP REFERENCE CARD,
PROGRAM NUI'IBEB 369A-CX-15X
IBM SYSTEM/369 ATTACHED SUPPORT PROCESSOR SYSTEM (ASP)
VERSION 2 MICROFICHE, PROGRAM NUMBER 369A-CI-1SX
IBM SYSTEM/369 AND SYSTEM/379 ATTACHED SUPPORT PROCESSOR
SYSTEM (ASP) VERSION 2 SYSTEM MANUAL PROGRAM NUMBER
369A-CX-1SX
SYSTEM/369 ATTACHED SUPPORT PROCESSOR SYSTEM (ASP)
VERSION 2 SYSTEM MANUAL PROGRAM NUMBER 369A-CX-15X

GH29-9673

CALL/36B-OS SYSTEM DESCRIPTION MANUAL,
PROGRAM NUMBER 369A-CX-~2X

GH20-0699

CALL/369-0S BASIC LANGUAGE REFERENCE MANUAL
(PROGRAM NUMBER 368A-CX-42X)
CALL/369-0S BASIC REFERENCE CARD PROGRAM NUMBER 36BA-CX-42X
CALL/369-0S (VERSION 1) BASIC ASS EMBLY LISTINGS
PROGRAM NUMBER 360A-CX-42X (FEU3B925)
CALL/369 - OS BASIC SYSTEM MANUAL
PROGRAM NUMBER 369A-CX-42X

GX20-1811
GYB0-9S~0

GY29-9S39

GH20-9719
GX 20-1812
GYB0-0S~1

**GY20'-0'531

GH20-9700
GX20-1810
GYBO-9S~2

GY29-9567
GY20-9S68
GY 29-956 9
GY 29-0570

GYBB-0S38
**GY20-0S29

CALL 36B/-OS FORTRAN LANGUAGE REFERENCE MANUAL
PROGRAM NUMBER 36BA-CX- 42X
CALL/369-0S FORTRAN REFERENCE CARD PROGRAM NUMBER
369A-CX-42X
CALL/369-0S (VERSION 1) FORTRAN ASSEMBLY LISTINGS
PROGRAM NUMBER 360A-CX-42X (FEU39925)
CALL/369-0S FORTRAN SYSTEM MANUAL PROGRAM NUMBER 360A-CX-42X

CALL/369-0S PL/I LANGUAGE REFERENCE MANUAL
CALL/369-0S PL/I REFERENCE CARD PROGRAM NUMBEE 360A-CX-42X
CALL/369-0S (VERSION 1) PL/I ASSEMBLY LISTINGS
PROGRAM NUMBEE 360A-CX-42X (PEU39B25)
CALLIt[) -OS PL/I SYSTEMS MANUAL VOLUME 1
CALL/369-0S PL/I SYSTEM MANUAL VOLUME I I
CALL/36H-OS PL/1 SISTEK MANUAL VOLUME I I I
PROGRU NUMBER 369A-CX- 42X
CALL/369 OS PL/I SYSTEM MANUAL VOLUME

CALL-OS VERSION 2 EXECUTIVE & UTILITY LISTINGS
PROGRU NUMB EE 36BA-CX- 42X
CALL/36B-OS EXECUTIVE AND UTILITIES SYSTEM MANUAL
PROGRAM NUMBER 369A-CX-42X

GH29-9786

CALL/36B-OS EXECUTIVE AND UTILITIES PROGRAM DESCRIPTION
MANUAL (PROGRAM NUMBER 360A-CI-42X)

GH2B-0787

CALL/36B-OS TERMINAL OPERATIONS MANUAL PROGRAM NUMBER
360A-CX-42X
CALL/36B-OS OPERATOR'S MANUAL PROGRAM NUMBER 360A-CX-42X
CALL-OS TERMINAL COMMAND LANGUAGE - REFERENCE CARD
PROGRAM NUMBER 36BA-CX-42X

GH29-0788
GX2B-1839

ign n.!!.!!

'!!Q!!!~Q!!

GH29-B824
GH29-B876

INTRODUCTION TO THE REAL-TIME MONITOR
THE REAL-TIME MONITOR (RTH) PROGRAM DESCRIPTION MANUAL,
PROGRAM NUMBER 360A-SV-BB1

16

ORDER
NU MBER

TITLE

GH2~-~817

GY2~-~599

The REAL-TIME MONITOR (RTM), PROGRAM NUMBER 360A-SV-001
OPERATIONS AND PROGAMHER'S GUIDE
THE REAL-TIME MONITOR (RTM) SYSTEM. MANUAL,
PROGRAM NUMBER 36"A-SV-"01

GX2S-6731
S229-3169

OPERATING SYSTEM SUMMARY CIIART
SYSTEM!36~ OPERATING SYSTEM - IIANDBOOK

GC 2 B- 6 596

IBM SYSTEM/360 FORTRAN IV LIBRARY SUBPROGRAMS
SYSTEMS REFERENCE LIBRARY MANUAL, PROGRAM NUMBERS
36~ F-LM-619, 360N-LM- QS0

GX33-6~0~

IBM SYSTEM/360 OPERATING SYSTEM PL/1
REFERENCE CARD: KEYWORDS

GC27-6975

IBM 2260 BTAM AND 226~ GAM TO IBM 3270 BTAS CONVERSION
GUIDE - PROGRAM NUMBERS 360S-CQ-513, 360N-CQ-q69
IBM SYSTEM/360 OPERATING SYSTEM BASIC TELECOMMUNICATIONS
ACCESS I1ETHOD PLANNING FOR USE OF THE IBM 2741 UNDER BTAM
PROGRAM NUMBER 360S-CQ-513
IBM SYSTEM/360 OPERATING SYSTEM
IBM SYSTEM/360 DISK OPERATING SYSTEM
BASIC TELECOMMUNICATIONS ACCESS METHOD
PLANNING POR IBM 279" DATA COMMUNICATION SYSTEM SUPPORT
IBM SYSTEM/360 OPERATING SYSTEM AND DISK OPERATING SYSTEM:
PLANNING FOR IMPROVED BTAM SUPPORT OF REMOTE BSC STATIONS
PROGRAM NUMBER 360S-CQ-513
IBM SYSTEM/360 OPERATING SYSTEM PLANNING FOR THE
IBM 3211 PRINTER DATA MANAGEMENT MACRO INSTRUCTIONS AND
SERVICES
IBM SYSTEH/36~ OPERATING SYSTEM: PLANNING FOR THE IBM 35~5
CARD READER AND 3525 CARD PUNCH
IBM 3705 COMMUNICATIONS CONTROLLER NETWORK PROGRAM
GENERATION AND UTILITIES GUIDE AND REFERENCE MANUAL

GC30-2009

GC30-100Q

GC3~-10~5

GC21-50~S

G:21- 5027

GC26-3717

(F)

GC27-6951
GC27-69q8

EMULATING DOS ON IBM SYSTEM/370 UNDER OS SYSTEM REFERENCE
LIBRARY MANUAL - FROGRAM NUMBER 36~C-EU-73B
IBM SYSTEM/360 OPERATING SYSTEM DOS EMULATOR FROGRAM ON IBM
SYSTEM/360 MODELS 135, 1q5, AND 155
PROGRAM LOGIC MANUAL - PROGRAM HonBER 360'C-EU-738
IBM 3105 COMMUNICATIONS CONTROLLER EMULATION GENERATION AND
UTILITIES GUIDE REFERENCE MANUAL - PROGRAM
NUMBERS 360H-TX-035, 360H-Tl-036
EMULATING THE IBM 709q ON IBM MODELS 85 AND 165 USING OS/360
EMULATING THE IBM 707q ON TilE IBM SYSTEM/370 MODEL 165

GY27-7228

PRg~~~~ ~~/~~~LATE

GY26-37Q1

GY27-723R
GC27-6952
GY27-7229
GY27-7187

THE IBM 707Q ON THE IBM SYSTEH/370
MODEL 165 USING OS/360 - PROGRAM NUMBER 360C-EU-739
MODEL 165 USING OS/360 - PROGRAM NUMBER 360C-EU-739
IBM 70H OPERATING SYSTEM EMULATOR ON SYSTEM/370 MODEL 155
LOGIC MANUAL - PROGRAM NUMBER 360C-EU-H1
EMULATING THE IBM 7080 ON THE IBM SYSTEM/37~ MODEL 165
USING OS/360 - PROGRAM NUMBER 360C-EU-737
PROGRAM TO EMULATE THE IBH 7080 ON THE IBM SYSTEM/370
MODEL 165 USING OS/360 - PROGRAM NUMBER 360C-EU-737
EMULATOR PROGRAM TO EMULATE THE 709QON MODELS 65 AND 165
USING OS/360 - PROGRAM NUMBERS 36~C-EU-73Q, 360C-EU-7Q0

3C27-6935

IBM SYSTEM/360 OPERATING SYSTEM PLANNING FOR ROLLOUT/ROLLIN

GC30-2015

IBM SYSTEM/360 OPERATING SYSTEM REMOTE JOB ENTRY PLANNING FOR IBM 2770 RJE SUPPORT

11!!:; lQ!:;!';

!!~~!!!n!!!< !l!:;!~~l.::!!~J,J!Ag 1§

GC2Q-5~63
GC2Q-503~

GC2Q-3Q1Q
GY26-36Q2
GY26-3716

DISK OFERATING
MASTER INDEX
IBM SYSTEM/360
CONCEPTS AND

Al!!! QIDlJl!!!1fl.@::!!!!l.

SYSTEM/360
SYSTEMS REFERENCE LIBRARY MANUAL
DISK AND rAPE OPERATING SYSTEMS
FACILITIES

IBM SYSTEM/360 DISK AND TAPE OPERATING SYSTEM
ASSEMBLER LANGUAGE
IBM SYSTEM/36~ DISK AND TAPE OPERATING SYSTEMS ASSEMBLER (D)
PROGRAM NUMBER 36~M/N-AS-Q65
IBM SYSTEM/36~ DISK OPERATING SYSTEM ASSEMBLER (F)
PROGRAM NUMBER 360'N-AS-466

17

ORDER
NUMBER

GC24-3433

GC24-5025

GC24-5039
GC28-6394
GC28-6398

GC28-6433

GC28-6433

GY24-5025
GY20-6392

Gf 28-6397

GC24-5338

GC28-6397
GC28-6515
GC28-6596

GC28-6629
GC28-6818

GC28-6819

GY24-5332
GY28-6394

SC21-5335
GC21-5321
SC21-5333
GC26-3570
GY26-3731

GC24-9335
GC28-8232
GX23-1749
GY33-9310

GY33-9011

GY33-9312

GY 33-9013

GC21-5334
GC21-5047
GC21-5363
GC24-3427

GC24-5337

GC24-5370

TrrLE

IBM SYSTEM/360 DISK AND TAPE OPERATING SYSTEMS
COBOL LANGUAGE SPECIFICATIONS COBOL DOS PROGRAM NUMBER
360N-CB-452 COBOL TOS PROGRAM NUMBER 360M-CB-402
IBM SYSTEM/360 DISK AND TAPE OPERATING SYTEMS COBOL
PROGRUIHER'S GUIDE
PROGRAM NUMBERS 360N-CB-452 360M-CB-402
IBM ·SYSTEM/363 DISK OPERATING SYSTEM COBOL DASD MACSOS
PROGRAM NUMBER 360N-CB-468
IBM SYSTEM/363 DISK OPERATING SYSTEM - USA STANDARD COBOL
IBM SYSTEM/363 DISK OPERATING SYSTEM: USA STANDARD COBOL
PROGRAMMER' 5 GUIDE
PROGRAM NUMBER 360N-CB-482
IBM SYSTEM/363 CONVERSION AIDS: COBOL-TO-USA STANDARD
COBOL LANGUAGE CONVERSION PROGRAM
PROGRAM NUMBERS 363N-CV-489, 363C-CV-713
IBM SYSTEM/363 DISK OPERATING SYStEM:
AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARD SUBSET COBOL
PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-CB1
IBM SYSTEM/360 DISK AND TAPE OPERATING SYSTEMS COBOL D
360M-CB-402 VERSION 2
363N-CB-452 VERSION 2
IBM SYSTEM/360 DISK OPESATING SYSTEM USA STANDARD COBOL
PROGRAM LOGIC MANUAL
PROGRAM NUMBER 360N-CB-482
IBM SYSTEM/363 CONVERSION AIDS: COBOL TO USA STANDARD COBOL
LANGUAGE CONVERSION PROGRAM - PROGRAM LOGIC MANUAL
PROGRAM NUMBERS 360N-CV-4 89, 360C-CV-713

IBM SYSTEM/363 DISK AND TAPE OPESATING SYSTEMS BASIC
FORTRAN IV PROGRAMMERS GUIDE
PROGRAM NUMBERS 363N-PO-451 AND 360M-FO-439
IBM SYSTEM/360 DISK OPERATING SYSTEM FOSTBAN IV
PROGRAMMER'S GUIDE PROGRAM NUMBERS 360N-FO-479 360N-LM-480
IBM SYSTEM/360 FORTRAN IV LANGUAGE
SYSTEMS REFERENCE LIBRARY MANUAL, PROGBAM NUMBES 363N-LM-480
IBM SYSTEM/360 FORTRAN IV LIBRARY SUBPSOGRAMS
SYSTEMS REFERENCE LIBRARY MANUAL, PROGRAM NUMBERS
363F-LM-619, 360N-LM-483
IBM SYSTEM/363 BASIC FORTRAN IV LANGUAGE
IBM SYSTEM/363 FORTRAN IV LIBRARY: MATHEMATICAL AND SERVICE
SUBPROGRAMS - SYSTEMS REFERENCE LIBRARY MANUAL
PROGSAH NUMBER 360S-LM-501
IBM SYSTEM/360 FORTRAN IV LANGUAGE HANDBOOK FOR CONVESSION
FROM IBM 7990/7394 FORTRAN IV
PROGRAM NUMBER 709B-PR-130
IBM SYSTEM/360 DISK AND TAPE OPERATING SYSTEMS FOBTRAN IV
PROGRAM NUMBER 360M-FO-439 PIIOGRAM NUMBER 360N-FO-451
IBM SYSTEM/360 DISK OPERATING SYSTEM FOSTRAN IV
PROGRAM LOGIC MANUAL PROGRAM NUMBER 363N-FO-479

IBM DOS RPG I I LANGUAGE - SYSTEMS REFERENCE LIBSASY MANUAL
PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-RG1
IBM DOS RPG I I GENERAL INFORMATION MANUAL
PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-RG1
IBM SYSTEM/360 DISK OPERATING SYSTEM
RPG TO RPG I I CONVERSION REFERENCE MANUAL
IBM SYSTEM/360 DISK AND rAPE OPERATING SYSTEMS
REPORT PROGRAM GENERATOR SPECIFICATIONS
IBM SYSTEM/369 DISK AND TAPE OPERATING SYSTEM REPORT
PROGRAM GENESATOR PSOGRAM NUMBESS 363N-RG-460 (DISK)
360M-RG-439 (TAPE)

DOS AND TOS PL/I (D) COMPILER PROGRAMMER'S GUIDE
PL/I - PROGRAMMER'S GUIDE
TNL TO IBM SYSTEM/360 DISK AND TAPE OPERATING SYSTEMS
PL/I SUBSET REFERENCE MANUAL
IBM SYSTEM/360 DOS/TOS REFERENCE CARD PL/I
IBM SYSTEM/360 DISK AND TAPE OPERATING SYSTEMS, PL/I SUBSET
LANGUAGE,. PROGRAM LOGIC 8ANUAL, VOLUME 1 OF 3
PROGRAM NUMBERS:
360N-PL-464 (DOS) 369M-PL-413 (TOS)
IBM SYSTEM/360 DISK AND rAPE OPERATING SYSTEMS, PL/I SUBSET
LANGUAGE, VOLUME 2 OF 3 PROGRAM NUMBERS: 369N-PL-464 (DOS)
363H-PL-41B (TOS)
PROGRAM LOGIC MANUAL
IBM SYSTEH/360 DISK AND TAPE OPERATING SYSTEMS, PL/I SUBSET
LANGUAGE, VOLUME 3 OF 3 PROGRAM LOGIC MANUAL
PROGRAM NUMBERS:
36BN-PL-464 (DOS) 360N-PL-41B (TOS)
IBM SYSTEM/363 DISK AND TAPE OPERATING SYSTEMS PL/I
SUBSET LIBRARY ROUTINES - PROGSAM LOGIC MANUAL
PROGRAM NUMBERS 360N-PL-464 (DOS), 360M-PL-419 (TOS)

IBM SYSTEM/36B DISK OPERATING SYSTEM: PLANNING FOR THE IBM
3505 CARD READER AND THE IBM 3525 CARD PUNCH
IBM 2596 CARD READ PUNCH DOS PROGRAM PLANNING GUIDE
DOS PROGRAMMING SUPPORT FOR IBM 2596 CARD READ PUNCH
IBM SYSTEM/360 DISK OPERATING SYSTEM
DATA MANAGEMENT CONCEPTS
SYSTEMS REFERENCE LIBRARY MANUAL
PROGRAM NUMBER 360N-CL-453
IBM SYSTEM/360 DISK OPERATING SYSTEM
SUPERVISOR AND INPUT/OUTPUT MACROS
SYSTEMS REFERENCE LIBRARY - PROGRAM NUMBER 360N-CL-453
IBM SYSTEM/360 BASIC PROGRAMMING SUPPORT,
BASIC OPERATING SYSTEM, TAPE OPERATING SYSTEM,
DISK OPERATING SYSTEM, TAPE LABELS
SYSTEMS REFERENCE LIBRARY MANUAL

19

ORDER
NUMBER
GC2q-Sa72
GC27-697S
GC27-6977
GC3a-Uaq

GC 3a-1 aas

GC3a-Saa1
GC3a-S003
GC30-S00q
GC33-SaOQ
GY2Q-SG2a

GY2Q-SB89
GY3B-SBB1

GY30-SBa2

GY2Q-Sa79
GY2Q-Sa8a

GC2Q-S042
GC27-6924

GC28-6676
GC28-6679
GY24-Sa21

GC24-5082
GC24-6000

TITLE
IBM SYSTEM/36B DISK OPERATING SYSTEM, DASD LABELS
IBM 226a BTAM AND 2260 GAM TO IBM 3270 BTAM CONVERSION
GUIDE - PROGRAM NUMBERS 360S-CQ-S13, 360N-CQ-469
DOS PROGRAMMING SUPPLEMENT POR THE 3270 INFORMATION DISPLU
SYSTEM - MANUAL
IBM SYSTEM/360 OPERATING SYSTEM
IBM SYSTEM/36B DISK OPERATING SYSTEM
BASIC TELECOMMUNICATIONS ACCESS METHOD
PUNNING POR IBM 2790 DATA COMMUNICAtION SYSTEM SUPPOBT
IBM SYSTEM/360 OPERATING SYSTEM AND DISK OPERATING SYSTEM:
PLANNING FOR IMPROVED BTAM SUPPORT OF REMOTE BSC STATIONS
PROGRAM NUMBER 36BS-CQ-513
IBM 37aS COMMUNICATIONS CONTROLLER NETWORK PBOGRAM
GENERATION AND UTILITIES GUIDE AND REPERENCE MANUAL
IBM SYSTEM/360 DISK OPEBATING SYSTEM
BASIC TELECOMMUNICATIONS ACCESS METHOD
PBOGRAM NUMBER 36BN-CQ-469
IBM SYSTEM/360 DISK OPERATING SYSTEM QTAM MESSAGE PBOCESSING
SERVICES - SYSTEMS REPEBENCE LIBRARY MANUAL
PROGRAM NUMBER 360N-CQ-470
IBM SYSTE8/360 DISK OEPeATING SYSTEM QTAM MESSAGE CONTROL
PROGRAM PROGRAM NUMBER 360N-CQ-470
SYSTEM/36a DOS PLANNING GUIDE POR PROGBAMMING TilE 3330
DIRECT ACCESS STORAGE FACILITY
IBM SYSTEM/36a DISK OPERATING SYSTEM, LOGICAL laCS,
VOLUME 1 INTRODUCTION PROGRAM LOGIC MANUAL, PROGRAM NUMBERS
CPHOD 360N-CL-Q53, DAMOD 360N-IO-454, DIMOD 360N-CL-453,
DTPCN 360N-CL-453, ISMOD 360N-IO-457, MRMOD 360N-IO-477,
MTMOD 360N-IO-456, ORMOD 360N-IO-478, PBMOD 36011-CL-453,
PTMOD 360N-IO-458, SDMOD 360N-IO-455
IBM SYSTEM/360 DISK OPERATING SYSTEM LOGICAL laCS VOLUME 2:
UNIT RECORD, MAGNETIC TAPE AND DEVICE INDEPENDEIIT PILES
PROGRAM LOGIC MANUAL
IBM SYSTEM/36B DISK OPERATING SYSTEM, LOGICAL laCS
VOLUME 3:
SEQUENTIAL AND DIRECT ACCESS DASD FILES,
(PROGRAM NUMBERS: SDMOD 360N-IO-455 DAMOD 360N-IO-4S4)
PROGRAM LOGIC MANUAL
DOS LIOCS VOLUME 4: ISPMS - PROGRAM NUMBER 360N-IO-457
IBM SYSTEM/36a DISK OPERATING SYSTEM
BASIC TELECOMMUNICATIONS ACCESS METHOD PROGRAM LOGIC MANUAL
PROGRAM NUMBER 360N-CQ-469
IBM SYSTEM/360 DISK OPERATING SYSTEM
QUEUED TELECOMMUNICATIONS ACCESS METHOD
PROGRAM LOGIC MANUAL PROGRAM NU MBER 36BN-CQ-470

IBM SYSTEM/360 DISK OPERATING SYSTEM LIBRARIAN MAINTENANCE
AND SERVICE PROGRAMS PROGRAM NUMBER 360N-CL-453
IBM SYSTEM/360 DISK OPERATING SYSTEM LINKAGE EDITOB PBOGRAM
PROGRAM NUMBER 360N-CL-453

IBM SYSTEM/36B DISK AND TAPE OPERATING SYSTEMS
UTILITY PROGRAMS SPECIFICATIONS
PROGRAM NUMBERS 360N-UT-461, 462, Q63
DOS AND TOS UTILITY MACBOS - SYSTEMS REPERENCE LIBRARY
MANUAL - PROGRAM NUMBERS 36HM-UT-411 AND 360N-UT-~71
IBM SYSTEM/360 DISK OPERATING SYSTEM VOCABULARY PILE UTILITY
PROGRAM POR THE IBM 7772 AUDIO RESPONSE UNIT
PBOGRAM NUMBER 360N-UT-472
IBM SYSTEM/360 DISK OPERATING SYSTEM UTILITIES
PROGBAM NUMBERS 360N-UT-461
360N-UT-462 360N-UT-463
DOS AND TOS UTILITIES MACROS - PROGRAM LOGIC MANUAL
PROGRAM NUMBERS 360M-UT-411, 360N-UT-471

IBM SYSTEM/360 DISK AND TAPE OPERATING SYSTEMS TAPE
SORT/MERGE PROGRAM
PBOGRAM NUMBERS 360M-SM-400
360N-SM-~00
IBM 1401/1460 TIMING PROGRAM paR IBM SYSTEM/360 DISK AND
TAPE OPERATING SYSTEMS TAPE/SOBT MERGE PROGRAM
PROGRAM NUMBEB 1401-LM-010 (2401-2404)
PROGRAM NUMBER 14B1-LM-012 (2415)
IBM SYSTEM/360 DISK OPERATING SYSTEM DISK SOBT/MEBGE PROGRAM
PROGRAM NUMBER 360N-SM-450
IBM 1401/1460 TIMING PROGRAM FOR IBM SYSTEM/36B DISK
OPERATING SYSTEM SORT/MERGE PROGRAM
PROGBAM NUMBER 1401-LM-B11
IBM SYSTEM/360 DISK OPERATING SYSTEM
TAPE AND DISK SORT/MERGE .PBOGRAM PROGRAM NUMBEB 360N-SM-483
IBM SYSTEM/360 DISK OPERATING SYSTEM TAPE AND DISK
SORT/MERGE TIMING ESTIMATES
PROGRAM NUMBER 360N-SM-483
IBM SYSTEM/36B DISK OPERATING SYSTEM SORT/MERGE
PROGRAM NUMBER 36aN-SM-450
IBM SYSTEM/360 DISK OPERATING SYSTEM TAPE AND DISK
SORT/MERGE PROGRAM LOGIC MANU AL
PROGRAM NUMBER 36BN-SM-~83

IBM SYSTEM/36B DISK OPERATING SYSTEM:
SYSTEM GENERATION AND MAINTENANCE
IBM SYSTEM/360 DOS TO as MANAGEMENT PLANNING GUIDE
IBM SYSTEM/36B DOS-TO-oS IMPLEMENTATION GUIDE
SYSTEM REPERENCE LIBRARY MANUAL

SYSTEM/360 DISK OPERATING SYSTEM 1401/1440/1460
EMULATOR PROGBAMS COMPATIBILITY SUPPORT 30/40
PROGRAM NUMBERS 360N-EU-484 AND 360N-EU-485
IBM 3705 COMMUNICATIONS CONTROLLER EMULATION GENERATION AND
UTILITIES GUIDE REPERENCE MANUAL - PROGRAM
NUMBERS 360H-TX-035, 360H-U-036

19

ORDER
NUMBER

TITLE

GC33-2004

Gc33-2005

GY27-7164

GY27-7165

GY33-70B8

GY33-7B09

GC 20-1685
GC24-5936

GC24-5973
GX20-1771
GY24-5B17
GY24-5B86

GY24-5151

GY24-5152
GY24-5153

EMULATING THE IBM 1491, 1449 AND 1469
ON THE IBM SYSTEH/370 MODELS 145 AND 155
USING DISK OPERATING SYSTEM/369
EMULATING THE IBM 1419 AND 7919
ON THE IBM SYSTEM/379 MODELS 145 AND 155
USING 005/36"
IBM SYSTEM/369 DISK OPERATING SYSTEM 149l/1449/1469
EMULATOR PROGRAM COMPATIBILITY SUPPORT/3B
PROGRAM NUMBER 369N-EU-484
IBM SYSTEM/369 DISK OPERATING SYSTEM
1401/1449/1460 EMULATOR PROGRAM
COMPATABILITY SUPPOR'r/4B PROGRAM NUMBER 360N-EU-485
PROGRAM TO EMULATE THE 14J:H. 144". AND 1460 ON THE
SYSTEM/379 MODELS 145 AND 155 USING DISK OPERATING
SYSTEM/369 - PROGRAM NUMBER 360N-EU-499
PROGRAM LOGIC MANUAL
PROGRAM TO EMULATE THE 1419 AND 7919 ON THE SYSTEH/37B
MODELS 145 AND 155 USING DOS/369 PROGRAM NUMBER 36BN-EU-499
PROGRAM LOGIC MANUAL

SYSTEM/36B DISK OPERATING SYSTEM USER'S GUIDE:
CONTROL
STATEMENT TECHNIQUES
IBM SYSTEM/36B DISK OPERATING SYSTEM:
SYSTEM CONTROL
AND SYSTEM SERVICE PROGRAMS
PROGRAM NUMBERS BEGINNING WITH 36BNDISK OPERATING SYSTEM SYSTEM PROGRAMMER'S GUIDE
IBH SYSTEM/36B REFERENCE DATA DOS JOB CONTROL LANGUAGE
OPERATOR COMMUNICATION REFERENCE CARD
IBM SYSTEM/36B DISK OPERATING SYSTEM INTRODUCTION TO
DOS LOGIC - PROGRAM NUMBER 36BN-CL-453
IBM SYSTEM/36B DISK OPERATING SYSTEM IPL AND
JOB CONTROL PROGRAHS
PROGRAM NUMBER 36BN-CL-453
IBM SYSTEM/36B DISK OPERATING SYSTEM
SUPERVISOR AND PHYSICAL TRANSIENTS - PROGRAM LOGIC MANUAL
PROGRAM NUMBER 36BN-CL-453
lEO SYSTEM/36B DISK OPERATING SYSTEM
LOGICAL TRANSIENT PROGRAl'!S
IBM SYSTEM/369 DISK OPERATING SYSTEM
SYSTEM SERVICE PROGRAMS

GC24-5962
GC24-5966

GC24-5986

IBM SYSTEM/36B DISK OPERATING SYSTEM AUTOTEST SPECIFICATIONS
181"1 SYSTElS/369. DISK AND TAPE OPERATING SYSTEIi. ON-LINE TEST
EXECUTIVE PROGRAM, SPECIFICATIONS AND OPERATING GUIDE.
PROGRAM NUMBEB FOR DOS 36BN-DN-481 TOS 36Bft-DN-418
DOS OLTEP
PROGRAM - SYSTEM REFERENCE LIBRARY MANUAL
l'ROGRAH NUHBER 36""-09-481

GY24-5927
GY24-5956
GY24-5154

GC24-5922
Gc24-5974

IBft SYSTEM/36B DISK OPERATING SYSTEH AUTOTEST
PROGRAM NUMBER 369N-PT-459
IBft SYSTEM/36B TAPE OPERATING SYSTEH
ON-LINE TEST EXECUTIVE PROGRAM - PROGRAM NUMBER 36BM-DN-418
IBl'! SYSTEH/36.0' DISK OPERATING SYSTEM ON-LINE TEST EXECUTIVE
PROGRAM - PROGRAM LOGIC MANUAL - PROGRAM NUMBEB 36BN-DN-461

IDM SYSTEM/36B DISK OPERATING SYSTEM OPERATING GUIDE
PROGR AM NUMBER 36BH-CL-453
SYSTEft/36B DISK OPERATING SYSTEM MESSAGES
SYSTEMS REFERENCE LIBRARY ftANUAL
SYSTEMS REFERENCE LIBRARY - PROGRAM NUMBER 36BN-CL-453

DOS FOR SYSTEMf370 -

RELElISE 27 (20-40)

SUBJECT
~

ORDER NO.

20 GENERAL INFORMATION

DOS Version 4

GC33-5007-0
GYC7-1700

DOS 370 Microfiche Master Index

24 £Q!!Q!,
ANS COBOL
COBOL 0 DOS 370
COBOL LCP DOS 370

GYC7-1920-0
GYC7-1919-0
GYC7-1921-0
25 FORTRAN

FORTRAN F DOS 370
FORTRAN Library Sub

GYC7-1922-0
GYC7-1923-0

Program DOS 370

21 ASSEMBLER
DOS 370 Assemb1er (D)

GYC7-1900-0
GYC7-1918-0

Assembler F - DOS 370

29 PL/I
GC24-9005-0

DOS and TOS PMI CD) Compiler

GN33-9129

Programmer's Guide
PYI

GN33-9130
GYC7-1924-0

20

ORDER
NUMBER

TITLE

30 ACCESS ME'rHODS. DATA MANAGEMENT. I/O CONTROL PROGRIIMS
DOS Version 4 LIOCS VolUme 1 PLM
DOS Version 4 LIOCS Volume 2 PLM
DOs Version 4 LIOCS Volume 3 PLM

GY33-8543-0
GY33-8544-0
GY33-8545-0
GY33-8546-0
GC27-6978-0

DOS Version .. LIOCS Vol\U1le II PLM

5/370 DOS version 4 Telecommunications
Access Methods
S/370 DOS version , Basic
"l'elecolDDllnications Access Methods PLM
compiler I/O Modules DOS 370
Direct Access Metbods DOS 370
ISIi'MS - loes DOS 370
Magnetic Tape - IOCS DOS 370
Magnetic Character Reader - IOCS DOS 370
Optical Cbaracter Reader - IOCS DOS 370
Paper Tape - IOCS DOS 370
sequential Disk - IOCS DOS 370
System Control/Basic - IOCS DOS 370
BTAH DOS 370
QTAH DOS 370
3735 Terminal Support DOS 370

GY27-72,5-0
GYC7-1914-0
GYC7-1902-0
GYC7-1905-0
GYC7-1904-0
GYC7-1915-0
GYC7-1916-0
GYC7-1906-0
GYC7-1903-0
GYC7-1901-0
GYC7-1909-0
GYC7-1910-0
GYC7-1911-0
31 SUPPOR'r PROGRAMS
GY33-8538-0

DOS Version 4 Linkage Editor PLM

32 UTILITIES

DOS Version .. System utilities PLM
System utilities DOS 370
Otilities Group 1 DOS 370
Utilities Group 2 DOS 370

GY33-8S"-O
GYC7-1907-0
GYC7-1927-0
GYC7-1928-0
33 SORT/MERGE

Disk Sort/Merge DOS 370
Modular Sort/Merge DOS 370

GYC7-1925-0
GYC7-1926-0
34 SYSTEM PLANNING. GENERATION. INSTALLATION. SMF.

DOS Version .. System Generation

GC33-5008-0
35 SIMULATION OR EMULATION

1401/1440/1460 DOS EmI1lator on Models
135/145/155 Reference Manual
1401/1'40/1460 DOS EmI1lator on
Models 135/145/155 PLM
1410;'7010 DOS EmUlator on Models
145/155 Reference Manual
1410;'7010 DOS Emulator on Models
145/155 PLM
S/370 EmUlator DOS 370

GC33-2004-2
GN33-7002

GY33-7008-0
GC33-2005-2

GN33-7023

GY33-7009-0
GYC7-1913-0
36 CONrROL PROGRAM

Introduction to DOS Version 4 Logic PLM
DOS Version 4 IPL and JOB COntrol - PLM
DOS Version 4 Librarian Maintenance
and Service Programs PLM

GY33-8533-0
GY33-8542-0
GY33-8539-0

DOS Version" Logical Transients PLM

GY33-8532-0
GY33-8534-0

DOS Version 4 SUpervisor and Related
Transients PLM
DOS Version , System service
Programs PLM

GY33-8537-0
37

!1M
DOS OLTBP Logic
EREP DOS 370
OLTBP DOS 370

GY24-515'-3
GYC7-1908-0
GYC7-1912-0
'0 SYSTEM OPERATION

DOS Version q Messages

GC33-5009-0

GC28-2883
GC28-2823
GC28-2943
GC28-2948

GC28-29U
GC28-2a32
GY28-2821

GC28-2aB7
GC28-2825
Gc28-2826
GY28-2819
GY28-2928

IBM SYSTU/369 TIftE SBARING SYSTU
IBM SYSTEM/368 TIBE SBUING SYSTEK
IBK SYSTEK/368 TIBE-SHUI BG SYSTEM
PBOGBU RUftS EB 36aS-CI- 555
IBK SYSTEK/368 TIKE SHABING SYSTEK
A PBIMEB FOR FORTRAN USEBS
PROGRAK HUKBEB 368S-CI-5S5

CONCEPTS ABD FACILITIES
BASTEB INDEX
ADDENDUM
INTBODUCIHG TSS/369

IBK SYSTEM/368 UBE-SHABIHG SYSTEK ASSEMBLEB LUGUAGE
18K SYS'rEK/368 TIBE-SBlBIBG SYSTEM ASSEBBLEB PBOGRlBHEB' 5
GOlDE
IBK SYSTEK/368 TIBE-SHlBIBG stSTEK ASSEBBLER
PBOGBAK LOGIC KUOAL

IBK SYSTEH/368 TI!E-SHARING SYSTEK FOBUB IV
SYSTEKS REFEBENCE LIB BUY
IBM SYSTEK/368 TIKE-SHABIIG SYSTEK FOBTRAB PBOGBAKKEB'S
GOlDE
IBK SYSTEM/368 TIME SBlBIHG SYSTEM
FOBTRAN IV LIBRARY SOBPROGRlBS
IBK SYSTEK/368 TIME SHABING SYSTEK: FORTBlN IV COKPILEB
PBOGRU LOGIC KAHOlL
IBK SYSTEft/368 TIHB SHABI HG SYSTSK I'OBTBU IV LIBBlBY
SOBPROGBAKS PIIOGB1! LOGIC UNOlL
PROGRAK ROKBEB 368G-CL-627

21

ORDER
NUMBER

GC28-29Q5
GC28-2946
GC28-2949
Gf28-2951
Gf28-2952

GC28-29S6
GY28-2916 .

GC28-2994
GC28-2995
GY28-2918
GY28-2939

TITLE

IBM SYSTEM/369 TIME-SHARING SYSTEM PL/I REFERENCE MANUAL
PROGRAM NUMBERS 360G-CL-625 360G-CL-626
IBM SYSTEM/369 TIME-SHARING SYSTEM PL/I LIBRARY
COMPUTATIONAL SUBROUTINES
IBM SYSTEM/369 TIME SHARING SYSTEM PL/I PROGRAMMER'S GUIDE
IBM SYSTEM/369 TIME SHARING SYSTEM PL/I COMPILER
PROGRAM LOGIC MANUAL PROGRAM NUMBER 360G-CL-627
IBM SYSTEM/369 TIME SHARING SYSTEM
PLII LIBRARY COMPUTATIONAL SUBROUTINES
PROGRAM LOGIC MANUAL PROGRAM NUMBER 360G-CL-627

IBM SYSTEM/369 TIME SHARING SYSTEM
DATA MANAGEMENT FACILITIES
IBM SYSTM/369 TIME SH ARING SYSTEM ACCESS METHODS
PROGRAM NUMBER 360G-CL-627
PROGRAM LOGIC MANUAL

IBM SYSTEM/369 TIME-SHARING SYSTEM ASSEMBLER USER
MACRO INSTRUCTIONS - SYSTEMS REFERENCE LIBRARY
IBM SYSTEM/369 TIME-SHARING SYSTEM LINKAGE EDITOR
SYSTEMS REFERENCE LIBRARY
IBM SYSTEM/369 TIME SHARING SYSTEM: SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL
PROGRAM LOGIC MANUAL
IBM SYSTEM/36B TIME-SHARING SYSTEM LINKAGE EDITOR
PROGRAM LOGIC MANUAL PROGRAM NUMBER 360G-CL-627

GC28-2938
GY28-2939

IBM SYSTEM/360 TIME-SHARING SYSTEM INDEPENDENT UTILITIES
IBM SYSTEM/369 TIME-SHARING SYSTEM INDEPENDENT UTILITIES
PROGRAM LOGIC MANUAL PROGRAM NUMBER 369G-CL-627

GC28-2919

IBM SYSTEM/369 TIME-SHARING SYSTEM SYSTEM GENERATION AND
MAINTENANCE
IBM SYSTEMS/369 TIME SHARING SYSTEM
MULTITERMINAL TASK PROGRAMMING AND OPERATION
PROGRAM NUMBER 369S-CI-555
IBM SYSTEM/369 TIME SHARING SYSTEM:
SYSTEM GENERATION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRU LOGIC MANUAL PROGRAM NUMBER 369-CL-627

Gc28-2034

GY28-2015

GC28-2991
GC28-2998

GC28-2924

IBM SYSTEM/369 TIME-SHARING SYSTEM COMMAND SYSTEM USER'S
GUIDE
IBM SYSTEM/369 TIME SHARING SYSTEM
SYSTEM PROGRAMMER'S GUIDE
SYSTEMS REFERENCE LIBRARY
IBM SYSTEM/369 TIME-SHARING SYSTEM MANAGER'S AND

ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
GX28-6401

GY28-2909
GY28-2911
GY28-2912
**GY28-2913
GY28-2914

TSS/369 QUICK GUIDE FOR SYSTEMS PROGRAMERS
PROGRAM NUMBER 369G-CL-627
REFERENCE CABD
IBM SYSTEM/369 TIME SHARING SYSTEM SYSTEM LOGIC SUMMARY
PROGRAM LOGIC MANUAL - PROGRAM NUMBER 369G-CL-627
IBM SYSTEM/369 TIME SHARING SYSTEM SYSTEM CONTROL nOCKS
PROGRAM LOGIC UNUAL - PROGRAM NUMBER 369G-CL-627
IBM SYSTEM/369 TIME SHARING SYSTEM: RESIDENT SUPERVISOR
PROGRAM LOGIC MANUAL
TIME SHARING SYSTEM/369 COMMAND LANGUAGE
PROGRAM LOGIC MANUAL - PROGRAM NUMBER 369G-CL-627
IBM SYSTEM/369 TIME-SHARING SYSTEM PROGRAM CONTROL SYSTEM

PROGRAM LOGIC MANUAL
GY28-2931
GY28-2941
GY28-2947

GC28-2996
GC28-2928
GY28-2922

GY 28-2942

GC28-2944
GC28-29S7

IBM SYSTEM/369 TIME SHARING SYSTEM: DYNAMIC LOADER
PROGRAM LOGIC MANUAL PROGRAM NU MBER 360G-CL-627
IBM SYSTEM/369 TIME SHARING SYSTEM TASK MONITOR
PROGRAM LOGIC MANUAL - PROGRAM NUMBER 369G-CL-627
IBM SYSTEM/369 TIME SHARING SYSTEM
OPERATOR TASK AND BULK I/O - PROGRAM LOGIC MANUAL
PROGRAM NUMBER 36BG-CL-627

IBM SYSTEM/36B TIME-SHARING SYSTEM
TIME SHARING SUPPORT SYSTEM
IBM SYSTEM/369 TIME SHARING SYSTEM TEST AND MAINTENANCE
USER'S GUIDE - PROGRAM NUMBER 369G-CL-627
IBM SYSTEM/36B TIME SHARING SYSTEM
TIME SHARING SUPPORT SYSTEM - PROGRAM LOGIC MANUAL
PROGRAM NUMBER 369G-CL- 627
IBM SYSTEM/369 TIME SHARING SYSTEM:
ON-LINE TEST CONTROL SYSTEM
PROGRAM LOGIC MANUAL PROGRAM NUMBER 369G-CL-627

IBM SYSTEM/369 TIME-SHARING SYSTEM PLANNING FOR REMOTE
JOB ENTRY
IBM SYSTEM/369 TIME SHARI NG SYSTEM R~,MOTE ,OB ENTRY

22

ORDER

NUMBER

GC28-2017
GC28-2033
GC28-2037
GX28-6400

TITLE

IBM SYSTEH/36" TIME-SHARING SYSTEM TERMINAL USER'S GUIDE
IB!"! SYSTEM/36l3 TIME-SHARING SYSTEM OPERATOR' 5 GUIDE

IBM SYSTEM/360 TIME SHARING SYSTEM SYSTEM MESSAGE
TSS/360 QUICK GUIDE FOR USERS
PROGRAM NUMBER 36aG-CL-621

GC28-6810

IBM SYSTEM/360 MODEL 44 PROGRAMMING SYSTEMS CONCEPTS AND
FACILITIES - SYSTEMS REFERENCE MANU AL

GC28-6811

IBM SYSTEM/360 MODEL 44 PROGRAMMING SYSTEM ASSEMBLER
LANGU AGE, PROGRAM NUMBER 36 0F-AS- 61.
IBM SYSTEH/360 MODEL 44 PROGRAMMING SYSTEM ASSEllBLER
PROGRAM LOGIC MANUAL - PROGRAM NUMBER 360F-AS-616

GY28-6811

GC28-6515

IBH SYSTEM/360 FORTRAN IV LANGUAGE

GC28-6596

IBM SYSTEM/360 FORTRAN IV LIBRARY SUBPROGRAMS

SYSTEMS REFERENCE LIBRARY
SYSTEMS REFERENCE LIBRARY

MANUAL.
MANUAL,

PROGRAI1

NUMBER 36l3N-LM-~8"

PROGfl.Aii nUMBERS

360F-LM-619, 360N-LM-480
GC28-6813
GC28-6819

GY28-6815

IBM SYSTEH/36l3 MODEL 41.1 PROGRAt1.MING SYSTEM
GUIDE TO SYSTEM USE FOR FORTRAN PROGRAMMERS
IBM SYSTEM/36l3 FOBTRAN IV LANGUAGE HANDBOOK FOR CONVERSION
FROH IBM 1"9"/7"94 FORTRAN IV

PROGRAM NUMBER H90-PR-130
IBM SYSTEM/360 MODEL 44 PROGRAMMING SYSTEM FORTRAN IV
COMPILER PROGRAM NUMBER 360F-FO-61a
PROGRAM LOGIC MANUAL - COMPILER PHOGRAH NUMBER 360F-FO-618

GY28-6813

IBM SYSTEM/360 MODEL 44 PROGRAMMING SYSTEM LINKAGE EDITOR
PROGRAM LOGIC MANUAL -

PROGRAM

NUMBER

36I3F-ED-615

GY28-68H

IBM SYSTEM/360 MODEL 44 PROGRAMMING SYSTEM UTILITIES AND
STAND ALONE PROGRAMS PROGRAM LOGIC MANUAL - PROGRAM NUMBERS
360F-UT-606 36H-UT-607 360F-UT-608 360F-UT-609 360F-UT-610
360F-UT-611
360F-UT-612
360F-UT-617 360F-UT-620

GC28-6812

IBM SYSTEl1/36l3 MODEL 44

GC28-6814

IBM SYSTEM/36eJ MODEL 44 PROGRAMMING SYSTEM SYSTEMS
PROGRAMMER'S GUIDE
IBM SYSTEM/360 MODEL 44 PROGRAMMING SYSTEM SUPERVISOR AND
JOB CONTROL PROGRAM LOGIC MANUAL

PROGRAMMING SYSTEM GUIDE TO

SYSTEM USE

GY28-6812

PROGRAM NUMBERS 360F-IO-613 360F-CL-614

GX28-6812

SYSTEM/360 MODEL 44 PROGRAMMING SYSTEM FORMATS FOR MACHINE-CHECK INTERRUPTION DIAGNOSTICS

GC28-6815

SYSTEM/360 MODEL 44 PROGRAMMING SYSTEM OPERATOR' S GUIDE

GC24-5064
GC24-5030

IBH SYSTEM/360 TAPE OPERATING SYSTEM, PROGRAMMING INDEX
IBM SYSTEH/360 DISK AND TAPE OPERATING SYSTEMS
CONCEPTS AND FACILITIES

GC24-H14

IBM SYSTEM/360 DISK AND TAPE OPERATING SYSTEM
ASSEMBLER LANGUAGE
IBM SYSTEM/360 DISK AND TAPE OPERATING SYSTEMS ASSEMBLER
PROGRAM NUMBER 360M/N-AS-465

IBM SYSTEM/360 DISK AND TAPE OPERATING SYSTEMS
COBOL LANGUAGE SPECIFICATIONS COBOL DOS PROGRAM NUMBER

360N-CB-452 COBOL TOS PROGRAM NUMBER 360M-CB-402
GC24-5025

IBH SYSTEM/36l3 DISK AND TAPE OPERATING SYTE!"!S COBOL
PROGRA!"!MER' 5 GUIDE

GY24-5025

IBM SYSTEM/360 DISK AND TAPE OPERATING SYSTEMS COBOL D
360M-CB-402 VERSION 2
36!itN-CB-~52 VERSION 2

PROGRAM NUMBERS 360N-CB-452 360M-CB-402

23

(D)

ORDER
NUMBER
l~

TIlLE

[!ll!I!!!l!
GC24-5938

GC28-6629
GY24-5932

GC26-3578
GY26-3791

GC24-9985
GC28-8292
GX28-1749
GY33-9918
GY33-9911

GY33-9912

GY33-9813

GC24-3439
GC24-5935
GC24-5B7B

GY24-5B18

GC24-3465

GC24-5842
GY24-5919
GY24-5945

GC24-3438
GC24-3439

GY24-5916

lY.

~I§U,!!

IBH SYSTEH/369 DISK AND TAPE OPERATING SYSTEMS BASIC
PORTRAN IV PROGRUHERS GUIDE
PROGRAM NUMBERS 368N-PO-451 AND 36BM-FO-499
IBM SYSTEft/369 BASIC PORTRAN IV LANGUAGE
IBH SYSTEM/36B DISK AND UPE OPERATING SYSTEMS FORTUN IV
PROGRAH NUMBER 36BM-PO-489 PROGRAM NUMBER 36BN-FO-451

IBM SYSTEM/36B DISK AND TAPE OPERATING SYSTEMS
REPORT PROGRAM GENERATOR SPECIFICATIONS
IBM SYSTEM/369 DISK AND TAPE OPERATING SYSTEM REPORT
PROGRAM GENERATOR PROGRAM NUMBERS 36BN-RG-46B (DISK)
36S!-RG-4B8 (TAPE)

DOS AND TOS PL/I (D) COMPILER PROGRAMMER'S GUIDE
PLII - PROGRAMMER'S GUIDE
TNL TO IBH SYSTEM/36B DISK AND TAPE OPERATING SYSTEMS
PL/I SUBSET REFERENCE MANUAL
IBM SYSTEM/36B DOS/TOS REFERENCE CARD PL/I
IBM SYSTEM/368 DISK AND TAPE OPERATING SYSTEMS, PL/I SUBSET
LANGUAGE, PBOGRUI LOGIC IUNUAL, VOLUlIE 1 OF J
PROGRAM NUMBERS:
369N-PL-464 (DOS) 368M-PL-418 (TOS)
IBM SYSTEM/36B DISK AND TAPE OPERATING SYSTEMS, PL/I SUBSET
LANGUAGE, VOLUME 2 OP 3 PROGRAM NUMBERS: 368N-PL-464 (DOS)
368M-PL-41B (TOS)
PROGRAM LOGIC MANUAL
IBH SYSTEM/36B DISK AND TAPE OPERA1'ING SYSTEMS, PL/I SUBSET
LANGU AGE, VOLUME 3 OP 3 PROGRAM LOGIC HANUAL
PROGRAM NUMBERS:
368N-PL-464 (DOS) 368N-PL-41B (TOS)
IBM SYSTEM/369 DISK AND TAPE OPERATING SYSTEMS PL/I
SUBSET LIBRARY ROUTINES - PROGRAM LOGIC MANUAL
PROGRAM NUMBERS 368N-PL-464 (DOS), 368M-PL-419 (TOS)

IBM SYSTEM/369, TAPE OPERATING SYSTEM, DATA MANAGEMENT
CONCEPTS
IBM SYSTEH/36B, TAPE OPERATING SYSTEM, SUPERVISOR AND
INPUT/OUTPUT MACROS
IBM SYSTEH/369 BASIC PROGRAMMING SUPPORT,
BASIC OPERATING SYSTEM, TAPE OPERATING SYSTEM,
DISK OPERATING SYSTEM, TAPE LABELS
SYSTEMS REFERENCE LIBRARY MANUAL
IBM SYSTEM/369, TAPE OPERATING SYSTEM, LOGICAL IOCS,
PROGRAM NUMBER 369H-IO-494, VERSION 2.1

IBM SYSTEM/369 DISK AND TAPE OPERATING SYSTEMS
UTILITY PROGRAMS SPECIFICATIONS
PROGRAM NUMBERS 369N-UT-461, 462, 463
DOS AND TOS UTILITY MACROS - SYSTEMS REFERENCE LIBRARY
MANUAL - PROGRAM NUMBERS 369M-U1'-411 AND 369N-UT-471
IBM SYSTEH/369 TAPE OPERATING SYSTEH UTILITY PROGRAHS
PROGRAM NOMBER 369M-UT-483
DOS AND TOS UTILITIES MACROS - PROGRAM LOGIC HANUU
PROGRAM NOMBERS 36BM-OT-411, 368H-UT-471

IBM SYSTEM/36B DISK AND TAPE OPERATING SYSTEMS TAPE
SORT/MERGE PROGRU PROGRAM NUMBERS 369M-SM-4B9
3UI-SM-4BB
IBM 1491/1469 TIMING PROGRAM FOR IBH SYSTEM/369 DISK AND
TAPE OPERATING SYSTEMS TAPE/SORT MERGE PROGRAM
PROGRlM NOMBER 14Bl-LM-BIB (2491-2494)
PROGRAM NOHBER 14Bl-LM-912 (2415)
IBM SYSTEM/36B BASIC OPERATING SYSTEM SORT/MERGE (16K TAPE)
PROGRAM NOHDER 369B-SM-499

Planning,

GC24-5B15
GC24-5929

GC24-5934
GY24-5822

GC24-3441
GC24-5866
GY24-5926
GY24-5956

Q~n~X:.Atl2!!L

Installation,

~~[

IBM SYSTEM/369 TAPE OPERATING SYSrEM, SYSTEM GENERATION AND
MAI NT EN ANCE
IBM SYSTEM/368, TAPE OPERATING SYSTEK, PERFORMANCE ESTIMATES

IBM SYSTEM/369 TAPE OPERATING SYSTEM, SYSTEM CONTROL AND
SYSTEH SERVICE PROGRUS
IBM SYSTEM/368, TAPE OPERATING SYSTEM, SYSTEM CONTROL,
PROGRAM NOMBER 369M-CL-495, VERSION 2

IBM SYSTEM/369 TAPE OPERATING SYSrEM AUTOTEST SPECIFICATIONS
PROGRAH ROMBER 369M-PT-497
IBM SYSTEM/36B, DISK AND TAPE OPERATING SYSTEM, ON-LINE TEST
EXECOTIVE PROGRAM, SPECIPICArlONS AND OPERATING GUIDE,
PROGRAM NOMBER POR DOS 369N-DN-481 TOS 368M-DN-418
IBM SYSTEM/36B TAPE OPERATING SYSTEM AUTOTEST
PROGRAM NOMBER 369M-PT- 497
IBM SYSTEM/369 TAPE OPERATING SYSTEM
ON-LINE TEST EXECUTIVE PROGRAM - PROGRAH NOHBER 3698-DN-418

24

CRDER
NU8BER

GC24-S921

TITLE

IBK SYSTEK/369, TAPE OPERATING SISTEH, CPERATING GUIDE

IBK SYSTEK/369 BASIC OPERATING SYSTU, HASTER INDEX

GC24-3361

GC24-3364
GY24-S999

GC24-3387
GY24-SB9S

IBK SYSTEM/36B BASIC CPERATING SYSTEK ASSEMBLER WITH
INPUT/OUTPUT HACRCS SPECIFICATICNS
PRCGalH NUHBER 369B-AS-399
IBM SYSTEM/36j1' BASIC PROGRAMMING SUPPo.RT BASIC
o.PERATING SYSTEM MACRO. DEFINITIo.N LANGUAGE
IBH SYSTER/369 BASIC CPERATING SYSTU DISK ASSEHBLER
PRCGRAM NURBER 369B-AS-399

IBM SISTER/36B BASIC OPERATING SYSTEH
REPORT PRCGRA! GENERATCR SPEClfICATICNS
PRCGRAM DUKBER 36SB-RG-397
IBH SYSTEK/369 BASIC OPERATING SYSTEH REPORT PROGRAB
GENERATOR (8K DISK) PROGRAH NUHBER 369B-RG-3B7

IBH SYSTBK/36B BASIC PRCGRAMHING SUPPCRT,
BASIC OPERATlDG SYSTEK, TAPE CPERATING SYSTEM,
DISK CPERATING SYSTEH, TAPE LABELS
SYSTEHS REFERENCE LIBRARY HANUAL
IBM SYSTEH/36S BASIC OPERATING SYSTEH LCGICAL ICCS
PRCGRAH NUHBER 36BB-IC-393 (SECTIONS 1 AND 2)
PRCGRAH NURBER 369B-IC-394 (SECTICN 3)
PRCGRAM NUHBER 369B-IC-39S (SECTION 4)

IBK SYSTEK/369 BASIC CPERATING SYSTEK UTILITY PRCGRAMS
SPECIFICATICNS
PRCGRAM NURBERS 369B-UT-399, 369B-UT-391

GC24-3321
GC24-3377
GY24-S9B1

GC24-3372
GC26-3627
GY24-S992

IBH SYSTEK/369 BASIC CPERATING SYSTEM SCRT/MERGE PRQGBAH
SPECIFICATICNS
PRCGRAM NU8BER 369B-S8-39B
IBM 1491/1469 TIMING PROGRAH FCR IBH BASIC CPERATING
SYSTEH/368. SCRT/BERGE PROGRAS PROGRAH 1401-LH-879
IBS BASIC OPERATING SYSTEH/369 (8K DISK) SCRT/HERGE
PRCGRAR NOBBER 368B-SS-388

IBH SYSTEH/36B BASIC CPERA1'ING SiSTEK PROGRAKBER'S GUIDE
IBK SYSTEK/3U BASIC OPERATING SY STEK
1 no PRCCESS COBKUNICATIOH SUPERVISCR OPERATING GUIDE
PRCGRAK HUMBER 368B-SY-B32
IBH BASIC CPERATING SYS!BK/368 SYSTEK CCNTROL (8K DISK)
PROGRAH !lUBBER 368B-CL-392
PROGRAK LOGIC BANUAL

II lUll<
GC24-337B

IBB SYSTEK/36B BASIC OPERATING SYSTEB SPECIFICArIONS
AOTCTEST (BK DISK)
PRCGRAft NUUER 368B-PT-396

GYJa-2996

IBH SYSTER/368 BASIC CPERATING SYSTEK, BASIC PRCGRURING
SUPPORT REMCTE JOB ENTRY VCRK STATION PRCGRAM
PROGRAH NUSBERS 369B-CQ-311-(BCS), 369P-CQ-218- (BPS)
PROGRAM LOGIC MANUAL

GC24-34SB

IBH SYSTEH/3U BASIC OPEBlTIHG SYSTES OPERATING GUIDE
SYSTEHS REFERENCE LIBRABY
IBft SYSTER/368 BASIC CPERATING SYSTEH OPERATCR ftESSAGES
SYSTEBS REFERENCE LIBRARY

GC24-SB24

GC2Q-SB67

IB8 SYSTER/36B BASIC PROGRAJl8IHG SUPPORT HASTER IHDEX

GC2Q-33S5

IBB SYSTEH/36B BASIC PROGBAftBIRG SUPPOB'r ASSEftBLER WITII
IRPUT/CUTPUT HACROS (TAPE) SPECIFICATICNS
SYSTEHS REFEBENCE LIBRARY - PRUGR18 NUBBER 369P-AS-021
IBH SYSTEB/369 BASIC PROGRABRING SUPPORT
BASIC OPERATING SYSTBR BACRC DEFIHITIOR LANGUAGE
IBR SISTEB/368 BASIC PROGRAH8IRG SUPPORT (CABO) BASIC
ASSEftBLER AND BASIC UULIn PRCGRAHS SI1ECIFICATIOHS lRD
CPERATING PRCCEDURES - SYSTERS REFERENCE LIBRARY
PRCGRAR RUBBERS: 368P-AS-821, 368P-UT-917, 368P-UT-81B.
368P-UT-919. 36BP-UT-928

GC24-3364
GC2B-6S83

25

ORDER
NOMBER
GY24-5012
oOGY24-5014

GC21-Sa00
GC21-9040
GC28-6S83
GC28-6629
GY21-0U1

GC24-3374
GC24-3418

GY24-5037

GC24-3398

GC24-3437

GC24-S070

GY 24-5007

GC21-S001

GC24-3363
GC24"3392
GC24-3396

GC24-S026
GC24-S027
GC24-S069

GX20-17S9

GY21-BaS4
GY24-5013
GY24-5015
GY24-S096

GC24-3345

GC24-3413

GC24-5361

TITLE
IBM SYSTEM/360 BASIC PROGRAMMING SUPPORT TAPE ASSEMBLER
PROGRAM NUMBER 360P-AS-091
IBM SYSTEM/360 BASIC PROGRAMMING SUPPORT
BASIC ASSEMBLER, PROGRAM LOGIC MANU AL
PROGRAM NUMBER 360P-AS-021

IBM SYSTEM/360 BASIC PROGRAMMING SUPPORT FORTRAN IV (CARD)
PROGRAMMER'S GUIDE PROGRAH NUHBER 360P-FO-205
IBH SYSTEH/360 BASIC PROGRAMMING SUPPORT SPECIFICATIONS
FORTRAN IV (16K CARD)
IBH SYSTEM/360 BASIC PROGRAMMING SUPPORT FORTRAN IV (TAPE)
PROGRAHMER'S GUIDE PROGRAM NUHBER 360P-PO-031
IBM SYSTEM/360 BASIC PORTRAN IV LANGUAGE
IBM SYSTEM/360 BASIC PROGRAMMING SUPPORT
FORTRAN IV (16K CARD) PROGRAM LOGIC MANOAL
PROGRAM NOMBER 360P-PO-205

IBM SYSTEM/360 BASIC PROGRAMMING SUPPORT SPECIFICATIONS
REPORT PROGRAM GENERATOR (CARD)
IBM SYSTEH/36a BASIC PROGRAMMING SUPPORT REPORT PROGRAM
GENERATOR (TAPE) SPECIFICATIONS
PROGRAM NUMBER 360p-RG-201
IBM SYSTEM/360 BASIC PROGRAMMING SUPPORT
REPOBT PROGRAM GENERATOR (CARD) OPERATING GOlDE
SYSTEMS REFERENCE LIBBARY
IBM SYSTEM/360, BASIC PROGRAMMING SUPPORT, REPORT PROGBAM
GENERATOR POR PONCHED CARD EQUIPMENT PROGRAM NUMBER
360P-RG-200

IBM SYSTEM/360 BASIC PROGRAMHING SUPPORT INPUT/OOTPUT 1231
SPECIPICATIONS AND OPERATING GUIDE
PROGRAM NOMBER:
360P-IO-060
IBM SYSTEM/360 BASIC PROGRAHMING SUPPORT INPUT/OUTPUT
1412/1419 SPECIFICATIONS AND OPERATING GUIDE
PROGRAM NOMBER 36SP-IO-058
IBM SYSTEM/36B BASIC PROGRAMMING SUPPORT INPUT/OUTPOT
1418/1q28 SPECIFICATIONS AND OPERATING GU IDE
PROGRAM NOMBER 360P-IO- 059
IBM SYSTEM/369 BASIC PROGRAMMING SUPPORT,
BASIC OPERATING SYSTEM, TAPE OPERATING SYSTEM,
DISK OPERATING SYSTEM, TAPE LABELS
SYSTEMS REFERENCE LIBRARY MANUAL
IBM SYSTEH/363 BASIC PROGRAMMING SUPPORT PAPER DOCUMENT
PROGRAM NUHBERS 360P-IO-0S9, 360P-IO-958

IBH SYSTEM/360 BASIC PROGRAMMING SOPPORT DISTRIBUTION
PROGRAM SPECIPICATIONS AND OPERATING GUIDE
PROGRAM NOMBER 360P-OT-298
IBM SYSTEM/360 BASIC PROGRAMMING SUPPORT DASD OTILITY
PROGRAMS SPECIFICATIONS
IBM SYSTEM/360 BASIC PROGRAMMING SUPPORT DASD UTILITY
PROGRAMS OPERATING GOlDE
IBM SYSTEM/360 BASIC PROGRAMMING SUPPORT UNIVERSAL
CHARACTER SET UTILITY PROGRAM OPERATING GOlDE
PROGRAM NOMBER 360P-UT-348
IBM SYSTEM/36B BASIC PROGRAMMING SUPPORT CARD AND TAPE
OTILITY PROGRAMS SPECIFICATIONS
IBM SYSTEM/363 BASIC PROGRAMMING SOPPORT CARD AND TAPE
OTILITY PROGRABS OPERATING GUIDE
IBM SYSTEM/360 BASIC PROGRAMMING SUPPORT
MODULAR PILE MAINTENANCE PROGRAM SPECIFICATIONS AND
OPERATING GOlDE
PROGRlM NOMBER 360P-OT-219
IBM SYSTEM/360 BASIC PROGRAMMING SOPPORT BASIC UTILIT.IES REFERENCE CARD
PROGRAM NOMBERS 360P-OT-917, 369P-UT-018, 369P-OT-019,
363P-OT-020
IBM SYSTEM/363 BASIC PROGRAMMING SOPPORT DISTRIBOTION
PROGRAM, PROGRAM NUMBER 360P-UT-208
IBM SYSTEM/360 BASIC PROGRAMMING SOPPORT ONlVERSAL
CHARACTER SET OTILITY PROGRAM PROGRAM NUMBER 360P-UT-048
IBM SYSTEM/363 BASIC PROGRAMMING SOPPORT BASIC UTILITIES
PROGRAM LOGIC MAROAL
IBM SYSTEM/363 BASIC PROGRAMMING SOPPORT MODOLAR PILE
MAINTENANCE PROGRAM - PROGRAM NUHBER 360P-OT-219

IBM SYSTEH/360 BASIC PROGRA MMING SOPPORT SORT/MERGE
PROGRAMS SPECIFICATIONS
PROGRAHS:
1 - CHANNEL - 360P-SM-043
2 - CHANNEL - 363P-SM-044
IBM 1401/1460 TIMING PROGRAMS FOR IBM SYSTEM/360 BASIC
PROGRAMMING SUPPORT SORT/MERGE PROGRAMS (8K TAPE)
PROGRAM 1Q01-LM-378, VERSION 2 (2401-2434)
PROGRAM 1401-LM-380, VERSION 1 (2415)
IBM SYSTEM/360 BASIC PROGRAMMING SOPPORT SORT/MERGE PROGRAMS
OPERATING GUIDE PROGRAHS:
1 - CHANNEL - 360P-SM-343
2 - CHANNEL - 360P-SM-044

IBM SYSTEM/363 BASIC PROGRAMMING SOPPORT BASIC TAPE SYSTEM
SYSTEK GENERATION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAM NOMBER 360P-AS-091

26

ORDER
HU15BEB

GC24-335q
GY2q-5010

TITLE

IBM SYSTEM/360 BASIC PROGRAMMING SOPPORT BASIC TAPE SYSTEft
PROGRAMMER'S GUIDE
PROGRAM NOMBER 360P-AS-091
IBM SYSTEM/360 BASIC PROGRUKING SUPPORT
BASIC TAPE SYSTEM SYSTEM CONTROL AND IOCS
PROGRAM NUMBER 360P-AS-991

GC2q-3343

IBM SYSTEM/360 BASIC PROGRA HMING SUPPORT AUTOTEST
SPECIFICATIONS (8K TAPE)
PROGRAM NOMBER 36~P-PT-0q5
IBM SYSTEM/360 BASIC PROGRAMMING SOPPORT
AUTOTEST OPERATING GUIDE
PROGRAM NUMBER 360P-PT- Oq5

GY30-2006

IBM SYSTEH/360 BASIC OPEBATlNG SYSTEK, BASIC PROGRAMMING
SOPPORT REMOTE JOB ENTRY WORK STATION PROGRAM
PROGRAM NOMBERS 360B-CQ-311- (B05) , 360P-CQ-218- (BPS)
PROGRAM LOGIC MAHUAL

GC2q-3391

IBM SYSTEM/360 BASIC PROGRAMMING SUPPORT BASIC TAPE SYSnM
OPEUTIUG GOlDE PROGRAM NUMBER 360P-AS-091 RPG
PROGRAM NUMBER 360P-RG-201

GB21-033q

SB21-0335

DOS TO OS ASSEMBLER LAHAUGE MACRO CONVERSION
FIELD DEVELOPED PROGRU AV AlLABILITY NOTICE
PROGRAM NUMBER 5198-AFL
DOS TO OS ASSEMBLER LANGUAGE MACRO CONVERSION
PIELD DEV ELOPED PROGBAM
PROGRAM DESCRIPTION/OPERATIONS MANU AL
PROGRAM NUMBER 5198-AFL

LB21-0336

DOS TO 05 ASSEMBLER LANGU AGE MACRO CONY ERSION -

LCB6-3772
GC26-3135
GC26-31Q3
GC26-3158
SC26-3159
SC26-3168
SC26-3110
GC26-3111
LY26-3160

GB20-0683
SH20-068Q
GH2B-B689
LYB9-B41B
GH20-B6S3
SH20-0685
S82B-B686
GR20-0689
LYBO-0Q11
G820-0858
5828-0890
GB28-0906
GH28-Q841
LYB8-0625
LY20-8618
G1I20-0858
GH20-0986

FIELD

DEVELOPED PROGRAM SYSTEMS GUIDE - PROGRAM NUMBER 519B-AFL
IBM SYSTEM/368 OS ASSEMBLER H - PROGRAK NUMBER 513Q-AS1
IBM SYSTM/368 OPERATING SYSTEM ASSEMBLER H
DESIGN OBJECTIVES SHEET, PROGRAM NUMBER 5134-AS1
IBM SYSTEM/36B OPERATING SYSTEM ASSEMBLER H
SPECIFICATION SHEBT, PROGRAM NUHBER 513Q-AS1
IBM SYSTEM/368 OPERATING SYSTEM ASSEMBLER (H)
PROGRAM PRODOCT GENERAL INFORMATION
PROGRAM NOHBER 5134-AS1
IBM SYSTEM/360 OPERATING SYSTEM ASSEMBLER H
PROGRAMMER'S GOlDE
PROGRAM NOMBER 5734-AS1
IBM SYSTEM/36B OPEBATING SYSTEM
ASSEMBLER H SYSTEM INFORMATION (PROGRAM NUMBER 5734-AS1)
IBM SYSTEM/369 OPERATING SYSTEM ASSEMBLER H MESSAGES
PROGRAM NUMBER 5134-AS1
IBK SYSTEM/36B OPERATING SYSTER ASSEMBLER
LANGUAGE SPECIPICATIONS
PROGRAM NOMBER 5134-AS1
IBM SYSTEH/36B OPERATIHG SYSTEM ASSEHBLER H PROGRAM LOGIC
RANUAL - PROGRAH NOHBER 513Q-AS1

APL/360 OSER'S MANUAL
PROGRAM NOMBERS 5134-XH1 AND 5136-XM1
APL/36B OS OPERATIONS AND INSTALLATION RANOAL
PROGRAM HOMBER 513Q-XH1
APL/36B PRIMER - PROGRAH NUMBERS 5134-XK1 AND 5136-XM1
APL/368-0S ASSEMBLER LISTINGS'
PROGRAM NUMBER 5134-XH1, FEATURE CODE 8381
APL/369 USER'S MANUAL
PROGRAM NURBERS 5134-XH1 AND 5136-X81
APL/368 OPERATIONS RANUAL
PROGRAM HOMBER 5136-XM1
APL/36B-DOS SYSTEH GENERATION MANUAL
PROGRAM HOMBEH 5136-XM1
APL/36B PRIMER - PROGRAH NOMBERS 513Q-XM1 AND 5136-XM1
APL/36B-DOS ASSEMBLER LISTINGS
PROGRAM NOMBER 5136-XM1
APL/360 - OS (5134-XH6) AND APL/36B - DOS (5136-XM6)
APL/360 - OS OPERATIONS AND INSTALLATION MANUAL,
PROGRAM NOMBER 513Q-XH6
APL/368-0S (513Q-XM6), APL/36B-DOS (5136-XH6),
USER'S MANOAL
APL/36B-OS PROGRAR PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
PROGRAM HOMBER 5134-XM6
APL/36a-os ASSEMBLY LISTINGS, PROGRA:.i NUMBER 5134-XM6,
FEATORE CODE 8892, FE SERVICE NUMBER 288156
APL/368-0S AND AP,L/368-DOS SYSTEM MANUAL
FEATORE NUMBERS 8091, 883Q
PROGRAM NUMBERS 513Q-XH6, 5136-IM6
APL/368 - OS (5134-XM6) AND APL/36a •• DOS (5136-U6)
APL/368-0S (5734-XM6), APL/360-DOS (5136-XM6),
USER' 5 MARUAL

S820-0938
GH28-Q8Q6
LYB8-B626

APL/360 - DOS OPERATIONS AND INSTALLATION MANUAL,
PROGRAM NUMBER 5136-Xft6
APL/36B-DOS PROGRAM PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
PROGRAM HUMBER 5136-XM6
APL/360 - DOS ASSEMBLY LISTINGS,
PROGRAM· NOMBER 5136-XM6, FEATURE CODE 8865,
FE SERVICE NUMBER 289151

21

ORDER
NUMBER

TITLE

LY20-0678

APL/360-0S AND APL/360-DOS SYSTE~1 MANUAL
FEATURE NUMBERS 8091, 8.0'34
PROGRAM NUMBERS 5734-XM6, 5736-XM6

G821-0387

HONEYlJELL 2.0.0 SERIES COBOL TO Iml ANS COBOL CONVERSION AIDS
FOP AVAILABILITY NOTICE - PROGRAM NUMBER 5798-AGC
UNIVAC 939.0 COBOL TO IBM ANS COBOL CONVERSION AID
FDP AVAILABILITY NOTICE - PROGRAM NUMBER 5798-AHP
IBM SYSTEM/360 DISK OPERATING SYSTEM
AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARD SUBSET COBOL COMPILER AND
LIBRARY - PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-CB1
IBM SYSTEM/360 DISK OPERATING SYSrEM:
AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARD SUBSET COBOL COMPILER
GENERAL INFORMATION
IBM SYSTEM/360 OPERATING SYSTEM FULL
AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARD (ANS) COBOL COMPILER
VERSION 3 DESIGN OBJECTIVES SHEET, PROGRAM NUMBER 5734-CB1
IBM SYSTEM/36fJ OPERATING SYSTEM AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARD
FULL COBOL COMPILER AND LIBRARY VERSION 3
GENERAL INFORMATION
PROGRAM NUMBER 5734-CB1
OS FULL AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARD COBOL COMPILER VERSION 4
PROGRAM PRODUCT DESIGN OBJECTIVES - PROGRAM NuriBER 5734-CB2
IBM SYSTEM/360 DISK OPERATING SYSTEM
AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARD FULL COBOL COMPILER VERSION
PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-CB2
IBM SYSTEM/363 DISK OPERATING SYSTEM
AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARD FULL COBOL COMPILER VERSION
AND ASSOCIATED COBOL OBJECT-rIME SUBROUTINE LIBRARY
GENERAL INFORMATION
IBM SYSTEM/363 DISK OPERATING SYSl'EM
AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARD FULL COBOL OBJECT-TIME
SUBROUTINE LIBRARY - PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-LM2
OS FULL AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARD COBOL COMPILER AND
"LIBRARY, VERSION 4, PLANNING GUIDE - PROGRAM
PRODUCT 5734-CB2
IBM SYSTEM/363 OPERATING SYSTEM
FULL AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARD COBOL COMPILER AND LIBRARY,
VERSION 3. INSTALLATION REFERENCE MANUAL,
PROGRAM NUMBER 5734-CB1
IBI1 SYSTEM/360 OS FULL AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARD COBOL
COMPILER AND LIBRARY, VERSION 3, PROGRAM PRODUCT
SPECIFICATIONS (PPS) - PROGRAM NUMBER 5734-CB1
IDM SYSTEM/368 OPERATING SYSTEM FULL AMERICAN NATIONAL
STANDARD COBOL COMPILER AND LIBRARY, VERSION 3, PROGRAMMER'S
GUIDE - PROGRAM N[JMBER 5734-CB1
IBM SYSTEM/36fJ DISK OPERATING SYSTEM S[JBSET AMERICAN
NATIONAL STANDARD COBOL COMPILER AND LIBRARY
INSTALLATION REFERENCE MATERIAL - PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-CB1
IBM SYSTEH/363 DISK OPERATING SYSTEM SUBSET AMERICAN
NATIONAL STANDARD COBOL COMPILER AND LIBRARY
PROGRAMMER'S GUIDE - PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-CB1
IBti SYSTEM/36fJ OPERATING SYSTEM FULL AMERICAN NATIONAL
STANDARD COBOL, VERSION 3, MESSAGES
PROGRAM NUMBER 5734-CB1
.
IDM SYSTEH/3612l DISK OPERATING SYSTEM: FULL AHERICAN
NATIONAL STANDARD C080L COMPILER AND LIBRARY, VERSION
SYSTEM REFERENCE LIBRARY PROGRAMMER's GUIDE
PROGRAM NUMBERS 5736-C82, 5736-L82
IBM SYSTEM/360' DISK OPERATING SYSTEM: FULL AMERICAN NATIONAL
STANDARD COBOL COMPILER AND LIBRARY, VERSION 3
SYSTEM REFERENCE LIBBARY INSTALLATION REFERENCE MATERIAL
PROGRAM NUMBERS 5736-CB2. 5736-LM2
IBM SYSTEM/360 DISK OPERATING SYSTEM FULL AMERICAN NATIONAL
STANDARD COBOL COMPILER VERSION 3
SYSTEM REFERENCE LIBRARY PROGRAM" PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
PROGRAM N[]MBER S736-CB2
IBM SYSTEH/360 DISK OPERATING SYSTEM: FULL AMERICAN NATIONAL
STANDARD COBOL OBJECT TIME SUBROUTINE LIBRARY
PROGRAM PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS - PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-LM2
IBM SYSTEM/360 DISK OPERATING SYSTEM: FULL AMERICAN NATIONAL
STANDARD COBOL VERSION 3 MESS"AGES - SYSTEM REFERENCE LIBRARY
MANUAL - PROGRAM NUMBERS 5736-CB2, 5736-LM2
IBM SYSTEM/360 DISK OPERATING SYSTEM SUBSET AMERICAN
NATIONAL STANDARD COBOL MESSAGES - PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-CB1
IBM SYSTEM/36.0' DISK OPERATING SYSTEM SUBSET AMERICAN
NATIONAL STANDARD COBOL COMPILER AND LIBARY (PROGRAM
PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS) PROGRAM NUKBER 5736-CB1
IBM DISK OPERATING SYSTEM SUBSET AMERICAN NATIONAL
STANDARD COBOL COMPILER AND LIBRARY PROGRAK PRODUCT
DESIGN OBJECTIVE - PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-CB1
IBM as COBOL INTERACTIVE DEBUG PROGRAM
PRODUCT DESIGN OGJECTIVE - PROGRAM NUMBER 5134-CB4
CONTROL PROGRAH-67 ONLINE COBOL SYMBOLIC DEBUG
PROGRAM NUMBER 5799-AAE - APPLICATION DESCRIPTION MANUAL
CONTROL PROGRAM - 67 ONLINE COBOL SYMBOLIC DEBUG
USER'S GUIDE - PROGRAM NUMBER 5799-AAE
CONTROL PROGRAM - 67 ONLINE COBOL SYMBOLIC DEBUG
INSTALLATION MANUAL, PROGRAM NUMBER 5799-A1E
CONTROL PROGRAM - 67 (NLINE COBOL SYMBOLIC DEBUG
OPERATING SYSTEH/360 IN A VIRTUAL MACHINE,
PROGRAM NUMBER 5799-AAE
ONLINE COBOL SYMBOLIC DEBUG FOR IBK CP-67 SYSTEMS (RPm
PROGRAM NUMBER 5799-AAE - REFERENCE PRPQ AA0476
PROGRAM PRODUCT SPECIFICATION SHEET
CONTROL PROGRAM-67 ONLINE COBOL SYMBOLIC DEBUG
SYSTEM MANUAL
PROGRAM NUMBER 5799-AEE, FEATURE NUMBER 8306
SYSTEM/360 OPERATING SYSTEM AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARD
(ANS) COBOL VERSION 3 LISTINGS - PROGRAM NUMBER 5734-CB1
SYSTEM/360 DISK OPERATING SYSTEM ANS COBOL COMPILER
VERSION "3 PROGRAM LISTI NG MICROFICHE
PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-CB2
SYSTEM/36.0 DISK OPERATING SYSTEM ANS COBO"!. LIBRARY VERSION
3 PROGRAM PRODUCT LISTING MICROFICHE
PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-L112
SYSTEH/360 OPERATING SYSTEM FULL ANS COBOL COMPILER
VERSION 3 LISTINGS - PROGRAM NUMBER 5734-CB1

G821-0490
GC28-6401

GC28-6492

GC28-6406

GC28-6407

"GC28-6408
GC28-6420

GC28-6421

GC28-6428

**GC28-6431

sc28-6432

GC28-6436

SC28-6437

SC28-6438

SC28-6439

SC28-6440

SC28-6441

SC28-6442

GC28-6443

GC28-6444

SC28-6445

SC28-6446
GC28-6450

GC28-6461

"GC28-6463
GH20-0n0
SH20-0921
SH20-0922

GH20-4101

LY20-0635

LYC7-5023
LYC7-5030

LYC7-5031

LYC7-5038

28

ORDER
NUMBER
LYC7-5341
LY28-6437

LY28-6412

LY28-6413

LY28-6414

GH23-3896
SH23-3897

LY23-0638

SC28-6868

LY28-6415

GC28-6832
GC28-6844
GC28-6846

GC28-6 847
GC29-6948

SC18-6851

SC28-6852

**SC28-6B53
GC28-6854
SC28-6858
SC28-6859

SC28-6861

GC28-6862

GC29-6963
SC28-6864

GC28-6865

GC28-6872

**GC28-6882
**5C28-6883
GC28-8193

GC28-8194

LYc7-5312

LYc7-5319
LYC7-532B
L'!C7-50'21

LYC7-5022
LYC7-5B36
LYC7-5342

**LYC7-5041l
LY28-6438
LY29-6439

TITLE

SYSTEM/3M' DISK OPERATING SYSTEM SUBSET ANS COBOL COMPILER
AND LIBRABY - MICROFICHE - PROGRAM PRODUCT 5736-cs1
IBM SYSTEM/363 OPERATING SYSTEM
FULL AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARD COBOL COMPILER AND LIBRARY,
VERSION 3 PROGRAM LOGIC MANUAL, PROGRAM NUMBER 5734-C81
IBM SYSTEM/360 DISK OPERATING SYSTEM FULL AMERICAN NATIONAL

STANDARD COBOL COMPILER, VERSION 3, PROGRAM. LOGIC MANUAL
PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-CB2
IBM SYSTEH/3613 DISK OPERATING SYSTEM FULL AMERICAN NATIONAL
STANDARD COBOL SUBROUTINE LIBRARY, VERSION 3
PROGRAM LOGIC MANUAL - PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-L82
IBM SYSTEM/3613 DISK OPERATING SYSTEM SUBSET AMERICAN
NATIONAL STANDARD COBOL COMPILER AnD LIBRARY PROGRAM LOGIC
MANUAL - PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-CBI

FORTRAN CONVERSION AID PROGRAM, GENERAL INFORMATION MANUAL
PROGRAM NUMBER 5799-AAJ, REFERENCE NUMBER FA1287
FORTRAN CONVERSION AID PROGRAM,
PROGRAM DESCRIPTION AND OPERATIONS MANUAL,
PROGRAM NU~BER 5799-AAJ, REFERENCE NU~BER FA1287
FORTRAN CONVERSION AID PROGRAM (SYSTEM MANUAL,
PROGRAM NUMBER 5199-AAJ, FEATURE CODE 8331,
REFERENCE NUMBER FA 1287
IBM SYSTEM/363 OPERATING SYSTEM FORTRAN IV (H EXTENDED
PLUS COMPILER & LIBRARY USER SUPPLEMENT - PROGRAM NUMBER
5799-AAW
IBM SYSTEM/36B OPERATING SYSTEM FORTRAN IV (H EXTENDED PLUSI
COMPILER AND LIBRARY PROGRAM LOGIC SUPPLEMENT
(PROGRAMMING REQUEST FOR PRICE QUOTATIONI
PROGRAM NUMBER 5199-AAW
IBM SYSTEM/36~ OPERATING SYSTEM CODE AND GO FORTRAN
PROGRAM PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS - PROGRAM NUHBER 5734-F01
IBM SYSTEM/36.0 OPERATING SYSTEM FORTRAN IV LIBRARY MOD 1
DESIGN OBJECTIVES - PROGRAM NUMBER 5734-LM1
IBM SYSTEH/36.0 OPERATING SYSTEM
FORTRAN IV LIBRARY MOD 1
DESIGN OBJECTIVES - PROGRAM NUMBER 5734-F03
IBM SYSTEM/36B OPERATING SYSTEM FORTRAN IV LIBRARY (MOD III
PROGRAM NOMBER 5734-LM3
IBM SYSTEM/36fJ OPERATING SYSTEM FORTRAN IV (H EXTENDED)
COMPILER AND FORTRAN IV LIBRARY (HOD II) GENERAL INFORMATION
PROGRAM NUMBERS 5734-F03, 5734-L83
IBM SYSTEM/36B DISK OPERATING SYSTEM - FORTRAN IV LIBRARY
ASCII SUPPORT:
PROGRAMMER'S GUIDE SUPPLEMENT
PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-LMI
IBM SYSTEM/360 OPERATING SYSTEM: FORTRAN IV (H EXTENDEDI
COMPILER, PROGRAHMER'S GUIDE - PROGRAM NUMBER 5734-F03
5734-LM3
IBM SYSTEM/363 OPERATING SYSTEM CODE AND GO FORTRAN IV (GIl
PROGRAMMER'S GUIDE, PROGRAM NUMBERS 5734-F01, 5734-F02,
5734-LM I
IBM SYSTEM/36B OPERATING SYSTEM FORTRAN IV (GIl PROCESSOR
PROGRAM PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS, PROGiiAH NUHIlER 5734-P02
IBM SYSTEM/36B FORTRAN IV LIDBABY (MODEL II
INSTALLATION REFERENCE MATERIAL, PROGRAM NUMBER 5734-LM1
IBM SYSTEM/363 OPERATING SYSTEM CODE AND GO FORTRAN
PROCESSOR INSTALLATION REFERENCE MATERIAL
PROGRAM NUMBER 5134-F01
IBM SYSTEM/363 OPERATING SYSTEM FORTRAN IV (H EXTENDED)
COMPILER AND LIBRARY (MOD II) IRM MODULE I I INSTALLATION
REFERENCE MATERIAL - PROGRAM NUMBERS 5734-P03, 5734-LM3
IBH SYSTEM/36fJ OPERATING SYSTEM: FORTRAN IV (H EXTENDED)
COMPILER PROGRAM PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
PROGRAM NUMBER 5734-F03
IBM SYSTEM/36B: FORTRAN IV LIBRARY (MODEL III
PROGRAM PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS, PROGRAI'l NUMBER 5134-LH3
IBM SYSTEH/36fJ as: FORTRAN IV MATH AND SVC SUBPROGRAM
SUPPLEMENT FOR HODE I and MODEL I I LIBRARIES
PROGRAM NUMBERS 5134-LI11, 5134-LM3
IBM SYSTEH/36fJ OS: FORTRAN IV (H EXTENDED)
COHPILER AND LIBRARY (HODEL I I ) , MESSAGES - SYSTEM REFERENCE
LIBRARY MANUAL, PROGRAM NUMBERS 5734-F03, 5134-L113
SYSTEH/36fJ DISK OPERATING SYSTEM FORTRAN IV LIBRARY,
OPTION 1 - PROGRAM PRODUCT DESIGN OBJECTIVE
PROGRAM NOMBER 5746-LM3
DISK OPERATING SYSTEM FORTRAN IV LIBRARY OPTION 1 - PROGRAM
PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS - PROGRAM NUMBER 5746-LM3
DOS FORTRAN IV LIBRARY OPTION/PROGRAMMERS'S GUIDE
SOPPLEMENT - PROGRAM PRODUCT 5746-LM3
IBM SYSTEM/36B DISK OPERATING SYSTEM PORTRAN IV LIBRARY
ASCII SUPPORT
PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-LMI
IBM SYSTEM/36B DISK OPERATING SYSTEM
FORTRAN IV LIBRARY ASCII SUPPORT
PROGRAM PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS - PROGRAM NUl-lEER 5736-L81
SYSTEM/36tl DISK OPERATING SYSTEM FORTRAN F LIBRARY
PROGRAM PRODUCT LISTING MICROFICHE
ASC I I - PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-L111
SYSTEM/360 OPERATING SYSTEM FORTRAN IV (H EXTENDEDI
SOURCE LISTINGS - PROGRAM NUMBER 573ij-F03
SYSTEM/36B OPERATING SYSTEM FORTRAN IV LIBRARY (MODIII
LISTINGS - PROGRAM NUMBER 5134-LM3
SYSTEM/360 OPERATING SYSTEM FORTRAN IV (G1) COMPILER
PROGRAM PRODUCT LISTING MICROFICHE
PROGRAM NOMBER 5734-F02
SYSTEM/36B OPERATING SYSTEM FORTRAN IV LIBRARY (HOD II
PROGRAM PRODUCT MICROFICHE - PROGRAM NUHBER 5734-tM 1
SYSTEM/360 OPERATING SYSTEM FORTRAN IV CODE AND GO
PROGRAM NUMBER 5734-F01
SYSTEM/363 OPERATING SYSTEM FORTRAN H EXTENDED PLUS
MICROFICHE - PROGRAM NUMBER 5799-AAW
DOS FORTRAN IV LIBRARY OPTION I - MICROFICHE - PROGRAM
NUMBER 5146-LM3
IBM SYSTEM/36fJ OPERATING SYSTEM FORTRAN IV LIBRARY (MODEL I)
PROGRAM LOGIC MANUAL, PROGRAM NUMBER 5734-LM1
IBM SYSTEM/36fJ OPERATING SYSTEM FORTRAN IV
LIBRARY MOD I I PROGRAM LOGIC MANUAL, PROGRAM NUMBER 5734-LM3

29

ORDER
NUMBER
L!28-6846
U28-6856

GC21-5B28
GC21-5B52
SC21-5B56
LYB1-M45B
UC7-1317
**LY21-UI4

GC33-BBBI
GC33-nB3
GC33-UU
SC33-BBBS
SC33-BU6
SC33-UB7
SC33-BBBB
SC33-BlB9
GC33-BBlB
GC33-BBI3
GC33-U16
GC33-BB17
GC33-BBI8
"SC33-BBI9
SC33-U28
SC33-BB21
GC33-BB22
GC33-BB23
GC33-BB24
SC33-B825
SC33-n26
SC33-BB27
GC33-BB3B
SC33-n31
SC33-BB32
SC33-BB34
SI33-6BBI
S133-6BB2
LYC7-25BB
LYC7-25Bl
LYC7-25B2
LYC7-2583
LYC7-25B4
LYC7-25B5
LYC7-2586
U33-6BB7
LY33-68BB
LY33-6BB9

TITLE
IBM SYSrEM/36M OPERATING SYSTEM CODE AND GO FORTRAN
PROCESSOR PROGRAM LOGIC MANUAL
PROGRAM NOMBER 5734-F91
IBM SYSrU/36B OPERATING S!STEM FORTRAN IV (GIl COMPILER PLM
PROGRAM NOMBER 5734-F02

IBn DISK OPERATING SYSTEM RPG I I
PROGRAM PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
PROGRAM NOMBER 5736-RGI
IBM DISK OPERATING S!STEM RPG I I AUTO REPORT FEATURE
GENERAL INFORMATION HANUAL - PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-RG 1
IBM DOS RPG I I AOTO REPORT FEATORE - REFERENCE MANOAL
PROGRAH NOMBER 5736-RGI
DISK OPERA'rING SYSTEM/36B RPG I I PROGRAM LISTING
PROGRAM NOMBER 5736-RGI
IBM DISK OPERATING SYSTEM REPORT PROGRAM GENERATOR I I
AUTO REPORT P EATORE - PROGRAM LISTINGS - PROGRAM NOMBER
5736-RGI
IBM DOS RPG I I LANGUAGE PROGRAM LOGIC MANOAL
PROGRAM NOMBER 5736-RGI

os

PL/I OPTIMIZING COMPILER: GENERAL INFORUTION MANOAL
PROGRAM NUMBER 5734-PLI
OS PL/I CHECKOOT COMPILER: GENERAL INFORMATION
PROGRAM NUMBERS 5734-PL2, 5734-LH4
DOS PL/I OPTIMIZING COMPILER: GENERAL INPORBATION MANOAL
PROGRAM NOMBER 5736-PL 1
DOS PL/I OPTIMIZING COMPILER: LANGUAGE REFERENCE MANOAL
PROGRAM NOMBER 5736-PLI
OS PL/I OPTIMIZING COMPILER - PROGRAMMER'S GOlDE
PROGRAM NOMBERS 5734-PLI, 5734-LM4, 5734-LM5
SYSTBM/368 OPERATING SYSTEM PL/I CHECKOUT COMPILER
PROGRAHftER'S GOlDE - PROGRAM NUMBERS 5734-PL2, 5734-LH5
DISK OPERATING SYSTEM PL/I OPTIMIZING COMPILER:
PROGRAMMER'S GUIDE - PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-PL/l
OS PL/I OPTIMIZING AND CHECKOUT COHPILER
LANGUAGE REFERENCE MANUAL
PROGRAM NOMBERS 5734-PL I, 5734-PL2, 5734-PL3
IBM SYSTEM/36B DISK OPERATING SYSTEM DESIGN OBJECTIVES
PL/I OPTIMIZING COMPILER - PROGRAM NUHBER 5736-PLI
IBM SYSTBM/369 OPERATING SYSTEM PL/I OPTIHIZING COMPILER
DESIGN OBJECTIVES - PROGRAM NUHBER 5734-PLI
DOS PL/I OPTIMIZING COMPILER PROGRAM PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-PLI
DOS PL/I RESIDENT LIBRARY PROGRAM PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-LM4
DOS PL/I TRANSIENT LIBRARY PROGRAM PRODOCT SPECIFICATIONS
PROGRAM NUHBER 5736-LM5
DISK OPERATING SYSTEK/36B PL/I OPTIMIZING COMPILER:
EXECOTION LOGIC PROGRA! NUMBERS 5736-PL1, 5736-LK4,
5736-LH5 DOS PL/I OPTIMIZING COMPILER: SYSTEM INPORMATION MANUAL
PROGRAH NOHDERS 5736-PLI, 5736-LK4, AND 5736-LM5
SYSTEM/36B DISK OPERATING SYSTEM PL/1 OPTIMIZING COMPILER:
MESSAGES MANOAL PROGRAM NUMBERS 5736-LH5, 5736-PLI
SYSTEM/368 OS PL/I OPTIMIZI NG COMPILER
PROGRAM PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS - PROGRU NUMBER 5734-PLI
OS PL/I RESIDENT LIBRARY - PROGRAM PRODOCT SPECIFICATIONS
PROGRAM NOMBER 5734-LM4
OS PL/I TRANSIENT LIBRARY - PROGRAM PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
PROGRAM HUMBER 5734-Lft5
SYSTEM/369 OPERATING SYSTEM PL/I OPTIMIZING COMPILER:
EXECUTION LOGIC MANUAL - PROGRAM NUMBER 57 34-PL 1
SYSTEK/36B OPERATING SYSTEM PL/I OPTIMIZING COMPILER:
SYSrEM INFORMATION - PROGRAM NUMBERS 5734-PL I, 5734-LM4,
5734-LH5
OPERATING SYSTEM PL/I OPTIMIZING COMPILER: MESSAGES
SYSTEH REFERENCE LIBRARY MANOAL
PROGRAM BOMBERS 5734-PL1, 5734-LM5
OS PL/I CHECKOUT COMPILER - PROGRAM PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
PROGRAM NOMBER 5734-PL2
SYSTEK/36B OPERATING SYSrEM PL/I OPTIMIZING COMPILER
SYSTEM INPORMATION SYSTEMS REFERENCE LIBRARY MANUAL
PROGRAH NOHDERS 5734-PL2, 5734-LM5
SYSTEM/36m OPERATING SYSTEM PL/I CHECKOUT COMPILER
EXECOTION LOGIC MANOAL - PROGRAM NUMBERS 5734-PL2
57H-LM5
SYSTEH/36B OPERATING SYSTEM PL/I CHECKOOT COHPILER:
MESSAGES MANOAL - PROGBAM NUMBERS S734-PL2, 5734-LH5
DISK OPERATl:NG SYSTEH/36B REFERENCE CARD PL/I OPTIMIZING
COMPILER KEYWORDS
OS PL/I OPTIftIZING AND CHECKOUT COMPILERS:
KEYWORDS, TERMINAL COMMANDS, AND COMPILER OPTIONS
REFERENCE CARD - PROGRAM NUHBERS 5734-PL1, PL2, PL3
SYSrEM/36S OPERATING SYSTEM PL/I CHECKOUT COMPILER
PROGRAM LISTING - PROGRAM NOMBER 5734-PL2
DISK OPERATING SYSTEM/368
PL/I RESIDENT LIBRARY - ASSEMBL Y LISTING MICROFICHE
PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-LM4
DISK OPERATING SYSTEM/368 PL/I TRANSIENT LIBRARY
ASSEMBLY LISTUG MICROFICHE - PROGRAM NOMBER 5736-LH5
DISK OPERATING SYSTEM/36B PL/I OPTIMIZING COMPILER
ASSEHBLY LISTING MICROFICHE - PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-PLI
SYSTEM/368 OPERATING SYSTEK PL/I RESIDENT LIBRARY
HICROFICHE - PROGRAM NUMBER 5734-LM4
SYSTEH/36B OPERATING SYSTEM TRANSIENT LIBRARY - MICROPICHE
PROGRAH NUMBER 5734-LMS
SYSTEH/36B OPERATING SYSTEM PL/I OPTIMIZING COMPILER
MICROFICHE LISTINGS - PROGRAM NUMBER 5734-PLI
05 PL/I OPTIKIZING COMPILER: PROGRAM LOGIC UNUAL
PROGRAM NUMBER 5734-PL1
SYSTEH/36B OPERATING SYSTEK PL/I RESIDENT LIBRARY:
PROGBAH LOGIC MANUAL - PROGRAM NUMBER 5734-LM4
OS PL/I TRANSIENT LIBRARY: PROGRAM LOGIC MANUAL
PROGRAH ROMBER 5734-LM5

30

ORDER
NUMBER

TITLE

LY33-6al a
LY 33-6a11
LY33-6012
LY33-6a13
LY33-601~

GB21-a861
SB21-a862

DOS PL/I OPTIMIZING COKPILER:
PROGRAK LOGIC MANUAL
PROGRAM NUKBER 5136-PLl
DOS PL/l RESIDENT LIBRARY:
PROGRAM LOGIC MANUAL
PROGRAM NUMBER 5136-LM~
DOS PL/I TRANSIENT LIBRARY - PROGRAM LOGIC MANUAL
PROGRAK HOKBER 5136-LK5
05 PL/I CHECKOUT COMPILER PROGRAM LOGIC UNUAL
PROGRAK NUMBER 513~-PL2
sysTEM/368 OPERATING SYSTEM PL/I CHECKOUT COMPILER
PROGRlK LOGIC, VOLUME 2 OF 2 - PROGRAM NUMBER 513Q-PL2

KINHUM TELEPROCESSING COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
AVAILABILITY NOTICE - PROGRAM NUMBER 5198-lAY
MINIMUM TELEPROCESSING COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM KANUAL
PROGRAM NUMBER 579B-AAY

LB21-a063
GB21-0238
sB21-0239
LB21-02Q0
GB21-aQ11
SB21-0Q12
LB21-aQ13
•• GB21-0628
'.SB21-0621
.'LB21-0622
.·GB21-0686
.'SB21-8681
.·LB21-0688
.·SC21-6955
GC21-6966
SC28-6689
GH28-0123
5820-0121
S820-a129
GH20-0838
sH20-0819
sH20-8885
GH20-~839

LY20-0Q93
LY20-0601
GH20-08S3
sH20-0925
5H20-8926
GH20-Q 105
LY20-0638
GH20-1831
GH20-~195

GH28-1036
GH2B-~

1 96

GH20-0??1
5H28-0829
5828-0838
GH20-QS28
GH2B-~211

LY2B-0566
GH2B-1031

MINIKUK TELEPROCESSING COKMUNICArIONs SYSTEM
MANUAL, PROGRAM NUMBER 5198-AAY
FIELD DEVELOPED PROGRAK - sYSTEKs GUIDE
DOS 2311-231~/19 DAsD DEVICE INDEPENDENCE ROUTINES
AVAILABILITY NOTICE - PROGRAM NUMBER 519B-ADT
DOS 231 1-231~/1 9 DAsD DEVICE INDEPENDENCE ROUTINES
PROGRAM DESCRIPTION/OPERATIONS MANUAL
PROGRAM NUMBER 519B-ADT
DOS 2311-231Q/19 DASD DEVICE INDEPENDENCE ROUTINES
SYSTEMS GUIDE - PROGRAM NUMBER 5198-ADT
GRAPHPAK - INTERACTIVE GRAPHICS PACKAGE FOR APL/360
FIELD DEVELOPED PROGRAMS-AVAILABILITY NOTICE
PROGRAH NUMBER 5198-AGK
GRAPHPAK - INTERACTIVE GRAPHICS PACKAGE FOR UL/360
PIELD DEVELOPED PROGRAM DESCRIPTION/OPERATIONS 8ANUAL
PROGRAM NUMBER 5198-AGK
GRAP8PAK - INTERACTIVE GRAPHICS PACKAGE FOR APL/368
PIELD DEVELOPED PROGRAM-SYSTEMS GUIDE
PROGRAM NUMBER 5198-AGK
3210 FORMAT KlCRO POB OUTPUT DATA STREAMS PDP - AVAILABILITY
NOTICE - PROGRAM HUMBER 579B-AKL
3210 FORHA~ MACBO FOR OUTPUT DATA STREAMS FOP - PBOGRAM
DESCRIPTION/OPERATIONS MANUAL - PROGRAn NUMBER 5798-AKL
3210 FORMAT MACRO FOR OUTPUT DATA STREAMS FOP - SYSTEMS
GUIDE - PROGRAK NUMBER 5198-AKL
DOS 231111Q/19 - 3330 DAsD DEVICE INDEPENDENCE ROUTINES
AVAILABILITY NOTICE - FOP NUMBER 519B-ALK
DOS 231111Q/19-3330 DISD DEVICE INDEPENDENCE ROUTINES
PROGRAM DESCRIPTION/OPERATIONS MANUAL - FOP 9U8BEB 5198-ALK
DOS 231111Q/1S-3338 DASD DEVICE INDEPENDENCE ROUTINES
SYSTEMS GUIDE - FOP NUMBER 5198-ALK
VIDEO/370 USERS GUIDE - PROGRAM PRODUCTS 51H-RC5. 5136-RC3
IBH OPERATING SYSTE8 VIDEO/370
PROGRAK PRODUCT DESIGN OBJECTIVES
PBOGRAM NUMBER 513Q-RC5
USER' 5 GUIDB FOR THE 18ft 29Q1 KODEL Q CHECK COLLECTION
CONTROLLER ASSEMBLY FACILITIES, PROGRAMMING - PBPQ P88083
PROGRAM NUMBER 5199-AlH
•
DATA/360-DOS APPLICATION DESCRIPTIOH MANUAL
PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-XS2
DATA/36B-DOS CONSOLE OPERATOR'S GUIDE
PBELIMINABY VERSION PROGRAK NUMBER 5136-XS2
DlTA/360-DOS TEUINAL OPERATOR'S GUIDE
PRELIMINARY VERSION (PROGRl8 NO. 5736-XS2)
INTRODUCTION TO DATA/360 - DOS
PROGRAM NUMBER 5136-XS2
DArl/360 - DOS CONSOLE OPERATOR'S GUIDE
PROGBAM NUMBEB 5136-XS2
DATA/360 - DOS TERMINAL OPERATOR'S GUIDE
PROGRAM NUMBER 5136-IS2
DIRECT ACCESS TERKINAL AHLICATION (DATA/360-DOS)
PROGRAM NUMBER 5136-XS2
DATA/360 DOS PRELIMINARY VERSION
PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-152 FEATURE CODE 8018
DATA/368 - DOS SYSTEK MANUAL
PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-XS2, FEATURE CODE 8818
DATA/368-0S - PROGBAM NUMBER 513Q-IS3
DATA/360-0S TERMIHAL OPEBATOR'S GUIDE,
• PROGRAM NUMBER 513~-XS3
DATA/360-0S CONSOLE OPERATOR'S GUIDE,
PBOGRAM NUMBER 513Q-XS3
DIRECT ACCESS TEBMlNAL APPLICATION (DATA/368-0S)
PROGBAM NUMBER 5134-XS3
DATA/360-0S SYSTEK HANUAL
PROGRAM NUMBER 5134-XS3, PEATURE CODE 8081
DATA/360 DOS I I APPLICATIOH DESCRIPTION MANUAL
PROGRU NUMBER - 5136-XS5
DIRECT ACCESS TERMINAL APPLICATION (DATA/368 005-11)
DESIGN OBJECTIVES - PROGRAK NUMBER 5136-IS5
DATl/36B OS I I APPLICATION DESCRIPTION MANUAL PROGRAft
NUMBER 513Q-XS8
DIRECT ACCESS TEBMINAL APPLIClTION (DATA/36B 05-11)
DESIGN OBJECTIVES - PROGRAM NUMBER 513Q-XS8
SYSTEK/368 DATA BASE ORGANIZATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCESSOR
APPLICATION DESCRIPTION MANUAL PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-IXQ
SysTEM/360 DATA BASE ORGANIZATION AND MAINTENANCE PBOCESSDR
5136-xn PROGRAM DESCRIPTION MANUAL
SYSTEK/360 DATA BASE ORGANIZATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCESSOR
5136-XX4 OPERATIONS MANUAL
DATA BASE ORGANIZATIOH AND MAINTENANCE PBOCESSOR
PROGBAM HUMBER 5136-XX~
CICs FEATURE FOR DATA BASE ORGANIZATION AND MAINTENANCE
PROCESSOR FEATURES - DESIGN ODJECTIVES SHEET
FEATURE NUMBERS 6B2Q-6829
IBM SYSTEM/360 DATA BASE ORGANIZATION AND MAINTENANCE
PBOCESSOB SYSTEM 8ANUAL PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-114
IBM OPERATING SYSTEM FILING AND SOURCE DATA ENTRY
TECHNIQUES FOR EASIER RETRIEVAL - MULTITHREAD (OS PASTER MT)
GENERAL INFOBUTION RANUAL - PROGRAM NURBER 573Q-G21
IBM OPERATING SYSTEM FILING AND SOURCE DATA ENTRY
TECHNIQUES FOR EASIER RETBIEVAL 8ULTITHREAD (05 FASTER MT)
OPERATIONS GUIDE - PROGRAK NUMBER 513~-G21

31

ORDER
NUMBER
SH23-1 H7

LY23-3787

GH23-381B

SH23-3863

SH23-3864

GH20-4032

LY2B-3595

GH23-3933

SH23-1B51

SH23-1352

GH2B-413B

GH23-4233

LY2B-B716

GH2B-B539
**GH2B-3678
SH2B-3679
SH2B-B683
GH23-4376

LY23-B455

GH23-8765

GH28-4367

sc21-5313

SC21-5314

GC21-5319

GC21-5328
GC28-6758
GC28-6759

SC28-6763
Gc33-5338

SC33-5881
GC33-5882
LYC7-1788
LYc7-2381
LY21-8821
LY21-8822

LY28-6761
LY33-8548

TIrLE
IBM OPERATING SYSTEM FILING AND SOURCE DATA ENTRY TECHNIQUES
FOR EASIER RETRIEVAL MULTITHREAD (OS FASTER MT)
PROGRAM NUMBER 5734-G21
THE OPERATING SYSTEM FILING AND SOURCE DATA ENTRY
TECHNIQUES FOR EASIER RETRIEVAL-MULTITHREAD (OS FASTER MT)
PROGRAM PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS - PROGRAM NUMBER 5734-G21
IBM OPERATING SYSTEM FILING AND SOURCE DATA ENTRY TECHNIQUES
FOR EASIER RETRIEVAL MULTITHREAD (OS FASTER MT) - LOGIC
MANUAL - PROGRAM NUMBER 5734-G21 - FEATURE CODE 80'59
IBM SYSTEM/360' FILING AND SOURCE DATA ENTRY TECHNIQUES FOR
EASIER RETRIEVAL - LOW CORE (FASTER LC) APPLICATION
DESCRIPTION - PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-G22
IBM SYSTEM/360' FILING AND SOURCE DATA ENTRY TECHNIQUES
FOR EASIER RETRIEVAL-LOW CORE (FASTER LC)
5736-G22 PROGRAM DESCRIPTION MANUAL
SYSTEM/363 FILING AND SOURCE DATA ENTRY TECHNIQUES
FOR EASIER RETRIEVAL-LOW CORE (FASTER LC)
5736-G22 OPERATIONS MANUAL
FILING AND SOURCE DATA ENTRY TECHNIQUES FOR EASIER
RETRIEVAL - LOW CORE (FASTER LC)
SPECIFICATIONS - PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-G22
IBM SYSTEM/363 FILING AND SOURCE DATA ENTRY TECHNIQUES
FOR EASIER RETRIEVAL-LOW CORE (PASTER LC)
5736-G22 SYSTEM MANUAL
IBM DISK OPERATING SYSTEM FILING AND SOURCE DATA ENTRY
TECHNIQUES FOR EASIER RETRIEVAL - MULTITHREAD
(DOS FASTER 8T) APPLICATION DESCRIPTION f
PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-G24
IBM DISK OPERATING SYSTEM FILING AND SOURCE DATA ENTRY
TECHNIQUES FOR EASIER RETRIEVAL - MULTITHREAD
(DOS FASTER MT) PROGRAM DESCRIPTION
PROGRAM NUM8ER 5736-G24
IBM DISK OPERATING SYSTEM FILING AND SOURCE DATA ENTRY
TECHNIQUES POR EASIER RETRIEVAL - MULTITHREAD
(DOS FASTER MT) OPERATIONS MANUAL - PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-G24
THE DISK OPERATING SYSTEM FILING AND SOURCE DATA ENTRY
TECHNIQUES FOR EASIER RETRIEVAL - MULTITHREAD
(DOS FASTER 8T) PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-G24
THE DISK OPERATING SYSTEM FILING AND SOURCE DATA ENTRY
TECHNIQUES FOR EASIER RETRIEVAL MULTITHREAD (DOS FASTER I1T)
DESIGN OBJECTIVES - PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-G24
IBM DISK OPERATING SYSTEM PILING AND SOURCE DATA ENTRY
TECHNIQUES FOR EASIER RETRIEVAL - MULTITHREAD
(DOS FASTER MT) - SYSTEM MANUAL - PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-~24
GRAPHIC ANALYSIS OF THREE-DIMENSIONAL DATA (GATD)
APPLICATION DESCRIPTION MANUAL (5734-XX2)
GRAPHIC ANALYSIS OP THREE-DEMENSIONAL DATA (GATD)
PROGRAM DESCRIPTION MANUAL - PROGRAM NUMBER 5734-XX2
GRAPHIC ANALYSIS OF THREE-DIMENSIONAL DATA (GATD)
OPERATIONS MANUAL - PROGRAM NUMBER 5734-XX2
Gi1APIIIC ANALYSIS OF THREE-DIMENSIONAL DATA (GATD)
TERHINAL OPERATIONS MANUAL
SYSTEM/368 GRAPHIC ANALYSIS OF THREE-DIMENSIONAL DATA (OS)
PROGRAM PRODUCT FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION SHEET
PBOGRAM PRODUCT 5734-XX2
GRAPIlIC ANALYSIS OP THREE-DIMENSIONAL DATA (GATD)
SYSTEM MANUAL - VOLUME I
PROGRAM NUMBER 573Q-XX2 FEATURE CODE 8101
II/PORMATION MANAGEMENT SYSTEM/363 FOR THE IBM SYSTEM/363
(SYSTEM DESCRIPTION) APPLICATION DESCRIPTION MANUAL
(VERSION 2) PROGRAM NUMBER 5734-XX6
INFORMATION MANAGEMENT SYSTEM/363 (IMS/363) VERSION
DESIGN OBJECTIVES - PROGRAM NUMBER 5734-XX6

IUM SYSTEM/360 DISK OPERATING SYSTEM
IBM 1288 8ASIC UNPORMATTED READ SYSTEM: A
DATA CAPTURE UTILITY PROGRAM
PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-UTI
IUM SYSTEM/363 OPERATING SYSTEM
IBM 1288 BASIC UNFORMATTED READ SYSTEM:
A DATA CAPTURE UTILITY PROGRAM
PROGRAM NUM8ER 5736-UT3
IBM SYSTEM/368 DOS 1288 BASIC UNFORMATTED READ SYSTEM
A DATA CAPTURE UTILITY PROGRAM
PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-UTI
IBM SYSTEM/360 OPERATING SYSTEM IBM 1288 BASIC UNFORMATTED
READ SYSTEM PROGRAM NUMBER 5734-UT3
IBM SYSTEM/363 OPERATING SYSTEM DATA SET UTILITIES
SUPPORT FOR ASCII - PROGRAM NUMBER 5734-UT2
18r'! PROGRAM PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS, IBM SYSTEM/363
OPERATING SYSTEI'!: DATA SET UTILITIES SUPPORT FOR ASCII
PROGRAM PRODUCT NUMBER 5734-UT2
IBK SYSTEK/363 OPERATING SYSTEM: DATA SET DTILITIES SUPPORT
FOR ASCII - USER'S GUIDE, PROGRAM PRODUCT 5734-UT2
IBM SYSTEH/363 DISK OPERATING SYSTEM ASCII MAGNETIC TAPE
UTILITIES
PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-UT2
IBM SYSTEI'IJ/36e DOS ASCII MAGNETIC TAPE UTILITIES
PROGRIK GUIDE - PROGRAK NUMBER 5736-UT2
SY5TE8/36.0 DOS ASCII MAGNETIC TAPE OTILITIES PROGRAM
PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS - PROGRAM NUHBER 5736-UT2
DOS/369 ASCII MAGNETIC TAPE UTILITIES PROGRAM LISTINGS
PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-UT2
SYSTEK/369 OPERATING SYSTEM ASCII UTILITIES ASSEMBLY LISTING
MICROFICHE - PROGRAM PRODUCT - PROGRAM NUMBER 5734-UT2
IBM SYSTEM/368 IBM 1288 BASIC UNPORMATTED BEAD SYSTEM
PROGR!H LOGIC MANUAL PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-UT1
IBM SYSTEM/368 OPERATING SYSTEM
IBM 1288 BASIC UNFORMATTED READ SYSTEM
PROGRAM LOGIC MANUAL - PROGRAM NUMBER 5734-UTJ
IBM SYSTEH/363 OPERATING SYSTEM: DATA SET UTILITIES SUPPORT
FOR ASCII - LOGIC MANOAL, PROGRAM PRODUCT 5734-UT2
IBM SYSTEK/363 DISK OPERATING SYSTEM ASCII
MAGNETIC TAPE UTILITIES PROGRAM LOGIC MANUAL
PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-UT2

32

ORDER
NUMBER

SB21-0035

L621-0036
LCB8-6757
SC28-6695

GC28-6753

5C28-6755

sc 33-IH:HJ4

GC33-4006
SC33-4007
GC33-4008

**SC33-4018
GC33-4020

GC33-4022
**SC33-4023
**LYC1-0901
LY28-6696

LY33-8027
**LY33-8039

GB21-0046
SB21-0041

LB21-0048
**GB21-9986

**GA 24-3594
**GA24-3595

GH20-1152
GH20-1153

GB21-0067
SB21-0068

LB21-0069

"GB21-~574

**sB21-0515

**L821-0576

GH20-0832

SH20-0837

5H20-0843

GH20-4026

TITLE

DISK OPERATING SYSTEM SOEl:T EXIT ROUTINES FOR CS/30/40 FILES
FIELD DEVELOPED PROGRAM - FLYER - PROGRAM NUMBER 5798-AAM
DISK OPERATING SYSTEM SORT EXIT ROUTINES FOR CONTROL SYSTEM
(CS)/3fJ/40 FILES - FIELD DEVELOPED PROGRAM DESCRIPTION
OPERATIONS MANUAL - PROGRAM NUMBER 5798-AAH
DISK OPERATING SYSTEM SORT EXIT ROUTINES FOR
CS/30/40 FILES SYSTEMS GUIDE - PROGRAM NUMBER 5798-AA!1
SYSTEH/360 DISK OPERATING SYSTEH SORT/MERGE
PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-SM1
IBM SYSTEI1/3613 DISK OPERATING SYSTEI1: TAPE AND DISK
SORT/MERGE PROGRAM" SYSTEMS REFEREliCE LIBRARY PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-SM1
IBM SYSTEH/360 DISK OPERATING SYSTEM: TAPE AND DISK
SORT/MERGE PROGRAM, PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-5111
PROGRAM PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
IBM SYSTEM/360 DISK OPERATING SYSTEM: TAPE AND DISK
SORT/MERGE PROGRAM, SYSTEM INFORMATION - PROGRAM NUMBER
5736-SM 1
IBM SYSTEM/360 OPERATING SYSTE~ - SORT/MERGE
SYSTEM INFORMATION - PROGRAM NUMBER 5734-5111
SYSTEM GENERATION/INSTALLATION
STORAGE REQUIREMENTS
MESSAGES
IBH 5YSTEM/36B OPERATING SYSTEM, SORT/MERGE
PROGRAM PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS - PROGRAM NUMBER 5134-5111
IBM SYSTEIV360 OPERATING SYSTEM, SORT/MERGE
PROGRAMMER' 5 GUIDE - PROGRAM NUMBER 5734-581
IBM SYSTEM/36B OPERATING SYSTEM SORT/MERGE TIMING ESTIMATES,
PROGRAM NUMBER 5734-5M1
IBM SYSTEI1/360 DOS SORT MERGE DESIGN OBJECTIVES
PROGRAM NUMBER 5734-SM1
DOS SORT/MERGE PROGRAMMER'S GUIDE - PROGRAM nUMBER 5743-51'11
IBH SYSTEH/3613 DISK OPERATING SYSTEM SORT/MERGE
GENERAL INFORMATION" PROGRAM 1m MBER 5743-SM 1
SYSTEM/360 OPERATING SYSTEr1 SORT/MERGE GENERAL INFORMATION
MANUAL - PROGRAM NUMBER 5734-SM 1
DOS SORT/MERGE INSTALLATION REFERENCE MANUAL
PROGRAM NUMBER 5743-S111
PROGRAM LISTINGS DOS SORT/MERGE PROGRAM PRODUCT - 5143-511.1
IBM SYSTEM/360 DISK OPERATING SYSTEM: TAPE AND DISK
SORT/MERGE PROGRAM - PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-SM.1
(PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-SM1)
IBM SYSTEM/36~ OPERATING SYSTEM, SORT/MERGE, PROGRAM. LOGIC
MANUAL - PROGRAM NO. 5134-5111
DOS SORT/MERGE PROGRAM LOGIC MANUAL
PROGRAM NUMBER 5143-SM1

SYSTEM MANAGEMENT FACILITY SELECT ABLE ANALYZER
AVAILABILITY NOTICE - PROGRAM NUM.BER 5798-AAR
OPERATING SYSTEM/360 SYSTEM MANAGEMENT FACILITY SELECTABLE
ANALYZER - PROGRAM DESCRIPTION/OPERATION MANUAL
PROGRAM NUMBER 5198-AAR
SYSTEM MANAGEMENT FACILITY ELECTABLE ANALYZER SYSTEMS GUIDE
PROGRAM NUMBER 579B-AAR
SMF SELECTABLE ANALYZER AND ACCOUNTING FOR DP OPERATIONS

RCA 3131 EMULATOR ON SYSTEM/370 USING DOS -- PLANNING GUIDE
HONEYWELL SERIES 21313 EMULATOR ON SYSTEM/310 USING DOS
(PRPQ) - PLANNING GUIDE, PROGRAM NUMBER 5799-ADT
RCA 301 EMULATOR ON SYSTEM/370 USING DOS (PRPQ) TRANSITION GUIDE - PROG. NO. 5199-AOR
HONEYWELL SERIES 200 EMULATOR ON SYSTEH/370 USING DOS
(PRPQ) - TRANSITION GUIDE - PROG. NO. 5799-ADT

USER ROLLIN/ROLLOUT AVAILABILIl'Y NOTICE
PROGRAM NUMBER 579B-ABA
DISK OPERATING SYSTEM DYNAMIC ROLLOUT/ROLLIN FIELD
DEV ELOPED PROGRAM DESCRIPTION OPERATIONS MANUAL
PROGRAM NUMBER 5:'198-ADA
DISK OPERATING SYSTEM DynAMIC ROLLOUT/ROLLIN
PROGRAM NUMBER 5798-1I.BA - FIELD DEVELOPED PROGRAM
SYSTEMS GUIDE
OS/36~/37~ JOB CONTROL LANGUIIGE DEVICE DEPENDENT
PARlIMETER CONVERSION AND REPLACEMENT (DDPREP)
AVAILABILITY NOTICE FDP NUMBER 5798-AJU
OS/36~/319 JOB CONTHOL LANGUAGE DEVICE DEPENDENT PARAMETER
CONVERSION AND REPLACEMENT (DDPREPJ PROGRAM DESCRIPTION/
OPERATIONS MANUAL - FOP NUMBER 5798-AJU
OS/36kJ/3113 JOB CONTROL LANGUAGE DEVICE DEPENDENT PARAMETER
CONVERSION AND REPLACEMENT (DDPREP) - SYSTEMS GUIDE - FDP
NunBER 5198-AJU

SYSTEM/3613 REMOTE ACCESS COMPUTING SYSTEM WITH
DISK OPERATING SYSTEM (RAX-DOSI
PROGRAM NUMBER 5199-AAA
SYSTEM/360 REMOTE ACCESS COMPUTING SYSTEM WITH DISK
OPERATING SYSTEM (RAX-DOS) PROGRAM DESCRIPTION MANUAL
PROGRAM NUMBER 5799-AAA
SYSTEM/3613 REMOTE ACCESS COMPUTING WITH DISK OPERATING
SYSTEM (RAX-DOS) OPERATIONS MAflUAL
PROGRAM NUMBER 5199-&11.1\
SYSTEM/36tJ REMOTE ACCESS COMPUTING SYSTEM WITH DISK OS
(HAX-DOS) PROGRAM NUMBER 5799-AAA SPECIFICATION SHEET

33

ORDER
NUMBER

"SC33-0029

GH20-4305
"G320-1408

TITLE

SYSTEM/360 OPERATING SYSTEM TIME SHARING OPTION
PL/I OPTIMIZING COMPILER - SYSTEMS REFERENCE LIBRARY MANUAL
PROGRAM NUHBERS 5734-PL1, 5734-LI14, 5734-LM5
CPS UNDER T50 - V DESIGN OBJECTlV ES SHEET
PROGRAM NOMBER 5799-ADY
5/361:' -

5/370 MCGILL UNIVEBSITY SYSTEM FOR INTERACTIVE

COMPUTING -

GB21-0553

PROGRAM NUMBER 5796-IUP

OPERATOR TRAINING -

DOS CONSOLE SIMULATION DRILLS:

BASIC

TRAINING COURSE A3609 (PROG. NO. 5798-AJH), CUSTOMER PROBLEM
DETERMINATION COORSE A3611 (PROG. NO. 5798-AJN).
AND MULTIPROGRAMMING COURSE A3612 (PROG. NO. 5798-AJP)
FIELD DEVELOPED PROGRAMS-AV AlLA BILITY NOTICE

SB21-0554
LB21-0555
GB21-0553

SB21-0557

LB21-0558

GB21-0553

5B21-0560

LB21-0561

LY28-684a
"LT68-684a

SC28-6835
SC28-6840

SX28-6814

ST88-6814

LYC7-5015
LYC7-5018

DOS BASIC OPERATOR TRAINING - PROGRAM
DESCRIPTION/OPERATIONS MANUAL - PROGRAM NUMBER 5798-AJM

DOS BASIC OPERATOR TRAINING - SYSTEMS GUIDE
FIELD DEVELOPED PROGRAM - PROGRAM NUMBER 5798-AJM
OPERATOR TRAINING - DOS CONSOLE SIMULATION DRILLS:
BASIC
TRAINING COURSE A3609 (PROG. NO. 5798-AJM). CUSTOMER PROBLEM
DETERMINATION COURSE A3611 (PROG. NO. 5798-AJN).
AND MULTIPROGRAMMING COURSE A3612 (PROG. NO. 5798-AJP)

FIELD DEVELOPED PROGRAMS-AVAILABILITY nOTICE
DOS COS TOMER PROBLEM DETERHINATION OPERATOR TRAINING
PROGRAM DESCRIPTION/OPERATIONS MANU AL - FIELD DEVELOPED
PROGRAM - PROGRAM NOMBER 5798-AJN
DOS CUSTO~ER PROBLEM DETERMINATION OPERATOR TRAINING
FIELD DEVELOPED PROGRAM SYSTEMS GUIDE - PROGRAM NUMBER
5798-AJN
OPEBATOR TRAINING - DOS CONSOLE SIMULATION DRILLS:
BASIC
TRAINING COURSE A3609 (PROG. NO. 5798-AJM). CUSTOMER PROBLEM
DETERMINATION COURSE A3611 (PROG. NO. 5798-AJN).
AND MULTIPROGRAMMING coaRSE A3612 (PROG. NO. 5798-AJP)
FIELD DEVELOPED PROGRAMS-AVAILABILITY NOTICE
DOS MULTIPROGRAHMING OPERATOR TRAINING - FIELD DEVELOPED
PROGRAM - PROGRAM DESCRIPTION/OPERATIONS MANUAL
PROGRAM NUMBER 5798-AJP
DOS MULTIPROGRAMMING OPERATOR TRAINING - SYSTEMS GUIDE
FIELD DEVELOPED PROGRAM - PROGRAM NUMBER 5798-AJP

INTERACTIVE TERMINAL FACILTIY PROGRAM LOGIC - PROGRAM
NUMBERS 5134-BC1, BC3 i 5736-RC1, Re2
IBM SYSTEM/36B OSIDOS ITF PROGRAM LOGIC MANUAL
PROGRAM NUMBERS 5734-RC1. 5734-RC3. 5736-RC1. 5736-RC2

IBM SYSTEIV36B OS/DOS rTF: BASIC TERMINAL USER'S GUIDE
PROGRAM NUMBERS 5736-RC2. 5734-RC3
IBM SYSTEM/360 OPERATING SYSTEM (TIME SHARING OPTION)
INTERACTIVE TERMINAL FACILITY: BASIC TERMINAL USER' 5 GUIDE
PROGRAM NUMBER 5734-RC4
IBM SYSTEM/36B OPERATING SYSTEM
IBM SYSTEM/360 DISK OPERATING SYSTEM
INTERACTIVE TERMINAL FACILITY: BASIC REFERENCE CARD
PROGRAM NUMBERS 5734-RC3. 5736-RC2

IBM SYSTEM/36B OPERATING SYSTEM IBM SYSTEM/36B DISK
OPERATING SYSTEM INTERACTIVE TERMINAL FACILITY BASIC
REPERENCE CARD, PROGRAM NUMBERS 5736-RC2, 5734-RC3
DOS ITF RELEASE II - BASIC ASSEMBLY LISTINGS - MICROFICHE
SYSTEM/360 OPERATING SYSTEM INTERACTIVE TERMINAL FACILITY -

BASIC HODULES LYC7-5034

LY28-6836

J'lICROFICHE LISTINGS -

PROGRAH NUMBER

5734-RC3
SYSTEM/36B OPERATING SYSTEM TIME SHARING OPTION
INTERACTIVE TERMINAL FACILITY (BASIC ONLY)
. PROGRAM PRODUCT LISTING MICROFICHE - PROGRAM NUMBER 5734~RC4
IBH SYSTEM/3M' OSIDOS ITF PROGRAM LOGIC
LANGUAGE COMPONENT: BASIC ROUTINES
PROGRAM NUMBERS 5736-RC2, 5734-RC3

GC28-682a

IBM SYSTEH/360 OPERATING SYSTEM
INTERACTIVE TERMINAL FACILITY -

GC28-6821

IBM SYSTEM/36B DISK OPERATING SYSTEM

PL/I AND BASIC

PROGRA" NUMBERS 5734-RC1, 5734-RC3 -

DESIGN OBJECTIVES

INTERACTIVE TERMINAL FACILITY
GC28-6825

PL/I AND BASIC (PROGRAM PRODUCT DESIGN OBJECTIVES)
PROGRAM NUMBERS 5736-RC1. 5736-RC2
IBM SYSTEM/36B OPERATING SYSTEM

GT28-6825

INTERACTIVE TERMINAL FACILITY: PL/I GENERAL INFORMATION
PROGRAM NOMBERS 5736-RC1. 5734-RC1
IBM SYSTEM/36B OPERATING SYSTEM. DISK OPERATING SYSTEM

IBM SYSTEM/360i DISK OPERATING SYSTEM

INTERACTIVE TERMINAL FACILITY:
GENERAL INFORMATION -

PLI AND BASIC

PROGRAM NUMBERS 5736-RC1.

5736-RC2

5736-RC1,2
GC28-6829

IBM SYSTEM/36B OPERATING SYSTEM
INTERACTIVE TERMINAL FACILITY: PL/I (5734-RC1)
BASIC (5734-RC3) SPECIFICATION SHEET

GC28-683a

IBM SYSTEM/36B DISK OPERATING SYSTEM INTERACTIVE
TERMINAL FACILITY: PL/I AND BASIC

GT28-6830

IBM SYSTEM/36B DISK OPERATING SYSTEM INTERACTIVE TERMINAL
FACILITY: PL/I AND BASIC - PROGRAM NUriBERS 5736-RC1

AND

PROGRAM NUMBERS: 5736-RC1 5736-RC2

SC28-6833

5736-RC2
IBM SYSTEM/360 OS/DOS ITF: PL/I INTRODUCTION

PROGRAM NUMBERS 5734-RC1, 5736-RCl

34

ORDER
NU MBER
ST28-6833
SC28-6834
SC28-6838

SC28-6839

TITLE
IBM SYSTEM/360 OS/DOS ITF: PL/I INTRODUCTION PROGRAM
NUMBERS 5734-RC1. 5736-RCl
IBM SYSTEH/360 OS/DOS ITF: PL/I TERHINAL USER'S GUIDE
PROGRAM NUMBERS 5734-RC1. 5736-RCl
IBM SYSTEM/360 OPERATING SYSTEM (TIME SHARING OPTION)
INTERACTIVE TERMINAL FACILITY: PL/l INTRODUCTION
PROGRAM NUMBER 5734-RC2
IBM SYSTEM/360 OPERATING SYSTEM (TIME SHARING OPTION)

INTERACTIVE TERMINAL FACILITY: PL/l TERMINAL USER' 5 GUIDE
SX28-6813
ST88-6813
LYC7-5013
LYC7-5016

LYc7-5033

LY28-6835

PROGRAM NUMBER 5734-RC2
IBM SYSTEM/360 OS/DOS ITF: PLI REFERENCE CARD
PROGRAM NUMBERS 5734-RC1. 573G-RCl
IBM SYSTEM/360 OS/DOS ITF: PL/I REFERENCE CARD
PROGRAM NUMBERS 5734-RC1. 573G-RCl
DOS ITF RELEASE I I - PL/I ASSEMBLY LISTINGS - MICROFICHE
IBM SYSTEM OPERATING SYSTEM
INTERACTIVE TERMINAL FACILITY - MICROFICHE LISTINGS
PROGRAM NUMBER 5734-RCl
SYSTEM/3GB OPERATING SYSTEM TIME SHARING OPTION INTERACTIVE
TERMINAL FACILITY (PL/I ONLY)
PROGRAM PRODUCT LISTING HICROFICHE
PROGRAM NUMBER 5734-RC2
IBM SYSTEM/3G0 OS/DOS ITF PL/I PROGRAM LOGIC

LANGUAGE COMPONENT: PL/I ROUTINES
PROGRAM NUMBERS 5734-RC1.

SC2B-G83G
ST2B-683G
SC2B-GB41

LYC7-5003
LYC7-5005
LYC7-5006

LYC7-5007
LYC7-5008

LYC7-5009

LYC7-5010

LYC7- 5011

LYC7-5014
LYC7-5017

573G-RCl

IBM SYSTEM/3G0 OS/DOS ITF INSTALLATION REFEBENCE MATERIAL
PROGRA!'I NOMBERS 573q.-RC1" 3; 5736-RC1, 2
IBM SYSTEM/360 OS/DOS ITF INSTALLATION REFERENCE MATERIAL
PROGRAM NUMBERS 5734-RC1. 5734-RC3. 573G-RC1. 573G-RC2
IBM SYSTEM/360 OPERATING SYSTEM (TIME SHARING OPTION)
INTERACTIVE TERMINAL FACILITY INSTALLATION REFERENCE MANUAL
PROGRAM NUMBERS 5734-RC2, 5734-BC4

IBM OPERATING SYSTEM 3G0 DOS ITF
PROGRAM NUMBERS 573G-RCl 5737-RCl
IBM OPERATING SYSTEM 36~ DOS ITF
PROGRAM NUMBERS 5736-RCl 5737-RCl
IBM SYSTEM/3Ga OPERATING SYSTEM INTERACTIVE TERMINAL
FACILITY - MICROFICHE LISTINGS - PROGRAM NUHBERS 573'6-8C1,
5734-RC3
IBM OPERATING SYSTEM/3G0 ITF
MICROFICHE LISTINGS - PROGRAM NUMBERS 5734-RC1. 573q-RC3

IBM SYSTEM/36B OPERATING SYSTEM INTERACTIVE TERKINAL
FACILITY - MICROFICHE LISTINGS - PROGRAM NUKBERS 5134-8C1,
5734-RC3
IBM SYSTEM/3G0 OPERATING SYSTEK INTERACTIVE TERKINAL
FACILITY - MICROFICHE LISTINGS - PROGRAM NUMBERS 5734-RC1.
5734-RC3
IBl'l SYSTEM/36e OPERATING SYSTEM INTERACTIVE TERttINAL
FACILITY MICROFICHE LISTINGS - PROGRAM NUMBERS 5734-RC1.
573Q-RC3
IBM SYSTEM/3G0 OPERATING SYSTEM INTERACTIVE TERMINAL
FACILITY - MICROFICHE LISTINGS - PROGRAM NUMBERS 573Q-RC1.
573Q-RC3
DOS ITF RELEASE I I - SHARED ASSEMBLY LISTINGS - MICROFICHE
OPERATING SYSTEM/3G0 INTERACTIVE TERKINAL FACILITY RELEASE 2

SHARED MODULES, MICROFICHE LISTINGS, PROGRAHS 513"-RC1, Be3
LY28-6832

LT6B-6832

IBM SYSTEM/3G0 OS/DOS ITF PROGRAM LOGIC INTRODUCTION AND
METHOD OF OPERATION
PROGRAM NUMBERS 5734-RC1, 5734-RC3, 5736-RC1, 5136-RC2
IBM SYSTEM/360 OS/DOS ITF PROGRAM LOGIC MANUAL

LY28-6833

PROGRAM NUMBERS 513"-RC1, Be3: 5736-RC1, Be2
(PREVIOUS RELEASE)
IBM SYSTEM/360 OS/DOS ITF PROGRAM LOGIC

INTRODUCTION AND METHOD OF OPERATION

INITIALIZATION SYSTEM CONTROL,
PROGRAM LOGIC MANUAL -

AND SYSTEM SUPPORT

PROGRAM NUMBERS 573"-RC1,

5734-RC3, 5736-RC1, 5736-RC2
**LTGB-G833

LY28-G834

LTG8-6B34

LY2B-6837

GC28-6831

LYc7-5035

LY28-6842

LY28-6845

IBM SYSTEM/369 OS/DOS rTP PROGRAM LOGIC KANUAL
INITIALIZATION SYSTEt1 CONTROL AND SYSTEM. SUPPORT
PROGRAM LOGIC MANUAL - PROGRAM NUMBERS 5734-RC1,
57H-RC3. 573G-RC1. 573G-RC2
IBM S YSTEM/3G 0 OS/DOS ITF PROGRAM LOGIC
LANGUAGE COKPONENT CONTROLLER
PROGRAM LOGIC l1ANUAL PROGRAM NUMBERS 57 3"-RC1, 5734-RC3,
573G-RC1. 573G-RC2
IB~ SYSTEM/36B OS/DOS ITF PROGRAM LOGIC LANGUAGE
COt1PONENT CONTROLLER PROGRAM LOGIC MANU AL
PROGRAM NOMBERS 573l1-RC1, 5731.1-RC3, 5736-8C1, 5736-RC2
IBM SYSTEM/3GB OS/DOS ITF PROGRAM LOGIC
LANGU AGE COMPONENT: COMMON ROUTINES AND REPERENCE DATA
PROGRAM NUMBERS 5734-RC1, RC3, 5736-RC1, RC2

IBM SYSTEM/3G0 OPERATING SYSTEM (TIKE SHARING OPTION)
INTERACTIVE TERMINAL FACILITY: PL/1 AND BASIC
PROGRAM PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
PROGRAM NUMBERS 5734-RC2. 573Q-RCQ
SYSTEM/3G~ OPERATING SYSTEM TIME SHARING
OPTION INTERACTIVE TERMINAL FACILITY (SHARED)
PROGRA" PRODUCT LISTING MICROFICHE
PROGRAM NUMBERS 5734-RC2, 5134-8C4
IBM SYSTEM/360 OPERATING SYSTEM (TIME SHARING OPTION)
INTERACTIVE TERMINAL FACILITY PROGRAM LOGIC INITIALIZATION,
SYSTEM CONTROL, AND SYSTEK SUPPORT
PROGRAM NUMBERS 5734-RC2, 5734-RCQ
IBM SYSTEM/3G~ OPERATING SYSTEM (TIME SHARING OPTION)
INTERACTIVE TERMINAL FACILITY PROGRAM LOGIC INDEX
PROGRAM NUtl.BERS 5734-RC2, 5734-RC4

35

ORDER
NUMBER

**GH20-1175

**GII2~-4223

S1I20-1157
SEl2"-1158

TITLE

BUSINESS ANALYSIS/BASIC POR SYSTEM/3 BASIC AND SYSTEI'V36B
AND SISTElV37" INTERACTIVE TERMINAL FACILITY GENERAL
INFORMATION MANUAL - PROGRAM NUMBER 57"3-XI'I3, 5734-XMB
BUSINESS ANALYSIS/BASIC FOR SYSTEH/3 MODEL6 AND
ITF (OS,DOS,TSO), DESIGN OBJECTIVES - PROGRAM
PRODUCTS 57~3-XH3, 5734-XMB
MATH/DASIC PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR ITF - OPERATOR'S GUIDE
PROGRAM NUMBER 5734-XM8
MATH/BASIC FOR SYSTEM/3 MODEL 6 AND INTERACTIVE TERMINAL
FACILITY (ITF) - PROGRAM PRODUCT REFERENCE MANUAL
PROGRAM NUMBERS 57"3-XM.2 (5/3 MODEL 6) 5734-X1'I8 (ITF-OS,
DOS AND TOS)
MATH/BASIC FOR SYSTEI1 3 MODEL 6 AND ITF LOGIC MANUAL
(FEATURE N0
8017 AND 8153) - PROGRAM PRODUCTS 5703-XM2.
5734-X!13
4

:!:~Q 1!!!H; ~!!AR!1!Q QrI!Q!!l=R!!QQR!~ ~QQ'!!~.'!: m!!!b!~!I!Q1lliJ~!!=.'H!l
NOTE: See ITF heading. above. for TSo-ITF Non-program
pl:oduct TSO publications are listed under subject code 39 in as
(OPERATING SYSTEI1) -Release Dependent Publications ..

GC26-37JlI
sc26-3740
GC26-3782

LYc7-5037

LY26-3737

GB21-fl2R3
5821-0284

L821-0285
GB21-9985
SC28-6433

SC28-6434

GC28-6435

**GC28-6454

LYC7-5039

LYC1-5040
LY28-64fl6

GC2S-682l1

sc28-6842

sc28-6855

SC28-6856

GC2S-68S7
**Gc28-6881
LYC7-5032
LY28-6410

IBM SY5TE11/361} OPERATING SYSTEM TIME SHARING OPTION:
T50 ASSEMBLER PROMPTER DESIGN OBJECTIVES, PROGRAM 5734-CP2
OS TSO ASSEMBLER PROMPTER USER'S GUIDE. PROG .. NO .. 5734-CP2
IBM SYSTEI1/361iJ OPERATING SYSTEM TIME SHARING OPTION
ASS EMBLER PROMPTER PROGRAM PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
PROGRAM NUMBER 5734-CP2
SYSTE1'I/360 OPERATING SYSTEM TII'IE SHARING OPTION
ASSEI1BLER PROMPTER PROGRAM PRODUCT I'lICROFICHE LISTING
PROGRAM NUMBER 5734-CP2
IBM 8Y3TEI1/360' OPERATING SYSTEM TIME SHARING OPTION
ASS EMBLER PROMPTER PROGRAM LOGIC MANUAL
PROGRAM NUMBER 5734-CP2

TSO ON-LINE COBOL SYMBOLIC DEBUG - AVAILABILITY NOTICE
PROGBA" NO'MBER 5798-AEZ
TSO ON-LINE COBOL SYMBOLIC DEBUG
PROGRAM DESCRIPTION/OPERATIONS MANUAL
PROGRAM NUMBER 5798-AEZ
TSO ON-LINE COBOL SYI1BOLIC DEBUG - SYSTEMS GUIDE
PROGRAM NUMBER 5798-AEZ
TIME SHARING OPTION ON-LINE COBOL SYMBOLIC DEBUG REQUESTS
REFERENCE CARD
IBM SYSTEM/360 OPERATING SYSTEM TII1E SHARING OPTION COBOL
prWMPTER TERMINAL USER'S GUIDE AND REFERENCE INFORMATION
PROGRAM NUMBER 5734-Cpl
IBM SY5TEM/361} OPERATING SYSTEM (TIME SHARING OPTION) COBOL
PROMPTER INSTALLA'l'ION REFERENCE MATERIAL
5734-CP1
IBM SYSTEH/360 OPERATING SYSTEM (TIME SHARING OPTION) COBOL
PROMPTER PROGRAM PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
PROGRAM NUMBER 5734-CP1
IBM as COBOL Il~TERACTIVE DEBUG AND (TSO) COBOL PROMPTER
GENERAL INFORMATION MANUAL - PROGRAM PRODUCTS 5734-CB4.
5734-CP1
SYSTEI1/361J OPERATING SYSTEM FULL COBOL COMPILER
VERSION 3/TII1E SHARING OPTION COBOL PROMPTER
PROGRAM NUMBER 5734-CB3
IBM SYSTEI1/36i:1 OPERATING SYSTEM - TIME SHARING OPTION
COBOL PROHPTER - PROGRAM NU MBERS 5734-CP1. 5734-CB3
SY5TEM/363 OPERATING SYSTEM TIME SHARING OPTION
COBOL PROMPTER PROGRAM LOGIC MANUAL. PROGRAM NUMBER 5734-CPl

IBM SYSTEI1/360 OPERATING SYSTEM FORTRAN PROGRAM PRODUCTS
FOR 05 AND os WITH TSO GENERAL INFORMATION
PROGRAM NUMBERS: 5734-F01, 5734-F02. 5734-CP3, 5734-L111
IB/1 SYSTEI'l/363 OPERATING SYSTEM (TIME SHARING OPTION)
CODE AnD GO FORTRAN PROCESSOR-TERMINAL USER'S GUIDE
PIlOGRAI1 NUMBERS 5734-F01, 5734-L111
IBM SYSTEI'l/360 OPERATING SYSTEM (TIME SHARING OPTION)
TERMINAL USER'S SUPPLEMENT FOR FORTRAN IV (G1) PROCESSOR
AND TSO FORTRAN - PROGRAM PRODUCT MANUAL
PROGRAM NUMBERS 5734-F02, 5734-CP3. 5734-L111
IBM SYSTEM/363 as FORTRAN IV (GI) PROCESSOR
AND TSO FORTRAN PROMPTER INSTALLATION REFERENCE MATERIAL
PROGRAM LOGIC MANUAL, PROGRAM. NUMBER 5734-P02
IBM SYSTEM/36" OPERATING SY5'rEM TIME SHARING OPTION FORTRAN
PROMPTER - PROGRAM PRODUCT SPECIFICATION
FORTRAN INTERACTIVE DEBUG FOR OS (TSO) - PROGRAM PRODUCT
DESIGN OBJECTIVE - PROGRAM NUMBER 5134-P05
SYSTEI'l/360 TIME SHARING OPTION FORTRAN PROMPTER VERSION 7
PROGRAM NUMBER 5734-CP3
IBM SYSTEI1/3613 OPERATING SYSTEM TIME SHARING OPTION FORTRAN
PROMPTER - PROGRAM LOGIC !lANUAL - PROGRAM NUMBER 5734-CP3

SYSTEH/360 OPERATING SYSTEM TIME SHARING OPTION
PL/l OPTIHIZING COMPILER - SYSTErJlS REFERENCE
LIBRARY HANUAL PROGRAM NUMBERS 5734-PL/l, 5734LH4, 5134-LM5
SYSTEM/360 OPERATING SYSTEH TIM!: SHARING OPTION:
PL/l CHECKOUT COHPILER MANUAL PROGRAM NUHBERS
5734-PL2. 5734-LM5

SC28-6765

SC28-6761

GC28-676B

LYC7-2300

LY28-6766

IBM 5YSTEM/36" OPERATING SYSTEM (TIME SHARING OPTION) DATA
UTILITIES: COPY. PORMAT. LIST, MERGE USER'S GUIDE AND
REFERENCE MATERIAL - PROGRAM NUMBER 5734-UT1
IBM SYSTEM/369 OPERATING SYSTEM (TIME SHARING OPTION) DATA
UTILITIES: COpy, FORMAT. LIST, MERGE SYSTEM INFORMATION
PROGRAM PRODUCT - PROGRAM NUMBER 5734-UTl
IBM 5YSTEI'1/369 OPERATING SYSTEM: TIME SHARING OPTION
DATA UTILITIES; COPY, FORMAT. LIST, MERGE - PROGRAM PRODUCT
SPECIPICATIONS - PROGRAM NUMBER 5734-UT1

IB~A~iS~i~Li~~E~~E~~~~:G p~~~i~~: Li~~.
IB~R~~~~~M~~~:E~p~~i~~~~l SYSTEM: TIME

MERGE

(LISTING)

SHARING OPTION DATA

UTILITIES: COPY, FORMAT, LIST, MERGE
PROGRAM LOGIC MANUAL - PROGRAM NUMBER 5734-UT1

36

ORDER
NUMBER

GC23-1747
GH23-3537
GH23-3522
G823-3533
G820-0531
G823-3536
G820-3973

**SH2~-1:5846

TITLE

BIBLIOGRAPHY OF APPLICATION PUBLICATIONS STATE AND LOCAL GOVERNMENT INDUSTRY
BIBLIOGRAPHY OF APPLICATION PUBLICATIONS EDUCATION INDUSTRY
BIBLIOGRAPHY OF APPLICATION PUBLICATION FINANCE INDUSTRIES
BIBLIOGRAPHY OF APPLICATION PUBLICATIONS DISTRIBUTION INDUSTRIES
BIBLIOGRAPHY OF APPLICATION PUBLICATIONS, PUBLIC UTILITY
INDUSTRIES
BIBLIOGRAPHY OF APPLICATION PUBLICATIONS - MEDIA INDUSTRIES
BIBLIOGRAPHY OF APPLIClLTION PUBLICATIONS INSURANCE INDUSTRY
BIBLIOGRAPHY OF APPLICATION PUBLICATIONS MEDICAL INDUSTRIES

SYSTEM/360 AGRIBUSINESS MANAGEMENT INFORMATION SYSTEM
APPLICATION DESCRIPTION MANUAL
PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-D51
APL/360 OS OPERATIONS AND INSTALLATION MANUAL
PROGRAM NUMBER 5734-1MI
SYSTEM/360 AGRIBUSINESS MANAGEMENT INFORMATION SYSTEM
PROGRAM DESCRIPTION MANUAL PROORAM NUKBER 5736-D51

GH20-4949

SYSTEM/360 AGRIBUSINESS MANAGEMENT INFORMATION SYSTEM
OPERATIONS MANUAL PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-051
AGRIBUSINESS MANAGEMENT INFORMATION SYSTEM (AMIS)
SPECIFICATIONS SHEET PROGRAM NUMBER: 5736-D51
APL/360-0S ASSEMBLER LISTINGS
PROGRAM NUMBER 5734-1M1, FEATURE CODE 8301
SYSTEM/360 AGRIBUSINESS MANAGEMENT INFORMATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM MANUAL FEATURE CODE sa12 PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-D51
SYSTEM/36B CONSUMER GOODS SYSTEM (COGS)
ALLOCATION (005) (OS) APPLICATION DESCRIPTION MANUAL
PROGRAM NUMBERS (DOS) 5736-031, (OS) 5734-D32
CONSUMER GOODS SYSTEM (COGS) ALLOCATION (nOS) (OS)
OPERATIONS MANUAL, PROGRAM NUMBERS DOS-5736-D31, 05-573/l-D32
CONSUMER GOODS SYSTEM (COGS) ALLOCATION (DOS) (OS)
PROGRAM DESCRIPTION, PROGRAM NUMBERS DOS 5736-D31,
OS 5734-D32
CONSUMER GOODS SYSTEMS (COGS) - ALLOCATION
PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-D31
SYSTEH/360 CONSUMER GOODS SYSTEM (COGS) ALLOCATION (OS)

LY23-3622

PROGRAM PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS - PROGRAM NUMBER 5734-D32
CONSUMER GOODS SYSTEM (COGS) ALLOCATION (OS) SYSTEM MANUAL

LY23-3579
G823-3721

S823-3823
S823-3821

G820-0722

S823-3833

PROGRAM NUMBER 5734-D32
SYSTEM/360 CONSUMER GOODS SYSTEM (COGS) FORECASTING (DOS)
(OS) - APPLICATION DESCRIPTION MANUAL - PROGRAM NUMBER
DOS 5736-D32, as 5734-D33
CONSUMER GOODS SYSTEM (COGS) FORECASTING (DOS) (OS)
OPERATIONS MANUAL, PROGRAM NUMBERS DOS 5736-D32, as 5734-D33
SYSTEM/360 CONSUMER GOODS SYSTEM (COGS) FORECASTING
PROGRAM DESCRIPTION MANUAL (PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-D32)
THE CONSUMER GOODS SYSTEMS

G823-4348
LY23-0621
G820-0935

S820-1053
S820-1354

LY20-0717
G820-0604
S820-0726

"S820-0728

(COGS)

-

FORECASTING

PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-032
SYSTEM/36B CONSUMER GOODS SYSTEM (COGS) FORECASTING (OS)
PROGRAM PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS - PROGRAM NUMBER 5734-033
CONSUMER GOODS SYSTEM (COGS), FORECASTING (OS),
SYSTEM MANUAL, PROGRAM NUMBER 5734-033

IBM FASHION REPORTER, APPLICATION DESCRIPTION MANUAL,
PROGRAM PRODUCT - PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-011
DISTRIBUTION RETAIL 5736-DI I
IBM FASHION REPORTER, PROGRAM DESCRIPTION MANUAL,
PROGRAM Nu!lIi~ER 57 36-D1 1
IBM FASHION REPORTER, OPERATIONS MANUAL
PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-01 I
FASHION REPORTER PROGRAM PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-011
IBM FASHION REPORTER PROGRAM PRODUCT SYSTEM IUNOAL
PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-D11
SYSTEM/360 ORDER ALLOCATION SYSTEM
APPLICATION DESCRIPTION MANUAL - 5736-D41
SYSTEK/360 ORDER ALLOCATION SYSTEK
PROGRAM DESCRIPTION MANUAL
PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-D41
ORDER ALLOCATION SYSTEM OPERATIONS MANUAL
PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-041
SYSTEM/36B ORDER ALLOCATION SYSTEM SYSTEM MANUAL
PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-041

G823-0987

COURSE WRITER III, VERSION 3 APPLICATION DESCRIPTION MANOAL
PROGRAM NUMBERS 5734-E13, 5736-E11

S820-1009

COURSEWRITER III, VBRSION 3 AUTHORI S GUIDE - OPERATING
SYSTEM AND DISK OPERATI NG SYSTEM
PROGRAM NUMBERS 5734-E13, 5736-EII
COORSBWRITER III, VERSION 3 STUDENT/MONITOR USER'S GUIDE
OPERATING SYSTEM AND DISK OPERATING SYSTEM
PROGRAM NUMBERS 5734-E13, 5736-EI I
COURSEWRITER III, VERSION 3 SUPERVISOR'S GUIDE
OPERATING SYSTEK AND DISK OPERATING SYSTEM
PROGRAM NUMBERS 5734-E13, 5736-EI I
COURSEWBITER III, VERSION 3 OPERATOR'S GUIDE
DISK OPERATING SYSTEM - PROGRAM NUMBERS 5736-E11
COURSEWRITER III/DOS VERSION 3 - SPECIFICATION SHEET
PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-EII
CQURSEWRITER III VERSION 3 MONITOR REFERENCE CARD PROGRAM
NUMBERS 5736-E1 I (DOS) 5734-813 (OS)
CQURSEiRITER III VERSION 3 AUTHOR'S REFERENCE CARD
PROGRAM NUMBERS 5736-E1 I (DOS) 5734-E13 (OS)
COORSEIiRITER III, VERSION 3 STUDENT REFERENCE CARD
OPERATING HINTS - PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-E11 (DOS)
5734-E13 (OS)
COURS EWIUTER III, VEn (SION 3 SUPERVISOR'S REFERENCE CARD
PROGRAK NUMBERS 5736-E11 (DOS) 5734-E13 (OS)

S820-1010·

5H26-1I:J11

SH23-1012

"GX20-1832
GX20-1833
GX20-1834

GX20-1835

37

ORDER
NUMBER
LYB3-3723
LYB3-B721
LY23-3679
GH23-e735
SH23-B744
GH23-4333
LY23-3495

LY23-3691
GH23-0987
SH20-1939

SH23-1913

SH23-131 I

SH23-1022
GH20-4301
"GX23-1832
GX20-1833
GX23-1834

GX20-1835
LYB0-0784
LYB3-e785
GH20-1129

TITLE
COURSEWRITER I I I , DOS VERSION 3 LISTINGS - MICROFICHE
PROGRAM NUM8ER 5736-El1
COURSEWRITER I I I : DOS VERSION 3 FLOWCHARTS
MICROFICHE - PROGRAM NUM8ER 5736-El I
COURSEWRITER I I I , VERSION 3 DISK OPERATING SYSTEM
SYSTEM PROGRAMMER' 5 GUIDE - PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-El I
COURSEWRITER I I I FOR SYSTEM/360 (OS AND DOS) VERSION 2
APPLICATION DBSCRIPTION MANUAL (5734-E12)
COURSBWRITER I I I FOR SYSTEM/363 (OS) VERSION
OPERATOR'S GUIDE PROGRH NUM8ER 5734-E12
COURSE WRITER I I I (OS) VERSION 2
PROGRAM NUMBER 5734-E12
COURSEWRITER I I I FOR SYSTEM/363 (OS) VERSION
PROGRAMMER' 5 GUIDE
PROGRAM NUMBER 5734-E12 FEATURE CODE 8BBB
COURSEWRITER III/OS VERSION 3 SYSTEM PROGRAMMERS GUIDE
PROGRAM NUMBER 5734-E12
COURSE WRITER I I I , VERSION 3 APPLICATION DESCRIPTION MANUAL
PROGRAM NUMBERS 5734-E13, 5736-El I
COURSEWRITER I I I , VERSION 3 AUTHOR' 5 GUIDE - OPERATING
SYSTEK AND DISK OPERATING SYSTEM
PROGRAM NUMBERS 5734-E13, 5736-El I
COURSEWRITER I I I , VERSION 3 STUDENT/MONITOR USER'S GUIDE
OPERATING SYSTEM AND DISK OPERATING SYSTEK
PROGRAM NUMBERS 5734-E13, 5736-El I
COURSEWRITER I I I , VERSION 3 SUPERVISOR' 5 GUIDE
OPERATING SYSTEM AND DISK OPERATI NG SYSTEK
PROGRAM NUMBERS 5734-E13, 5736-El I
COURSEWRITER III/OS VERSION 3 - OPERATOR'S GUIDE
PROGRAM NUMBER 5734-E13
COURSEWRITER III/OS VERSION 3 - SPECIFICATION SHEET
PROGRAM NUMBER 5734-E13
COURSEWRITER I I I VERSION 3 MONITOR REFERENCE CARD PROGRAM
NUMRERS 5736-Ell (DOS) 5734-E13 (OS)
COURSEWRITER I I I VERSION 3 AUTHOR'S REFERENCE CARD
PROGRAM NUMBERS 5736-El I (DOS) 5734-E13 (OS)

COUBSEii'RITBB III, VERSION 3 STUDENT REFERENCE CARD
OPERATING HINTS - PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-Ell (D05)
5734-E13 (OS)
COURSEWRITER I I I , VER (SION 3 SUPERVISOR' 5 REFERENCE CARD
PROGRAM NUMBERS 5736-El I (DOS) 5734-E13 (OS)
COURSEWRITER I I I , VERSION 3 OS FLOWCHARTS - MICROFICHE
PROGRAM NUMBER 5734-E13
COURSEWRITER I I I , VERSION 3 OS LISTINGS - MICROFICHE
PROGRAM NUMBER 5734-E13
EPIC SOCRATES STUDENT SCHEDULING SYSTEM FOR EDUCATIONAL

INSTITUTIONS GH23-4238
GH23-42e7
GH20-4213
GH20-42B9
GH2B-I173
GH2B-4222

GH23-B9B3

SH2B-1315

SH20-1325

GH23-4137

LY23-3692

SH20-B612
SH20-3613

GH20-4BB2
LY20-9473

SH20-B612
SH2B-0613

G823-4383

PROGRAM PRODUCT GENERAL INFoRnATlaN

PROGRAM NUMBER 5735-E91
EPIC: SOCRATES STUDENT SCHEDULING SYSTEM DESIGN OBJECTIVES
PROGRAM NUMBER 5735-E91
EPIC: FAST TEST SCORING SYSTEM DESIGN OBJECTIVES
PROGRAM NUMBER 5735-E92
EPIC: BUDGET/FINANCE DESIGN OBJECTIVES
PROGRAM NUMBER 5735-E93
EPIC: STUDENT RECORDS DESIGN OBJECTIVES
PROGRAM NUMBER 5735-E94
INTERACTIVE TRAINING SYSTEfi - GENEBAL INFORMATION IUNUAL
PROGRAM NUMBER 5734-XXC
INTERACTIVE TRAINING SYSTEM COURSE STRUCTURING FEATURE
SPECIFICATION SHEET - PROGRAM NUMBER 5734-XXC

ELECTRONIC CIRCUIT ANALYSIS PROGRAM II (ECAP II) FOR
SYSTEM/363 AND 1130 COMPUTING SYSTEM
APPLICATION DESCRIPTION MANUAL
ELECTRONIC CIRCUIT ANALYSIS PROGRAM I I (ECAP II) FOR THE IBM
OPERATING SYSTEM AND 1130 COMPUTING SYSTEM
PROGRAM DESCRIPTION MANUAL - PROGRAM NUMBERS 5734-EE1,
571 I-EEl
ELECTRONIC CIRCUIT ANALYSIS PROGRAM I I (ECAP II) FOR THE IBM
OPERATING SYSTEM - OPERATIONS MANUAL
PROGRAM NUMBER 5734-EEI
ELECTRONIC CIRCUIT ANALYSIS PROGRAM I I (ECAP-II) FOR THE
OPERATI NG SYSTEM AND 1130 SYSTEM - SPECIFICATIONS SHEET
PROGRAM NUMBERS 5734-EEI AND 57 I I-EEl
ELECTRONIC CIRCUIT ANALYSIS PROGRAM I I (ECAP II) FOR THE IBM
OPERATING SYSTEM AND 1133 COMPUTING SYSTEM - SYSTEM MANUAL
FEATURE NUMBER 8B95 - PROGRAM NUMBERS 5734-EE1, 5711-EEI
RIGID PRAME SELECTION PROGRAM (RFSP) OPERATIONS MANUAL
PROGRAM NUMBER 1139-EC-39X 5734-ECI 5736-ECI
RIGID FRUE .SELECTION PROGRAM RFSP
PROGRAM DESCRIPTION MANUAL
.PROGRAH NUMBER 5734-ECI 5736-EC 1

RIGID FRAME SELECTION PROGRAM -

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION SHEET

PROGRAM NUMBER 5734-ECI
RIGID FRAME SELECTION PROGRAM (RFSP) VOLUME 3 - COMPILATION
LISTINGS SYSTEM MANUAL
PROGRAM NUMBER 5734-ECI FEATURE CODE 8501
RIGID FRAME SELECTION PROGRAM (RFSP) OPERATIONS MANUAL
PROGRAM NUMBER 1139-EC-99X 5734-EC1 5736-ECI
RIGID FRAME SELECTION PROGRAM RFSP
PROGRAM DESCRIPTION MANUAL
PROGRAM NUMBER 5734-ECI 5736-ECI

RIGID FRAME SELECTION PROGRAM -

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

SHEET (RFSP DOS) - PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-EC1
RIGID FRAME SELECTION PROGRAM (RFSP) VOLUME 4 COMPILATION LISTINGS SYSTEM MANUAL
PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-EC1 FEATURE CODE 8501

GH23-3775
SH23-3893
SH29-0894

SYSTEM/360 ACTIVE CERTIFICATE INFORMATION PROGRAM
APPLICATION DESCRIPTION MANUAL, PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-F32
SYSTEM/369 ACTIVE CERTIFICATE INFORMATION PROGRAM
OPERATIONS MANUAL, PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-F32
SYSTEM/360 ACTIVE CERTIFICATE INFORMATION PROGRAM
rERMINAL OPERATOR'S MANUAL PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-F32

38

ORDER
NUMBER
SH 23-3895

GH20-0189
SH20-3991

SH2jJ-jJ998
SH20-0999
GH20-4121

"GH20-1038

GH20-0163
SH20-0810
SH23-0811
SH20-0812
GH20-4036
LY 20-0606

LY23-0601

SH20-1154
"SH23-1155

GH20-4304
LY23-3193
"SH23-1159
GB21-0010
SB21-3011

LB21-0012
"GH20-1339
GH20-4188
GH23-1038

G820-0BBB
5820-0963
SH20-0964
GH20-411B
LY20-0656
GH20-1002

5820-1150
5820-1151

LY20-9192

G820-9629

SH20-0695

SH29-0696
GH20-4065

G520-2255

TITLE
SYSTEM/36" ACTIVE CERTIFICATE INFORMATION PROGRAM
PROGRAM DESCRIPTION MANUAL, PROGRAM NUMBER 5136-F32
SYSTEM/360 ACTIVE CERTIFICATE INFORMATION PROGRAM (ACIP)
PROGRAM PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS - PROGRAM NUMRER 5136-F32
SYSTEM/360 ACTIVE CERTIFICATE INFORMATION PROGRAK
SYSTEM MANUAL - PROGRAM NUHBER 5736-F32 FEATURE NUMBER 8"33
BROKERAGE ACCOUNTING SYSTEM ELEMENTS (RASE) VERSION 2
APPLICATION DESCRIPTION - PROGRAM NUMRER 5136-F31
BROKERAGE ACCOUNTING SYSTEM ELEMENTS (BASE) VERSION 2
PROGRAM DESCRIPTION MANUAL VOLUME 1: NARRATIVE
PROGRAM NUMBER 5136-F31
BROKERAGE ACCOUNTING SYSTEM ELEMENTS (BASE) VERSION 2
PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-F31
BROKERAGE ACCOUNTING SYSTEM ELEMENTS (BASE) VERSION
PROGRAM PRODUCT MANUAL - PROGRAM NUMBER 57)6-F31
BROKERAGE ACCOUNTING SYSTEMS ELEMENTS (BASE)
SPECIFICATIONS SHEETS - PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-F31
BROKERAGE ACCOUNTING SYSTEM ELEMENTS (BASE) VERSION 2
SYSTEM MANUAL - PROGRAM NUMBER 5136-F31, FEATURE 6005
CHECK PROCESSING CONTROL SYSTEM (CPCS)
GENERAL INFORMATION MANUAL - PROGRAM NUMBER 5734-F11
CHECK PROCESSING CONTROL SYSTEM (CPCS)
PROGRAM PRODUCT DESIGN OBJECTIVES, PROGRAr!. NUliBER 5734-Fl1
FINANCIAL TERMINAL SYSTEM APPLICATION DESCRIPTION FTS/360
PROGRAM NUHBER 5736-F12
SYSTEM/360 FINANCIAL TERMINAL SYSTEM,
PROGRAM DESCRIPTION MANUAL, PROGRAM NUMBER 5136-F12
SYSTEM/36" FINANCIAL TERMINAL SYSTEM, OPERATIONS MANUAL,
PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-F12 •
SYSTEM/36~ FINANCIAL TERMINAL SYSTE", PROGRAMMER'S IUNUAL,
PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-F12
FINANCIAL TERMINAL SYSTEM (FTS)
SYSTEM/363 FINANCIAL TERMINAL SYSTEM
SYSTEM MANUAL, VOLUME I: FLOWCHART NARRATIVES
PROGRAM NUMBER 5136-F12, PEATURE CODE 8tf26
SYSTEM/360 FINANCIAL TERMINAL SYSTEM
SYSTEM MANUAL VOLUME II: FLOWCHARTS
PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-F12 FEATURE CODE B~26
MARKETABLE SECURITIES INVENTORY SYSTEK, PROGRAMMING RPQ
MB4259, PROGRAM REFERENCE MANUAL - PROG. NO. 5199-ABY
MARKETABLE SECURITIES INVENTORY SYSTEM PROGRAMMING
RPQ MB~259 - PROGRAM NUMBER 5199-ABY
OPERATIONS GUIDE
OPERATIONS GUIDE
~ARKETABLE SECURITIES INVENTORY SYSTEn PROGRAMMING RPQ
MB4259 - SPECIFICATION SHEET - PROGRAM NUMBER 5199-ABY
MARKETABLE SECURITIES INVENTORY SYSTEM - LOGIC MANUAL
PROGRAM NUMBER 5199-ABY
REGISTERED REPRESENTATIVE SYSTEM PROGRAftMING OVERVIEW
PROGRAM NUMBER 5134-F34
2170/1255 REMOTE MICR ENTRY SYSTEM (UNDER DOS BTAH) - FOP
AVAILABILIT·Y NOTICE - PROG. NO. 5196-AAD
2173/1255 REMUTE MICR ENTRY SYSTEM
PROGRAM DESCRIPTION/OPERATION MANUAL
PROGRAM NUMBER 519B-AAD
2170/1255 REMOTE MICR ENTRY SYSTEM - SYSTEMS GUIDE
PROGRAM NUMBER 519B-AAD
SECURITIES ORDER MATCHING GENERAL INFORMATION MANUAL
PROGRAM NUMBER 5134-F32
IBM SECURITIES ORDER MATCHING - PROGRAM NUMBER 5734-F32
DESIGN OBJECTIVES
TELECOMMUNICATIONS CONTROL SYSTEM (TCS)
GENERAL INFORMATION MANUAL - PROGRAM NUMBER 5134-F31

BASIC COURTS SYSTEM (BCS) APPLICATION DESCRIPTION MANUAL,
PROGRAM NUMBER 5136-G26
BASIC COURTS SYSTEM - PROGRAM PRODUCT DESCRIPTION MANUAL
PROGRAM PRODUCT 5736-G26
BASIC COURTS SYSTEK. PROGRAM PRODUCT OPERATIONS MANUAL
PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-G26
IBM BASIC COURTS SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS SHEETS
PROGRU NUMBER 5736-G26
IB(I! SYSTE!l/369 BASIC COURTS SYSTEl'l, SYSTEM. MANUAL
PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-G26
BUDGET ACCOUNTING INFORMATION SYSTEM (BACIS) FOR PUBLIC
INSTITUTIONS - GENERAL INFORMATION ftANOAL
PROGRAM NUMB ER 5136-G25
BUDGET ACCOUNTING INFORMATION SYSTEM (BACIS)
PROGRAM PRODUCT - OPERATOR'S GUIDE - PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-G25
BUDGET ACCOUNTING INFORMATION SYSTEM (BACIS) FOR PUBLIC
INSTITUTIONS; PROGRAft. PRODUCT REFERENCE tlANUAL
PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-G25
BASIC (BUDGET ACCOUNTING INFORMATION SYSTEM) FOR PUBLIC
INSTITUTIONS - PROGRAM PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
PROGRAM NUMBER 5136-G25
BUDGET ACCOUNTING INFORMATION SYSTEM (BACIS) FOR pUBLIC
INSTITUTIONS - LICENSED PROGRAM PRODUCT MANUAL
PROGRAM NUMBER 5136-G25
LAW ENFORCEMENT MANPOWER RESOURCE ALLOCATION SYSTEM
(LEMRAS): APPLICATION DESCRIPTION MANUAL
PROGRH NUMBER 5136-G21
LAW ENFORCEMENT MANPOWER RESOURCE ALLOCATION SYSTEM (LEMRAS)
PROGRAM DESCRIPTION MANUAL
PROGRAM NUMBER 5136-G21
LAW ENFORCEMENT RESOURCE ALLOCATION SYSTEM (LEMRAS)
OPERATIONS MANUAL (5136-G21)
LAW ENFORCEMENT MANpOWER RESOURCE ALLOCATION SYSTEM
(LEMRAS) FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION - PROGRAM PRODUCT 5136-G21
LAW ENFORCEMENT MANPOWER RESOURCE ALLOCATION SYSTEM (LEMRAS)
VOLUME 2 LISTINGS - tlICROFICliE
SYSTEM MANUAL PROGRAM NUMBER 5136-G21, FEATURE CODE 8401
LAW ENFORCEMENT MANPOWER RESOURCE ALLOCATION SYSTEM (LEMRAS)
SYSTEM MANUAL VOLUME I
(PROGRAM NUMBER 5136-G21 FEATURE CODE 84~0)
LEMRAS - LAW ENFORCEMENT MANPOWER RESOURCE ALLOCATION SYSTEM
MORE EFFICIENT POLICING WITH THE SAME POLICE FORCE

39

ORDU
NUMBER

TITLE

Z1 ;[!!!!!IU!!S1 NUMBERS
36gM-AS-465. 36gN-AS-465, 36J1N-AS-466
COBOL CODING FORM
IBM 14a0 COMPATIBILITY INITIALIZATION DECK SYSTEM/360
MODEL 30 CODING SHEETS 1 AND 2
FLOWCHARTING TEMPLATE
FORTRAN CODING FORM
MATHEMATICAL PROGRAMMING INPUT FORH
SYSTEM/360 - 1130
PROPORTIONAL RECORD LAYOUT FORM
IBM SYSTEM/360 RECORD LAYOUT WORKSHEET
RPG CALCULATION SPECIFICATIONS SHEET
RPG CONTROL CARD AND FILE DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION SHEET
RPG DEBUGGING TEMPLATE
RPG EXTENSIONS AND LINE COUNTER SPECIFICATIONS SHEET
RPG OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS SHEET
MULTIPLEXER CHANNEL WORKSHEET - SYSTEM/360 MODEL 25
CONFIGURATION A AND B
IBM SYSTEM/360 MODEL 33 MULTIPLEXER CHANNEL WORKSHEET
IBM SYSTEM/360 MODEL 30 IBM 1052 KEY-TABS
IBH 1445 PRINTER SPACING CHART
2250 DISPLAY LAYOUT SHEET
IBM 2260 DISPLAY FORMAT
IBM SYSTEMf360 MODEL 30 IBM 2702 WORKSHEET
IMAGE PLANNING CHART - 2760 OPTICAL II1AGE UNIT, REGISTRATION
PUNCHING ACME
IMAGE PLANNING CHART - 2760 OPTICAL IMAGE UNIT REGISTRATION
PUNCHING OXBERRY

2.2. E~~ l~~~!Y Ji2:ming '§'Y21!ll!!1.
NOTE:
Evs, published weekly on microfiche, contains
information useful in program maintenance and diagnosis ..
Automatic updating is available through SLSS.
S2C0-0051
S2C0-0101
S2C0-0201
"S2C0-0301

MICROFICHE - EARLY WARNING
2025 AND LARGER FILE CARD
MICROFICHE - EARLY WARNING
OPERATING SYSTEM OS FILE CARD
MICROFICHE..;.. EARLY WARNING
PROGRAMMING SYSTE~ OTHER THAN OS FILE
MICROFICHE - EARLY WARNING PRODUCTS CSP-SCP FILE

21 fIr

19£Q[£~m T~m£Q£2£Y !1~ Listingel
NOTE: PTF Listings are available under SLSS.
To order, specify
the bill-of-forms number corresponding to the program of interest.

**LBOF-2063
SBOF-6101!J
SBO F-61 03
SBOF-6106
SBOF-6109
SBOF-6110
SBOF-6113
SBOF-6116
SBOF-6119
SBOF-6122
SBOF-6125
SBOF-6128
SBOF-6131
SBOF-6137
SBOF-6140
SBOF-6143
SBOF-61116
SBOF-6149
SBOF-6152
SBOF-6155
SBOF-6158
S80F-6161
SBOF-616L1
SBOF-6167
SBOF-6170
SBOF-617 3
SBOF-6176
SBOF-6179
SBOF-6182
SBOF-61B5
SEOF-61S8
SBOF-6192
SBOF-6195
SBOF-6198
SBOF-6201
SBOF-6204

82 SORTER OPERATION - PI - COURSE CODE A3082
PTF PROGRAM NUMBER 360S-AL-531
PTF PROGRAM NUMBER 36fJS-AS-937
PTF PROGRAM NUMBER 360S-CB-524
PTF PROGRAM NUMBER 360S-CB-545
PTF PROGRAM NUMBER 360S-CI-505
PTF PROGRAM NUMBER 360S-CI-535
PTF PROGRAM NUMBER 360S-CI-555
PTF PROGRAM NUMBER 360S-CO-503
PTF PROGRAM NUMBER 360S-CQ-513
PTF PROGRAI'! NUMBER 360S-CQ-519
PTF PROGRAM NUMBER 360S-CQ-548
PTF PROGRAM NUMBER 360S-DM-508
PTF PROGRAM NUMBER 360S-DN-527
PTF PROGRA~ NUMBER 360S-DN-533
PTF PROGRAM NUMBER 360S-DN-539
PTF PROGRAM NUMBER 360S-DN-554
PTF PROGRAM NUMBER 360S-ED-521
PTF PROGRAM NUMBER 360S-FO-500
PTF PROGRAM NUMBER 360S-FO-520
PTF PROGRAM NUMBER 360S-FO-550
PTF PROGRAM NUMBER 360S-IO-523
PTF PROGRAM NUMBER 363S-IO-526
PTF PROGRAM NUMBER 360S-LD-547
PTF PROGRAM NUMBER 360S-LM-501
PTF PROGRAM NUMBER 360S-LM-512
PTF PROGRAM NU HBER 360S-LM-525
PTF PROGRAM NUMBER 360S-LM-532
PTF PROGRAM NUMBER 360S-LM-537
PTF PROGRAM NUMBER 360S-LM-542
PTF PROGRAM NUMBER 360S-LM-546
PTF PROGRAJ'I NUMBER 360S-NL-511
PTF PROGRAM NUMBER 360S-PL-552
PTF PROGRAM NUMBER 360S-PT-516
PTF PROGRAM NUMBER 360S-RC-536
PTF PROGRAM NUMBER 360S-RC-541

60

ORDER
NUMBER

TITLE

SBOF-6207
SBOF-6219
SBOF-6213
SBOF-6216
SBOF-6219
SBOF-6222
SBOF-6225
SBOF-6238
SBOF-6232
SBOF-6234
SBOP-6236
SBOF-6238
SBOF-6249
SBOF-6242
SBOF-6244
SBOF-6248
SBOF-6259
SBOF-6252
SBOF-6254
SBOF-6256
SBOP-6258
SBOP-6269
SBOF-6262
SBOF-6264
SBOP-6266
SBOF-6268
SBOF-6278
SBOF-6272
SBOF-6274
SBOF-6276
SBOF-6278
SBOF-6289
SBOF-6282
SBOF-6284
SBOF-6286
SBOP-6288
SBOF-6299
SBOF-6292
SBOF-6294
SBOP-6296
S80P-6298
SBOP-6300
S80P-6382
SBOP-6394
SBOF-6396
SBOP-639B

22 fIQ!ll:.A!!

PTF
PTF
PTF
PTF
PTP
PTF
PTF
PTF
PTP
PTP
PTF
PTF
PTF
PTF
PTF
PTF
PTF
PTF
PTF
PTF
PTF
PTF
PTF
PTF
PTF
PTP
PTF
PTF
PTF
PTF
PTF
PTF
PTF
PTF
PTF
PTF
PTF
PTP
PTF
PTF
PTP
PTF
PTF
PTF
PTF
PTF

PROGRAM NUMBER 360S-RC-543
PROGRAM NURBER 360S-RC-551
PROGRAM NUMBER 369S-RG-93B
PROGRAM NnBER 369S-SM-023
PROGRAM NUHBER 360S-UT-506
MODULE GENERATION - OS
SER VICE AIDS OS
PROGRAM NUMBER 368N-AS-465
PROGRAM NUH8ER 36SN-AS-466
PROGRAM NOMBER 369N-CB-452
PROGRAM NUMBER 369N-CB-468
PROGRAM NOMBER 369N-CB-482
PROGRAM NOMBER 368N-CL-453
PROGRAM NOMBER 369N-CQ-469
PROGRAM NOMBER 368N-CQ-47W
PROGRAM NOMBER 360N-DN-481
PROGRAM NOMBER 360N-EU-484
PROGRAK NUMBEB 369N-EU-485
PROGRAM NUMBER 368N-PO-451
PROGRAK NOMBER 369N-FO-479
PROGRAM NOHBER 360N-IO-454
PROGRAM NOMBER 368N-IO-455
PROGRAK NOHBER 360N-IO-456
PROGRAH NOMBER 368N-IO-457
PROGRU NOMBER 369N-I0-458
PROGRAH NOMBER 369N-IO-476
PROGRAM NOMBER 369N-IO-477
PROGRlH NOMBER 360N-IO-478
PROGRAH NOMBER 360N-PL-464
PROGRAH NOHBER 368N-PT-459
PROGRAM NOMBER 36SN-RG-460
PROGRAM NOHBER 360N-SM-400
PROGRAM NUMBER 360N-SH-459
PROGRAM NOHBER 369N-SM-483
PROGRAM NUMBER 369N-SV-473
PROGRAM NUMBER 368N-SV-474
PROGRAM NOMBER 360N-S Y-4 75
PROGRAM NUHBER 360N-SV-486
PROGRAM NUHBER 368N-S V-487
PROGRAM NUHBER 360N-SV-4BB
PROGRAH NUMBER 360N-UT-461
PROGRAM NOHBER 360N-UT-462
PROGRAM NUMBEB 368N-UT-463
PROGRAM NUMBER 360N-UT-471
PROGRAM NUMBER 360H-UT-472
SERVICE AIDS DOS

~igil.g.§

NOTE: Tbe follow ing program listings are available for TYPE 1
programs.
Automatic updating, if required, is available through SLSS.

**GJD1-0015
GJD1-1010

GJD1-1911
GJD1-1012
GJD1-1013
GJD1-1914
GJD1-1315
GJD1-1316
GJD1-1917
GJD1-1918
GJD1-1019

GJD1-1020
GJD1-1021
GJD1-1022
GJD1-1023

GJD1-1025
GJD1-1026
GJD1-1030
GJD1-1035
GJD1-1049
GJD1-1042
GJD1-1043
GJD1-1044
GJD1-1945
GJD1-1948
GJD1-1050
GJD1-1052
GJD1-1B54
GJD1-1B55

3830 4-CHAHHEL SWITCH SUPPORT (CALTROP) ICR - PROGRAH
NOMBER 360-0S-587
SYSTEM/360 OS PRIMARY CONTROL PROGRAMS
MICROFICHE LISTING - PROGRAH NU MBER 36BS-CI-566
OPERAnNG SYSUM/360 'rIME SHARING OPTION PROGRAM LISTIIIG
(TSO) PROGRAM NUMBER 368S-CI-555
SYSTEM1360 OS MVT
SYSTEK/360 OS DATA MANAGEMENT
MICROFICHE LISTINGS - PROGRAM NUMBER 368S-DM-588
SYSTEM/360 OS BASIC DIRECT ACCESS METHOD
MICROFICHE LISTING - PROGRAM NUMBER 360S-DM-S09
SYSTEM/360 OS REHOTE JOB ENTRY
MICROFICHE LISTING - PROGBAH NOHBER 360S-RC-536
SYSTEM/368 OS BTAM
HIC_OnCHE LISTINGS - PROGRAM NOHBER 360S':'CQ-513
SYSTEK/360 OS QTA!
HICROFICHE LISTING - PROGRAM NURBER 368S-CQ-519
SYSTEM/360 OS OLTEP
MICROPICHE LISTINGS - PROGUM NUMBER 360S-DN-533
OPERATING SYSTEM/369 CONVERSATIONAL REMOTE JOB ENTRY
MICROFICHE LISTINGS - PROGRAH NUKBER 360S-RC-551
PROGRAM LISTING
SYSTEK/360 OS ISAH
MICROPICHE LISTINGS - PROGRAM NUKBER I[) S-IO-526
SYSTE81360 OS UTILITIES
MICROFICHE LISTINGS - PROGRAM NUMBEB 360S-UT-506
OPERATING SYSTEM/360 INDEPENDENT OTILITIES
MICROFICHE LISTINGS - PROGRAM NUHBER 368S-UT-5S1
OPERATING SYSTEM/369 TELEPROCESSING
COMMUBICATIONS ACCESS HETHOD (TCAR)
PROGRAK LISTING - PROGRAM NOKBER 36SS-CQ-548
SYSUM/360 OS ALGOL COMPILER-F
MICROPICHE LISTING - PROGRAM NUMBER 368S-AL-531
SYSTEM1368 OS ALGOL LIBRARY
MICRO PICHE LISTING - PROGRAM NU KBER 368S-L8-532
MICROFICHE - SOURCE LISTING
SYSUK/36B-OS ASSEMBLER E 360S-15-036
MICROFICHE - SOURCE LISTING
SYSTEM/360-0S ASSEMBLER F 3605-15-037
SYSTE81360 OS COBOL COKPILER-E
KICBOFICBE LISTING - PROGRAM NUKBER 360S-CO-503
SYSTEM136B OS ANS COBOL
MICROFICHE LISTING - PROGRAM NUKBER 360S-CB-545
SYSTEM1360 OS ANS COBOL LIBRARY
MICROFICHE LISTING - PROGRlft NUMBER 368S-LK-546
SYSTEM/360 OS COBOL F LIBRARY
MICROFICHE LISTING - PROGRAK NU KBER 368S-LK-525
SYSTEK/360 OS COBOL COHPILER-F
MICROFICHE LISTINGS - PROGRAM NUKBER 360S-CB-524
SYSTEM1360 OS COBOL LIBRARY
MICROFICHE LISTING - PROGRAM NUKBER 360S-L8-504
MICROFICHE - SOORCE LISTING
SYSTEM/360-0S FORTRAN E IV 360S-FO-092
SYSTEH/368 05 FOR'rBAN G IV
MICRO PICHE LISTING - PROGRAK NU MBER 360S-PO-520
OPERATING SYSTEM/36B PORTRAN SYNTAX CHECKER
KICROFICHE LISTINGS - PROGRAM NUMBBR 360S-FO-550
SYSTEK/36B OS FORTRAN H IV
MICROFICHE LISTINGS - PROGRAH NUKBER 360S-FO-500

61

ORDER
NU~BER

GJD1-1 a5B
GJDl-1969
GJDl-1962
GJDl-1965
GJD1-U68
GJDl-1979
GJDl-1972
GJDl-1975
GJD1-1B76
GJD1-1077
GJDl-1080
GJD1-1985
GJD1-1S9S
GJDl-1991
GJD1-1992
GJD1-1093
GJDl-199~

GJD1-1995
GJD1-1996

GJDl-1997
GJD1-1998
GJD1-1199
GJDl-1319
GJD1-1379
GJD 1-1 380
GJD1-1399
GJD1-1~00
GJD1-1~10

GJDl-1420
GJD1-1~80

GJDl -1590
GJDl-1519
GJD1-160S
GJD1-1620
GJD1-1630
GJD1-16~9

GJD 1-1641

GJDl-1642
GJDl-1643
GJDl-1709

TITLE
SYSTEIV360 OS FORTRAN LIBRARY IV
MICROFICHE LISTINGS - PROGRAM NUMBER 360S-LM-501
SYSTEM/360 OS PL/l COMPILER F
MICROFICHE LISTINGS - PROGRAM NUMBER 360S-NL-511
SYSTEM/360 OS SERVICE AIDS
MICROFICHE LISTINGS - PROGRAM NUMBER 369S-DN-554
OPERATING SYSTEM/360 PL/I SYNTAX CHECKER
MICROFICHE LISTINGS - PROGRAM NUMBER 360S-PL-552
SYSTEM/369 OS PL/l LIBRARY F
MICROFICHE LISTINGS - PROGRAM NUMBER 360S-LM-512
HICROFICHE - SOURCE LISTING
SYSTEM/369-0S LINKAGE EDITOR E 369s-ED-519
SYSTEM/360 OS LINKAGE EDITOR LOADER
MICROFICHE LISTINGS - PROGARAM NUMBER 360S-LD-547
SYSTEM/369 OS LINKAGE EDITOR F
MICROFICHE LISTINGS - PROGRAM NUMBER 369S-BD-521
SYSTEM/36B OS SER0, SERl
MICROFICHE LISTINGS - PROGRAM NUMBER 369S-DN-527
SYSTEM/369 OS RECOVERY MANAGEMENT
MICROFICHE LISTINGS - PROGRAM NUMBER 360S-DN-539
SYSTEM/36B OS SORT MERGE
MICROFICHE LISTINGS - PROGRAM NUMBER 360S-SH-023
SYSTEM/360 OS TESTRAN
MICROFICHE LISTINGS - PROGRAM NUMBER 360S-PT-516
SYSTEM/360 OS GRAPHIC PROGRAMMING SERVICES
MICROFICHE LISTINGS - PROGRAM NUMBER 360S-IO-523
SYSTEM/369 OS GRAPHIC SUB-ROUTINE PROGRAM
MICROFICHE LISTINGS - PROGRAM NUMBER 360S-LM-537
SYSrEM/369 OS SATELLITE GRAPHIC JOB PROCESS
MICROfICHE LISTING - PROGRAM NU KBER 369S-RC-543
SYSTEM/369 OS GRAPHIC JOB PROCESS
MICROFICHE LISTING - PROGRAM NUMBER 36HS-RC-541
MICROFICHE - SOURCE LISTING
SYSTEM/360-0S 1130/360 DATA TRANSMISSION 36HS-LM-542
SYSTEM/360 OS REPORT PROGRAM GENERATOR
PROGRAM NUMBER 369S-RG-038
MICROFICHE FOR OPERATING SYSTEM RELEASE 20.7 PROGRAMS:
360S-CI-505 369S-CI-535 36SS-CI-555 360S-CQ-548
360S-DM-508 360S-DM-509 360S-DN-527 360S-DN-533
360S-DN-554 360S-ED-521 360S-IO-526 3605--LD-547
460S-LM-512 360S-NL-511 360S-UT-506 360S-UT-507
SYSTEM/360 OPERATING SYSTEM RELEASE SUPPORT DOCUMENTATION
(MICROFICHE)
SYSTEft/369 OPERATING SYSTEM RELEASE SUPPORT DOCUMENTATION
(MICROFICHE)
MICROFICHE - SOURCE LISTING
ATTACHED SUPPORT PROCESSOR (ASP) PROGRAM NUMBER 360A-CX-15X
MICROFICHE - SOURCE LISTING
SYSTEM/360 SIMULATOR 1410/7010 360C-SI-754
MICROFICHE - SOURCE LISTING
SYSTEM/360 SIMULATOR 7070/7074 360C-SI-753
MICROFICHE - SOURCE LISTI NG
SYSTEM/360 SIMULATOR 7080 360C-SI-551
MICROFICHE - SOURCE LISTING
SYSTEH/369 SIMULATOR 7090/7094 360C-SI-750
MICROFICHE - SOURCE LISTI NG
SYSTEM/360 EMULATOR (MODEL 49r 1401/1410 360C-EU-074
MICROFICHE - SOURCE LISTI NG
SYSTEM/360 EMULATOR (MODEL 40) 369C-EU-728
IBM 7094 EMULATOR FOR THE SYSTEM/360 MODEL 85 UNDER OS/360
MICROFICHE LISTINGS - PROGRAM NUMBER 360C-EU-734
IBM OPERATING SYSTEM/360 DOS EMULATOR PROGRAM FOR
SYSTEM/370 MODELS 145 AND 155 - PROGRAM NUMBER 360C-EU-73B
MICROFICHE - SOURCE LISTING
SYSTEM/360 EMULATOR (MODEL 50) 1410/1010 360C-EU-726
MICROFICHE - SOURCE LISTI NG
SYSTEM/360 EMULATOR (MODELS 50 AND 65) 7070/7074 360C-EU-725
MICROFICHE - SOURCE LISTI NG
SYSTEM/36B EMULATOR (MODEL 65) 7040/7944 360C-EU-733
MICROFICHE - SOURCE LISTING
SYSTEM/360 EMULATOR (MODEL 65) 7080 360C-EU-727
MICROFICHE - SOURCE LISTING
SYSTEM/360 EMULATOR (MODEL 65) 7090/1094 360C-EU-729
OPERATING SYSTEM 370/165 OS-7094 INTEGRATED EMULATOR
MICROFICHE LISTINGS - PROGRAM NUMBER 360C-EU-740
SYSTEM/360 OPERATING SYSTEM EMULATOR FOR 7074
ON 370/165 UNDER OPERATING SYSTEM
PROGRAM LISTING MICROFICHE - PROGRAM NUMBER 360C-EU-739
7089 EMULATOR FOR SYSTEM/370 HODEL 165 UNDER OPERATING
SYSTEM/360 - MICROFICHE LISTING - PROGRAM NUMBER 360C-EU-737
EMULATOR FOR 71174 ON S/3711 MODEL 155 UNDER OS MICROFICHEPROGRAM NUMBER 36I1C-EU-741
MICROFICHE - SOURCE LISTING

~~~~~~~:::1 MODEL 44 BASIC PROGRAMMING SUPPORT (BPS)
GJDl-1720
GJDl-1740
GJD1-U00

GJD1-2919

MICROFICHE - SOURCE LISTING
SYSTEM/360 MODEL 44 BASIC PROGRAMMING SUPPORT 360F-IO-613
MICROFICHE - SOURCE LISTING
SYSTEM/360 MODEL 44 1628 SIMULATOR FOR 1620 360C-SI-755
MICROFICHE - SOURCE LISTI NG
SYSTEM/360 BASIC PROGRAMMING SUPPORT (BPS)
PROGRAM NOMBERS BEGINNING WITH 360P
MICROFICHE - SOURCE LISTING
SYSTEM/360-BOS BASIC OPERATING SYSTEM (COMPLETE)

GJD1-U12

MICROFICHE - SOURCE LISTr NG
SYSTEM/360 BOS MACRO LISTINGS, PROGRAM NUMBERS 360B-CL-302,
360B-IO-303, 360B-I0--304, 360B-IO-305
360B-SU-023

GJDl-2020

MICROFICHE - SOURCE LISTING
SYSTEM/360-TOS CONTROL PROGRAM (COMPLETE)
SYSTEM/360 DISK OPERATING SYSTEM
MACROS - MICROFICHE LISTINGS - PROGRAM NUMBER 360N-CL-453
SYSTEM1360 DISK OPERATING SYSTEM
SORT/MERGE - TAPE
MICROFICHE LISTINGS - PROGRAM NUMBER 369N-5H-400
SYSTEM/360 DISK OPERATING SYSTEM
SORT/MERGE - DISK
MICROFICHE LISTINGS - PROGRAM NUMBER 369N-58-450
SYSTEM/360 DISK OPERATING SYSTEK
BASIC PORTRAN IV
MICROFICHE LISTING - PROGRAM NUMBER 36.0N-FO-451
SYSTEM/36" DISK OPERATING SYSTEM
COBOL _. MICROFICHE LISTINGS - PROGRAM NUMBER 36"N-CB-452

GJD1-2032
GJD1-2935

GJD1-2936

GJD1-2037

GJD1-2938

62

ORDER
TITLE

NU MBER
GJDl-2039

SYSTEK/36kJ DISK OPERATING SYSTEI1

GJDl-2040

SYSTEM/360 DISK OPERATING SYSTEM

SYSTEM CONTROL/IDCS

MICROFICHE LISTINGS ISFKS -

PROGRAM NUMBER 36!3N-CL-453

HICROFICHE LISTING -

PROGRAM NUMBERS 36.0N-IO-457,

360N-IO-411, 360N-IO-418
GJDl-2042

GJDl-2044
GJDl-2045

GJD 1-2046

MICROFICHE - SOURCE LISTING
SYSTEM/36B-DOS AUTOTEST 36BN-PT-459
SYSTEM/360 DISK OPERATING SYSTEM
RPG/DISK - MICROFICHE LISTINGS - PROGRAM NUMBER 360N-RG-460
SYSTEM/360 DISK OPERATING SYSTEM
UTILITY GROUP 1 - MICROFICHE LISTING - PROGRAM 360N-UT-461
SYSTEH/360 DISK OPERATING SYSTEM
UTILITY GROUP 2
MICROFICHE LISTINGS - PROGRAM NUMBER 360N-UT-462
SYSTEM/360 DISK OPERATING SYSTEM
UTILITY GROUP 3

MICROFICHE LISTINGS GJDl-2041
GJDl-2048
GJD1-2049
GJD1-2050
GJD1-2052

QTAH GJDl-2053

GJDl-2054

GJDl-2055

GJDl-2056
GJDl-2051
GJDl-2058

GJDl-2059

GJDl-2060
GJD1-2063
GJDl-2100
GJD1-2150

GJDl-2300
GJDl-3010

GJDl-4610

GJD 1-4620

GJDl-9000

GJDl-9030

PROGRAM NUMBER 360N-UT-463

SYSTEM/360 DISK OPERATING SYSTEM
PL/I - MICROFICHE LISTINGS - PROGRAM NUMBER 360N-PL-464
SYSTEM/360 DISK OPERATING SYSTEM
ASSEMBLER - MICROFICHE LISTINGS - PROGRAM NUMBER 360N-AS-465
SYSTEM/360 DISK OPERATING SYSTEM
ASSEMBLER F - MICROFICHE LISTINGS - PROGRAM 360N-AS-466
SYSTEM/360 DISK OPERATING SYSTEM
BTAM - MICROFICHE LISTINGS - PEaGRAM NUMBER 360N-CQ-419
SYSTEM/360 DISK OPERATING SYSTEM

MICROFICHE LISTINGS -

PROGRAM NIJHBER 360N-CQ-470

SYSTEM/360 DISK OPERATING SYSTEM
MPS UTILITY MACROS
MICROFICHE LISTINGS - PROGRAM NUMBER 360N-UT-411
S/360 DISK OPERATING SYSTEM
VOCABULARY FILE UTILITY PROGRAM - MICROFICHE LISTINGS
PROGRAM NUMBER 360N-UT-412
SYSTEM/360 DISK OPERATING SYSTEM
COMPILER I/O MODULES
MICROFICHE LISTINGS - PROGRAM NUMBER 360N-IO-416
SYSTEM/360 DISK OPERATING SYSTEM
PORTRAN IV MICROFICHE LISTING - PROGRAMS 363N-PO-479, LM-480
SYSTEM/360 DISK OPERATING SYSTEM RELEASE 26 OLTEP
PROGRAM NUMBER 360N-DN-481
SYSTEM/360 DISK OPERATING SYSTEM
SORT/MERGE DISK/TAPE
MICROFICHE LISTINGS - PROGRAM NUMBER 360N-SM-483
SYSTEM/360 DISK OPERATING SYSTEM - MICROFICHE LISTINGS CE SERVICEABILITY PROGRAM
OLTEP - PROGRAM NUMBER 360N-DN-481
SYSTEM/360 DISK OPERATING SYSTEM
ANS COBOL - HICROFICHE LISTING - PROGRAM NUMBER 360N-CB-482
DISK OPERATING SYTEK MODEL 155 EMULATOR
MICROFICHE LISTINGS - PROGRAM NUMBER 360N-EU-490
EMULATOR FOR 1401j1440/146e ON THE SYSTEM/370 MODEL 155
UNDER OS, MICROFICHE LISTING - PROGRAM NUMBER 360C-EU-135
EMULATOR FOR THE IBM 14e1j144e/146e ON THE SYSTEM/310
MODEL 155 UNDER OS PROGRAM NUMBER 360C-EU-135
MICROPlCHE LISTINGS

MICROPICHE - SOURCE LISTING
SYSTEM/360 EMULATOR (MODEL 30) 1401/1460 360C-EU-091
MICROFICHE - SOURCE LISTING
IBM 1800 HPX MULTIPROGRAMMING EXECUTIVE SYSTEM 180e-OS-e10
REFEBENCE CARD

MICROFICHE - SOURCE LISTING
SYSTEN/360 FORTRAN IV TO PL/I LANGUAGE CONVERSION PROGRAM
360C-CV-710
MICRO PICHE - SOURCE LISTI NG
SYSTEH/360 COBOL TO PL/I LANGUAGE CONVERSION PROGRAM
36eC-CV-112
MICROFICHE - SOURCE LISTING
SYSTEM/360 USA STANDARD COBOL LANGUAGE CONVERSION PROGRAM
360C-CV-113

MICROFICHE -

SOORCE LISTING

SYSTEM/360-TSS

(CONTROLLED RELEASE I)

63

360G-CL-621

GA19-eee4

GA 19-8e36

.n!t! 111.2 U!Q~R 2QElgRL MODEt 11
I!!!! 1!!12 !!!!i.!!!;.!!£ !;!!!RACIrul. READE!!.. !!QQI;.!, :i£
2!§Igt!~ R~r~~H~

LI~R!R! ~HQ!.t

This publication contains detailed information about the
keys, lights, swi tebes, mecbanical features, and special.
features of the IBH 1219 Reader Sorter, Hodel 32 and the
IBH 1419 Magnetic character Reader, Model 32.
On-line and off-line data-floW' and operating theory
are fully discussed, with step-by-step procedures for each
reader operation.. Programming notes and error-correction
routines are also covered in detail.. It should be noted
that, in the areas of on-line operation, error-recovery,
and programming notes, this manual refers to the 1401

a ttachment only ..
For additional information, readers are referred to
the following publica tions: IBM 1481/1468 MIS CELLAN EOUS
Input/output Instructions, (GA24-3968) and IBM ±$±( Magnetic
Character Reader with IBM 1418 System, (GA229536.
For information concerning the attachment of the
18H 1219/1419, Hodel 32 to the IBM System/369, Models 39
or 49, readers are referred to IBM 1419, MODEL 32 ATTACHED
to IBM System/36e Model 3e or 49,

(GA19-ee23)

GA19-9919
IBM 3944 DIAL TERMINAL

~!§Xg~-RiEig~~£~-~~g!R! !!!!!~!~
The IBM 3944 Dial Terminal is designed to be used as an
input device to Audio Response Units through a telephone
network.
The 7112 Audio Response Unit is an input/output unit
of the IBM System/369 Models 39, 40, 59, 65, and 75,
interfacing the computer and a telephone network. The
Audio Response Unit provides, under program control,
com posed lIessages of spoken vords in response to digital
inquiries or input messages. Except for the usc of digital
language from the calling to the called line, communication
between remote inquj,ry terminals and the Audio Response
Uni t is condUcted in the same manner as an ordinary
telephone call.

GA21-ge25

!6 COMPONEliI Q~~£R!fI!QN !liQ Qf~RATI!~
PROCEDURES
publication describes the operating principles, machine
features,. and operating procedures of the IBM 1442-N1 Card
Bead-Punch and the IBH 1442-62 Card Punch. Also, it
discusses in general the operation of these devices with
IBM system/36e.

!~ ~=!1 !M~

This

GA19-ee19
IBM H§!Jl.!!.!M!! .!!QJW, 1!! 1 49 V1!!.49/146!! !;Q!!!!!!'.!!!!1IT! lll!!l!l!ll
INVERTED PRINT EDIT AND STERLING SUB-FEATURES
SYS~~~-Rif~g~~~li~g! !!!NUAL -----------This publication is a supplement to the source manual
entitled IBH SYSTEH/36e MODEL 39, 14el/1449/146U
compatibility feature, (GA24-3255), and should be read
in conjunction with it. The information contained herein
is intended primarily for users in world Trade sterling
countries.
This publication is limited to a description of (1)
the use of the Comma and Decimal Point Inversion SubFeature; and (21 how sterling-currency applications can
be processed with the sterling-Currency Sub-Feature without
conversion of existing 14g0-series programs.
The reader is also referred to the ISH SYSTEM/36B HODEL
3B, functional characteristics, (GA24-3231) for a
description of the capabilities, functions, and operational
characteristics of the 5ystelll/369 Kodel 30; and to REFERENCE
KANUAL, IB~ 1491 DATA PBOCESSING SYSTEM STEHLING CUBBENCY
FEATURES, Porm UK3-14Bl-8.
the IBM system/369 Bibliography, (G122-6822), Lists
the associated reference publications.
GA 19-ee23
II!!! 1!!.12 .!!Q!~U

J1Q.!2.1L

~.4 ~!k

1£

ATTACH[!/. :!Q II!!! U§U!!LM!!.

S:!!L a!!L l!m

~!RJm !J!Q R!!!.!!! QJ!!r.IT! RllQJ!!.!!!;'!!ll!!!§. ffig I!!~ ill!! A!!l! l£n
OPTI!;!b Rll!Qll!! §!lE!llR§
This publication describes the quality of paper and print
required for documents that are to be read by the IBM 1273
and 1215 optical Reader Sorters. The manual is intended
for those responsible for pro'viding the documents and for
those vho plan and maintain the optical character
recognition system.
The following topics are dealt with:
1.. The mechanical and optical characteristics
desired o£ the paper.
2.
The sizes and conditions of documents.
3. The quality of the printing, and the printing devices
that can be used to obtain this quality.
4. The procedures for manual, as well as machine, handling
of the documents ..
For information on the 127.0 and 1275 Optical Reader
sorters, refer to Systems Reference Library (SRLJ IBM
SlSTEM/36e COMPONENT DESCBIPTION - IBM 1279 OPTICAL READER
SORTER, Order No. GA 19-.0'.035 and IBM SYSTEH/36.0 COMPONENT
DESCRIPTION - IBM 1275 OPTICAL READER SORTER, order No.
GA 19-ee35 and IBH SlSTEM/36e COMPONENT DESCRIPTION - IBM
1215 OPTICAL READER SORTER, Order NO. GA 19-0034. For
information on the design of documents, refer to SRL FORMDESIGN CONSIDERATIONS - SYSTEM PRINTERS, Order No. GA243488. For information on the IBH printing devices dealt
with in the manual, refer to SRL IBM 14.03 PRINTER COMPONENT
DESCRIPTION, Order No. GA24-3.073 and to the booklet IBM
TYPING INSTRUCTIONS FOR OPTICAL CHARACTER RECOGNITION.

~

§L§!l!!!§ !!;'[!;'!llR!;l! ~!!!~!gr ~AM~!~
This publication is a supplement to ISM 1219 Beader sorter,
Hodel 32--IBM 1419 "agnetic Character Reader, Hodel 32,
Porm A19-9904 and should be read in conjunction with it.
This publication is limited to certain additions to
A19-80B4.. Additional operating information relating to
Power On-Power Off, Channel Line Termination and Sort Mode
Selection is provided.
GA 19-ge34
I!!!! 1£12 QUI!;!r. !!1lA!!ll!! ~l!!!!.!l!! [Q! !lI~l!!!L:i~ A!!l!
SYS!Jl!!.!379
This publication desCribes the functional characteristics of
the IBt! 1275 optical Reader Sorter and contains recommended
progralilling techniques and complete operating instructions.
The lIan ual is intended primarily for systems analysts,
progralllmers, and operators who are working in an OCR
environ_ent.
The 1215 Optical Reader Sorter reads either of two
common types of optical character recognition (OCR) printing
and sorts intermixed paper documents.. Models 1 and 3
operate off-line; Hodels 2 and 4 can operate either on-line
with an IBM system/36.0' Model 25, 39,4.0', or 50, or with an
IBM systell/379 Model 135, 145,. 155, or 165, or off-line.
For understanding the on-line operation of the 1275, the
reader should be familiar with the Systems Reference
Library, IBH system/36.0' Principl-es of Operation (GA22-6821).

64

GA21-9926
IBM 2501 HODELS B1 AND B2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION AND
QfMATIN~-gRQ£~Qi~-

-- ------ ------- --

This publication describes the operation of the IBM 2501
Card Reader Models B 1 and B2 with IBM System/360' Models
30 and higher. Operating principles, system communication,
and operating procedures are presented.
This manual assumes that the reader is fa'miliar with
the operation of the IBM System/36.0, as described in the
SRL publication, IBM SYSTEM/360 PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION,
Order Number GA22-6821.
GA21-ge27
!~.t! l520=JH.L ~l.... !@ &
£Q!iPONENT Q£;SCRll,nm! !l!Q ~lili
R!!Ql;ll!!QRlll1
This publication describes the IBM 2520 Card Read Punch
Model B1 and the IBH 2520 Card Punch Models B2 and B3 with
IBM System/369 Models 3B and above. Included are
discussions of machine features and operating principles
and procedures.
For information about attaching the 252.0 to system/36B
channels, see the publication IBM SYSTEM/360 CHANNEL
characteristics and functional evaluation, (GA24-3411) ..
GA21-ge31
I!!!! SYSTE!!.!369 £Q.!l11Q!!ll!!:!: !!ll§.£Rnn!l.!! A!!!l !lEll!!!n!!!i.
E!!Q£ll!ll!l!ll§;' 1 £ 1 1 = ! ! 1 ,
This publication is a reference manual for the IBM 1231
optical Mark Page Reader, which serves as an input device
(reading handwritten marks frolll sheets of paper) for IB8
System/368 Models 25,. 3B,. 49, and 58. The manual provides
reference information about the 1231-N1, explaining 1231Nl operation and its interaction with the system to which
it is attached.
The principle audience for this publication will be
IBM System/369 programmers, system analysts, supervisors,
and operators.
others who vill use the manual are forms
designers, forms manufacturers, and input document printers.
Programmers, system analysts, and supervisors using
this manual will need to be familiar with the system to
which the 1231-N1 is attached.
GA21-ge33

!~~ ~X§1:~ttLJ'§! £Q1!PONEHl: DESCRIPTION i l l Qfl!RATING
PROQ;!ll!!lll1 I!!!! £§!!.!! £!!!!! !!.!lAQ E!!.!!£!!
This publication explains the operating prinCiples,
procedures, and controls of the IBM 2540 Card Read Punch.
Special features for the 2540' are also discussed ..
refer to the IBlI 2821 Control Unit SRL (GA24-3312),
for information concerning the commands, status and sense
indicators, and other programming considerations that
affect the 254.0'. Par similar information about an IBM
2549 attached to an IBM System/36B through the integrated
2549 attachment feature, refer to IBM SYSTEH/369 MODEL 25
functional characteristics, (GA24-351H).

GA21-ge64

GA22-6613

11!~ §!2:rFl!1L12~ ~!1fQ!nB!! DESC!n.~I.Q.H lili~ Q~~!LAII1ill
PROCEDURES IBM 1287 OPTICAL READER

H!! :.

~~nH!Ld§~ !!Q!!~1 ~Jl

£QNFIill!1!!!QJl

Sheet shows all possible units that can be configured on
the System/36" Model 40.

ThIs-pubiTcation-describestheIBM

1287 optical Reader and
its featuI:"es, operating principles and pJ:'ocedures, and
operations with IBM System/3GB.
The manual also contains
detailed specifications for input documents and tapes, and
for input data quality.

GA22-6614
'§'!'§!~LJ§!! tl.QQg .2& fQl!ll§!!~!IQ£
sheet shows all possible uni ts can be configured on the

!!H1

system/36e Model 59.
GA21-ge1e
I~~ j!2~ ~fg£I!~ l~!~YR~li
COMKUNICATION SYSTEM WITH

DESCRIfIIQliL

I~n ~f!! ~b!A

GA22-6621

R~Q-fg!rqRg~~I~~ B20~lL ~~£~~ !MQ ~~~£2

!lH1

§!~!~J1L12!!

f!!!M£!R.!&.§.

Q~ QR.~E.!.TI.Q!!

SYSTEHS REFERENCE LIBRARY
ThIs-pub'i'icatiOil-isthe-machine reference manual for the
IBK System/360..
It provides a direct, comprehensive
description of the system structure; of the arithmetic,
logical, branching, status switching, and input/output
operations, and of the interruption system ..
The reader is assumed to have a basic knowledge of
data processing s1stell1s and to have read the IBH SYSTEM/36tJ
System sUllimary, (GA22-681~) which describes the System ..
briefly and discusses the input/output devices available.

This pll blication serves as a reference manual for the IBM

1353 ASCII Data Communication system. which provides the
IBM System/363 Data Processing System with remote input
and output capabilities using the American standard Code
for Information Interchange ..
Detailed information about the IBM System/36~ and the
appropriate transmission control unit will be found in
their respective SRL publications.. Site preparation
information in the publication, IBM 1~5~ DATA COMMUNICATION
System Installation Manual, Physical Planning (GA24-3922)
applies for this System.

GA22-6623
GA21-ge61

~!2!~~LJ§~ 1liR~1LQQ!R.Q~ ~QliFIGQli!!Qg

IBK ~!.~nJ1Ld~!l ~!tfill!ID!%' QEsclltl!2!! m!t 1~'§'!!
OPTICAL PAGE READER MODEL 1
This-publIcatIonIS' areference manual for the IBH 1288
Optical page Reader, whicb serves as an input device for
the IBH System/369 Hodels 25,. 3~, 49, and 59. This manual,
which is organized by function, discusses:
Interconnection between the 1288 and the processing
unit.
Characters read by the 1288 and their data codes.
Data transfer between the 1288 and the system.
programming information about 1288 control, status
signals, and sense indications.
Opt ical !'lark. data recording and reading ..
Operator controls for the 1288.
Operating procedures for the 1288 that are not
application dependent ..
Input document design and printing ..
special featUJ:es for the 1288.
Input data printing ..
The principle audience for this publication will be
IBK system/360' programmers, system analysts, supervisors,
and operators.. Others who will use the manual are forms
designers, forms manufacturers, and input document printers ..
programmers, systems analysts, and supervisors using
this manual vill need to be familiar with the system to
which the 1288 is attached.

This configura tor deals with the input/output equipment
attachable to IBH system/360' Models 25-91 ..
The presentation is arranged in two ways: by type of
equipment (such as "direct access", IIdisplay", and
"printers") and by machine number (such as 1"52, 1".03, and
7179).. For each item of equipment, information is given
concerning the way in which the item attaches to the system
and the number of items that can be attached ..
GA22-6626
!~~ ~2I~~J§~ £QHgQM~~I Q~£~!R.!!QM !~~ lJ~~ ~QDEL

HYPERTAPE DRIV E

J

ThIspUblicatTon describes the functions, operations,
controls, and timings of the IBM 734.0 Hypertape Drive Hodel
3, including the dynamics of 734.0 reading and writing and
details on the tape, tape cartridge, and optional automatic
cartridge loader.. In addition, all necessary details on
the functions and operations of the IBH 28"2 Hypertape
Control are presented ..
This manual provides information for customer systems
personnel and is designed as a reference. and guide in the
training of operators, systems engineers, programmers,
manageJ:s, and others who need a good general idea of how
Hypertape operates within the System/36"..
It is an I/O
adjunct to IBM System/36B Principles of Operation, (GA226621) •

GA22-6646

!!H1

GA21-9139
GENERAL INFORMATION MANUAL IBM 1281 HODEL V

This-enual-contains-iiitroductory-InformatIon about the 1287
Optical Reader Model 5 for programmers, sY5tem analysts,
supervisors, and machine operators.. To fully understand the
content of this manual, readers should be familiar with
other 1287 models. References to the 1267 SRL GA21-9"64 are
made throughout the manual where basic 1287 operations
information is necessary to understand Model 5 fUnctions.

gonoralizod do!>cription and advantages of the 2702
within a SY!ltom/369-Teleprocessing activity
A fUnctional dO!lcription of the various sections and
foaturos af the 270'2
Operational functions of the 2702
IBH 2702 commands--bath channel based and terminal
con trol based
Individual sections on 2702 Terminal Controls

GA21-9144

I1H!

~a2.~ £!1!.Q ~!!b.Q

§!§!~HLJ§!! ~Q!!.!2Ql!!!!!! !H!~£!!!g!!Q1!

IBM 2702 TRAN!iHISSION CONTROL
Inforiiiation-conccrninq-tho-operation of an IBH 2702 in
a System/36U ba:.cd Toloprocc5sing operation is provided
in this publicdtion. It contains the following information:

Terminal Controls
IBH Terminal Cont:rol Type I
IBM Terminal Control Type II
World Trade Telegraph Terminal control
IBM Telegra ph Terminal Control Type I
IBM Telegraph Terminal Control Type II

R.!B!£!! gI!Q2R!H.H~!!!.~ B~l!B.!Hi£g A!li!!!1

AND OPERATOR'S GOlDE - SYSTEMS REFERENCE LIBRARY
This -manual-describes- the-IBK- 2596-Card- Read-Punch ..
The manual is intended for IBM System/360' or IBM System/379
systems analysts, programmers experienced in assembler
language, and operators ..
This manual describes the following:
o
General hardware characteristics of the 2596 ..
o
Commands, status bytes, sense bytes and timing
co nsider at ions ..
o
Keys, lights, and operating procedures ..

Related literature is referenced by form number and briefly
described in the IBH SYSTEM/360' BIBLIOGRAPHY, Form GA226622.
GA22-6664

GA22-661e

I]H

~I§~~HLd~~ ~~~~H ~~~!li!

This publication provides basic information about the IBK
System/360, with the objective of helping readers to achieVe
a' general understanding of this new data processing system
and the interrelationships of its models and parts. BJ:oad
system concepts, basic and optional features, and specific
input/output devices are briefly discussed ..
It is assumed that the reader has a basic knowledge
of data processing systems as in INTRODUCTION TO IBM DATA
Processing systems, Order Number GC20'-1684.

65

IBH 2701 DATA ADAPTER UNIT COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
The IBH- 27{j"i- Data-Adapter-uIiit-component-oescrlption is a
reference manual describing the fUnctions of the IBH 2701 ..
The IBM 2701 permits an IBH system/360 or System/310 to
communicate with a variety of remote terminals, devices, and
stations.
This publication .is designed to help the 2701 user,
operator, and pJ:ogrammer to achieve efficient use of the
27"1.. Detailed descriptions are presented for:
The 27131 in the IBH System/360 and System/37"
environment
o
Characteristics of the 2701 (including features)
a
Terminal adapter types: IBM Start/Stop Terminal

SECTION 2:

illll.!~ A!!!!.!!!! :!:Q :!:!!Y !!!!!1.!!l!!BAPH!A!!ii-!!!l!!!UlU!! !!I A !.!!! !.!l!!!£.UQ!!
:!:Q UJl ll!!l!!:!: Q.f m Qll!!l!ll .!!.!!.!!1!.!!1l..
CONTINUED PR08 PRIOR PAGE
Adapters,. Telegraph Terminal Adapters, Parallel
Data Adapter, Synchronous Transmit Receive (5TR)

Adapter, and Binary Synchronous Com.unicatioDS
(BSC) Adapter
o
Prograllming considerations for the 278'
o
Line control sequences to and froll the 27S1 and
attached teninals
o
Ending status and sense bit descriptions
i'he reader should haye a knowledge of teleprocessing and
be fuiliar with the principles of operation for the IB8
Systea1368 or Systea/378. For detailed information about
Binary Synchronous COlllunication,. refer to General Inforllation - Binary Synchronous Coaounications (GA27-3Uq). For
detailed lofar.ation about a specific terminal, refer to
the appropriate publication for that terminal.
GA22-6866

1M §IU:J!l!LJi.!! £!!11!1QI!W DESCRI!1UQ'!! a!!!!..!! U!!nl! l!AJl!!.!!:!:l£
n!1l! !!Eli ~!!I!UZl!!!!! IllH. £!!WQll A!!!! A!!1§ l!l!!:!:£JIl!!§ !!!!ll..
l!Q!!l!!. 1
This manual contains 8 cOllprehensive presentation of the
characteristica, functions, and features of the IS" 2481
Series "agnetic Tapo Onits, 28S3/288q Tape Controls, and
a general deocripHon of the IBft 2816 "odel 1 Switching
onit. The 24"" aorios consists of the 2411, 2412, and
2q2B "agnetic Tapo Units, and 2q83, 2QSQ, and 2Q15 8agnetic
Tape Onits and controls.
In most instances, operational descriptions are limited
to the channel and command level. Operating fUDctions and
procedures cOllaon And fundamental to all I/O operations
are described in 10" SrSTE"/368 PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION,
Order Nu. ber GA 22-6 021.
.
Subjects covorod include magnetic tape unit principles:
keys and lights: tapo load, unload, and cleaning procedures:
status and seoso information: magnetic tape handling: tape
block and roel organization: aDd error recovery procedures.
GA22-6868

1M l!Ill:!:!l.l!ill.!! =. £Ql!llil!!!:!: !!l!l!CRIPT:!.Q'!!'" ill! 1827 !!All
£Q!!:!:!!2l. !!l!ll
This publication contains the functional characteristics
and operating information for the IBft 1827 Data Control
unit. operations with the IBft Syste./368 ftodels 38, Q8,
QQ, and 58 are described. The following IBft 18811 Data
Acquisition and control System Process 1/0 teatures are
described; Digital Input, Digital Output, Analog Output,
Analog :Input, and co_parator.

GA22-688Q
il.!! gSTE"a§l! .!!.Q!!l!!. §2. £:!1..!!£tlQlli £l!A!!A£U!l.!l!ll£l!
This manual presents the organization, characteristics,
functions and features unique to the IBH System/36B Hodel
65. Bajor areas described are syste. structure, generalized
information flow, standard and optional features,
instruction timings, and the systell control panel.
Descriptions of specific input/output devices used
with the IBft S ystea/3611 ftodel 65 appear in separate
publications. Configurations for the IB!! 2865 .ProceSSing
unit and I/O devices are available.
It is assumed that the reader has a knowledge of the
System/368 as defined in the IBH SrSTEft/368 PRINCIPLES OF
Operation, (GA22-6821) and the IBH system/368 System
suamary, Order Number GA22-681B.
G122-6887
gl!l:n.t368 l!QI!l!!. §.~ £!!.!!.f!li!!1!UQ.!!
Sheet shows all units that can be configured on the
System/36S Hodel 65.
G122-6888
!!!.!! l!ISTEna§@. l!Q!!~ II £Q.!!lli!!!!AlQ.!!
Sheet shows all possible Daits that can be configured on
the System/368 80del 75.
GA22-6889
'!!.Q!!~ II .t!!'!!£UQU!' £!!Al!A.£ll!!.!ill£.l!
This manual prese~ts the organization, characteristics,
fUDctioJls and features unique to the IS" System/369 aodel
75. "ajar areas described are: syate. structure,
generalized information flow, standard and optional
features, instruction timings, and the system control
panel.
Descriptions of specific input/output devices used
with the 108 System/368 Hodel 75 appear in separate
publications .
. This lIanual assumes that the reader has a knowledge
of Syste./368 as defined in the IBn SrSTEft/368 PBIHCIPLES
of Operation, (GA22-6821) and the IBK System/368 System
Su •• ary, order HUllber GI22-6818.

!l!!!. SrSTl!!Il:J§l!

GA22-6892
ill!. l!illIl!LJ§l! SPEgAl< UUl!l!!! £!!ANNEL-TO-CHAHlln A!!AllJ!!!
This aanual describes the functions and operating
characteristics of the channel-to-channel adapter in either
multiple-processor or Single-processor systems.
IBII Systell/361 input/output operations that are
exclusive of device considerations are described in detail
in the IBft SYSTEn/368 PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION, Form 1226821.

GA22-6872
!l!!!. 1l!Z! !!In £Q!!:!:J!Q!' !!!!ll =. CONPIGO!!HQ!!
Chart lists all possible units that can be configured onto
the 1827.
GA22-6874
ill! l!Illll!!'!Ji!! l!Ql!ll!. !!!! CONFIGORATO!!
1 schematic drawing Dhows the complete "ode1 44 Processor
with all standard and optional features. Input/output
devices are shown on form G122-6823, and Data comllunications
Devices on form G122-682Q.
GA22-6875
ill! l!IllHU'}§.!! l!Q!!ll!. !!! .f!!.!!£U2.!!!!< £l!All£:!:J!Il.!~Kl!
This anual describes the systea structure, features,
instruction timings and formulas, channels, device
addressing, and operator controls unique to Syste_/36S
ftodel 4Q.
It is assumed the reader has a knowledge of the
system/36B as defined in the IBft SrSTEft/368 PBIHCIPLES OP
Operaton, (G122-6821) and the IB8 Systea/368 Syste.
SUlllaary, Order lu_ber GI.22-6811.

GA22-6895
!!I.!! l!llUl!L.}§.!! £Q.!!!1Q.!!1O.!!:!: !!ESCBIPTIOHl!
Z!!~!! l!:!:Q!!ill
£!!'!!UQ!< A.!!!! n!!l !!!tl!.!! l!:!:!!l!Alll!
This publication contains reference information for the
operation and programming of the IB! 2821 Storage Control
and IBll 2381 Drua Storage. It also contains a brief
description of the special features that are available for
use with the devices.

=

GA22-6898
!!Ill lll!TEft068 .!!.Q!!l!!. ~!! !'.!!'!!£.UQ.!!Al< ~l!l!ill1£l!
This lIanual presents the organization, characteristics,
functions and features unique to the IDH system/369 Hodel
58. Major areas described are system structure, generalized
information flow, standard and optional features, system
control panel, instruction timings, channel characteristics,
concurrent input/output capabilities, selector channel
loading, multiplexer channel loading, and channel
interference with the cpa.
It is assumed that the reader bas a knowledge of the
System/3611 as defined in the ID8 SrSTEft/3611 PRINCIPLES OP
OPERATIOH, Form 122-6821 and the IBft srSTE8 SUUABr, Form
A22-6818.

GA22-6877

1M llJU!!l!LJi.!! £Ql!!1Q.!!.!!.!!I !!l!l!£l!!!1:!:!!!.!!l! A.!!!! Qfl!lI!l!!!§
UOCEDOlli !l!!!. l.!!2l PRiliTER-KEIBOl.!!!! JIQ!!l!!. I fUll
1M ~~l! £!!!!l!QU

This pablication describes the fUnctional and operational
characteristics of the IBll 1S52 Printer-Keyboard Bodel 7
with the 10ft 2158 COHSOLE.

G122-6881

1M l!Illma§!! l!QI!l!!< !!.!! l!!l!£UQlli £1!A!!A£:!:.!!lilllli
This manual presents the organization, characteristics,
functions and features unique to the lSI! System/36B KODEL
liS. tlajor areas described are system structure, generalized
inforlla tion flow, standard and optional features, systell
control panel, instruction timings, and channel
characteristics and functional evaluation.
It is assumed that the reader has a knowledge of the
Syste.1368 as defined in the IBn SISTEft/3611 PRINCIPLES OF
Operation, (GA22-6821) and the ISII Systell Sumllary, Order
Nuober GA22-6818.

66

G122-6988
!!UA ACQUISIUQ!! l!fl!£!ll ll!illllM lQ'!! U.!! il.!! lll!ll.!!.!368
l!Qm !!!
This publication prov:ldes information about the operation,
control, and interface of three special features:
.
Direct Nork
Direct Data channel
priority Interrupt
~hese features are particularly suitable for high-speed
data acqUisition and relatively complell': control applications
in the scientific fields.

CONTINUED FROM PRIOR COLUMN
GA 22- 6997

nm

g§11!!Ld.§.!! !!Q!!l!1

2.1

Operator1s Guide for the operating system in use at this
installation ..

FO NCUQ!!A1 ~!!!!£.!!t!l.!.l!.Ug;

This pllbllcation describes the organization and the
functional characteristics of the IBM System/369 Model 91,
an information- processing system. designed for ultrahighspeed, large-scale scientific and business applications.
The system components are described, and a detailed
consideration is given to the fUnctions of processor
storage, the central· processing unit, the iop ut/outpu t
channels, and the operator-control and operator-intervention
portions of the system control panel. In addition certain
coding and timing considerations are discussed ..
The reader is assumed to have a knowledge of
information-processing systems and to have read the IBH
System/368 Principles of Operation, (GA22-6821) ..
GA22-6998
Ill!! l!.!§1!l!!Ld.§.!! !!QQ.!:.1

~

GA22-692a
Ill!! SYS:!:lliJ§.!! !!Q!!M,

~

£.Ql!UGURATQji

Sheet shows all units that can be configured on the
Syste./369 Model 85.
GA22-6927
Ill!! l!..!l!.I1!!LJ&'!! !!Q!!M,

!l2

QRllllll!!ffi EJ!Qf1!!!!!!1l!.

This manual describes opez;oator procedures for an IBM. 2965
processing Unit, operating with or without an associated
IBH Operator Console Feature. The manual describes machine
functions, machine procedures, program-oriented procedures,
and operator intervention procedures. In addition,
appendices of reference material and an index are included.
The reader is assumed to have a knowledge of the
following SRL publications:
IBH System/36a Principles of Operation, (GA22-6821).

IBM Syste./369 Principles of Operation, (GA22-6821)
IBM SYSTEM/369 MODEL 59 FUNCTIONAL CHARACTERISTICS,

Orc1er Number GA22-6898
lBA SYSTEM/369 TAPE OPERATING SYSTEM OPERATING GUIDE,

Orc1er Number GC24-Sa21
IBM SYSTEM/369 DISK OPERATING SYSTEM OPERATING GUIDE,

Order Number GC24-5822
IBM SYSTEM/369 OPERATING SYSTEM OPERATOR'S GUIDE

oraer Number GC28-654a
.
(Of the three operating system publications listed
above, at least the one applicable to the system in use
shoulc1 be read by the operator.)

IBM SYSTEM/369 MODEL 65 FONCTIONAL CHARACTERISTICS,

Order Number GA22-6916
IBM SYSTEM/369 OPERATING SYSTEM OPERATOR'S GUIDE,

Order Number GC28-6549
For information pertaining to the operation of units
attachable to tbe Syntom/36B Model 85, refor to the
appropriato SOL publication. SIlL publications that pertain
to IBM SYGtom/36" ilnd attacbable units are abstracted and
referenced by Order Number in IBM Systom/369 Bibliography,

GA22-6999

!m! §'!§'!~l1Ld§..@. !1Q~~ 12. OPERllING g!lQ~!m~
This manual describes operator procedures for an IBK 2915
Processing Unit, operating with or without an associated
IBH HIS2 Printer-Keyboard. The manual describes system
control panel machine functions, machine procedures,
program-oriented procedures, and operator-intervention
procedures.. An appendix of reference material and an index
are included.
The reader is assumed to have a knowledge of the
following SBL publications:
IBti System/369 PrinCiples of Operation, (GA22-6821)
(sections on "system Structure" and "system
Control Panel ll )

GA22-6622.
G122-6935
H!! l!.I§1l!!!fl1.!! !!Q!!M, 165 f!1.!!£t!Q!!A1 flli~Ig;

This publication describes the organization and the
functional characteristics ~of the IBM System/379 !IIodel
165, an inforllation-processing system designed for very
high-speed" large-scale scientific and business
applications ..
The system components are described, and a detailed
consideration is given to the functions of processor
storage, the central processing unit, the input/output
channels, and the operator-control. and operator-intervention
portions of the system control panel. In addition, certain
coding and timing considerations are described ..
The reader is assumed to have a know ledge of
information-processing systems and to have an understanding
of the system/360, as that system is described in the IBM.

IBM SYSTEM/369 MODEL 75 FUNCTIONAL CHARACTERISTICS,
Order Number (GA22-6BB9)
IBK SYSTEM/36B TAPE OPERATING SYSTEM UPERATING GUIDE,

Order Humber GC24-Sa21
IBM SYSTEM/369 DISK OPEBATING SYSTEM OPERATING GUIDE,

Order Number GC24-5922
IBM SYSTEM1369 OPERATING SYSTEM OPERATOR'S GOlDE,
GC28-65~B

GA22-6919
Ill!! gl1.:!:llid.§.!! !!QQ.!:.!,

!~11 ~~M.Ld~!! ~~ l2 l.!!!£K!'Q!ll £!!!!!A£!ID!IST!£.§.
This publication describes the organization and the
functional characteristics of the IBH System/36B Hodel
85, an information-processing system designed for very
high-speed, large-scale scientific and business
applications.
The system components are described, and a detailed
consideration is given to the functions of processor
storage, the central processing unit, the input/output
channels, and the operator-control and operator-intervention
portians of the system control panel. In addition, certain
coding and timing considerations are described.

QRlllillING PROgDUREl!.

This manual describes operator procedures for an IBH 2859
Processing Unit, operating with or without an associated
IBM 1(;'52 Printer-Keyboard.. The manual describes machine
functions, machine procedures, program-oriented procedures,
and operator-intervention procedures..
An appendix of
reference materia~ and an index are also included.
The reader shoulc1 also refer to the following SRL
pUblications:

Order Number

GA22-6916

SYSTEM/369 PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION, Order No. GA22-6821.
The IBM SYSTEK/379 PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION, GA22-7aaa,

!!!l OPERATI!!§ PROCEDUREl!.

shou~d

This manual describes operator procedures for an XBK 20qq
processing Unit, operating with its associated Control
printer-Keyboard. The manual has sections devoted to
system control panel machine functions, machine procedures,
prograll-oriented procedures, operator-intervention
procedures, and com.mand examples, plus an appendix of
reference material, and a complete index.
The reader should also refer to the following SBL
publica tions:
IBK System/369 Principles of Operation, (GA22-6821)
(sections on System Structure and System Control

be used in conjunction with the IBM SYSTEM/369

PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION.
GA22-69ij2

ill

~!!a1.!!

MODM,

122

!:!!1!£:!:1ll]!!!' £!!~ACTE!l.!.l!.1Ig;

This publisation describes the organization, functional
characteristics, and features of the IBM System/319 Kodel
155. System components are described, and consideration
is given to the central processing unit, main storage,
input/output Channels, and the operator control and operator
intervention portions of the system control panel.
Instruction tilling information is also given ..
This publication is intended for users and potential
users of the Hodel 155. The reader is assulled to have
a background knowledge of data processing systems ..

panel)

IBK system/369 Kodel qq functional characteristics, Order
Number GA22-6B75.

IBK System/368 Kodel "4 PROGRAMMING SYSTEM, GOlDE TO
System use, order Number GC28-6812
IBK SYSTEM/369 MODEL ijij PROGRAMMING SYSTEM OPERATOR'S

Guide, Order Number GC28-681S
GA22-6911
Ill!! l!.Il1.:!:!l!!Ld.§.!! !!QDE L

G122-69ij3
Ill!! gSTEM/369 !!Q!!M, 195 FUN£t!Qlli\1 £lli\!l!£:E1!!ISTICS
ON

!l.!! Q!Ull!!1!!ffi J1!!.Qg!!Qlllll!.

This manual describes operator procedures for an IBM 2940
processing Unit, operating with or without an associated
IB!II 1952 Printer-Keyboard. The manual describes the system
control panel, system procedures, program-oriented
procedures, operator-intervention procedures, and IPL
procedures.. An appendix of reference material and an index
are also included. This manual is intended for the 11ode1
48 system operator.
The reader is assumed to have a knowledge of
information-processing systems and to have read the

67

This publication describes tho organization and functional
characteristics of the IBH systom/36" Hodo~ 195, an
information-processing system. designed for u~trahigh-speed,
large-scale scientific applications ..
system components are described, and detailed
consideration is given to the functions of processor
storage, central. processing unit, input/output channels,
and operator-control and operator-intervention pox:tions
of the system control panel. Coding and timing
considerations are discussed.
The reader is assumed to have a knowledge of
information-processing systems and to have read the IBM
Systelll/360 Principles of Operation, OLder Number GA22-6821.

CONTINOED FROM PRIOR COLOHN

Systell/318 Model 165 of programs IIIritten for the lOll 7889
Data Processing system.

GA22-69qq
~ll!l!!!t36B !!Q!lll! !~

£!!.!!llill!!llli!

sheet shows all unit.s that can be configured on the

Systell/368, lIode1 195.
GA22-6966
!!!!! gg!!..!!LJ1.!! !!.Q!lll! 155~!1!!! fl!~
This manual describes operator procedures for an 18ft
System/370 ftodel 155. (lachine coverage includes consol.e
indicators, switches, and keys; printer-keyboard; and
operating procedures. The manual is intended for the I!lodel.
155 system operator. The reader is assulled to have a
knowledge of information-processing syste.ll.s and to have read
the IBM SYSTEK/368 OPEBATIHG SISTEn: OPERATOR'S PROCEDURES,
GC28-6692.

GA22-6951
U!! :i.!!: l!M.!!l!!!£ !l!!l !!!§.illlll!!! !!fJlll!l!.!!.!§ !il!!!ll!
This manual for the IBft 58 "agnatic Data Inscriber (IIDI)
has heen prepared to satisfy the requirements of the
operator. It contains descriptions, in text and
illustrations, of all the possible operations. Included

are a general description of the machine and its
capabilities, procedures for readying the machine, and
detailed descriptions of operations, recovery procedures,
specific' applications, special features, and available
accessories.

GA22-6969
!~A SYSTEM{~l~ ~l!l. 165
g~ll!! !.!!!lW!! U n g

GA22-695q
!!!!! ~U!!tl~!!: !!Q1lll! 195 2f!!l!!!!.!!!! R.!!OCEDURl!~

This manual describes operator procedures for an IBft
system/368 Bodel 195, operating with or without an

associated IBII 1952 printer-Keyboard. This lIanual. describes
the system control panel, system procedures, programoriented procedures, operator-intervention procedures,
and IPL procedures. An appendiz of reference material
and an index are also included. This .anual is intended
for the Model 195 system operator.
The reader is assumed to have a knowledge of
information-processing systems and to have read the IBM
SYSTEn/36B OPERATING SYSTEft, OPERATOR'S GOIDE, order Ho.
GC28-65qB.
GA22-6955

1M

GA22-6983

~llUlltlZl! ~l!£ll!. lElTORE DESCRIPTION:

1.!!~L1!2.@L1!!2!!L1!!2!.

2fl!!!A!I!Q fl!2!;~~

This .ll.anual describes the manual operator procedures for an
IBIi Systell/37B Bodel 165. This material provides a guide to
performing the procedures which cover the bul.k of the
operator's job in operating the Model 165. '1'his publ.ication
is written for the Iforking opera tor who has already received
training in general computer operation. This book is
prepared specifically for the Hodel 165 system operator;
other lIodel.s have" their own aanua1s. Covering the overall.
dail.y .ll.anual. operation, this information includes Systell
procedures, Operator Intervention Procedures. How the system
Works (control panel.s), and supple.entary appendixes useful
for operating this model.. '1'he reader is assumed to have
read the IBft SISTEn/36S OPERATING SISTE!: OPERATOR'S
PROCEDURES, GC28-6692.

~!~!l!!lLJ1.!!

SfECIAl. rl!!1l!~ CHAHNEL-TO-CHAN.!!l!l. ~
g~ll!! ill!!ill U!!lli
This publication provides a functional. description of the
SYSTEK/37B Channel-to-ChaDnel Adapter. The system/37S aDd
System/368 channel.-to-channel. adapters are alike in fUnction
and similar in operation. This manual. describes all the
functions of the Systelll/36B adapter as provided in IBft
Systell/368 Special .Feature Channel-to-Channel Adapter, plus
unique System/378 extensions. seference information is
included vhich pertains to the adapter's use. operation, and
comllands, and status data required for the assellbly language
programming.
The reader should possess a basic tnowl.edge of data
processing syste.ll.s and, specifically, the laB System/37.0.
Such infor.ation can be found, for example, in the
Introduction to IBM Data processing systems, GC2S-1684, and
in the 188 Systea/378 system Suamary, GA22-7001.
This manual. is directed to the user who needs a
description of the adapter's function and operation, as veIl
as to the syste.s programmer, systeas engineer, or
maintenance personnel who need reference information in the
writing and aaintenance of asse.ll.bl.y language programs for
the channel.-ta-channel adapter.

II

£2!!UU!!ll!tt ~l!l:m!!! rl!!! i l l S YSTE K/:rr!!: !!Qlli i l l
This publication contains information about the IBK 1994
compatibility feature (.7119), whicb adds interpretive
facilities to syste'/37B Kadel 165 for use by the IBft 7S9Q
elllulator program. The cOlllbination of the feature and the
program (referred to as the 789lJ emulator) allows execution
on IBH systea/379 Hodel 165 of programs written for the
IBft 789, 709B, 7894, and 7994 II Data proceSSing Syste.s.
GA22-6956
~ll!!!..!!LlI!!: !!Q!ll!!. 165 £l!R.!2!!!!.m!!!
Diagra. of 3165 processing Unit and attachable channels
(no I/O units) showing capacities and all standard and
special features.

I!!.!!

GA22-6957
Ill!! SYsUlltlI!!: !!Q!ll!! !2~ CONFIGORATOl!
This sheet shovs standard and optional features, main
storage sizes by 1I0del, channel and sub-channel avail.abil.ity
by lIodel, and adapters required for console I/O units on
the Systell/37B ftodel 155.

GA22-7SSB

i l l gSTEKt31.!! f!!'!.!!l;.!f!.M !!l OPEBATI 2!!

The IBM System/37.0 is a data processing system that is
based on the IBH Systea/368 but that extends the
capabilities of that system. This manual describes
extensions to the functional design of the systea/369 that
are incorporated in models of the Systea/370.
The reader is assullled to have aD understanding of the
Systea/36S, as described in the IBH SISrEB/36B PRINCIPLES
OF OPERATION, GA22-6821.
The SISTEH/37B PRINCIPLES OF
OPERATION shoul.d be used in conjunction with the SYS'1'EII/360
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION.
Por information about the characteristics, functions,
and features of a specific Systell/379 model., use the
functional. characteristics manual for that model.

GA22-6958
~ll!!!..!!L37B ~l!!;nl. lRt!!!!l! DESCRm.!!!!!i. ZllB/7S74
£2!!fU!Ml.!tt ~l!l:m!!! rl!!! IBft ~Y!!tlI~ !!Q1lll! 165

I!!.!!

This publication contains inforamtion about the IBM
7978/1874 compatibility feature, which adds interpretive
facilities to systell/37B Kadel 165 for use by the IBn 7B74
emulator program. The cOllbination of the feature and t.he
progral (referred to as the 7074 ellul.ator) al.10ws execution
on 18ft Systell/370 Hodel 165 of progralls written for the
IBn 7B79 and 1974 Data processing Systems.
GA22-6962
!!!!! g~!l!!!L1Z~ !!Q!tl!l. 155 CHANNl!!. £!!ll!l£ll!!!~E~
This publication describes methods used to calculate
Systell/378 Model 155 data handling capabilities that are
dependent upon I/O-channel. configurations and operations.
Considerations of methods are al.so presented for priority
attach.ent of I/O devices for aaximum throughput ..
:Information related to specific I/O devices is contained
in separate systeas Reference Library publications. These
publica tions are listed by order DUllber and briefly
described in IBft Syste'136S Bibliography, GA22-6822.
This Mnual. is intended for users at the system
prograllller l.evel.; it assumes a thorough background in I/O
programlling techniques.
GA22-6963
!!!!! ~llU!!tlI~ :!fl!!;ll!. UUl!!!l! DESCRnUl!.!!
Z!!:!l!!: £Q.KPAT.!!!!!..!U Ulll!!l! ll!.!! !!!!! ~ll!!!!!il.Z!! llQJ!.l!l. 165
This publ.ication contains iaformation about the IBM 708B
compatibility feature, which adds interpretive facil.ities to
syste'/37S Model 165 for use by the IBB 7S88 emulator
proqram. The combination of the feature and the progralll
(referred to as the 70S9 ellul.ator) allows execution on IBII

68

GA22-7SB1
.!!!ll SJSTEHtJ1.!! ~llU1f ~ll!!
This publication is intended to provide basic inforlla tion
about IBft system/379, the data processing system based
on IBft System/368 but extending beyond the capabilities
of that syste.. The objective of this publication is to
help readers achieve a general. understanding of this data
processing system and of the interrelationships of its
components. Briefl.y discussed are the systea concepts,
features, individual. model.s, programlling syste.s. and
attachable input/output devices of Systelll/37B.
A basic knowledge of data processing systems, such
as that given in the IHTRODUCTION TO IBH DATA PSOCESSING
SYSTEIIS, GC29-1684, is assumed.
I!ore detailed information about Systea/378 is available
in IBH System/37S PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION, GA22-7BBS, and
the associated publ.ication, IBB SYSTEI!/36B PRINCIPLES OF
OPERATION,. GA22-6821. For aore information about any
individual. System/378 model, see the functional.
characteristics manual. for the model.

CONTINUED FROM PRIOR COLUI1."
Document Format
Document Corner Cuts
Document Feeding
This publication is for those familiar with programming
and operating the IBM 1418 and 1428, as described in these
system Reference Library publications:

G~22-7B32

§X§!g~}I~ IRf~!iQQ!fQ! CONPIgQRATIOR
This document highlights all of the Input/Output devices
that can be configured on the System/379.

G~2q-1q21

PROGRAMMING FOR THE IBH 1q18 AND IBM 1q28

Optical Readers, Order Number Gc24-1.091

IBM 1412 KAGNETIC CHARACTER READER MODEL I

This -reference-pubi'ica-tIOii-containsdetailed

information
about the keys, lights, switches, mechanical features, and
special features of the IBM 1412 M.agnetic cbat'acter Reader.
on-line and off-line data-flow and operating theory are
fully discussed with step-by-step procedures for each
reader operation.
Prograllming notes and error-correction
routines are also covered in detail.

IBM 1q18 OPTICAL CHARACTER READER AND IBM H28

Alphameric Optical Reader. Order Number GA2q".1473
GA2.-3089

TELE-PROCESSING AND DATA COLLECTION BIBLIOGRAPHY
ThIs bibliographyliSts-the-availablereference-li tera ture
for in'Stalling. programming, and operating IBH Teleprocessing and data collection eqUipment, used independently
or with several data processing systems.
For publications
on data communications equipment and programs associa ted
with a single data processing system. see the bibliography
for that system ..
Part 1 lists publications by major subjects.. This
sequence (subject code) may be used in building a library.
Part 2 is a cross-index of Tele-processing or data
collection eguip ment with associated data processing system ..
Part 3 contains the abstract of each Tele-processing
or data collection publication in form-numbered sequence ..
Copies of most f erm-numbered publications may be ordered
through the local IBM Sales Representative ..

GA2q-1qq6
IBn 1434 PRINTER
i~-14i4printer,.

The

an output unit for the IBM 14.01 Data
processing System and the IBH System/360, Models 39, 49,
and 53, is capable of printing either cut-card forms or
continuous forms.
This reference publication 'presents the
fUnctional and operational characteristics of the 141:14 ..
including the settings of the feed mechanism and the print
unit.
It also describes the read-compare special feature.
Informa tion on timing and on certain normal operating
procedu"res is presented.
.." -GA2q- H52
fl!IR:!: Q!!!ll:!:!

~QRgill'l!!nQR§

GA2q-3123

!!l!! lUi! !@ !!ll!. lq28

This pUblication contains a detailed description of the
print quality requirements of printing to be read by the
IBK 1418 Optical Character Reader and the IBH 1428
Alphameric Optical Reader. and to be used as input to an
IBI1. 14~1 Data processing system .. IBK 146" Data Processing
System, and IBK system/369. 11.0del 39. The use of printquality measuJ:'ing devices is fully explained with examples
of the range of acceptable printing produced by the IBK
497 Accounting Kachine, IBM 1403 Printer .. IBK SELECTRIC
Typewri ter and IBK Electric Typewriter ..

IBM 1443 PRINTER MODELS 1 TO 4 AND Nl
ll~ PRljiTER iQn~~ :1 AND-.!ll-~~fg!!1;!!I ~!tl.!Q.1!
This reference publication describes the operation of the
IBM 1443 and 1"'45 Printers with the IBn 1249, 14.01, 144.0,
145B, 1460, 180.0, and the IBH System/36.0 Data Processing
System Models 25 through 85 ..
The manual discusses timing information for the printer
and the tapecontrolled carriage, as well as their functional
and operating characteristics.. The speed of the printer
using tbe various character sets is described.
Also.
included is command, status, and sense information for
these printers used with the 18ft System/369 Data Processing
system.

IBM

GA2q-1 q73
!Jl~

lll!!

Q~I!~At.

£!!!.RAfllR

lt~AQM!

~lH1 lll~ llg!!.MHm~£ Qf!!£!~ ll!!1ilJ!!
This publication describes the operation of the IBM 1418
Optical character R~ader and the IBM 1428 Alphameric Optical
Reader used as input devices to an IBM data processing
system.
Included are a description of character and mark-reading
capabilities, off-line sorting, document-design
requirements, and examples of the range of acceptable print
quality of the documents to be scanned by both machines ..
The use of the IBM 1418/1428 Document Design and PDS Timing
Chart and the formulas for calculating document output and
maximum. character reading per document are also fully
discussed as an aid in optimizing the design of documents
to be read by both machines.

1£1~ ~!Q.,gR

2QR!gB. il.,t! 1112

~Mi!U;Il£

PUN~nQNAL ~l!!l!!gERISTICS

This reference publication describes the relationship of
the IBM System/369 Model 39 to the entire System/369.. The
system1s capabilities, features, I/O channels, and
operations are also discussed ..
GA2q-3232
Ill!! ;;!!l%!;.!!L}§l! J!Q!!ll

Jl! CONFIGURATOR

chart listing all units tha"t-can-be-configured on the
System/369 Kodel 3.0 ..
GA24-3255
!ll!! ;;!!l!E;.!!L1.§l! !!Q!!ll }~ .l!!J!.1Ll!l!H!L.l!!§~ £Q.!!llllJl!.!llX

GA 2q- 1 q99

I1H1

GA2q-3231
!Jl.!! ;;!!l%!!!L}§l! '!!Q!!ll }J!

IM!.!!.l!.!i

This publication describes the 14.01/1449/1469 Basic
Compatibility feature and associated subieatures for the
System/361Zl Hodel 39.. These special features enable a rapid
and simplified transfer from 14-'J1-, 144.0-, or 146.0-or iented
applications to the IBM system/36" Hodel 39 ..

9!AR ACll!! !!11.A],g.,B

This publication describes the operating characteristics,
controls, indicators .. and features of the IBM 1219 Reader
Sorter and the IBM 1419 Magnetic Character Reader.
Operating theory and procedures are given for off-line
operation of both machines and on-line operation of the
IBM 1419 within the 1"'"" series and System/369 ..
Document handling and data flow are discussed fully ..
and step-hy-step procedures and practical examples are
given for each machine.. programming notes and error
recovery procedures are also given.

GA2q-3256

IBM

1.?~

.2ll:!CAL

!t~AJLE!t

fQHPO!!.ID!I

Q~~£!!U!Q!i

PROC!!t!I!i~

AJill.

~!l!Q

This publication describes the IBM 1285 Optical Reader ..
The major topics include operating principles. controls
and operating procedures. programming for the IBH
System/369, and input tape and printing specifications ..

GA2q-3073
Ill!! l!illl RllI!!!lll! ~Q!H~QJ!!;R! !!;§~!liITIQ'!!

SYSTEl'IS REFERENCE LIBRARY MANUAL
planners, programmers,
and operators describes the functions and operations of the
IBM 1493 Printer. Special features available are describedi
timing information is presented; and print-quality
requirements are set forth.. The reader should be familiar ..
within his field of responsibility .. with the system to which
this printer is attached.
For system and programming
information, refer to publications listed in the
bibliography for the system.

T'hiS-re ference-PUblication for-system

GA2q-3312
IBH 2821 CONTROL UNIT

This -referencepublication presents a description of
input/output operations controlled through the IBH 2821
Control Unit.
The IBM 2540 Card Bead-Punch and the IBM.
14B3 and 14.04 Printers controlled by the IBI1. 2821 Control
Unit are briefly described ..
Commands. status, and sense information pertaining to
the attached input/output is presented.. programming timing
considerations for control unit, card :a:eader, card punch,
and printers are also presented ..

GA2q-33B 1

~~~ ~~~ii~~~r~~~d~~~~~~ ~~;a~~RR~~ ~~i~~~(~~n~;~~

GA2q-33q2
!!!!£l! l!!!!!Jl.!ll!IRJ< I!l!!~Jl.!l !Ql! !ll.!!

Mark) special feature.
This feature is available for the
IBM 1418 Optical Character Reader, and for the IBM 1428
Alphameric Optical Reader.. A description of these
functional specifications is included:
Document Specifications
Mark Reading

ll!!1

!@

1!!1.2

'!!!J<.!!!;n~ !.!!11

CHARACTER RECOGNITION HEADERS
T"hIS-pUblicatiOiideScrIiies-t:he fUnctions and features of
the Batch Numbering special feature when used with the IBM.
1241 Magnetic Ink Character Recognition Reader and the IBI!
1419 Magnetic Character Reader.

69

CONTINUED FRO" PRIOR PAGE

The operation of the keys, lights, and switches, as
vell as the programming information needed to operate the
feature, is covered in detail.

GA24-3599
Ill!! 1'<22 !!AGN~n£ !;!!!!!!l;.:!:];;!! BEA!!!!! !;Q!ll1Q'!!~ !!§.gBIPTION
This reference publication contains information about all
the features and functions of the IBH 1259 Magnetic
Character Reader. On-line and off-line data flow and
operating theory are discussed, with detailed programming
information and operating instructions for each reader
function.

GA24-3365
Ill!! §.I~,:!:t;!!LJ.§~ !!Q!!.ID. oW. 162B £2"PATIllllITY .!:U:!:!!.!!£;
This publication describes the IBtI 1620 COllpatibility
Feature for the IBK System/360' Hodel 30. This special

feature provides a means of rapid and simplified transfer
of 1620'-oriented applications to the IBM System/36B Hodel
3B.

GA24-3599
Ill!! 294~ Q~':!:!!;]!~£:1 ~];;l1£:!':!:£;~ !!"!!b1!.:!:IQ~ "ANY!1-P HYS!£!!.
l11A.!!.!!I.!!§
This publication provides physical planning information
for the IBH 294tt Data Channel Repeater Model 1 (master)
and Model 2 (remote) when used with the IBM system/36B.
Incl uded are physical specifications and cable, electrical
and environmental requirements.

G&24-3373

1M

~ll:rE&12~

1!Q!HU:! M

Q.f~il!!llli

!ll!IJlll

This reference publication describes operator procedures
for the IBM 20'30 Processing Unit and the IBft 10'52 Printer
Keyboard (attached to the IB" System/369 "odel 3B).

GA24-3519
Il!!! l!!§U!!LJ~!! !!2!!M ~2 r!!.!!f;UQ.!!!!.. £1!!RACW!lli!;§
This reference publication augments the IBM SrSXElf/368
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION, GA22-6B21. It describes the
relationship of the Hodel 25 to other Systelll/360 models:
system capabilities, systell control panel, input/output
channels and integrated IIO attachments, operations,
instruction timings, and system features.
The reader should have a knowledge of the System/360
as defined in the IBM S~SXEH/36.0 PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION.

GA24-3388
Ill!! ~~Z1fAf.!ssing environment, together with knowledge of the
binary synchronous method of data-link control as outlined
in the IBM Systems Reference Library publication, General
Inforation--Binary Synchronous Communications, GA27-33011.

GA32-9996
~!f:g 2~CIFIf!~IQ1§ ~QH 1M Q1i~!l!l
~§. !!!l! !H!!! !!H !!!Q J209 xg;

ll£!l

I!f~

1rnll.l§. All

This manual provides the specifications and requirements
for magnetic tape to be used on IBK Tape Drives. The
specifications are presented in two parts: General
information and Tape properties Essential for IBM Tape
Dri ve Use. The latter section covers minimum properties
required for tape use on all IBM Tape Drives.

!M

~!!l!!

!!Qll!!I. 2

!!A!l.!!~!£

GA33-3~~7 see page 228

GA33-3998

I!H1

~E.!~~L1Ii1 !!QQ~

112 =.

.'!:~g~!1!!b !Q!f1~!

1!f] llIL lQ!

INTEGRATED COMMUNICATIONS ADAPTER: SPECIAL FEATURE
DESCiIPiiON-M'ANuli--- -------- - - - - - - - TiliS'manuiI provides information for writing channel
peograms for the Terminal Adapter Type III subfeature in the
integrated communications adapteI: (rCA) base feature of the
IBM System/370 Hodel 135.
The manual is intended for applications programmers who
use assembler language and who are familiar with
input/output programming as described in IBM System/360
Principles of Operation (GA22-6821) and IBM System/370
Principles of Operation (GA22-7000).
The Terminal Adapter Type III subfeature allows the
Model 135 to communicate with remotely sited IBM 2260 or
2265 Display Stations, via IBH 2646 or 2645 Display
Controls, eespecti vely ..
The first section of the manual outlines the
rela tionship of the ICA to the CPU main storage and to the
external communication link..
Subsequent sections give
details of transmission codes, methods of error detection,
special characters, commands, status and sense information,
and communication peoced uees ..

GA33- 3099

!!!1! gSTE!lL379 !!Ql!l!.!. 135 2!!!£llRONOUS OAT! !.!!APTE!!
lrl!R !QU gEl!!. UATO!!l! !l~.s.CRlpnQ!!
lllllI~l! lll!!!ARY l!!1!J!A1

ll~

II..

This manual provides reference inforlDation for programmers
writing channel prograllls for the Synchronous Data Adapter
Type II subfeature in th~ Integrated Commmunication Adapter

GA32-9997
~!!~Ql!!l..!!! !l!!~£RHnQ!!

!!!~ §'!~1.MLJ~~ ~Q]!1 1~~ fQ!H:l§Y!!!1Q,g =. .§.!,§,± EMS bll!l!.!!
PUBLICATION
This -isasingle-sheet, foldout publication that summarizes
the Model 135 features and their prerequisites and
limitations. Control storage requirements for different
feature combinations are listed..
The reverse side of the
sheet is devoted to the subfeatures that are required in the
integrated cOllmunications adapter (ICA) for use with
start/stop, display, and binary synchronous type remote
terminals.

nfl! J!!!!!

This bulletin describes the characteristics, functions,
and features of the IBM 2"20 Model 5 Magnetic Tape Unit.

(ICA) feature of the IBK System/319 Hodel 135.

The Synchronous Data Adapter Type II subfeature al.lows
the Hodel 135 to communicate with other processing systems
and terminals that operate under binary synchronous
communications procedures ..
The manual is intended for applications programmers who
use assembler language and who are familiar with
input/output programming as described in IBM System/360
l»rinciples of Operation (GA22-6821) and IBM System/310
Principles of Opeeation (GA22-7090). The reader should also
be falliliar with the basic principles of binary synchronous
communications, such as is given in General Information Binary Synchronous Communications (GA27-3984).
The first section of the manual out.lines the
relationship of the ICA to the CPU main storage and to the
external communica tion link; the second section summarizes

GA32-9915

!!!l! :l.!!.1!!LJ9.11 l!!!1!!l!!l£ nfl! lill!!g~l!!! £Q!!RQ!!!!!IT .s.!!!!!!!J!!
!!!.!!!!!I.

This manual will give potential customers a general
introduction to the 3"10/3"11 Magnetic Tape Subsystem.
The manual describes the IBM 3,,10 !1odels 1,2, and 3
Magnetic Tape onits and the IBM 3411 Magnetic Tape
Unit and Control.

77

CONTINUED FROB PRIOR PAGE

the principles of binary synchronous communications.
subsequent sections give details of the transmission codes
used in the Synchronous Da ta Adapter Type II, the error
detection methods used,. control characters,. commands, status
and sense information, and operations of the adapter.
GA33-3919
I!!l! :>~u.!!L;nl! !!QUI. 135 !d!!mI. 9!!l!A!;U!!IaU~a
l!~U'!! ll1!.!l!!!! !!URA!.
This lIanual provides informatioD needed for checking that a
proposed configuration of I/O devices on the channels of IBK
system/37S will work satisfactorily. The book is intended
for Qse in systems assurance work at the planning stage.
Procedures with examples are given for testing the
effects of imposinq heavy loads aD the M04el 135 channels.
The effects covered are: data overrun, loss of davice
performance, channel interference vith the CPO, program
overrun, and excessive channel utilization.
Additional but related topics covered in the book are:
(1) priority sequence of devices on the byte- multiplexer
channel (with examples that include the 1419 lIagnetic
Character Reader with expanded capability); (2) tba effects
of clock-multiplexing on channel busy time and percentaga
channel utilization: and (3) channel prograllming
conventions,. upon which the validity of test procedures in
the book is based.
prerequisi te Po blications
The reader must be familiar with System/37e input/output
operations as presented in:
IBB system/369 Principles of Operation GA22-6821
IBB system/379 prinCiples of Operation GA22-7eee
IBM system/379 Hodel 135 Functional Characteristics
GA33-39B5
IBM System/369 and System/379 Interface Channel Unit
original Equipment Hanufacturers Information GA22-6974.
Por testing data ovarrun on the byte-multiplexer channel,
the following special worksheet in required: IBli System/378
Model 135 Byte-Multiplexer Channel: Load Sum iorksheet GX336994.

SBOP-6193

l1![ l1!lQ.!lU'!! !!UHBll!!

.1§~M::lli

PTP listings for program DUllber listed in title above.

SBOP-6196
I1U 11!Q.!l!ll!.!! !!!!!!M!! J§l!§.:£.!!.:524
PTF listings for program number listed in ti tie above.
SBOF-6199
I1U l1!lQ!1ll.!! !!!!!!§.Jl!! 36BS-CB-5~a
PTF listings for program nUlllber listed in title above.
SBOF-6119
I1U PROGB!!! .!!!!Mll!! 369~CI-595
PTF listings for prograll. number listed in title above.
SBOP-6113

:fU J1!!2ll.!!!.!! !!!!1!!!ll!! J2M.:g:aJa

P'rF listings for program number listed in title above.

SBOF-6116
l1!f l1lU!!lIll!!! l!!!l!.!!ll!! J§.!!a:CI- 5 aa
PTF listings for prograll. number listed in title above.
SBOF-6119

:fU 11!!Qll.!!!.!! !!!!J!!!M J§.!!l!:£!l=a!;l

PTF listings for program number listad in title above.

SBOF-6122

l1![ RJ!Q.!l!!!! !!!!!!!!ll!!

J§.!!~CQ- 513

.PTP listings far program number listed in ti tIe above.

SBOP-6125
I1U l1!lQ!l!I!!! !!!!!!!!ll!! J6BS-CO-519
PTF listings for program number listed in title above.

GA33-459B

Ul! l!!Ulli1§l! £!l!!I1Q!!~I !!!l!£!!IWQJ!l! : ;1~§ I1lPER lin
!;!!!!UQL !!!!U 1l!1Z UI1ll!! IUll l!l!!J!ll!! l.l!!.!! 11l!I1U lin l1l!!!~!!
'l'his publication describes the above nailed paper tape
input/output components for the reading and punching of
paper or Mylar. tape. Attachment is to the multiplexer
channel of the IBM System/36e Models 25, 39, 49, and 59.
The cbannel commands necessary to control the operation
of the above units, and the status and sense bytes provided
by the control unit,. are fully described.
controls, tape specifications,. tape-splicing procedures,
tape-loading procedures, and special features are also
described.

SBOP-6128
I1U PROGRA K !!!!!!!!ll!! 36e~£ll::a~
PTF listings for program number listed in title above.
SBOF-6131
I1U l1Il.Q.!l!!!'!! NUHBll!! J2M:!!!!~
PTF listings for program numher listed in title above.
SBOP-6137

:fU 11!!.Q!lll'!! l!!!.!!!!M J§.!!a:.ll.!!:a;11

GA36-S9B2

Ill!!

PTF listings for program number listed in title above.

~!U!l

lUI! UAmlHLru!mID

This publication provides basic information about the IBM
4481 Pilm Reader/Recorder, with the objective of helpin9
reader to acbieve a general understanding of the machine's
operation, its interface with the IBI! System/36B through
the lBI! 1827 Data control Onit, and its functional
characteristics. programming considerations, timing
information,. operator controls, and installation planning
are discussed in detail.

SBOF-6149

l1!1. l1!lQ!l!!!.!! !!!!!!!!M J6eS-!!!!:aJJ

PTP listings for program number listed in title abova.

SBOP-6143
I1U I1RQ.!l!!!!! !!!!l!.!!ll!! J2M:DN-539
P'l'P listings for program number listed in titla above.

GA36-Sge3
SBOP-6146

!l.!!U ULl! Rll.!1.lli!lI\£QMR PROGU,!!I!U!.§. l1!!I!!l!

This publication provides information that will enable
the user to write programs for the IS" 4481 Pilm
Reader/Recorder. Pro9ramming considerations are discussed
prior to acquainting the user with the software support
designed for his use. The user-oriented support programs
comprise a set of macro-instrUctions whicb control data
flow between the System/36B Central Processing Unit and
the Film Reader/Recorder,. and a selection of PORTRAN
callable sllbroutines and image handling progralls Ifhich
perform transmission of data to and froll the Film
Reader/Recorder.

l1!1. l1Il.Q.!l!!!'!! .!!!!Mll!! .1§!S-DN-52!!,

PTP listings for program number listed in title above.

SBOP-6149

l1![ l1!!.OGBA!! !!!!1!!!M

J§.!!~ED-5;11

PTF listings for prograll number listed in title above.

SBOP-6152
I1U 11!!Q.!l!!l!.!! !!!!!!!!ll!! J§'!!~~
P'l'P listings for program number listed in title above.

LBOP-2963
*N
.!!~ aQR!l!!I Ql1l!RAl1QH : ~! : £QQ!I§E £QQl! A9B8;1
This Bill of Forms number permits ordering student materials
UDder one form nu»ber. One each of the following forms are
included: tu SR29-0133 SR29-9136 SR29-9137

SBOF-'6155

l1![ l1Il.Q.!lU!! !!!!!!!!!!I J60S-PO-52l!

PTF listings for program number listed in title abo,e.

SBOP-6158
u,[ RJ!Qlil!!!! .l!!!J!l!ll!! J2M:lJl:a2!!
PTF listings for program number listed in title above.

SBOF-61B9
~I[

I1RQgHA.!! !!Y~~! 1§!~:!L-511
PTF listings for program number listed in title above.

SBOP-6161
I1U I1!!Q!l!ll!.!! !!Y!!!!!!I J§'!!~!Q:all
PTF listings for program. number listed in title ahoye.

78

SBOF-6164
PTF PROGRAK NUMBER 36BS-IO-526

PTF lIstings -forprogram - numii"er

SBOF-6225
PTF SERVICE AIDS

PTP

listed in title above.

SBOF-6167

as

lIstIngs -0£"operating system Service Aids ..

SBOF-623B

PTF PROGRAM NUMBER 36"S-LD-547

PTP :CiSt:ings-forprogra-m number

PTF PROGRAM NUKBER 360N-AS-465

PTF

listed in title above.

SBOF-617B
PTF PROGRAM NUMBER 36BS-LM-5B1

PTF liStings -"forprogralll nUiiber

listingsforprogramliUttiber listed in title above.

SBOF-6232

R1:1

listed in title above.

~ftQ§!!!ll

lUUrnru!

J.§!!!,:.AS-4~~

PTt' listings for program number listed in title above.

SBOF-6173

SBOF-6234
Rn R!!QQl!!~ !!!!.!!l!El! l§J!li::!;l!=!!g
PTF listings for program number listed in title above.

R~K RRQgS!~ li[~~S d&BS-LM-5!~

PTF listings for program number listed in title above.
SBOF-6176
nK R!!QgSM !![!!~!! lliM::!Jt2la

SBOF-6236
PTF PROGRU NUMBER 36BN-CB-468
PTF lIstings forprogram number listed in title above ..

SBOF-6179

SBOF-6238
PTF PROGRAM NUMBER 36BN-CB-482
'PTP lIstings - for
number listed in title above.

PTF listings for program number listed in title above.

R~K

R!!Qgl!M li~~!! 36BS-LM-532
PTF listings for program number listed in title above.

program-

SBOF-6182
Rn RRQgl!!~ liQ!!~!! d&~=!.M-511
PTF l.istings for program number listed in title above.

SBOF-624B

SBOF-6185
PTF PROGRAM NUMBER 36BS-LM-542

listed in title above.

SBOF-6242
Rn RROG!!!.!! !!!!MEl! lliBN-cQ-469
PTF listings for program number listed in title above.

RRQgl!M li!!~~l! d&BS-J,M-546
PTF listings for program number listed in title above.

SBOF-6244
En R!!Qg!!M Nual!El! 1&BN-CQ-47B
PTF listings for program number listed in title above ..

SBOF-6192
En: RRQgl!!!! NUKBER 36BS-NL-511
PTF listings -for-program number listed in title above.

SBOF-6248
En R!!Qg!!M !!!!!!J!M ill!!::!!!!::!!!li
PTr listings for program number listed in title above.

SBOF-6195

PTF listings for program number listed in title above ..

'!§'M=RL.=2~~

SBOF-625B
f n Rl!QQl!M !!M!!IDl lli!!.!!::EU-484
PTF listings for program number listed in title above.

SBOF-619B
PTF PROGRAK NuaBER 36BS-PT-516
PTP lIS'tiligs-for-program number listed in title above.

SBOF-6252
PTF PROGRAK NUMBER 36BN-EU-485
PH IIS"tIiigsforprogramn'Uiber listed in title above.

SBOF-62B1

!'H!!!ID;! J.§!lli::..l!£=lli

SBOF-6254
PTF PROGRAK NUKBER 36BN-FO-451
PTF listings forprogramnUiiber listed in title above ..

R~K E!!Qg!!!!! li~~!! d&BS-l!£=.2!!!

PTF listings for program number listed in title above.

SBOF-6256
En R!!Qgl!M @MEl! lliBN-K!l.::.!!.12
PTF listings for program number listed in title above.

SBOF-62B7
PTF PROGRAa NuaBER 36BS-RC-543
piP' :lIstings -forprogramWmber listed in title above.

SBOF-6258
En ERQg!!!l! @.!!l!IDl 1§J!N-IO-4a'!.
PTE listings for program number listed in title above.

SBOF-621 B
UK E!!Qg!!!!! NuaBER 36BS-RC-551
PTF listings -forprogramIiUDiber listed in title above.

SBOF-626B

SBOF-6213
PTF listings -for-program number listed in title above.

SBOF-6262
PTF PROGRAM NUMBER 360N-IO-456
PTP lIstIngs-fOrprogramnuiiiber listed in title above.

SBOF-6216
Rn E!!QgJ!!!! li[~~l! d&!!l!~!!=.@ll
PTF listings for program number listed in title above.

SBOF-6264
. E~K E!!Qg!!M li[M.!!!! llil!!!::!Q::!!ll
PTE listings for program number listed in title above.

SBOF-6219

SBOF-6266
En R!!Q!l!!M NUKB IDl lli[[::!Q::!!2.l!
PTP listings for program number listed in ti tIe above ..

PTF lIstings -"forprogramrnile'r

f~f

E!!Qgl!!.!! NUMl!El! lliBN-!;L-4.21
PTF listings for program number listed in title above ..

SBOF-6188
R~K

~!£: ggQfH~!!!

~~[ ~!lQ~!l1

ID!!1n!

PTF listings for program number listed in title above ..

SBOF-62B4

R~K

E~f.

E~K R!!Qg!\!~ !!Ml!M lli[[::!Q::!!.2.2

PTF listings for program number listed in title above.

RRQgl!M NUKBER 36BS-RG-B38

PRog!!M li[!!~!! 1!iM::!!T-5B§.

PTF listings for program number listed in title above.

SBOF-6222
PTF KODQLE GENERA TION - as
'PTF listings-foroperating System Kodule Generation.

SBOF-6266
RIf f!!Qg!!M NUMB.!!l! 1.!il!!!-IO-47§.
PTF listings for program number listed in title above.

79

SECTION 2:

!RIR!~§' A1!12~ 1:Q ~H!§ J1!IH~!mBi~r-iRR- Inl;HIl.l.Um !!! A !l!! !!!Q!£!1:Q!!
IQ Il!!l l!!.!1l!I Qf Ill!l Ql!~!ll! Hl!!!.!!!ll! ..

SBOF-6218

GB21-SSST
1l1l.!!!l!!!llH!! H1!!fH 2fll'!!Q!!ll!!!i ~!!Q.!1l!!!! lVSPl NETWOBK
lQR 1~ !1!§~l!!!~ lll1.!! DEVELOPII2. fRQ.2RAH
!Yll!.!l!U!!! '!!Q!!!;ll
~!!'Q!lRA ft NU ".!!.!!l! 212§.::ll!
Provides the Los Angeles based distributor a new method of
implementing the IBH Vehicle Scheduling Program (360A-ST86X). The network and its associa ted prog ram elimina te the
need for each distributor to develop his own VSP maps.

~I!:: ~l!Q.!1l!!!!

.!!l!!!.!!!ll! J.§l!J[=!Q=!!ZZ
PTP listings for program number listed in title above.

=

SBOF-6212
~I~ ~.!1l!!!! .!!l!!!~l!

368N-IO-41.!!
PTF list.lngs for program number listed in title above.

SBOF-6214

SB21-SS92
GENEBALIZED VEHICLE SCHEDULING PROGRAM
NETWORK-POR LOS-ANGE~FIELo-DEViLOPED PBOG.!!!!!
QE~nf~iQiLOPERAT!Q~ !!iiiUAj; =PROGgM J!!l~~~ 579B-All
Describes the capabilities of the system and the programs.
Discu'Ssion of design assumptions and potential modification
areas are included. Record and file layouts are descrihed
and primary processing procedures specified. This manual is
both a systeD. description and an installation and operations
reference document ..
Provides the Los Angeles based distributor a new method
of implementing the IBH Vehicle Scheduling program (360A-ST861). The network and its associated program eliminate the
need for each distributor to develop his own YSP maps.

~IT ~l!Q.!1l!!!!

NunBER 368N-PL-464
PTP listings -forproqraii-iiUiber listed in title above.

SBOF-6216
~IT ~l!Q.!1l!!!! .!!!!!!~l! J.§8N-PT-45~

PTP listings for program number listed in title above.
SBOF-6218

m

~l!Qlll!!!! !!Q!!.!!!l!! 368N-RG-468
PTF listings for prograll Dumber listed in title above.

SBOP-628S

m

LB21-SSS3
H!!!f!Jl §£l!ll!!l!!.!..!!!l f!!.Q!ll!!!!
.!1!l!!~!!!!.!~!!! !§f .!!llTWORK fQ!! !Q§ !.!!.!1ll!.~ CALIFORNIA:
FIELD DEVELOPED PROGRAM SYSTEMS GUIDE fiiQ§ii!!! !!Q!!.!!!ll!-2798- AAA - - - - - - - - The Generalized VSP Network for Los Angeles provides a means
for creating a routing network within the Los Angeles hasin
(all of Los Angeles and Orange counties located south of the
Santa Susanna and San Gabriel mountain ranges). This manual
provides program flowcharts, program listings, and operating
instructions for the Hap selection, Link Verification, and
Zone Selection Programs. These programs are used to develop
a network unique to a given distributor.. Licensed program
Product material.
Provides the Los Angeles based distributor a new method
of implementing the IB! Vehicle Scheduling Program (360A-ST861). The network and its associated program eliminate the
need for each distributor to develop his own VSP maps.

~l!Qill!! !!!!!!~!! .J.§!!!::l!n-US
Pi'F listings for prograll number listed in title above.

SBOP-6282
~I~ ~!!Q.!1l!!!! .!!!!!!~l!

J.§8N-Sn-45S
PTF listings for program Dumber listed in title above.

SBOP-6284
fIT fl!Q.!1RAn .!!!!!!.!!.!!!! J.§ru!-sn-483
Pi'P listings for program DUllber listed in title above.
SBOF-6286

~~ t~~:!:s llJ~~=r!:::;S:;:~:r

listed

in

title

above.

SBOF-6288
GB21-SST9

f1~

fl!Q.!1RA" l!!!!!BEB 368N-SV-414
PTP listings for proqram number listed in title above.

=

~Z1~22 l!.!!!!ill !!!!;l! nnx gggJ! ll!!!DEB !!Q~ BT HI
!:!!R
!yAILABl!.ITY !!Q!!!;!l
~Q!l... !!!h. 2198-ill
This program provides ability to transmit, capture on disk,
balance, and settle batches of HICR encoded bank documents.
Operating under DOS BTUI, it accumulates totals by
application or type of entry for each bank.

=

SBOF-629S
PTF ~l!Q.!1l!!!! .!!!!!!~l! J.§ru!::l!!::!12
PTP listings for program number listed in title above.
SBOF-6292
PTF fl!Q.!1l!!!! !!!!!!~l! 36S9-SV-486
PTP listings for prograll number listed in title above.

sa21-sall
~ZZU1255

!!t;!!Qll II!!;!!

U!.!!! SYSTEM
!!ill!!.

~OGRAn !!!l.~!!ll!l~llJ!ll!Q..!!

fl!Q.!1l!!!! !!l!!!.!!ll!! 2ll8- AlQ
This lIanual describes the capabilities of the system and the
programs. Discussion of design assumptions and potential
modification areas are included.. Record and file layouts
are described, and primary processing procedures specified.
This .anual is both a system description and an installation
and operations reference document.
This program provides ability to transmit, capture on
disk, balance, and set.tle batches of HICB encoded bank
documents. operating under DOS BTA!, it accullulates totals
by application or type of entry for each bank ..

SBOP-6294

m

~.!1l!!!! .!!!!!!~!! 36S9-SV-!!§1
PTF listings for program number listed in title above.

S80P-6296

m

~l!Qlll!!!! !!!!!!!!.!!l! 36S9-SV-488
PTP listings for prograa number listed in title above.

SBOF-6298
~IT

fl!Q.!1l!!!! .!!!!!!~!! 36SR'-U'l'-461
PTP listings for program number listed in title above.

LB21-S912

=

~11S11255 l!.!!!!Q!Jl !!!£l! .!!.!!!!!I ll§!ll!!
§~ GUIDE
IDllBAft !!l!!!.!!.!!l! 2ll~ll1l
This nUser's Hanual" is for the systems Analyst, programmer
and operator during the Systems Test and Daily Operations o:f
the programs. It also contains programmer notes to assist
in making minor al terations.
This program provides ability to transmit, capture on
disk, balance, and settle ba tches of MICR encoded hank
documents. Operating under DOS BTAM, it accumulates totals
by application or'type of entry for each bank ..

SBOF-6388
f1~

Rl!Q.!1!!!!! !!!!!!~!! J!!9N-UT-46~
PTF listinqs for program number listed in title above.

SBOF-63S2

fIT

fRQ.!1l!!!! !!!!!!~!! 36SN-UT-463
PTP listings for prograll number listed in title above.

Ga21-SS19
SBOF-63S4
fI[ ~l!Q.!1RA~ !!!!!!~!! 3699-UT-471
PTP listings for program DUllber listed in title above.

U!!!£!.!l !!U.!!U!!.!!£.!! !'!!Q fll§! !!!!!.!lll!
nn!! !!llUl&fll.!! .f!!Q!lBAft AI!!!.!.!!!!.!!! !!Q!ICE
fl!Q.!1l!!!! .!!!!!!l!.!!l! 5198-AAG
This manual provides programs which assist in controlling
Ilaintenance cost of equipment. This is accomplished by
processing vehicle information in a manner that facilitates
the lIeasurellent and evaluation of equipment performance.

SBOF-63S6
fI~ fl!Q.!1!!!!! !!!!!!!!U .J.§!!!::!!T-412
PTF listings for program number listed in title above.

sa21-SSlS
SDOF-6388

!ll!il:ill !!!!J!U!!!..!!f.!!

!@ fll§! !l!!!.!ll§
nn!! !!llU!QPED fl!Q.!1.!!!!! l!.!!2fl!U:!:!!ll!lQf.!!l!!TIOHS .!IA HUAL
~Q!lBA8 !!!!!!!!U 2ll~ll.!1
This lIanual describes the capabilities of the system and the

Ut gU!£! !l!!l! !!Ql!

PTP listings of Disk operating system Service Aids.

80

SECTION 2:

~liTl!!~2 !!m~ 1:Q THIS !!!!!1I.2§.!!!i!!X:-:AE:g-IRJ;;EI!!!EQ !!! II !J!~ !Ji~!f.!!Q!!
!.Q !.!!] B.!.ill!:!: f!f I!:I~ Q!!~~li !!!!!!!!]li~
CONTINUED FROM PRIOR PA.GE

CONTINUED FROM. PRIOR COLUMN

programs.
Discussion of design assumptions and potential
modification areas ar:e included. Record and file layouts
ar:e desct"ibed and primary pr:ocessing procedures are
specified. This manual is both a system descr:iption and an
installation and operations reference documen t ..
Provides programs which assist in controlling the
maintenance cost of equipment. This is accomplished by
processing vehicle information in a manner that facilitates
the measurement and evaluation of equipment performance.

specified. This manual is both a system. description and an
installation and operations reference document.
This program provides routines which allow users of
CS/30 or CS/4~ to take advantage of the high-speed 005/36"
Tape and Disk Sort program for sorting emulated 1311 diSK
files.
Independent input and output routines are provided
which allow the 005/36., Sort (36tlN-SM-lalf83) o£ the Program
Product (5136-SM1) to read and write disk files in emulator
format.
Improvements in sorting times over Sort 5 or Sort 6
running under CS/31a will be as great as 7iJ percent.

LB21-0021
VEHIC·LE MAINTENANCE AND COST ANALYSIS
fI~b:g:-Q£;i~1QR~Q-fRQ~RM §:!~!EH~-Qli!Qli.L
PROGRAM NUMBER 5198-A.AG
ThiS:-nasec's-Hanualn-iS: for the Systems Analyst, Programmer
and Operator during the Systems Test and Daily operations of
the proqrams.
It also contains programmer notes to assist
in making minor alteL'ations.
The manual provides programs which assist in controlling
the maintenance cost of equipment. This is accomplished by
processing vehicle information in a manner that facilitates
the measurement and evaluation of equipment performance.
GB21-0328
PROGRAM REPORT INVENTORY SYSTEM - FIELD DEVELOPED PROGRAM
AVAILABILITY-UOTICE-:-PROGRAM-NUM8ER-S79B=AAK-- ------As-data-process:r;;g-syste;sbecome--;oreadvanced, user
demands for greater productive out-put are increasing. Data
processing departments are vitally concerned with more
difficult questions concerning efficient operations,
scheduling, and programming.
These answers can be supplied through the Program/Report
Inventory System.
This set of six ANS COBOL programs
provides management documentation for the analysis of vital
progl:am and report information.

SB21-ilil2Q
r!iQ.~Rhli R~Q!LT

llyg!tT9.!t!

~STE~

~~g~~~ *~~~~~~J~~- ~*~RtlIQ1!~ l1!lli!!b
This-iiianual-descrlbeS:the capabilities of the system and the
programs.
Discussion of design assumptions and potential
modification areas are included.
Record and file layouts
are described, and primary processing procedures are
specified.. This manual is both a system description and an
installation and oper:ations refer:ence document ..
As data processing systems become more advanced, user
demands for greater: productive output are increasing.
Oa ta
process ing departments are vitally concerned with more
difficult questions concerning efficient operations,
scheduling, and programming.
These answers can be supplied through the Program/Report
Inventory System.
This set of six ANS COBOL programs
provides management documentation for the analysis of vital
program and r:eport information.
LB21-fHB13
f.liQ.~R!.!i REPORT INVENTORY SYSTEM - SYSTEM GUIDE
PROGRAM NUMBER 579S=iiK- ---- - ----- ---ThiS:-User'S:-Manual-ISfor the System Analyst, Programmer,
and Operator during the Systems Test and Daily Operations
of the program. It also contains programmer notes to assist
in making minor alterations.
As data processing systems become more advanced, useJ:
demands for greater productive output are increasing.
Data
processing departments are vitally concerned with more
difficult questions concerning efficient operations,
scheduling, and programming.
These answers can be supplied through the Program/Report
Inventory System.
This set of six ANS COBOL progL'ams
provides management documentation for the analysis of vital
program and report information.

GB21-0il34

2Q.R! ]!!1 .Rlli!!!1!E2 KQft

QI~~ QR.~R!:!:!!!9 ~X~1:]!1
I!~1Q Q~Yl~]!Q£§R £liQ~!i!!i

= K1llli

::.

~Ll~L.9.~ K!.!&~
f.!if!§l!!~ Ey'!g!~!i 21~§'=A!n

This program provides £outines which allow users of CS/3l1 01:
CS/40 to take advantage of the high-speed 005/360 Tape and
Disk Sort progt"am for: sorting emulated 1311 disk files ..
Independent input and output J:outines are pl:ovided which
allow the 005/3613 Sort (360N-SM-1iI483) or the program Product
(5136-SM1) to read and write disk files in emulator format.
Improvements in sOL'ting times over Sort 5 or Sort 6 running
under CS/313 will be as great as 113 percent.
5B21-0335
DISK OPERATING SYSTEM SORT EXIT ROUTINES FOR CONTROL SYSTEM
1~iLl~2~f!-Ei1&~-=-fim;Q-~En1Q~QE~Q§B!]-M~£ll~jQ:H--OPERATIONS MANUAL - PROGRAM NUMBER 5198-AAM
ThIs-manual-describes-the-capabilitIesof-the system and the
programs.
Discussion of design assumptions and potential
modification areas are included. Record and file layouts
are described, and primary processing procedures are

81

LB21-3e 36

Q!.§.K QfE1!A1!.H§ §1§I]l1 2.Qj~ j};!I '!!Q.!IT!!~ l!lli
£~a!lL!l!! ll11Hl ~ll:E.!l.!l~ iiY!ll.!l
~!!Qll!!l!.!l !f!!J!!!.!i!! 212Jl::Ml!

=

This I Userls Manuall is for the Systems Analyst. Programmer.
and Operator during the SystelRs Test and Daily Operations of
the programs. It also contains progl:ammer notes to assist
in mdking winor al teratioos.
This progl:am provides routines whicn. allow users of
CS/30 or C5/40 to take advantage of the high-speed D05/360
Tape and Disk Sort program for sorting emulated 1311 disk
files.
Independent input and output routines are provided
which allolf the DOS/36111 Sort (36I!1N-SH-0483) or the Program
Product (5136-SM1) to read and write disk files in emulator
format.
Improvements in sorting times over Sort 5 or Sort 6
running under CS/30 will be as great as 716 percent.

GB21-0343

Q!!b!I! fll!.!H';;!ll gil!!!!!!!
gll2ll!!l!l! .!!!!!!.!!.!l!! ~12Jl::!l!2

£Q~I:!.!!:;

~!aXM

A.llll!A!!!ilI! !QI!g

This Public Utility Financial Planning System, for the
System/36~ Model 25 and above. provides a tool to assist the
corporate planning function of electric, gas. and
combination utilities.
Rather than attempt to forecast the future based on
statistical analysis of past data, this system projects data
into the future based on management estimates of future
performance..
The user provides current financial and
opeJ:ating data, as well as planning assumptions about future
values of the data items..
Based on this information. the
system produces projected financial statelllents for a fiveyear planning: period. These documents would be used by
corporate planners to evaluate the given plan ..
5B21- 3344

f.!!!!!£!!&

~!!.!!I:!.I!:; Q.tll!!II.
f!&!ili!!Q. §.!alll1
f!iQ~M!1 ::. gROGR!1j ~29tilI!Q!! Q.f'§R!!IQ1!~
fliQ~Rb.!1 NUM!!]!! a12!!=l!!2

=
K!.§bR
!lAIDlltT:!

!!!!11&fEQ

This manliaI describes the capabilities of the syste. and the
programs..
Discussion of design assumptions and potential
modification areas are included.
Record and file layouts
are described. and primary processing procedures are
specified.
This manual is both a system descJ:iption and an
installation and operations reference document.
The Public Utility Financial Planning System. for the
system/363 J1o~el 25 and above, provides a tool to assist the
corporate planning function of electric, ~as, and
combination utilities.
Rather than attempt to forecast the future based on
statistical analysis of past data, this syst~m projects data
into the future based on management estimates of future
performance..
The usar pl:ovidcs current financial and
operating data, as well as planning assumptions about future
values of the data items. Bd!ied on this information, the
system produces pl:ojected financial statements for a fiveyear planning period. These documents would be used by
corporate planners to evaluate the given plan ..
LB21-e345
R~l!!~ !rIll!!! l1!!!!!fI~ .Fb!!!!!!!!Q §!JIl;t! §.Yl'!!l;
g!!Qll!!l!1! NUM!!.!l!! 212Jl::M2
_

This 'User's Manual' is for the Systems Analyst. Programmer,
and Operator during the SystelRs Test and Daily Operations of
the programs..
It also contains programmer notes to assist
in making minor al tera tions.
The Public Utility Financial Planning system, for the
System/360 Hodel 25 and above, provides a tool to assist the
corporate planning function of electric, gas. and
combination utilities.
Rather than attempt to forecast the future based on
statistical analysis of past data. this system projects data
into the future based on management estimates of future
performance. The user provides current financial and
opel:ating data, as well as planning assumptions about future
values of the data items..
Based on this information, the
system produces projected financial statem~nts for a fiveyear planning period.. These documents would be used by
corporate planners to evaluate the given plan.
GB21-0046
~!~I~~ nA]!g~~~li~ ~!£!b!T! SELE£!!~~ !liAl1~§R

AVAILABILITY NOTICE - PfiOGRAH NUMBER 2l2!!.:.!hR

ThiS-is-a-~ograiii-using-asinpiitth9 data created by the

SI1F option of OS/MFT and MVT..

Based on control card

SECTION 2:

E!i!llM ~RER 1:Q :t!i!~ !!!!!bIQ2Bi:mii-iRi-!R~!IIl!E.Q !!I A!.!!! !B!!I9I21!
1:Q I.H! B1Q.HX Ql Ilii! Q!.QgR !!!U1gE~
CONTINUED FROM PRIOR PAGE

CONTINUED FROM PRIOR COLUMN

specification~

the program. main procedure viII call
in report overl ay procedures.
The report procedures include analysis and display
of information rala ting to CPU and 1/0 utilization,
multiprogramming activity, program use profile~ job and
task initiation and completion, and distribution of cost.

possible. It cOlllplements and provides a logical growth path
to systems such as IEM Customer Information Control System

(CICSt.
GB21-SS67
!!!l]R ll..Q1g.!!llli!ll9!!~ .!Y!H!.!!!HI! 1!ml£]
PROGRAM NUMBER 5798-ABA

SB21-9947

user-ROllout/RoIITnpermits the user to maintain a small
partition (2K) and expand this partition to the necessary
size when a request is made by seizing extra memory from the
other tvo possible partitions. The programs being processed
in the other partitions are temporarily stored on disk files
until the seized area has completed the assigned task~ then
processing resumes as if no seizure had taken place.

QfgR!I~!2 SYS~~~~ SYST~ ~Ali!GEM]~~ rA£~~!!! ~]~~k]

!!!llH]R ~ fJ!Q!l.R!!! ~RIPTION&llinQ1! .!!!!!!!!k
fJ!Q!l.U'!! .!U!!!ID!R .21~~MR

This lIanual describes the capabilities of the system and
the programs. Discussion of design assumptions and
potential modification areas are included.. Record and
file layouts are described, and primary processing
procedures specified.. This manual is both a system
description and an installation and operations reference
document ..
This is a program using as input the da ta created by
the SflF option of OS/MFT and HiT.. Based on control card
specification, the program main procedure will call in
report overlay procedures.. The report procedures include
analysis and display of information relating to CPU and
I/O utilization, multiprogramming activity, program use
distribution of cost ..

SB21-9S68
I!!!l!!: QU!!UING
!!!!!meQf~Q
~!tQ!l.!t!~

,!!U£I!~~.!! !1!gn!;~ !l!!l~]l!!l QQ!.!l]

This "User's "anual" i's for the Systems Analyst,
program.er and operator during the Systems Test and
Daily operations of the programs. It also contains
programmer notes to assist in making minor al terations.
This is a program. using as input the data created by
the S"F option of OS/HFT and flYT. Based on control card
specification, the program main procedure will call in
report overlay procedures. The report procedures include
analysis and display of information relating to CPU and
I/O utilization, aultiprogramming activity, prograll use
profile~ job and task initiation and cOllpletion~ and
distribution of cost ..

LB21-9969
!!!!l!!: QUill!!!!l. g~TEM DYNAMl£ !!Qk!&!!TlROLLIN
fJ!Q!l.R!.!! !!!!l!~l!!! 212~.!!!! = lHJ.I! I!£;!£;.!,Q.f]I! ~
SYSTEMS GUIDE

This oserrslianual is for the System Analyst~ Programmer~
and Operator during the Systems Test and Daily Operations
of the program. It also contains programmer notes to assist
in making minor al tera tions.
User Rollout/Bollin permits the user to maintain a small
partition (2K) and expand this partition to the necessary
size when a request is made by seizing extra mellory froll the
other two possible partitions. The programs being processed
in the other- partitions are temporarily stored on disk files
until the seized area has completed the assigned task~ then
proces:sing resumes as if no seizure had taken place ..

G821-B961
l!IUl!!!lI ~'tI!fRll£]§!l!1!Q COIIIIUNIC1TION!l !l!.~.Ul!
A!AIHl!liITY !!Qll£] ~ PROGRAII .!!UMBER 5798~!ll
Now. a Hinilul Teleprocessing COllmunication System is
available to the DOS user wbo vould like to install a first
tor.inal system.. It is a generalized, single-thread~
transaction oriented system that can be quickly installed
and requires no specialized training in teleproceSSing
concepts, BTA" or Assellbler Language to illplement the
system.
It utilizes design concepts of the more
sophisticated data base/data communication systems vh-ere
possible. It complements and provides a logical growth
path to systels such as IBM Customer Information Control

GB21-9136
!!!U £M!l~In£U!Q1! gg]l! rllR :J:!!] !lilllli~~
llUHlUHI! !!m!£~ ~ ~!l.Q!l.R!.!! !!!!!!gR 5798-AC£

The "Data Communication System" is a program designed to run
under OS or DOS to transform a user data base into
meaningful statistical information.. It is designed for the
no nm a the mati ci an/D on sta t isti cian ..

system (CICSt.
SB21-9962
!!!1!I!!J!!! :J:]k.!!f1lQ£.!!~!l!1!!l. £Q..!!!!!!1!!£ATION!l !lYSTE.!! MANUAL
lli!il\!l! !!J!!!~R .21~=!ll

SB21-9137
!!!U £H~~IE!£U!Q1! SYS:J:~ EllR THE gSTE~369
fRQ!TNUMBER 5798-AFC

SB21-il239
DOS 2311-2314/19 DASD DEVICE INDEPENDENCE ROUTINES
PROGRAM DESCRIPTli5N70PERATIONS ~

5798-ADT
This manu:a:raescrIE'e'Sthe capabilities of the system and the
programs. Discussion of design assumptions and potential
modification areas are included. Record and file layouts
are described, and primary processing procedures specified.
This manual is both a system description and an installation
and operations reference document.
This system allows the user to run programs compiled for
specific DASD devices on a different DASD device without
program recompilation.
PROGRAM NUMBER

The DOS Rotable Control Program provides airline management
with a comprehensive ratable control system aimed at
optimizing the very significant Rotable Spare Investment,
while insuring sustained aircraft availability and
airworthiness.
Employing the System/36~ Data Base Organization and
l1aintenance Processor (DBOl1P) program product, the system is
modular in design with an integrated data base framework.
Thus, it can function independently or as part of an
expanded Maintenance and Engineering system. In this
manner, both immediate and long term benefits accrue to the
airlines.
SB21-~317

Q!g OPE~J!Q §Wrullli.! gQ!!§1:§ £QJ.!!!illk ,f!!OGRAM
m;X]1&ll..!2 .f!QQ.Bil Q.£;§£!t!.H!Q!!LQWll!QH2 11!lill!1
PROGRAM NUMBER 5798-AFC

!!H1

L621-B2qB

n]L~

l1Q:l. nl.1=.<.U!!.!H lll!§!! ll.!!YICE .!!!l1.!!ll!!!lIDl"-1l !iQ!!nJrn§
§!§ntl§ -"!!l:1l.!!
~ROG!!!!! .!ill!!!!.!!!! 212!!=!!l!

=

This "User's Manllal" is for the Systems Analyst, Programmer
and Operator during the systems Test and Daily Operations of
the programs.
It also contains ptogrammer notes to assist
in making minor alterations.
This system allows the user to run programs compiled for
specific DASD devices on a different DASD iievice withou't
progralD recompilation.

This-iDanualdesctibesthe capabilities of the system and the
programs. Discllssion of design assumptions and potential
1Il0difica tion are as are included. aecord and file layouts
are described, and primary processing procedures specified.
This manual is both a system description and an installation
and operations reference document.
LB21-B318

I!B! !!!§.!i

G321-0283

IgQ Q!:!=1il!; £Q!!Q1

~U!iQ.u~

lrnID!§

= A!!!b!~!1!IX.

Q1!~.R!1!.!ffi §YSTEl1L36~ EOTA~!

FIELD DEVELOPED PROGRAM SYSTEMS GUIDE

~~QQEl!~-NUMB~g-212~AFC

l!QI!£~

PROGRAM NUMBER 5798-AEZ
ThIs-proqramprovidesthe TSO user with an interactive
facilit y for symbolic debugging during execution of his
COBOL program.

CONTROL RjillGRA!1

------- -----

This "User's Manual" is for the Systems Ana~yst. Programmer
and Operator dl1ring the Systems Test and Daily opetations of
the programs. It also contains programmer notes to assist
in making minor alterations.
93

SECTION 2:

.&1!!11!,&2 ~QQ~.Q 1:Q !tl!~ !!!~~!QQR!gj!:rARi-!!l.fH!!!!!.£;Q !H. 1 ~.tl~ !1!!?'!£!!Q~
!Q THE RI§.!!! 2! I@ QRQ~!! !!.!!..!tg~~
CONTINUED FROM PRIOR COLUMN
modification areas are included. Record and file layouts
are desccibed, and primary processing procedures specified.
This manual is both a system description and an installation
and operations reference document.

GB21-0322
DOS APPLICATIOrJ DCOUMENATION PROGRAM - FIELD DEVELOPED
~RQQBlH-Ayi!1A~!1!I!-iQ!!g- -fliQQi!1!- !~~~E ~12.~!ITManagement must be in a position to assess current systems
and the impact of proposed systems modi fica tions. All too
often, however, analysis of systems documentation (even when
current and complete) is time-consuming and tedious.
The DOS Application Documentation program helps data
process ing management to create and maintain a centralized
documentation base. This documentation data base provides
information about systems components and how they are
related.
Reporting programs allow the user to retrieve
information rapidly and useful formats.
File Maintenance
routines are also provided to update the documentation base.
W'ith the aid of the DOS Application Documentation
program. reports may be generated showing every file used by
each program and every program that uses a particular file.
The DOS Application Documentation program uses the
system/36.0 Bill of ria terial Processor Program as a file
orqanization technique.

=

5B21-~323

LB21-9395
IBGS - INTERACTIVE BUSINESS GAME SIMULATION - A GENERAL

§Y~IHi~~~!i~!T!Q!-FOa-!g1L~~=-KI!1~ Qj!~bQR£lrr RBOGRA~
SYSTEMS GUIDE - PROGRAM NUMBER 5798-AGM
ThIs-Uus;Cr;-Manual"iS" for -the
Analyst. Programmer
and Operator dur ing the Systems Test and Daily Operations of
the programs. It also contains programmer notes to assist
in making minor alterations.

-systems

GB21-0411
QR!f.H.PAK :: I.!it~R!£n!~ Qnf!!!f2 R!fKAQ1; lQ!! APL/3M!
FIELD DEVELOPED PROGRAMS-AVAILABILITY NOTICE
PROGRA~NOHBER-5798=A~------------- -----The-availabilltynOtice is a marketing oriented
document that describes the purpose and capabilities
of the program, advantages of design, and problems
solved by the program referenced in the title.

=

222. ~~fb!£!11.QR QQ£~UA~lQ.H .F.BQ.Q.R!l!
l!£;~Q M!£!.1Qgi!~
RRQQRAtt Q~£!i!~nQ1!LQR.gSAllQ1f~ =- .f!QQ!!~ .IDH!!!£!B 579§::jEI

This. manual describes the capabilities of the system and the
programs.
Discussion of design assumptions and potential
modification areas are included. Record and file layouts
are described. and primary processing procedures specified.
This ma Dual is both a system description and an installation
and operations reference document.

5B21-g412
2RAP!!f!K
!n:~!£n!~ QB!f!!!f~ RA£KAQ~ FOR AfW§l!
E!~.LQ QEVE!!QfEQ ggQQ~A~ DES£.ElfX.!Q!LQfM!TIONS 1!!..!i!!!~
PROGRAM NUMBER S19B-AGK
T'hiSmanual-descrlbeSthe capabilities of the system and the
programs. Discussion of design assumptions and potential
modification areas are included.
Record and file layouts
are described. and primary processing procedures specified.
This manual is both a system descciption and an installation
and operations reference document"

=

LB21-3324
DOS APPLICATION DOCUMENTATION PROGRAM - FIELD DEVELOPED
PROGRAM:5YSTEMS GijIDE-:-PROGBAH~~ift-21~~~!ff-------­
Thi"s-iijj ser's-iianualii- is forthe Systems Analyst, Programmer
and Operator during the Systems Test and Daily Operations of
the programs.
It also contains programmer notes to assist
in making minor alterations.

LB21-3413
QE!f!!PAK
!!1:~!£nY~ §EAg!!If2
FIELD DEVELOPED PROGRAM-SYSTEMS
PROGRA MNUHB"ER- 5 798=AG"K-----ThIs-iUser'siianualllls for the
and operator during the Systems
the programs. It also contains
in making minor a1 terations.

=

GB21-9334

!!.Q2. 1:Q Q§
!.H!!d~

!~2~tm~E!t b!]A'!!Q~ l1!£RQ ~li!'§M!Q!!
u!!~!I!ll!n .!2.'U.£§

!2 ~.!':gQf~Jl fM§.R!!t

PROGRAM NUMBER 519B-AFL
The-availabIlItynotice is a marketing oriented
documen t th at describes the purpose and capabilities
of the program, advantages of design, and problems
sol ved by the program referenced in the title.

GB21-0432
AR!~!II~A~ gRQ~~§'§1.!§

.'!£l£!!!!2.!!1

RAfKAQl! lQ.E HbL.J~
GUIDE
---Systems Analyst, programmer
Test and Daily Operations of
programmer notes to assist

.1llll !!.!!!lli!! fR::2lLfl1§.

FIELD DEVELOPED PROGRAM .- AVAILABILITY NOTICE
PROGRAHNUMBER-S798-AGD - - - - - - - - - Th-e-availabTITtynOtice is a marketing oriented
document that describes the purpose and capabilities
of the program, advantages of design, and problems
sol ved by the program referenced in tbe title"

5B21-3335
QQ§. J:Q Q§.

A~~~!!~~!! ItAHQQ.AGE l!A£RQ £Q!!ERS~Ql!
!I~1Q !In.nQl!~Q flQQ!!!!1
fRQ.Q.E!t! Q.g§.£RI.~I!QRLQ.~£l~!IIQ!i§' l!!!!!ll

£ftQ@ft~ ~~~R 2Z~~=!f~

This 12 page document describes the capabilities of the
PDP and the programs of DOS to OS Assembler Language
Macro conversion.
Written in OS Assembler Lanuage
(363-AS-0"37), this system converts DOS nacros to their
as egui valent.
This Program Description/operations Manual provides

5B21-3433
!£! !!!!!!llll fUm = !'.!!Q@!W! J!!!!!§l!S 2Z 98 - A@
This manual describes the capabilities of the system and the
programs. Discussion of design assumptions and potential
modification areas are included. Secord and file J.ayouts
are described, and primary processing procedures specified.
This manual is both a system description and an installation
and operations reference document.

LB21-9336
QQ~

tQ Q~ !~~~~~~~E ~ANQ~~ HA£SQ £QM!~!QR = KI~~Q
Q~YnQfl!Q £!!Q@!!~ a~!ll!!§' QY"l!~ = £l!Qill!~ !Y!!~R 2Z98- A

n

This "Userls nanual" is for the Systems Analyst, Programmer
and Operator during the Systems Test and Daily Operations of
the programs. It also contains programmer no tes to assist
in making minor alterations.
GB21-9381
HQMl!!R~~1 ~@! ~l!E"l!~ QQ~ !Q !§~ !S~ £Q§Q~ £QRY~!!~!Q! !Jl!§
FDP AVAILABILITY NOTICE - PROGRAM NUMBER 519B-AGC
The availabilIty
is -a-iiiarketiiig-orIeiited-document that describes the purpose and capabilities
of the program, advantages of design, and problems
solved by the program referenced in the title.

notice

::

l1!IEBA~lJ;!1; I!!lg!{~§~ Q!l!~

DEV~!&flll f!!Q§.S!~=g§.IEl!§' Q.!!~!

=

lll!!l1!lION :: ! §.ID!ruili

§~gHl!~~ gl!~~!nQl! fQ!! Antill = RllQ@E!1! !!!!!~.!lft 2Z~l!::!&~
fn~Q Q.!ln~Q£l!Q Fl!QQ!!!!1::ll!!H§!g!! !!Q!!£l!

5B21-3451
QQ§. .tI1rn ill2.!!!II..!iQ !!!~ .I!!~.L1]§
l!~.!J2 M~ g~GRAM
Ql!§£R!IT!Q!!LQ£l!Ellml!§ Ml!!!!~ = £!lOGRA!! NUMllID! 21.2l!::.!!rn
This manual describes the capabilities of the systelll and the
programs.
Discussion of design assumptions and potential
modification areas are included. Record and fiJ.e layouts
are described, and primary processing procedures specified.
This manual is both a system description and an installation
and operations reference document.

=

The availability notice is a marketing oriented
document that describes the purpose and capabilities
of the program, advantages of design, and problems
sol ved by the progralll referenced in the title.

5B21-9394
!~~ = !l!!.!l!!!£UU m!illl!~ Q~.!l g!!!!1!UQ! = ! QID!l!!!!k
[QR ll~a§! = KIUl! Q.!lU!.2£ru! FllQill!Al!
Ql!~£R!f!!QRLQf!;RA!!Q!~ ~QAb
£RQQft!1! ~!!~ll 2Z~~=!Q~

!lQg!!;§~ g~YU!!Q!!

U!1r!

This "Userls Manual" is for the Systems Analyst, Programmer
and Operator during the Systems Test and Daily Operations of
the programs.
It also contains programmer notes to assist
in making minor alterations.
GB21-34S3
QQ2 .'!I~~ A££Q.!!!!.'!!1!Q !lill BILLll~
1I1!!& ~!~QR!Q
PROGRAMS-AVAILABILITY NOTICE - PROGRAM NUMBER 579B-AHB
TheavaIla:bilItYnOt:Icels-a: marketing otiented---document that describes the purpose and capabilities
of the program, advantages of design, and problems
solved by the program referenced in the title.

GB21-B393
l~!i~

LB21-3434
!f! !!!!!!llR !;U£!i~ = f!!Qill!~ !!!!l!§l!S 2Z9B~AQQ

=

This manual describes the capabilities of the system and the
programs.
Discussion of design assumptions and potential

B4

CONTINUED FROH PRIOR COLUMN
L821-0452

necessary information on the design, logic and coding of the
system to enable him to make modifications, diagnose program
errors and perform program maintenance ..

!@ !!ILLI1!Q ::. f!~1& !!~~~b.QRliQ
=
l!!!.H1HH! 21~§=!l!]

~Q§' X!lH~ !f~!!!!X!!!!!

~RQ.QR!!i=2r~~n;11~

Q!!!Qg
llQgE!.H
This nUser' 5 Manual" is for the
and operator during the systems
the programs. It also contains
in making minor alterations ..

Systems Analyst, Programmer
Test and Daily Operations of
programmer notes to assist

GB21-e553

=

QQ§ £Q.!!§Ql& 2.llliLATll2l! Q].!1LS:
BASI!;;
lJ§!.2 ~RQ&!. !!Q~ .211§.=fuHll..&. fillQ1H;!i UQ]1.§~
!J§l1 lfRQQ~ l!Q..!.. ill§.=!d!!L.
H!!h!~!gRQQRM!:1!l!Q £Q!!RSE A361£ 1fBOG .. !!!b.. 212.§-AJPl

QRg!1A~Q!! ~.R!n!!liQ

1:!1!Ili!!i§

£QY.!t~§

~!;.'!:!;!UUl!A:E!QH £.QQ.Rg

G821-0490

AJ:!~

!!!!!!!£. ~!H! £Q~~ 12 IBM ANS £0801. £QNVEHSIQ.!! AIQ
1:Qr. !!!11!!li~1!! 1:!9.!!£!! ::. £ROG.R!1i M!!!t!lliR 2Z~=A!!.f
The availability notice is a

FIELD DEVELOPED PROGRAMS-AVAILABILITY NOTICE
The-iviilabllity-notice-IS-a marketing~ented
document that de scribes the purpose and capabilities
of the program, advantages of design, and problems
solved by the program referenced in the title ..

marketing oriented

document that describes the purpose and capabilities

of the program, advantages of design, and problems
solved hy the program referenced in the title ..

5B21-0554
DOS BASIC OPERATOR TRAINING -

G821-0505

n~~£R!f1!Q!2Qg~AI!Q~-~iliY!1

£~lQ!1~R !!![Q1B1!1:IQ!! Kn~ !!§!J!§. QQ~L£!£§
FDP - AVAILABILITY NOTICE - PROGRAM NUMBER 5798-AHX

This - siipa~docijmeii:tdescribes-the -purpose-andiiIghlights
of the .Customer Information File Using DOS/CICS for the
System/360, 37ft.. Written in Assembler Language Code, this
program is a multi-purpose file that combines all customer
descriptive data into a centralized pool of information.
Access can be from on-line terminals via name or account
number or from various accounting application programs ..
This system is designed primarily for banks but can be
modified for other institutions ..
This Availability Notice contains complete ordering
instructions for the Field Developed Program and all its
related documen ta tiOD, for management and data processing
personnel who are prospective users of the program and
others who require information concerning it ..

LB21-0555
QQ~

5B21-0506

£!!§'!Qng
~~

X!!~!!.!t!x!Q1! llil !1.§llQ £QU~!£§
!!~~fBX~llON/OP!;.Rl!!!Q1!2 Millb

= ~!!Q!iill

PROGRAM NUMBER 579B-AHX
This-174Page-doc;JOient-describes the capabilities of the FDP
and the programs of the Customer Information File using
DOS/CICS system .. Written in Assembler Language Code for the
System/360,370, this program is a multi-purpose file that
combines al.l customer descriptive data into a centralized
pool of information.. Access can be from on-line terminals
via name or account number or from various accounting
application programs.. This system is designed primarily for
banks but can be modified for other institutions ..
This program Description/Operations Manual provides the
user with sufficient information to understand, install and
successfully use the program ..
LB21-0537
fM~Q.H.g.R

l.!U~.

llFORftllIQ]!

= ~mgM

!H!I~

FIL~

PROGRAM

=-f£QgR!fi

!!!!~~~ ~I~in

This 28 page document describes the capabilities of tbe FDP
and the programs of the DOS Basic Operator Training system ..
written ill the Coursewriter III Language, this Console
Simulation Drill provides the student with simulated handson experience but controls ·the student activity, thus
protecting vital system and user files.
This Program Description/Operations Hanual provides the
user with sufficient information to understand, install and
successfully use the program ..

rr§.!J!Q !!QUCIC§.
!.!!Hill 211§=!!!!

= gjill2.!!!J1

This 26 ~ page document describes the steps necessary to
modify the Customer Information File Using DOS/CICS FDP
written in Assembler Language Code for the system/36B,370.
This program is a mu1.ti-purpose file that combines a1.l
customer descriptive data into a centralized pool of
informa tion..
Access can be from on-line terminals via name
or account number or from various accounting application
program.s.. This system is designed primarily for banks but
can be modified for other institutions ..
This systems guide provides the systems Analyst with the
necessary information on the design, logic and coding of the
system to enable hill to make modi fica tions, diagnose program
errors and perform proqram maintenance ..
GB21-0541
*N
LEASE VS .. PURCHASE ANALYSIS· OF CAPITAL EXPENDITURES FOP
!!AIL!~llITY!!Qn£~-~ ~ROGRAM-NUHru;i-~9S-A~!s---- - This four page document describes the purpose and highlights
of the Lease vs. Purchase Analysis of Captital Expenditures
prograll for the system/36.0.. ilritten in FORTRAN IV, this
program simulates different approaches to capital
acquisi tion by applying a variety of depreciation methods,
tax credits, financing, lease prices, etc ..
This Availability Notice contains complete ordering
instructions for the Field Developed program and all its
related documentation, for management and data processing
personnel who are prospective users of the program and
others vho require information concerning it.
SB21-jl542 see page 22B
LB21-0543

*N
g!!!£!!A2E !lillllll Q! £!PITA1 EXPEM1!ll!rnM. 2YSTE~
GOlDE - FOP NUHBER 5798-AJK
This-36 pagedoCu:mentaescribes the steps necessary to
1I0dify tbe Lease vs. Purchase Analysis of Capital
Expenditures FOP written in FORTRAN IBM for the system/36~ ..
This program is designed to simulate different approaches to
capital acquisition by applying a variety of depreciation
methods, tax credits, financing, lease prices, etc.
This systems guide provides the systems Analyst with the

.Mll£

Qg~!!!1:Q1!

!!!!.li!lHi

=

= g§1:M§

GYYU;

n~1I! ~!;gl&f~ fliQQR!H
UQ§llH !!!HilR .ll.2&=!ill1
This 50 page document describes the. steps necessary to
modify the DOS Basic operator Training PDP written in the
coursevriter III Language.. This Console Simulation Drill
provides the student with simulated hands-on experience but
controls the student actiVity, thus protecting vital system
and user files.
This systems guide provides the Systems Analyst with the
necessary information on tbe dosign, logic and coding of the
system to enable him to make modifications, diagnose program
errors and perform program maintenance.

5B 21- 0557
DOS fY§.'!:QMER g]~bll ]j.'!:M~!liA.'!:!Q'!! Q~!;ll.'!:Q!! ~!!!l!i!!lii
f:BQQRAH ~§'£.R!nMH!LQfgR!!!Q!!~ H!!!Q!b :. fiELD DEVELOP~
PROGRAM - PROGRAM NUMBER 5798-AJN
TiiIS28 pagedOcumen"t-describes-the capabilities of the FOP
and the programs of the DOS Customer Problem Determination
operator Training system. Written in the Coursewriter III
Language, this Console Simul.ation Drill provides the student
with simulated hands-on experience but controls the student
activity, thus protecting vital system and user files ..
This program Description/operations Manual provides the
user with sufficient information to understand, install and
successfully use the program ..
LB21- 0558
!!22 fJl§!!H1£;!! f!Q1!1.M DET!!U1!~!.Qli QEMliQ! !!!A!!i!lill
llELD n!!;!&il~ E£QQ!!A! g21ID1~ Q!!~ =- llillH!!l! NUHBE!!
5798-AJN
This
page document describes the steps necessary to
modify the DOS Customer Problem Determination Operata!:
Training PDP written in the Course writer III Language.. This
Console Simulation Drill provides the student with simulated
hands-on experience but controls the student actiVity, thus
protecting vital system and user files.
This systems guide provides the Systems Analyst with the
necessary information on the design, logic and coding of the
system to enable him to make modifications, diagnose program
errors and perform program maintenance.

sa

5B21-0560
~Q§

=

MULI!PROQR!H!:!!!ill QPERATOR TRAINING
lll!& Q~
:. ~ROGM!1 DESCRIPTION/OPERATIONS MANUAL

~.RQ!i.RA1i

.I1!!Qll!!!!l mll.!l!! allJ!=.ill

This 26 page document describes the capabilities of the FDP
and the programs of the DOS Multiprogramming Operator
Training system..
Written in the Course writer III Language,
this console Simulation Drill provides the studont with
simulated hands-on experience but controls tho .otudont
activity, thus protecting vital system and usor filoD.
This Program Description/Operatl.ons tlnnual provideG the
user with sufficient information to undor.atand, install and
successfully use the program ..

bE!!2~ !§~

85

L821-3561

=

J!QJl !!l!H!.I1I!Q!;RAHHI]lli Qll of PL/I tha·.:,
apply to commorcial data pt:oces::;ing.
It docs not restrict
itself to a particular aspoct of commercial data processing
but attempts to discuss all features of PL/I that may be
used in the full spectrum of commercial applications.

SECTION 2:

n

~.8II.§ ~!!M ~ ~!!!2 1!~ilQ2!APHr ARE~!!!!
:rQ THE !lIGHT Ql THE .Q!!!!l!!! .!!!!.!ml!!!:.

! !!! ll1U£.UQ!

CONTINUED FROK PRIOB COLOfty
GC28-1667
!.!!I.!!!!!!!!'£UQ'!! II! !ID! :!~U!!il§'@: !!!£!!llECTUBE
This text is intended to introduce the student to the
characteristics of 5Y5te./368. It is expected that the

*N

• IBH supervisor's Coursevriter III Reference
Card -- GI2B-1782
coursevriter III Instruction Sheet -- GX2S-175S

student bas some knowledge of computing systems.

• Coursevriter III for systeID/36S Application
Description -- GH29-8587
GC28-168q
!!! UI!!!!!!!!£UQ!! :rQ !!!ll Q!I! ~l! llru:J!!!.§
This manual presents concepts and principals essential
to a basic knowledge of computers. It is designed for
Ilse in training programs that serve as prerequisites for
a detailed study of an IDS system. Covered in general
terlls are topics such as Data Representation, storage
Devices, CPV Functions, IIO Devices, Stored program
Principles, Prograllming Systems, operating Systems,
COD version, and Procedural Controls. Reference to specific
systells is made to illustrate general principles.

• Coursevriter III for SysteJl/368 Supervisor's
Guide -- GH2B-B61B
• Coursevriter III for system/368 System Programm.er's
Guide -- GY28-11372
GC28-1729
! GUIDE :rQ X!!.!! !!!.!! :!!§ll;.!!Lll! .!!l!m 12.2
This guide presents hardware, programming systems, and
other pertinent information about the IBII Systelll/37" !odel
155 that describes its significant, nev, features and
advantages. Its contents are intended to acquaint the
reader with the Model 155 and to be of benefit in planning
for its installation.

GC28-1685
~!!!!l~U. m;:!l\ Q!1J!!!!:rul! ill:rJ!.!! USE!!!.:! ill!!!!,;. £Q!!:um.
l!n:rm.!!I :!:J!£!!'!!!Q!!J!:!
This publication provides guidance in the use of control
statellents as related to compilations, linkage editing,
utilities, sorts, and user programs. It presents tested
examples with supporting explanations as an aid to
understanding the input stream requirements for processing
in the System/369 Disk Operating System environment. The
control statements discussed are job control statellents,
linkage editor control statements, and operator comlland.
A list of related publications appears in the Preface.

GC28-173B

! !l..!!ill :rQ I!!J! !!!.!! illI.!!.!!Lll! !!Q!!J!!. 165

This guide presents hardware, programlling systells, and
other pertinent information about the ID! Systelll/370 !lodel
165 that describes its significant nev features and
advantages. Its contents are intended to acquaint the
reader vith the !lodel 165 and to be of benefit in planDing
for its installation.

Gc28-1688
!!!.!! ~~H m;:!!1!.H :!UUQ'!! Q!1l!!!llQ!! !!!!!!!!!.
The IBn 2268 Display station provides visual access to
inforlla tion stored in an IBI! systell/369. This manual
fam.iliarizes the operator with the fUnction of each key
on the keyboard. While the keyboard is similar to the
familiar typewriter keyboard, the operator viII find that
seeing the keyed characters appear instantly on a TV-like
screen viII feel different froll typing on paper.
The 2269 enters data into the SysteJl/36S through the
2848 Display control. An IBH '853 Printer can be attached
to the 2SQS to provide printed copy of the characters
displayed on the screen.
The fUnctions described refer to t!odels , and 2 of
the 2268 Display station; "odels 1,2,3,21 and 22 of the
2SQS Display Control; and !lode 1 4 of the 1853 printer.

GC211-173Q

! !l..!!ill :rQ I!!J! !ID! :!YSTE!!l37! !!!!m 1QS

This guide presents hardware, progra.aing systems, and
ot.her pertinent inforlllation about the IBH systell/37B Model
145 that describes its significant new features and
advantages. Its contents are intended to acquaint the
reader vith the Kodel 145 and to be of benefit in planning
for its installation.

GC28-1738
l!~nB{378 .!!l!!!ll 135
This Guide presents hardware, prograllJling systems and other
pertinent inforJlation about the IDK Syste_/37" Hodel 135
that describes its significant features and advantages.
The contents are intended to acqaaint the reader with the
t!odel 135 and to be of benefit in planning for its
installation.

! !l..!!ill :rQ :r!!J!

SC28-1689
!.!! !U!!Q!!.!!£nQ'!! :!:Q I!!J! £Q!!n!Jl::n!!l! IA£!!.llll:! !U: !1!.L!
Ho abstract available.

GC2'-1nB

.!!!J!UQl!!!!f!!! Q!t A!1lliill!Q!! PUBLICAT!Q.!!:! :::

:;:rAIl!

GC28-1699

ABD LOCAL GOVEBBBE.!!I !!!!!.!!l!:rJ!!
The purpose of this bibliography and the associated
classification system is to list and categorize IBK
application publications tlLat are pertinent to the state
and local governllent industry.

! !!!U nru;.!l1l:!!l!!! !Boll:!:!!!!!

This glossary contains over 2,""8 definitions of terms
in the data processing field. It contains definitions
froll:
1. The American Rational standard Vocabulary for InforBation Processing, published by the Allerican Rational
Standards Institute, Inc. (ARSI).
2. The proposed A.erlcan National standard Vocabulary.
3. The IBK Data Coa.unications Glossary (GC2B-1666).
4. The IBI! Glossary of Infor.ation processing.

GC2B-17QQ

£!!!!!lSEiBIn!! UL. !J!!!l!!Q!! ~ llJ!l!J!.!!:r
!1!!!!!1J!!!! !!!!lrn!!.!!l! .573Q-E13. 5736-E11

GC28-1786

£!!!!.!!l!H!lUll! il!

The intent of this publication is to get a new aut.hor
working on his material as soon as possible. Course
material so prepared aay not be the ultiaate in Coursewri ter
III Language usage, but it viII be available for student
use in the shortest possible tiae.
This student text guides the nev author of course
materials through the lanqauge by a s'tep-hy-step
presentation. The text is not all-inclUsive but contains
the basics of the cours~writer III Language and aany
exallples of operation code and author command use. The
author is assumed to be familiar with the use of the IBt!
terminal be is using. If he is not, COORSBIlBITER III FOB
System/369, Sudent/ftonitor Dser's Guide (GH28-868S) should
be studied before going any further.
Once this student text has been read, the author lIay
refer to COUBSEVRITER III FOR SYSTEft/368, AUTHOR'S GUIDE
(GH28-B689) for greater detail on operation Codes, Author
cOlDllands, and other related inforllation.
Other IBt! publications concerned vith Coursewriter
III, Version 2, include:
• IBt! Terllinal Coursevriter III Reference Card for
student and lIoDitor users -- GX28-17S8
• IBK Author's coursevriter III Reference
Card -- G%28-1782

88

un

The intent of this publication is to get a new author
vorking on his lIaterial as soon as possible. Course
mat"erial so prepared lIay not be the ultimate in coursevriter
III Version 3 Language usage, but it viII be available for
student use in the shortest possible tille.,
This student text guides the nev author of course
aaterials through the language by a step-by-step
presentation. The text is not all-inclusive but contains
the basics of the Coursevriter III Version 3 language and
aany examples of operation code and author cO.lland use.
The text assUlles the reader is using an IB!I H'5S or 2748
ter.inal and is familiar vith its use. If he is not using
either of these terllinals, or is not familiar vith terllinal
operation, Coursevriter III, Version 3 Student/Bonitor
Oser's Guide (SH28-'S18) should be studied before going any
further.
The text also assumes the reader is using a ter.inal
that is connected to the cOllputer via a telephone line. For
terllinals using direct vire connection (!lodeJl), none of the
dialing procedure is necessary.
If an OEa acoustic coupler is being used instead of the
data set, refer to the OBII docu.entation for operational
procedures.
Once this student text has been read, the author mal
refer to coursevri ter III, Version 3 Author's Guide (SB2e18"9) for greater detail on operation codes, author
comllands, and other relat.ed information. other IDlI
publications concerned vith cou.rsewriter III, version 3
include:
Coursevriter III, Version 3 Application Description
o
(GB211-B987)
Coursewriter III, Version 3 supervisor's Guide
o

CONTINUED FROM PRIOR COLUMN

CONTINUED FROM PRIOR PAGE

1.

(SH29-1911)

o

Coursevriter III,. Version 3 Systelll Programmer's

o

Guide (LY20-9691 for as, or LY2~-0679 fOI: DOSI
Coursevri ter III" Version 3 Operator· s Guide
(5829-1922 for as, or SH29-HJ12 for DOS)

o

Coursevriter III, Version 3 Student Reference Card

o

Coursevriter III,. Version

o

Coursevriter III, Version

o

Coursevriter III Instruction Sheet (GX29-1831)

Translating Card FORTRAN IV source programs into
System/360 coding
AND

2. Executing the resulting System/360 coding.
Included also are techniques and considerations for
improving card FORTRAN IV programs. These are supplementary
to the information provided in the language publication,
IBM SYSTEK/36B BASIC PROGRAMMING SUPPORT SPECIFICATIONS,
FORTRAN IV (16K CARD), Form. C21-90L10. The user should
read that publication before reading this one.

COllrsevriter III, Version 3 Author Reference Card
(GX29-1833)
(GX29-1834)

Monitor Reference Card

(GX29-1832)

Supervisor Reference

Card (GX29-183S

GC21-SS91

ll!.!! SYSTEM/360

.!!~g PRO~.Blll!!lHi ~!!RgQ!IT DIS1R.Y!!lIlQ!!

PROGRAM SPECIFICATIONS AND OPERATING GUIDE

PROGRAM NUMBER360P-uT-zi8 -------- - GC29-1747

!!1JlL!QQB!£!!! Q!: !PPLI£,!TION gUBLICATION~ ~!!fnION !.li.m!§'~!!!
The purpose of this bibliography and the associated
classification system is to list and categorize IBM
application publications that are pertinent to the Education
Industry. Section I lists these publications by subject
area. section II contains an abstract of each publication
in form number sequence.
A periodic Bibliography of Application Publications
(BAP) newsletter is published to keep the bibliography up to
date. The newsletter is devided into two sections. Section
I is an updated listing of application publications by
applica tion or industry.. This section also includes any
corrections to the bibliography and a list of superseded
pUblications:. Section I I contains an abstract of each
publication not included in the published bibliography.
GC29-17S1

1M :l.ll!l.l llfll!;H .!!AM .!!lll1.ID! §Im:!!!!l Mill!! !HgM
This manual is a guide to the design of a data
system using OMR. The material includes forms
operations, and programming techniques.. It is
to be used both as an instruction guide and as
resource during systems installation design.

entry
design ..
intended
a

Thedlstributionprograiii.-Issued for maintenance and
distribution of the Disk Operating System. This reference
publication contains the specifications and operating guide
for the distribution program and describes the functions
of the program, program deck, control cards, system and
deck preparation, error messages and options, and operating
instructions.
GC21-SS94

!!Hl Q§ !.!!!1 l£§.2L 1£§1 A!!!! 1l~ OPT!£!b 1!~ADE!lli
Q!ll. A!!!!GEHENT MACRO§. AND .§.§Rll.CES
gSTEMS ~KEREN£E

=

LIBRARY MANUAL
Th'iS'-pub,UCition defines and describes the data management
macro instructions and services for the IBM Optical Readers.
The macro instructions are used in the IBK System/360
Operating system Assembler language.. The macro instruction
descriptions and definitions apply to the two main
configurations of the operating system: systems that
provide multiprogramming with a fixed number of tasks (OS
8FT); and systems that provide multiprogramming with a
variable number of tasks (OS HVT).
sc21-S9SS

GC29-8S11

lillM.lR !ig!!RBAI!21! !!ill n;~ IN G
Random sampling, simulation studies, and ttont~ Carlo methods
have been in use for many years. papers describing various
aspects of these topics have appeared in technical journals
and textbooks available to a relatively sllall percentage
of computer users. fteanvhile, applications requiring
random numbers are becoming more important and more common
in business and industry as well as purely scientific
areas. Therefore, this manual has been prepared which
gives the mathematical development of the power residue
method, outlines computer techniques for implementing it
and also offers brief comments on other methods. An
appendix provides programming illustrations for binary and
decimal computers.
R!H.~1!

=

1!l1! !!Q2 RPG i l b!li2YMil!
SISTEMa ID!£:~1!~ LIBRll! HANUAb
RRQ2M~ .HUHB~ .a1J§=1!!ll
THIS PUBLICATION IS A PLANNING AID ONtI.
It is intended
for use prior to the availability of the DOS RPG II
Compiler. The publication viII be updated to become
reference documentation when the RPG II language is
available.
This publication contains the fundamentals of the RPG
II language along with the RPG II language specifications
for the IBH System/360 Disk Operating System. The DOS
RPG II compiler and generated program can be used for
system/360 Models 25, 30 .. LIB, sa, 65, and 75 ..
Job se.tup information for compiling and executing an
RPG II program is also included in the publication.
GC21-SS96

!!lJl ll§:J:ID!Lill QR!l!!A:J:!!!Q !!!.§:!1!1! !.!l.!! 1llU1275

DATA MANAGEMENT MACRO INSTRUCTIONS AND SERVICES
pubiicatIon-aefIn05-aD~escribes the data management
macro instructiona and ::::;orvicos for the IBM 1419. The
macro instructions aro Il'lailablo in the IBM System/360
operating System. Tho macro instruction descriptions and
definitions apply to tho three main configurations of the
operating system: sy::::;tem::i with the primary control program
(PCP): systems that provide multiprogramming with a fixed
number of tasks (MFT or option 2); and systems that provide
multiprogramming with a variable number of tasks (MVT or

ThIs

GC29-8978

lQIUl llJ2 £AIm IHlli!!H!
This manual is divided in two sections--the first devoted
to fora design and the second to card design. Its use
presupposes a knowledge of IBM data processing equipment.
It can be used as a guide for individual study or a text
for class study.
SC29-8S92

Option 4).

llil:l!!!Lill JlQ§. llfl!!!!HQl! TI!lll!.l!!Q .!!!!!!!AI.
COORSE CODE A3658

TiiIs-reUSible~teit introduces the student to lIany of the

GC21-SS98

procedures to be followed when operating the IBK Sys'tem/36B
Kodels 25, 38~' and 48 in a Disk Operating System batchedjob environment. Because the operator's main tasks are
concerned wit.h "I/O and the console, this text. concentrates
on thes e areas

1M §!STEM/J,§.H OPER!!!!!!i §.!§.ll.H R1!J!ll!!.§ IQ!! THE
UBI l l l ! PRI!IT~ Q!!! M!AGE~lH!! 1!!£:!!Q !NSTRUCTIQ1ili !'!!Q
gRVlc~

GC2S-81S2

llQ!l;!!Utll!!!l. :J:lliNIQUES

Adherence to standard techniques for the preparation of
flowcharts of data processing systems and procedures greatly
increases the effectiveness of communication between the
programller-analyst and the many groups with whom he deals.
The manual describes in detail the preparation of system
and program flowcharts. The symbols used are those provided
by the IBM Flovchartinq Template (GX29-8S29).

This publication is a planning aid only. It is intended
for use prior to the availability of the data management
macro instructions for the IBM 3211 Printer and shall be
replaced by reference dOCUmentation when that support
becomes available.
This publication describes macro instructions and
services provided under IBM System/360 Operating system
for use with the IBM 3211 Printer.
SC21-SS13

1!!.!!

g!!:J:l!!!Ll~

!!l!!!i

~!l!ll

§.!.§:J:l!!!

IBM 1288 BASIC UNFORMATTED READ SYSTEM: A

A flowchart

worksheet (GX29-8821) is a means of standardizing
docu.en tation. It provides space for drawing program
flowcharts and contains an area for identification of the
job, including application, procedure, date, and pagination ..
GC21-588S

!l!.!! §.!liTI!.!!L1§.!!. !!!n!; PROGRAMMING §!!ffQ!!l: N!!1'.!!!!! l ! 1Q!!ll
U!!!i!!!!!1!l!!!!.§. !i!!.1lH! R!!.Q!i!l!!!. .!!J!1!l!l!!! illP=PO-2!!.2
This publication provides the information necessary for:

89

Qi~!-CAP!YMUTILIll PROQBAK- - - - -

PROGRAM NUMBER S736-UT1

This-publICation-IS-a-reference manual designed to assist
you in implellenting data entry applications using the IBM
1288 Optical Page Reader. T!le data must be printed or
typed in either USASCSOCR Size A or ISOOCR-A size 1 font
in the unform.atted mode.
This manual describes the control and functions of
1288 Basic Unformatted Read System, which include:
Input and output

CONTINUED FROM PRIOR PAGE

Error handling routines
Job control language

GC21-5347
Ill!! ...:1.2& £!!!Q .!!1lJ!!! 1OJ!!!£!! !!2"- 1O.!!QQ!!!!! l1MIDilJlQ Q![!!!ll
This publication describes the programming support provided
under IBM DOS for the IBM 2596 Card Read Punch attached to
IBH system/369 or IBH system/379. It is provided for use by
the system programmer as a planning aid only and is intended
for use prior to the availability of the IBH 2596 Card Read
Punch. Information in this publication includes a
discussion of the DOS support of the 2596 under the Logical
Input/Output Control System (LIOCS) and the 2596 performance
characteristics ..
Before using this publication, the reader should be
familiar with the following publications:

The program operates under the IBH System/36B Disk

Operating System with either BATCH or Multiple Programming
support (MPS).

SC21-5014
!!!!! e.Ie.!.ll!lL1§.!! QRll!!U!HQ ~ll!!
Ill!! H!l.1! ll~g£ !!~lQ.!!!!ll:rllQ !!MQ ~ll!!';'

l! .Ill'!'.!

£!fI!!R~

'[X!LIX! iJ!QQ!A.H

PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-UT3

T'hl'S-publication-Is-ii-reference

mahaul designed to assist
you in implementing data entry applications using the IBM

DOS
DOS
DOS
DOS

1288 Optical Page Beader.
The data must be printed or
typed in either USACSOCR size A or ISO OCR-A size 1 font

in the unformatted mode.
This manual describes the control and functions of
the 1288 Basic Unformatted Read System, which include:
Input and output.
Error handling routines.
Job control language.
The prograCl operates under the IBM System/369 Operating
System with primary control program (PCP), multi-programming
with a fixed number of tasks (I1FT), or multi-programming
with a variable number of tasks (MVT) supervisor design.

GC21-5052
IBM DISK OPERATI NG SYSTEM RPG II AUTO REPORT PEATURE
~~~li!~I[EQ~!IIQM MEQ!~-=-RSQ2S~-MJ!~Ea-.:!136-RGl
This manual introduces the function o£ the DOS BPG II Auto
Report Peature for potential customer management, customer
analysts, and for IBM personnel involved ill marketing this
feature.
Auto Report is a DOS RPG I I program product feature.
This feature extends the capabilities of the PRG II language
and aids the RPG II user by reducing the programming effort
required to code and deb ug his applica tion programs.
This publication provides general descriptions of the
four functions of the Auto Report Feature; discusses the
compatibility and performance of Auto Report; and has an
example showing an Auto Report job, from the coding needed
to produce a report, to the specifications generated by Auto
Report for that job, and finally to the report produced as
output.. prerequisite publications are:
o
Concepts and Facilities for DOS and TOS (GC24-S93B)
o
Introduction to BPG II (GC21-7514)

GC21-5019

Ill!!

QQ!1 1£1!1! llASIC J!!!lORMATIll!! !!EAD e.n:!:l1!!
J!!!.H:r! PROGRA!!

g~nU1§.!!

~ !!!:!:~ £H!J!R~

Supervisor and I/O Macros, GC24-5B37
System control and service, GC24-5936
Operating Guide, GC24-SB22
system Generation, GC24-S833

l1!!QQ!!!~ Hl!!! I!!: a 2ll2::!!:r1

This Program Product SpeCifications (PPS) describes the
warranted npocifications of the subjoct program Product.

GC21-5029

!.!H1 ~!~!~r1Ld2!! Qf.!!M!!lm. ~YSTID1 1m! 1£!!!! .ll~g~ !!.Hl2!.U!.ll:!:EQ
!lH!! e.!!1n!! rammA!! NUM!lll!! 2l.ll.=UT3
Thb::; ProgroCl Product Specifications (PPS) describes the
warranted npoci!ications of the subjoct Program Product.

SC21-5356
!~!! QQ!1 !!Rl1

g AJ!!Q .!!llR2.!!:r !:EATU.!!ll :: !!ll!:ll.!!ll.!!£ll !!J!.!!!!ll
PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-RGI

GC21-5021

~~M~~ ~llM! ~m~t.!HlQ!!mill

TiiIs-iiian~contains -three types of info.cmation about the

M!!!!ll
Thi:::i publicntion describes the basic RPG II functions and
provide:::; inforClntion on performance and compatibility ..
Tho DOS RPG II compiler and generated program can be used
for Syntom/36n 110dols 25, 39, 49, 59, 65, and 75.

RPG II Auto Beport Feature:
1.
Introductory and tutorial information aD Auto
Report for beginning users ..
2.
Reference ·information on Auto Report specifications
for more experienced users.
3.
Information on the internal operation of the Auto
Report Feature for personnel with maintenance
responsibility (replaces the program logic manual) ..
The Auto Report Feature is a program. that operates prior to
the RPG II compiler and that calls the compiler IIhen it bas
finished processing. Auto Beport generates complete BPG II
source specifications for simple reports from simplified BPG
II output specifications, standard RPG II specifications.
and a apecial statement that copies previously cataloged
specifications from a source library. Auto Report also
provides for selection and sorting of input records prior to
processing by the RPG II object program ..
Readers of this manual must have some knoilledge of RPG

GC21-5027

!!H1

~!R.Q

§!§'!!!~Ll!H!

R£;!Q!B !!H!

Qf1l!!!!I NG ~.;" f!!!lB!!l!.Q fQ.B I!rn
J~2 £!RI! f.J!!£!!

~§~ 1.2~2

This publication is a planning aid only. It is intended
for use prior to the a vailabili ty of tho data management
macro instructions for both the IBM 3505 Card Reader and
the IBM 3525 Card Punch, and will be replaced by reference
documentation when the support is made available.
The content of this book describes macro instructions
and services that are provided under IBK SY5tem/369
Operating System for use with both the 3595 Card Reader
and the 3525' Card Punch.

II.

Gc21-5328
IBM DISK OPERATING SYSTEK RPG II
PROGRAH- PRODUCTSPECrFiCATIONS-~RQ~R~ !~~~R-211~=R~------The Program Product Specifications (PPS) describe the
warranted specifications of the subject Program Product.
SC21-5033
Ill!! e.xe.:!:~~~!!

gEE

~Q !U~.2

il

!!Ie.K Ql1ERA:rING 2!!1TEM

~QN!llR~!Qlf Ul!m~E~ !l~!U!ti

This manual explains the differences between the Disk
Operating System RPG and RPG I I languages. Differences
which are fully diagnosed, partially diagnosed, and not
diagnosed are' described. A recommended conVersion procedure
from RPG to RPG II is explained as well as procedures for
can vertin g each difference ..
This manual is intended for programmers experienced
in using the RPG language who plan to use their RPG programs
under the RPG II compiler ..

FOR

GC21-7514

!!!!!!QQy£!ION lQ RR2 !!
The purpose of this manual is to teach the RPG Ir
programming language.. The manual is written not only for
the person who has some previous knowledge of computer
programming, but also for the person who knows little or
nothing about data processing.
The first chapter is solely for the beginner. It
contains basic information about computers and data
processing. The remainder of the book explains the RPG II
specifications and the RPG II specifications sheets. Many
job-related examples are used to show how the RPG II
speCifications apply to a real situation. The manual
concludes with a sample job, IIhich summarizes the duties of

Gc21-5934
l~H §r~I!!ttLJ2~ Qr2~ OPERATIH~ §YST~~ fbAlfN!H2
~~.:1 £~!!!! !!g~Ql!.!! !!!!! THE IBM ~£.:! ~!l!! l1!!!!£!!

GC21-5363
DOS PROGRAMMING SUPPORT FOR IBM 2596 CARD READ PUNCH
ThIs -pUbITcation i'SIiitended-for -people~vhoImplelRent
IBM System/36.0i DOS configurations. It is intended for
use upon availability of the IBM 2596 Card Read Punch.
This publication describes the DOS support of the
2596 under the Logical Input/Output Control system (LIOCS)
and provides 2596 ,performance information ..
Before using this publication. you should be familiar
with the information in the £ollolling publications:
a
DOS Operating Guide, GC24-S922
DOS Supervisor and I/O Macros, GC24-5937
o
o
DOS System Control and S,ervice, GC2t1-5936
o
DOS system Generation, GC24-5033
o
IBM 2596 Card Read Punch programmer's Reference
Manual and Operator's Guide. GA21-9144

tli~ !§~

This publication is a planning aid only. It is intended
for use prior to the availability of the IBK 3505 Card
Reader and the IBM '3525 Card Punch. It will be replaced
by reference documentation when these devices become
available.
This publication describes the programming support
provided under the IBM system/369 Disk Operating System
for use with the IBM 35.0i5 Card Reader and the IBM 3525
card Punch.
90

SBCTION 2:

IDITllE§

!!!,!!gQ

!2 :Ifi!§. .Hilglliig}m!! !Ri-1QIDinl!~ AI .A ~.!. 1!!Q!£!!.Q~
!Q !.!l.!1 !!!ill!! QI !.!l.!1 Q!!ll.!1!! l!J!1ll!.!1J!~

CONTINU BD FROM PRIOR PAGE

an BPG II programmer.
After completing this manual, the reader should he able
to use the various systems reference manuals to write basic
RPG II programs.

GC2Q-3337
IBM SYSTEl!L363 OPERATING SYSTEM REPORT PROGRAM GENERATOR
iiANU
~WFlCiTrQ~s YSTEilli:-J!gMi~~~

llH@iGE

GC21-99q9

I!!!! 2ll!.!1l!L~1l l!!2!£ fJ!~!!!!!'!!!.!!ll
l2!!!!!1ili i l 11&.5. £Iilil!l

§.!!llQJ!! 2.I!.!1£IFICAT!Ql!2

This publication describes and illustrates the use of the
Basic program.ing support Card FORTRAN IV language for the
IBH System/369. The reader is presumed to have _some
knovledga of an existing FORTRAN language.
The Basic programming Support FORTRAN IV language is
a sYllbolic prograllming language. It parallels the symbolisll
and forllat of mathellatical notation. In addi tiOD, many
programming features and facilities are available for
expressing the method of solution of a mathematical problell
as a lIeaningful PORTRAN prograll.
GC22-6B29

ufu!!!!X-

=

l!!.!1 ~!'§~m!L.l§!! ll2n1LATION MANUAL
R..H.l§ICAL g1ill!J!!!
This manual contains preliminary physical inforllation for
installing IBK system/363, including floor planning and
electrical, environment.al, and structural requirements.
It discusses the physical characteristics of each· unit and
their effect on installation requirements. Detailed cable
and location ·charts are included, together with
illustrations and dimensions, on all cable connectors used
in the system.

GC24-3343

llJ1

ll§nHL1~~

1!llIf

211Ell!£illQ!!§. 1m\

!!!Hl§BilllH.!!

.1U

TAPE)

procedures for the IBM 1q81 and 1460 timing programs used
to estimate the amount of time required to sort records
with an IBM System/369 Basic Programming Suport 1-channel
or 2-channel Sort/Berge Program (8K Tape) ..
The following information is included in this
publication:
1.
Minimum machine requirements for estimating times
with these programs.
2... A description of the user-prepared informat.l,.on
cards required to define the proposed sort operation.
3.
The procedure to follow for executing the timing
programs.
The user of this publication should be familiar with IBH

standardized symbols as IBM SYSTBM/369 INSTALLATION HANOAL-

- Physical Planning, order Number GC22-6823.
GC22-6939
fill!!!!!

This aanual contains physical planning data necessary to
install the IB!I 2688 CRT Printer.. The reguirements of
the unit are subject to modification by engineering
developments. 'Hote that in any numtiple-equipment
installation, specifications for the most critical unit
!lust be met.
Data is given in the standardized format and symbology

SYSTBM/369 BASIC PROGRAMMING SUPPORT SORT/MERGE PROGRAMS

(8K Tape), Order Number GC2Q-3329.
GC2Q-33SQ

!!U1

2llIML1~ft Jill.If
GUlm;

~mmi.!.§.

PHYSICAL

fJ!!!§RA M NU Ml!1ll!

Planning. Order. Number GC22-6828, Which is a required
GC22-79n

!l!!! lli:tl!!aIll ll2!l!1llllQ!!
SYS!!!!!ll !!1llJ!!!!!£J! gBUR Y

ill! SYSTBM/363 Jl!gf

~~llg ml;t=:g~~ ~~i~:

This bulletin
data necessary
to install the IB! 2911 Kanual Switching Unit, !!odels 1,
2, and 5 and the IBft 2989 Remote Switching Console, Hodel
8. If a unit is to be installed in conjunction with a
computer system, specifications for the most critical unit
lIust be .et.
Data follows the same format and uses the same

found in IBM SYS~EM/369 INSTALLATION MANOAL -

.J1!!.Q!i!lill lQJ!

S{]PPQ.RI SOBT/KERGE f!QGBAHS

f ffi~~im4)
This publication contains the specifications and operating

~

!!!!i!!I.UTION!!!!!!!!1

!l!!! 211mILill 2.l!1l£ll1 fJ!ll.!U!.!1.;. 2ill £!!!
mnil.!I!.Ql! !!!.!!!!!1 f!!U!ill llA!!!!.U!!!

2illQJIT. .!!J.IQn§!

Order Number GC24-3354.
GC2Q-33QS
!l!!! 1491/1Q69 ll.!!!!!l!

= ~ ll.!.!!l!ill
contains all physical planning

g!iQQR!~ll!!§

!Am

369P-PT-SIl5
ihlSreference piibITcatiOn de!icribes in detail the testing
services provided by the Basic programming Support (BPS)
Tape Autotest (8K Tape) program and the control cards
necessary to use the services. Although one of the 8K TPE
BPS programs, Autotest requires at least 16K positions of
mai,n storage for execution. The following features are
described: Autopatch, display, panel, card list, Autotest
output Tape, the Autotest Card to Tape utility, the Autotest
Tape to Printer utility, normal and abnormal dumps, and
Disaster continue. Special Autotest requirements of Job
Control are also presented.
PROGRAM NUMBER

The re~der should be familiar with IBM SYSTEM/369
PRINCIPLES OP OPERATION, Porm A22-6B21 and IBH SYSTEM/369
BASIC PROGRAMMING SUPPORT PROGRAMMBR'S GUIDE (BK TAPE),

GC22-6922

!l!!! 2111 !!QDELS lL 6.. AND .2 A!!!! ill! 2m !!Q!!l!1

II

R£QQ!Al! lliUH!E!! JM2.=~.:l!J~
This reference publication contains fundamentals of RPG
programming and language specifications for the IBM
System/36S Operating System RPG. Also included is the job
setup information for executing RPG.

l!~HYSICA1 PLANNI!!l!

This manual contains preliminary physical information for
installing the IBt! System/379, including floor planning and
electrical, environmental, and structural requirements.
It
describes the physical characteristics of each machine and
their effect on installation requirements.
This publication is intended for use by custoller and IB!I
installation planning personnel, as veIl as architects and
electrical and building contractors.

R!illQ!!A1UUJ!§

2~fQJ!I

!!!.§I£ !!.R!d

~

1§l!.!::M=llJ!1

This reference publication describes the Basic Tape System
and its use. The reader should have a basiC knowledge of
System/369. The major topics explained are:
OPERATION iilITH THE ·CONTROL PROGRAMS: supervisor
interruption handling, oporator communication, the channel.
Scheduler, and the communication region; Job Control card
formats and symbolic I/O assignment; IPL and the Program
Loader.
INPUT/OUTPUT CONTROL SYSTEM (IOCS):

Labels, file and

record processing.
BASIC TAPE SYSTEB: Job control with the System Tape,
assembly of a Supervisor, Linkage Editor, and System Tape
building, maintenance, and service.
GC24-33SS

I!!!!

GC2'-3329

!l!!!

2ll!.!1~.!!

l!!2!£

fJ!Q!!!!!!!2 2.l!E.!lli.!I!Q!!!i PROG RAMS.l.
1 - CHlHHEL - 369P-SK-n3
~ :: CHANuEL :: ;!~~SM-9!i9:

This publicatioD describes the following:
1.
Minillull machine requirements.
2.
program capabilities.
3.
Required control statellents.
4.
User-Written routines.
GC2Q-3321

!l!!! 2llmIL~1l l!!2!£ OPBRATI!!Q SYSTEM SORT/MERGB l1!!QGRA!!
2.I!.!1£!llill!.!l!U!
l1!!!!§RAK NOKill

§'x~ID!ill~ ~!2!£

PROG!!!MING §UPPQ!cr.

A~.s

llI!!

llPUT/OUTl1lIT MAC!!Q2 1!ll.!1l. SPECIFICATIONS
SYSTEMS RBPERENCE LIBRARY - PROGRAM NUMBER 36HP-AS-921

~!!!!!.!!!.!!ll illl1!!l!! 22l!U!!ERGE

~lll!=§.ll=1.!!.§

This publication describes the IBK Systell/36S Basic
operating system, Sort/Kerge prograll.
It contains the
following inforlla tion:
1..
!linimull lIachine requirements for sorting or merging
records with this program.
2.
prograa ca pabili ties.
3.
A description of the control statements required
to define specific sort or merge operations.
4..
A description of the facilities provided for
insertinq user-written routines into the program.
91

"This-referencepubITcatlon-describes -t:hebasic programming
support tape assembler language and the input/output (I/O)
macros supplied by IBB for use in programs written in the
assembler language.. The general features of the assembler
language are described first, followed by a description
of each of the three types of assembler language statements:
machine-instruction. Assembler-instruction, and macro
instruction statements. The description of macro
instructions consists of a description of each of the IBHsupplied I/O macros.
The reader should be familiar with the information
presented in the publications: IBH SYSTEB/369 PRINCIPLES
of Operation, GA22-6821), IB!I System/369 Basic Programming
support. programmer's Guide (GC2Q-3354)
and IBM SYSTEH/363 BASIC OPERATING SYSTEM AND IBM SYSTEM/363

Basic Programming Support, Macro Definition Language, Order
Number GC24-3364.

CONTINUED FROM PRIOR COLUMN

Basic operating System provides stacked-job processing
capability, controls and input/outputi and provides for
continuous operation of all programs run in'its environ.ent •
This Programmer's Guide includes descriptions of the
control programs, service, programs, and system facilities
supported by IBM. A comprehensive introduction gives an
OVer-all picture of the entire system.. Detailed information
is given on these major topics:
1..
Operation with the System Control Programs
2.
Using the System Service Progralls
3.
Data Management
The prerequisite for a thorough understanding of this
manual is a basic knowledge of System/36S machine concepts
and instructions ..

GC24-3361
IIlIi ge.U!lL1§.~ llAg£ QfIDilli!!.Q §!2TEM !22!!lill!..M .!!I!!l
.!.Hg.!IILQ!!.!R!!~ !1A~.BQ~ ~g]£!f!~:r!QJ!~

fliQ.~!\M !ill!!!ill!\ 1§.~!l::!2::Ml2
This reference publication describes the assembler language
and the input/output (I/O) macros supplied by IBH for use
in writing programs for BK disk-oriented System/360
installations.. The general features of the assembler
language are described first" followed by a description
of each of three types of assembler language statements:

machine-instruction, assembler-instruction, and macro
instruction statements. The description of the macro
instructions consists of a description of each of the IBHsupplied IIO macros.
The reader should be familiar with the information
presented in the publications:
IBM·system/369 PrinCiples of Operation, (GA22-6821) i
IBH SYSTEM/363 BASIC OPERATING SYSTEM, PROGRAMMER'S
Guide, Order Number GC24-3372
IBM SYSTEH/363 BASIC OPERATING SYSTEM AND IBM SYSTEM/363
BASIC PROGRAlUtING SUPPORT, KACRO DEFINITION
Language, Order Number GC24-3364.

GC21i-3374
!!l!! m!ll!lL~.2~ l!ME '!!!lQ!lRMl!Il!!l. 2!!'!!'!!Qll! 2llill!£lliQ!!§
Jl!!.!!Q!\! .!!1!Q2!l.!J! !l.!!!!!1!YQl! 19l!.!!l

This reference publicatioD contains complete programming
specifications for the IBH System/36B Report Program
Generator (Card). Included are the basic fUDction of RPG
for readers with unit record experience who are not familiar
with RPG.

GC24-3363
I!lli ggML1§.!! llf;21:£ PROGRAMHING .2!!ERQ!l! !1!!.2!! !!ll1.In:

PROGRAHS SPECIFICATIONS
This-reference-publlcation describes the IBM system/369
Basic programming support Direct Access Storage Device
utility Programs.. The programs described are:
PROGRAM NAME

GC24-3377
Ill!! 1!l!1L1!!.2@ llMlill '!!!lQ§U'!! !:Q!l !ll!! lliI£ Q.!!IDi!!ill
SYSU!iLJ.2~ 2QJ!Ul!!!~!! fliQ§1!!!!
.!!!!Q!lR!!! 1431-LM-379

363P-UT-398

This publication contains" the specifications and operating
procedures for the IBB 1491 and 1469 timing program used
to estimate the amount of tille required to 'sort records
with the IBH Basic Operating system/369 SK Disk Sort/Berge
program ..
The following information is included in this
publ ica tion:
1.
Minimum' machine requirements for estimating times
with this program.
2.
A description of the user-prepared information
cards required to define the proposed sort operation.
3.
The procedure to follow for executing the tiaing
program.
The user of this publication should be familiar with. IBM

363P-UT-237

C24-3321.

ORDER NUMBER

SINGLE-TRANSFER UTILITY PROGRAMS

Card
Disk
Disk
Disk
Disk
Tape

to
to
to
to
to
to

Disk, Version 3
Card, Version 3
Disk, Version 3
Printer, Version 3
Tape, Version 3
Disk, Version 3

363P-UT-363
363P-UT-364
363P-UT-367
363P-UT-373
3 63P- UT- 365
363P-UT-366

SPECIAL-PURPOSE UTILITY PROGRAMS

Alternate Track Assignment (2311)
Version 3
16K Alternate Track Assignment
(2311/2314), Version 1
Alterna te Track Assignment (2321),
Version 1
Clear Disk, Version 3
Copy Data Cell .to Tape,. and Restore
Tape to Data Cell, Version 1
Copy Disk to Card, and Restore Card
to Disk, Version 1
copy Disk. to Disk, Version 1
Copy Disk to Tape, and Restore Tape
to Disk, Version 1
Initialize Data cell, Version 1
Initialize Disk (2311), Version 4

BASIC OPERATING SISTEM/363 SORT/MERGE
363P-UT-212
3 G3P-UT-368

(8K DISK).

GC2Q-3318
!~!! 2!2!!!.!!Ld.2@ !lMI£ OPERAT!lill SYSTE!! SPECIFICATIONS
!!!!!!!!:!!2! 1M illn

363P- UT-371

~f~~R~:f=~::~: ~~fI~!;~~

describes in detail the testing
services provided by Disk Autotest in the Basic Operating
system (SK Disk) and the control cards necessary to use
the services. Although Disk Autotest is a BOS (SK Disk)
program, it requires a ainimum. of 16K positions of main
storage for execution. The following services are
discussed: Autopatch, display, panel, The Autotest Card
to Tape (Variable) utility, the norllal and abnor.al end
of job dumps including the sYllbolic dump, testing
immediate~y following an assembly, and separate assemblies
and tests. Special Autotest require.ents for Job Control
are also presented ..
The reader should be familiar with IBS SYS1'Eti/360
principles of operation, (GA22-6821), IBB Basic Operating
system/369 progra"lImer's Guide (SK Disk), GC24-3372i

363P-UT-362
3 63P- UT-372
363P-UT-361
363P-UT-23Q
363P-UT-369

16K Initialize Disk (23111231q),

Version 1
369P-UT-206
Multiple Disk to Printer, Version
369P-UT-293
These programs can be received by ordering individually
numbered program packages. Each program is shipped as a
complete entity, in object form, ready to perform its
function. Other BPS Utility Programs have been reissued

in the publications:

paOGBA~

IBM SYSTEH/363 BASIC SPECIFICATIONS.

GC24-5826. These publications support only the latest
version of the program.
The reader should he familiar with the information
presented in the publication: IBK SYSTEH/360 BASIC
Operating System, Programmer's Guide, GC24-3372 and IBft

IBM BASIC OPERATING

SYSrE~/363

UTILITY

paOGRA~S

(8K DISK).

GC24-3409, and IBK Basic Operating systea/36.0 lsseabler
with Input/Output ISacros (8K Disk). Order Huaber GC24-3361.

SYSTEM/363 BASIC PROGRAMMING SUPPORT DASD UTILITY PROGRAHS

operation Guide, GC24-3392

GC24-3387

lID:! §.!§!!JUJ2.@ !!M!£ ~l!§ illllA
M.!!Q!!! .!!RQill!!.!! fiID!!.!!!!!!.!! ~.!!.!!illIcATIONS
.!!J!QfiRAM NUHBER ~.2!!l!::~fl

GC24-3364
Ill!! g~!!!!!L1§.!! llAg£ .!!ROGR!!!!!!!!!l. 2!!.!!.!!Q!l!
ll!2I£ Q.l1MUIl!!l. ~!~!ll!! '!!f;£..!lQ .!l.!!ll!!!!!L.:lJ!!l !!Ig !!!.!l

! i l l Qg]JlATING
!!lliln !!1!Q.!iR!.!:!§. ~E.lli£!TI01§
~Q2!!A!! !!.!U!ll~ dll!!=.!!!-461. !§b. .9.2d

21m:~~~

This reference publication describes to programmers the
use of the IBH System/360 Disk and Tape operating systems
Utility programs. Both file-to-file and special-purpose
utilities are included. The programs described are:

stacked- job processing capability, multi prog ramming, and
related functions the operator must perform to inJ.tiate
system operation and communicate with the system. A guick
reference listing of all system-to-operator messages is
included.
GC24-5B22
Iill! ~!§'!ID1L.:lJ!!l

llllli

QR1Hl!!!!!.!i g~!!l!! Qgg!!ING

lill1.!!£1

PROGRAM NUMBER 36BN-CL-453
This-reference pUblIcatIon describes the procedures to
be followed by system opera-tors when executing jobs using
the Disk Operating System. Topics discussed include:
system concepts, system operation, problem determination,
and communication with the system. A section of general
operating techniques is included.
Messages from the system, previously included in the
DOS Operating Guide, are now contained in a separate
publication, IBM SYSTEM/360 DISK OPERATING SYSTEM OPERATOR
COMMUNICATIONS AND MESSAGES, GC24-5074. The communications
manual also contains other reference information of interest
to the system operator.
For a list of associated publications, refer to the
IBM SYSTEM/36B BIBLIOGRAPHY, GA22-6822.

GC24-5024

Assign Alternate-Track-Disk
Cal"d to PJ:inter and/oJ: Punch
card to Disk
Clear Disk
Copy-Disk to Disk
Copy and Restore-Disk to Card

Disk to Card
Disk to Disk
Disk to Printer
Initialize Disk

Card to Tape
Copy and Restore-Disk or
Data cell to Tape
Data Cell to Tape
Disk to Tape
Ini tialize Tape

Tape
Tape
Tape
Tape
Tape
Tape

!lH! §!?IllilM !!A§l£. QR~ill!.lli! gX§.U!1 QgERATQJ! !i~§'.ilQM
SYSTEMS REFERENCE LIBRARY
ThIs-referenC'e-pUbITcation lists, in numeric and alphabetic
order, all messages issued to the operator by the programs
of the IBK System/360 Basic Operating System.
The following pJ:ograms have messages contained in this
manual.
Basic Control program
36BB-CL-3B2
consecutive Processing Macros
36BB-IO-3B3
Indexed sequential File Management
360B-IO-3B4
System (ISPHSI Kacros
STR Macros
36BB- IO- 31 B
360B-CQ-312
BSC Macros
Utilities--Group 1
36BB-UT-3BB
Utili ties--Group II
36BB- UT- 3 B1
36kJB-SH-308
Sort/Merge
360B-AS-3B9
Assembler
Report Program Generator
36BB-RG-3B7
360B-PT-3B6
Autotest

VTOC Display

to Card
Compare
to Da ta Cell
to Disk
to Printer
to Tape

GC24-5B25

Assign Alternate Track-Data Cell
clear Data Cell
Data Cell to Data Cell
Data Cell to Disk

!illi §I2IML1~ !!!§Ji !!!!2. lAPE QPERATilQ
g[Q!i.RlmR.!2 Q'y'!PA

Da ta cell to Printer
Disk to Da ta Cell
Initialize Data Cell

~

£.Q.§Q1

PROGRAM NUMBERS 369N-CB-452 360M-CB-402
This-PUblIcation describe.showtocom"PIle, linkage edit,
and execute a Disk and Tape COBOL program. The text also
describes the output from each of these steps.
In addition,
it explains options of the compiler and many available
features of the opex:ating system.

The reader should be familiar with these saL publications
for the IBM system/360 Disk and Tape Operating Systems:
IBM SYSTEM/36B TAPE OPERATING SYSTEM, SYSTEM CONTROL AND
SYSTEM SERVICE PROGRAMS, Order No. GC24-5B34: IBM SYSTEM/36B

DISK OPERATING SYSTEK, SYSTEH CONTROL AND SYSTEK SERVICE
PROGRAKS, Order No. GC24-5B36. For titles and abstracts
of other associated publications, see the IBM SYSTEH/369
and System/37B Bibliograpby, GA22-6822.

GC24-5B26

!1!!! §!.§.l].H.la§Jl

GC24-5B15

ilH

a!§~~!1Ld§!

:Elf!

ill.R..Ull~

E.XllllL ll§n.H

2~.u;.RA~IQl!

A1!Q

MAI!!:!:l!H!!Q1

This reference publication contains specifications and
operating procedures used to generate an installation
tailored Tape Operat.ing system.. Supervisor macro
instructions are used to describe facilities that are
required within the system. This publication also contains
sample problems that can be use,d to test the generated
system.
GC24-5B2B

I!H1 lilln!.Hll§.~L t!Ei; QlERA~Il!g §!.2:E1BIL gnlQ!U!ANCE ~STIl1!n§
This reference publication contains main storage, external
storage. and timing estimates for the Tape Operating system ..
The storage requirements are not sensitive to system
configuration, but the timing estimates are. Therefore,
representative system configurations are used to illustrate
timing variances.
The timing discussion includes estimates for Job
control, Linkage Editor, Assembler, COBOL, FORTRAN, PL/I,
and RPG. Time requirements for processing ATTN commands,
foreground progra II ini tia tion, and the task selection
mechanism are included. Examples illustJ:ate the use of
the tilling data to calculate total job time.

~

!!B.Q!i!l!lB1!1ill. §.yggQ!IT. £AR!'! AIm Ill!

UTILITY PROGRAMS SPECIFICATIONS
rhIs-reference puiilicat:londescJ:ibes the IBM System/360
Basic Programming Support Ca~d and Tape Utility Programs.
The programs described are:
SP ECIAL-PURPOSE
SINGLE-TRANSFER
UTILITY PROGRAMS
UTILITY PROGRAMS
Card to Printer andl
Initialize Tape
360P-UT-057, Version
or Punch
369P-UT-1Il59, Version 3
Multiple Utility
Card to Tape
360P-UT-355, Version
360P-UT-051, Version
Storage Print
360-UT-I15b, Version 1
Tape to Card
360P-UT-053, Version
Tape Compare
Tape to- Printer
360P-UT-291, Version
360P-UT-052, Version
Tape to Tape
360P-UT-954, Version 3
The preceding programs can be received by ordering
;ndividually numbered program packages.
Each program is
~hipped as a complete entity, in object form, ready to
perform its function.
The J:eader should be familiar with tbo iuformation
presented in the publications: IDH SYSTEH/36" BASIC
Programming Support, Programm.er's Guido (UK tapel, GC243354, IBM System/360 Basic Progcamt3inlJ $UppoJ:t operating
Guide: card and Tape Utility Programs, (GC24-50271.
GC24-5027

GC 24- 5B21
gli~~!1LJ.§.~L

!!H~

!!R.§ f!f.§B.!!!1!Q

§X2!t!1lJ§!! !!!!§!£

gB.QQn!1.!:1~!!~

§!!REQ1!! £!M Ali!! llEJ

UTILITY PROGRAMS OPERATING GUIDE
T'hI;:;-reference-puiillcat:Ion contains the guidelines to
operate the following card and tape utility programs:
SINGLE-TRANSFER UTILITY
SPECIAL-PURPOSE UTILITY
PROGRAMS
PROGRAMS

QRMArING lli!.n~]
This reference publication describes the operating
procedures to be followed when executing jobs in a
multiprogramming environment using the Tape operating
system. Topics discussed in this publication include

Il!H

ll§.~1!...

95

CONTINUED FROM PRIOR rAGE

CONTINUED FROM PRIOR COLUMN

Card to Printer and/or Punch
Ini tialize Tape
360P-UT-950, Version 3
369P-UT-.057, Version 3
Card to Tape
Multiple Utility
369P- UT-3S1, Version
360 P-UT-1iJ55, Version 2
Tape to Card
Storage Print
363 P- UT-.053, Version
360P-UT-056, Version 1
Tape to Printec
Tape Compare
360P-UT-e52, Version 3
360P-UT-202, Version
Tape to Tape
36@P-UT-054, Vers ion
These programs can be received by ordering individually
numbered pl'ogram packages. Each program is shipped as a
complete entity, in object form, ready to perform its
function.
The reader should be familiar with these IBM system/36B'
pUblications:
IBM. SYSTEH/369 BASIC PROGRAMMING SOPPORT
CARD AND TAPE UTILITY PROGRAMS SPECIFICATIONS, Form C245026: IBM SYSTEM/36.0 PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION, Form A226821; and other manuals associated with his device
configuration.

multiprogramming capability, controls all input/output,
and provides for continuous operation of all programs run
in its environment. Detailed information is given in this
publication on these major topics.
1..
Operation with the system Control Program:
a.
System Organization
b.
Supervisor Functions
c.
Job Control program
2.
Using the System Service Programs:
a.
Linkage Editor
h.
Librarian
The prereguisite for a thorough understanding of this
publication is a basic knowledge of System/36B machine
concepts.
GC24-5935

!§ft

GC24-5029
!!H1 ~!2~~rud~~ 2~!HtAI!1!2 §.li TEH £Q.!LQb ill g1!QQ!i!t!!1gR!.~ f!!!IQ~
PROGRAM NUMBER 360S-CO-503
Thls-pubiICatioii-descrlbes how to compile, linkage edit,
and execute a COBOL {m program. The text also describes
the output from each of these stt:ps. In addition, it
explains options of the compiler and many available features
of the operating system.
GC2~-5030

!!!tt §.!.§.'!'.gttLd§.!!
!;Qtf~§gr§

.AliI!

QI~K Alm
lA£Illn~

:rAPE Q,fERATIRQ

~~!§'nLJ§!tL .n~

2ff!R!1:!1:!Q 21s TE1:!L

~Q.f~!I2Q!

!]!!

Hf!!T/OUTPUT !!!£l!Q;;

~g,EMS

This reference publication contains planning information
about the Input/Output Control System macro instructions
and the Supervisor macro instructions for use with the IBM
System/36B Tape operating System (TOS).
GC2~-5936

!!U:!..

g~~ttL:l§.!! Q!§!i OPEH!!!!ill .§.!.§.IM!.l
~X2In! fQ1!TROL
AND SYSTEM SERVICE PROGRAMS
PROGRAHNUMBERSBEGINNING-WITH 360NThTs-reference-publication -describes the IBH system/36,0
Disk Operating System. The system is a set of control
programs and processing programs for IEM System/36.0.
Using
IBM 2311 Disk Storage or IBM 2314 Direct Access Storage
for on-line program residence, the IBM System/360 Disk
Operating System:

This reference publication describes the concepts of Disk
and rape Operating Systems and guides the planner in the
use of their Various facilities.
It describes the
components in the Disk and Tape Operating Systems and
explains the function of each. The last section of the
publica tion discusses the design~ preparation and execution
of programs.
For titles and abstracts of associated publications,
,see the IBM SYSTEM/368 BIBLIOGRAPHY, GA22-6822.

Provides stacked-job programming capability.
Provides lIIultiprogramming and telecommunications
capability ..
Controls all input/output.
Provides for continuous operation of all programs run in
its' environment.
Detailed information is given on these major topics:
System Con tr01 program
System Organization
Supervisor Functions
Job Control Program
System Service Programs
Linkage Editor
Librarian
Problem Determination

GC2Q-5033

!ill! g§!!;'!!LJ§J! m;;;~ QU!!lli1!Q ;;YST!:;!!.;.
g;;!!:;!! .!1J:;!l!;.!!!nQ!! !l!Q !!!INTE!!!NCE
This reference publication describes the planning and the
procedures necessary to generate and to maintain an
installation-tailored IBM system/368 Disk Operating System
(DOS) that provides suppo,rt for IBM"supplied DOS programs
you desire, as well as for your own programs. The major
topics discussed are:
Planning the installation-tailored DOS supervisor
Planning the installation-tailored DOS operational

Prereguisite for understanding this publication is
a basic knowledge of System/360 machine concepts ..
Por titles and abstracts of other associated
publications, see the IBM SYSTEH/360 BIBLIOGRAPHY, GA22-

pack (s)

6822.

Procedures for generating and for maintaining the DOS
system
Sample problems for testing the IBM-supplied DOS
programs

Gc2~-5037

I

!.!l!! gSTEHn!!.!! l!!2J\
~!!f~R!I2QR

NG

ggg

This reference publication is for the programmer planning
to use the DOS Input/Output Control Systell macro
instructions and supervisor communication macro
instructions. These macro instructions can be combined
with problem programs to produce generalized or specific
£ile processing programs for a foreground or background
enviroDment. The major subjects describe the macro system,
label processing, multitasking macros, physical IOCS,
supervisor communication macros, and sequential, direct.
and indexed sequential access methods. prerequisite
informa tion is contained in the following publications:

IBM SYSTEM/360 DISK OPERATING SYSTEM, CONCEPTS AND
PACILITIES, GC2Q-5030
IBH SYSTEH/360 DISK OPERATING SYSTEM:

Qg£;!L~!I

AliQ !.Hf!!lLQJll:f!!! 1I!£.RQ§
li.ru!ll! = UQ!I.Ii!.H li!!11!!!! J2!lli=fld2J

'§'I~r~[2 .R~!!£]

The storage requirements for the supervisor and the
operational pack (s) are found in their respective sections
of this publication.
Prerequisites for a thorough understanding and for
the effective use of this publication are:

SYSTEM CONTROL AND

SYSTEM SERVICE PROGRAKS, GC2Q-50'36
IBM SYSTEM/36B DISK OPERATING SYSTEM, SUPERVISOR AND
INPUT/OUTPUT MACROS, Gc24-5.037

IEM SYSTEH/360 DISK OPERATING SYSTEM:
GUIDE,

SYSTEM PROGBAIHIERIS

GC2~-5073

IBM SYSTEM/360 DISK OPERATING SYSTEM, OPERATING GUIDE,
GC2~-5022

IBM SYSTEM/36,0 DISK OPERATING SYSTf::H, DASD LABELS, GC24-

IBM SYSTEM/36B DI SK OPERATING SYSTEK, OPERATOR
COMMUNICATIONS AND MESSAGES. GC2Q-5074

IBH SYSTEH/360 PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION, GA22-6821

5072

IBM SYSTEM/36B DISK AND TAPE OPERATING SYSTEMS, ASSEMELER

Foc titles and abstracts of other associated
publications, see the IBM SYSTEM/36" BIBLIOGBAPHY, GA22-

LANGUAGE,

Gc2~-3414

6822.

IBM SYSTEM/360 DISK OPERATING SYSTEM, DATA MANAGEMENT
CONCEPTS, GC.24-3427
Gc2Q-593~

I~!1 §I~~~HLJ.§.H ll.Rg Q~RATI!ffi
~I.~~g!1 ~£;liYla fRQ!Ili!!1~

§.YSTEl1L

~!§.!~tt

£Q!!IEQ.b

For titles and abstracts of other associated
see the IBM SYSTEH/360 BIBLIOGRAPHY ~ GA22-

!!H~

publicatioDs~

This r~ference publication describes the IEM System/360
Tape Operating System. The system is a set of control
programs and processing programs provided for the IBM
system/360. Using IBK 24JJff-series magnetic tape units for
on-line progcam residence, IBM system/36B Tape Operating
System provides stacked-job processing capability,

6822.

96

SECTION 2:

IDl!B!g~ !!H!M 1Q .'I!!!~ !!!1!b!.Q§i~!:tl!-!!ill- !Q.lili!!f!§Q ~! ! ~..!. !!L~l£!!Q~
1Q TIl£; 1!!Q!!! ill: .'It!]. Q~~'§R ~!!.!1!!&!h_
CONTINUED PROtl PRIOR COLUMN
GC2ij-593B

llH1

[!§'~~~~§'!l Q!§.!i !1!.!2 I~1! Q~IDtll.!!!Q SYSTru!§ BASI£
FORTRAN IV PROGRAMMERS GUIDE
li[n~ig~-l~~~PO=~~-AND 360~=KQ~~~
This publication describes the procedut"es for compiling
and executing Fortran IV programs under control of the
Disk Operating system or Tape Operating System.
Its purpose
is to guide the programmer with examples and techniques
of the Basic Fortran IV language. It also exposes the
user to the components of the control program and facilities
of the IBM system/369 Disk and Tape Operating Systems.

RRQ§E!tt

publications used to compile this consolidated index by
abbreviated title, complete title, order number, and the
subject code of the publication within the IBM System
Reference Library.
Appendix B contains the publication plan
for the Disk Operating Syst~m.
For titles and abstracts of all IBM System/36J and
system/37fl publications, see the IBM System/36t1 and
System/370 Bibliography (GA22-6822).
GC2ij-596ij
l~k! §!~.na:!L~§~

!ll] 2..f:fli!1!1ffi ~!'.§1ID!.L ~QQB!1i!:ll!g IND];!
This index is a consolidation of the indexes of all
programming publications for the IBM Tape Operating system
(TOS). Each index entry is accompanied by the abbreviated
publication title, and subjeGt code of the publication
within the IBH System Reference Library, and the publication
form number.
Appendix A contains a list of the TOS
publications, by title and form number, used to compile
this consolidated index.
Appendix B contains the
publication plan for the Tape Operating System.

GC2ij-5939

I1H! ~X§!~.!1LI§! Q!§!i QPERATING §YSTEH £Q1!Q1 ~!~ ~~.sQ2
PROGRAM NUMBER 360N-CB-46B
This-reference publICation provides the pt"ogrammer with
rules for using DASD macros to handle input/output
operations for direct access or indexed sequential files.
GC2ij-59ij1
Q£E~!I!!!Q

!!!!i §.!§.'tl!!LJ§..f! !!!2!£

ll21JH!L !1!§!li!i

!!!~!

This index is a consolidation of the indexes of all
progt"am ming publica tions for the IBM Basic Operating System
(BOS). Each index entry is accompanied by the abbreviated
publication title, the subject code of the publication
within the IBM System Reference Library, and the publication
form number.
GC2ij-59ij2

DOS AND TOS UTILITY MACROS - SYSTEMS REFERENCE LIBRARY

HANUAC---PROGRA~NijMB~36~M~411

iNn-36Bi=ui=47'--

The-uti Ii tymaero -iIiSttuction;-are priiDarllydeSIgned to
operate within the multiprogramming environment of the Disk
or Tape operating System. Input macro instructions ,can be
combined with output macro instruct ins, and with processing
routines, to generate generalized or specific file
processing programs. The resulting utility programs can
operate in either a foreground or bac kgI:ound partition.
This manual is intended for the applications programmer
who is concerned lIith creating utility pI:ograms to operate
in a DOS or TOS multiprogramming system. The manual
desct"ibes how to specify each macro instruction and gives
examples of various programming applications.
The main sections of this book are:
general information
on generating a utility program, detailed specifications of
the macro instructions, and coded examples illustrating the
use of these instructions.
The reader must be familiar with the information
presented in: IBM System/36~ Disk and Tape Operating
systems, Assembler Language, GC2ij.-341ij., and either TOS
System Control and Service Programs, GC24-5034, or DOS
System Control and Service, GC24-Se36.
GC2ij-5961

!lHi §.!.§.!EHLJ§.!! M§I£
~I§'1:E!1 §~U'!!'!![Q!!

fRQ~RAHMlli§

!!ill

S(JPf2!! §!§!£ I!fli SYSn!l:!

!1AINTENA!~

PROGRAM NUMBER 369p-AS-991

This-reference Publication contains specifications and
operating procedures for generating and maintaining a
system tape for Basic programming Support.
GC24-5962
~li!~.!1L1§.~ !!!~ii QPER!!ING ~I.liTEM !!!TOTE~1. §~gnf!!!£H!§
This reference pu blication describes the testing services
provided by the Disk Operating System Autotest. The
following featUres are described:
Autopatch, Test Request
Options, normal and abnormal End of Job Dumps, Disaster,
Continue and the Autotest Card-to-Tape variable program.
Pt"ogramll.er-oriented diagnostic messages are also included.
Control card formats and examples are given for Job control
as well as for Autotest.
J
The reader should be familiar with the following related
pUblications:

!IB!

order number GA22-6821;
specifica tions, order Dumber GC24-3413;
IB! SYSTEM/369 DISK OPERATING SYSTEM OPERATING

guide, order number GC24-5922;
IBM SYSTEM/369 DISK OPERATING SYSTEM SYSTEM GENERATION

and maintenance, 'order number GC2ij.-5033; and
IBM SYSTEM/369 DISK AND TAPE OPERATING SYSTEMS UTILITY

programs specifications, order number GC24-3465.
GC2ij-5963

,u!IT!!!L1§J!

!!Q~ ~x..§I~!i§ nl.~

GC2ij-5969

!!!1t §x'§'!IDiL:lQJ! .!i!§!£

fRQ~RAHM!1ill

2!!EEQll

MODULAR FILE MAINTENANCE PROGRAM SPECIFICATIONS AND
OPERiTlNG-G"UIDE------ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - fRQg~!~-![H~ig-J~~UT-ll~
This reference publication describes the specifications
and operating procedures for the IBM System/360 Basic
Programming Support Modular File Maintenance program ..
This program is used to retrieve programs from IBM-supplied
distribution tapes.
It i.ll~o builds and maintains a filt:!
of one or more modulus, primarily source and/or object
decks of programs, which may be revised whenever necessary.
Programmer-ori(Jntcd diagnostic messages, as well as
formats and examples of control statements for job control
and the Modular File Maintenance program, are included
in this publication..
An understanding of the IBM System/369
programming concepts is a prerequisite.
System/36liJ programming concepts are discussed in IBM
SYSTEM/36liJ PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION, Order No~ GA22-6821.
Titles and abstracts of other reatled publications are
listed in the IBM SYSTEM/360 BIBLIOGRAPBY, Order No. GA226822. For indexes to other BPS publications refer to the
IBM SYSTEM/360 BASIC PROGRAMMING SUPPORT MASTER INDEX,
Order No. GC24-5067 ..
GC2ij-5979
!~.!i .§!'§!ML.JQ~ .!!~§lf E!iQ§!!!l:!~l]§ §..!1Egg~!L

.QE'§~!!ll.§

§!§Ili!i.§.

ggi!k!L X!fi!

Q~miAll!~

§.!;in1'!L

.s~~IDUa!.£] hl~1!!~r .tl!]!!!~

The types of labels that may be written on magnetic tape
by the System/36.0 are defined and described in this
reference m.anual. The processing performed by the
programming systems, and the specifications that the user
must supply to the systems, are discussed in two major
sections: one section for BPS and BOS processing, and
another section for TOS and DOS processing. Each section
discusses the processing of standard, user-standard, and
nonstandard labels, and unlabeled files.
The discussion
deals primarily with the functions performed for volume,
header, and trailer labels when the user gives
specifications directly to Ioes through DTF entries. In
addition, a portion of each label processing section deals
with the label processing specifications required by
components of the system (such as Sort/Merge, utilities,
COBOL, etc.).
Illustra tions of volume layouts depict the various
art"angements of labels and data records that can be handled

IBM SYSTEM/369 DISK OPERATING SYSTEM SYSTEM CONTROL

and system service programs, order number GC24-5936;

Q~JH!U!.l!!<

!!!~ §:YSTEM/360 ~M.I~ fliQQ~!l!l!.!~§ SUPPORT MASTER INDEX
This index is a consolidation of the-indemof :111programming publications for IBM system/360 Basic
Programming Support (BPS).
Each indeX entry is accom.panied
by the abbreviated publication title, the subject code of
the publication wi thin the IBl1 Systellls Reference Library,
and the publication form number.
Appendix A contains a
list of the BPS publications, by title and form. number,
used to compile this consolidated index.
Appendix B
contains the publication plan for Basic Programming Support.

Q!§.li Q~li!!l~§ §12~£;~L ~!g~ 1!~~1'§

IBM SYSTEM/369 DISK AND TAPE OPERATING SYSTEMS ASSEMBLER

Q;!;g

GC2ij-5967

!!Ag£

IBM SYSTEH/369 PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION,

.!iA§i.Eli

GC2ij.-S066
!lifi ~!.STEtlQ§!!.L Q12li !!!!2. !lll! ggMll!!!§ 2!~~!lL Q!=~J.li£; 1m
llECU1.ll~ g!H!§B!1:h. ~gEfl11QllQ1i2 !!!~ ggg!1TI!§ GUIQ£!.L
PRO!llAl1 .lli!11~ID! IQR QQ§ 1'§'!!!!=1lli=~§1 !Q~ ~§!!,!=DN-41!J
This reference publication describes the On Line Test
Executive Program. that controls on line testing of I/O
units under the Disk and Tape Opet"ating Systems supervisors.
It explains the functions of the program and gives
procedures fot" running the test prog.["ams~ The test programs
are not described in this publication.. Information about
the test programs can be obtained from an IBM Field
Engineering representative.

ll.!lli!!!X 11!!ill.!&

This index is a consolidation of the indexes of programming
publications for the IBH Disk. Operating System (DOS). Each
index entry is accompanied by an abbreviated title of the
publication. Appendix A contains a list of the DOS

97

CONTINUED FRon PRIOR PAGE

by the four programming systems. Plowcharts show the
sequence of events that occur when files with standard.
nonstandard" or no labels are opened and closed.
Por a thorough understanding of this manual. the reader
should have a basic knowledge of the Input/Output control
System (IOeS). The manuals that provide tb.is information
for each system are:

GC24-5982
ill! l!X!!Ul!.Q.2J! !!~ III ~ .!!!!!!l!ll!!W .!1Wl!Uli GUIDE

This publication presents areas for your consideration
during the planning stages for the transition from the

IBH System/36B Disk Operating System (DOS) to the IBH
System/36B Operating System (OS). It is designed to assist

management in preparing a total plan for a DOS-ta-OS
project.
An overview of a transition project is presented
follolled by discussions on education, organization,
operations, standards, system planning, schedl11ing, and
program and file revision considerations. 1'wo appendixes
are also included. Appendix A shows a relationship between
the transition work flow and as education. Appendix S
is an OS glossar y.
This publication emphasizes the considerations for
a DOS-to-os transition project. Because of the differences
between data processing installations, the guidelines in
this publication will ha ve to be adjusted and tailored
to fit the needs of Jour installation.

IBH SYSTEK/36B BASIC PROGRUHING SUPPORT, ASSEIIBLER WITH
INPUT/OUTPUT HACROS (TAPE) SPECIFICATIONS, GC24-JJ55.
IBH SISTER/36S BASIC OPERATING SYSTEM, ASSElIaLER WITH
INPUT/OOTPUT nACROS SPECIFICATIONS, GC24-3361.
IBH SYSTEB/360 TAPE OPERATING SYSTEK, SUPERVISOR AND
INPUT/OUTPUT HACROS, GC24-5B35.
IBH SYSTEK/36B DISK OPERATING SISTEn, SUPERVISOR AND
IHPUT/OUTPUT HACROS, GC24-SB37.
GC24-5S72
.Ill!! liIl!I!!.!!LMJ! !!!g QWUill llllmL 11!!l!l !.AJ!l!!.!l
The types of labels that lIIay be written on a Direct Access
Storage Device (DASD) by the Disk operating System are
defined and described in this reference manual. The
processing performed by the prograllll.ing system, and the

GC24-SB86
!!Ql! 2!.nl!
.!1!!2!l.Il!!!
l!!!lIU !!llEREBCE LIBRA!!! !!!!!l1A!.
!!!!2!!!!Al! !!J!l!m 36SH-!!N-481

=

specifications that the user lIust supply to the system,
are discussed in the second major section. This section
discusses the processing of standard labels (volume, format1, format-3) and user-standard labels for input/output
sequential files and input/output direct access files.
For indexed sequential files, the section discusses standard
labels (volume, forma t-1, forma t-2) under the load, add,
and retrieve functions. The discussion deals prillarily .
with the functions performed for the labels when the user
gives specifications directly to IOCS througb DTF entries.
In other sections, illustrations of volume layouts
depict the various arrangements of labels and data records
that can be handled by the Disk Operating System. The
DASD labels supported by the programalng system are
described. Each label is illustated, and each field of
each label is described in detail. Flowcharts shOll the
sequence of events for lallel processing when sequential,
direct access, and indexed seguential files are opened
and closed.
For a thorough I1nderstanding of this manual, the reader
should have a basic knowledge of the Input/Output control
System (IOCS) as described in IBB SISTEK/36B DISK OPERATING
system, supervisor and input/output .acros, (GC24-S837).
For a list of associated publications, refer to the
IBH System/36B bibliography (GA22-6822).
GC24-5B73
!!.IllK QU!!!U!!!< llXliI!!!! llI!lIU !!J!2!!!!ill.!!!!!!l !l.UIDE

This reference publication is intended primarily for the
systell prograllmer who is involved in Jlaking decisions
relating to the components of the installation's supervisor,
file organization and program design. 1'0 for. a single
publica tioD, this manual brings together and expands upon
informa tioD from many sources. !lajor topics discussed are:
1.
Supervisor Planning concepts
2.
Data 8anagellent
3.
Program Design
4.
Debugging Aids
For each aajor section, the Preface lists the most closely
related publications. Par a complete list of available
publica tions, see the ISM Systeml368 and Systeml370
Bibliography (GA22-6822).

GC24-5S74
llXllI!!!!LMJ! n g Q!!J!!!A.I!!!!l. !l!!l:rn! .!l!!lll!!iM
!l!!lI!!!!l1 !!.!1!1EREN£l! gnARl .!!!!!J!ll
liIl!Il!!!l1 !!ll§RU£l! H!!!!Al!!
.!1ROGRAI! !!J!l!!!H 36SN-Ck!!2J

=

This reference publication provides quick access information
for operators and progralllmers who encounter DOS messages and
use DOS commands and job control language. This publication
does not include:
o
Any lIessage issued by IS!! program .Products
o
Any language .essage issued during compilation or
assembly
o
RPG messages
o
OLTEP messages
o
System/378 ElI.ulator messages
NOTE:

Although titles of some DOS publications have been
simplified, the change does not affect the contents
of the publica tion.
For detailed DOS operating inforllation, see the companion
publication, DOS OPERATING GOlDE (GC24-S8221.. For a list of
associated publications, refer to the lSI! SYSTB!I/368 AND
SYSTEH/37B BIBLIOGRAPHY (GA22-6822).

98

This reference publication describes the Disk Operating
System (DOS) On-Line Test Executive Progra. (OLUP) that
controls online testing of I/O uni t8 under the DOS supervisor. It explains the functions of the prograll and gives
procedures for running the test programs that are obtained
froll. the ISft customer Bngineer.
For titles and abstracts of associated publications,
see the IBB SYSTEB/J6B 2and system/37S BIBLIOGRAPHY
(GA22-6822) •

GC24-6SBS
Ill!! !lIliI!!!!Lill !!.!I§.=lQ::~ !lli.E!II!BUIm GOlDE
!lIl!W lli!UJ!l!!!£.E! !.il!!!!!! .!!!!!m

This publication consists of self-contained chapters, each
of wbich provides information on how to modify the .ISS
Systea/368 Disk operating System (DOS) programs and files to
run under the IBn System/36B Operating System. It is
designed primarily for programming personnel responsible for
making the transition from DOS to OS and applies to DOS
Release 23 and OS .Release 19.

GC24-9SB5

i l l IQ!l f!.L! 11ll. COKPIY!! .!1!!!!!i!!!!!!.!m!§. GOlDE
PROGBilln!!l !llUl!1l
This publication cOllplements the Systems Reference Library
puhlication DOS and TOS PL/I (D) Compiler, Language
Reference lIanual, order Jo. GC28-82B2. Its purpose is to
aid the programmer and to fallilarize him with the techniques
of PL/I programming. rhis publication therefore provides
all information that is DOt part of the PL/I Language
Beference !laoual but regl1ired by the programmer to write
prograas in the PL/I (D) language and to have them compiled
and executed in the DOs/TOS environment.
The main topics coV'ered in this publication are:
o
The DOS~OS environment
o
PL/I data file organization
o
storage requirements of PL/I programs and program
elellents
o
The overlay facility
o
Listings produced for PL/I programs
o
Restrictions to the PL/I (0) language
In sOlle instances, the programmer lIay desire detailed
additional inforllation on topics not directly connected with
PL/I. A list of all pertinent systems Beference Library
publications is provided in the Introduction section of this
puhlication.

!!Q!l

fIoL!

=

GC26-3564
ill! srl!TEH/3~ £Q!!!'!!~ illl!.. I!!l! l!!J!.lLl!!.4S/1468
Il.!1.!! !!llll!.A.!1 .E!!!l!!.!I!!lI .!1!!Q!ii!!! l!!.!! i l l !lISTEH/3GB
!!Ql!1l!. H.. .!1!!Q!ill!! !!!!!!!!ll 36BC-EU-B97

This publication describes the T~pe Overlap Emulator Prograll
and contains instructions on its Ilse. The Tape Overlap
Emulator Program is used with the IBft .14B1/144B/1468
Compatibility Peature of the Systell/368 to allow overlap
of magnetic tape operations with processing of .IBft 148.8series programs.
Emulation is a technique that uses both special machine
features and programming to allow programs written for one
data processing systell be run on another type of system.

GC26-357B
~~ !!ll.!!; AI!!! U.!1.!! l!.!1!!!!lU!!li l!!!lll!!l!
llllQ.!!I .!1!!Q!i!!!!! li BUR ATOR l!U£!filllllli
This publication contains fundamentals of B.PG programlling
and language specifications for the 188 System/368 Disk
and Tape operating Systeas, Beport program Generator.
This program can be I1sed for Systell/368 !lode Is 3B, 48, 58.
65 and 75.

ill

CONTINO ED

FRO~

PRIOR PAGE

CONTINUED FROa PRIOR COLUHN

Also included is the job setup information for executing
RPG.
GC26-3627
g§~lliJ§Jl !!6liJ;J; QUllllllli ll3ll!!
.
lllJl lRQ!;ll§.§. J;Q!!!!!!!!l£U1Q!! ill.!!!!llQ!! illll~ill Jl1Wll!
l!!QJl!M J!!!.!!!!.!!.!! J§Jl!!::ll-032
This pllblicatlon describes operating procedures for the
IB" 1978 Process Communication supervisor. It describes
methods of assellbling, loading, and Bzecuting the pes and
problell programs. A description of error aessages and

It also provides information on systelll requirements and
performance estimates. This manual is designed to aid
both planning and programlling personnel. The reader is
assumed to he familiar with the assembler language and
with macJ:o and conditional-assembly language processing.

lllI

SC26-3759

nMffi::1~6~umRAmG illU!! !ill1ftBLER !!
!1J!Qlll!!!! !!!!!!l!.!!!! 57 H- AS 1

This hook tells hOIl to use Assembler H. It describes
assembler options. cataloged Job Control Language
procedures, assellbler listing and output, sample programs,
and prograllming techniques and considerations.
Assellbler H is an asselllbler-language processor for
the IBft system/36B Operating system. It performs highspeed assemblies on an IBH System/36B Kodel I.UJ or higher
with at least 256K bytes of main storage.
This book is intended for all Assembler H programmer s.
It should be used in conjunction with the OPERATING SISTEK
ASSEMBLED LANGUAGE Hanual, Order Humber GC28-6514; the
ASSEHBLER H LANGUAGE SPECIPICATIONS. order NUliber GC263771; and the ASSEKBLER H MESSAGES, Order H.mber SC26-3770.

halts is also included.
GC26-3734
!l!!1 J!ll~J§Jl QlERlTING SYSTEK ll.!!.!! illJ!.!!!li Q.HlQ!!.;.
~ MJ!!!1m..!!J! f!!Q!!lUll .!l!!.!!ill Q!!,!.E!;!1.!.!!~ !1!!!!!lJ!!!! 573ij-CP2
This Program Product Design Objectives (PPDO) describes
the design objectlyes and provides the estimated
availability date of the subject Prograll Product.
GC26-3735

!l!!1 illnLJ.2Jl QUllUill J!llrEK !liJ!.llMBLER !!
.!l.!!§l!l.!! gl!!!.!!!;ll!ll§. J!J!.!!.!!L. Wll.!!l!!! .!!l!.l!!!]J! lli!!::!lil

Assembler H is a high-performance assembler language
processor for the IBft System/36B Operating system. This
document contains the design objectives for Assembler H
support of syste./370.

GC26-3767
.
!l!!! 27 ~Jla.2~ 6!!.!l.ll!=llJ!J!ll £illJ!QIo !!J!ER ' J! GU I DE
U5I NOKBER urn!!
This manual tells course authors how to control the audiovisual units with the 271.HI remote terminal. It also
describes the units and the' progralliling support required
to operate them.

SC26-37U
~ Aill!1l!Io.!!lll!!2!1mll USER'J! mlllL. PRO!!". !!!!.. 21ll=m
The assembler prollpter is a program product that makes it
easy to call Assembler :r frail a terminal. The prompter,
which is a command processor, operates only under the Tille
Sharing option (~SO) of the IBM Systeill/360 operating System.
This book is for the assembler-language programller who
vants to use TSO to write, assemble, and execute programs
from a terminal using the assembler prollpter.
section 1, wbich supplements the manual IBM. SYSTEH/36B
OPERATING SISTEM: USB SHARIHG OPTION TERMINAL USER'S GUIDE
(GC28-6763), explains how to use the ASft coamand by itself
to assemble source code and obtain object code for existing
source code. It also e1:plains how to use ASK as an operand
of the ROB command and of the BUN subcommand of the EDIT
cOllmand to assemble, load, and execote assellbler-language
source code.
Section 2, which supplements the book IBM SISTEK/360
OPEBlTI NG SISTU: TIftE SHARING OPTIOH COftftAND LAHGUAGE
REFERERCE (GC28-6732), describes the format of the AS!
cOlllland and lists the operands, with a brief description of
each, in alphabetic order.

!!J!

GC26-37~3

m §.1lH!!Lill Q!1ERlUNG illn.!! llJ!l!!!m..!!J! !!
SPECIPlrul.!!!! !i.J!.!!.!!L. U!!llll!! NUMBER 573~-A§1
This Program product Specifications (PPS) describes the
warranted specifications of the subject program Product.

GC26-37~6

QJl MU !!.l!!Mln!ll!~ ~ ll!!lll! = §.1lU!!J! rum!!.!;!!
1l!!l!!!!I = f!!!!llW I!!!IIl!l!!!J! 36IlS-AS-036.137 ~~l!=.!!!!::liJlL.2ft.2
~2!!.l!=l!!~

Describes the assembler-language, I/O-related macros of OS.
Defines and provides how-to information about (£i1:ed,
blocked, variable, undefined) record for.ats, data set
organization methods (sequential, indexed-sequential, and
direct) and procedures for creating and updating access
techniques (BDAI!, BISn, BPAH, BS1S, QISU, QSAft). Contains
information on direct-access device characteristics and
allocation of space on direct-access devices.

SC26-3768

!l!!1 gSTEK/360 Qll.!!lll!!!i ~!!!
!§.J!.!!.!!l!ill !! ill~n INFOUATION 1!1J!Qlll!!!! !!!!!!!!.!l!! 573ij-Aill
IBft system/36B Operating Systell Assembler H Systell
Information Prograll Number 5734-.151 vas designed
to improve man y features of Assembler F, and has expanded
capabilities as a macro assembler for both system and user
defined macro languages.
This publication describes installation considerations
and system-generation procedures for Assembler H, and is
intended primarily for programmers responsible for
installing the assembler.
This manual is divided into three independent chapters:
a
Performance Estilla tes,
o
Storage Estim.ates, And
o
Srstell Generation.

SC26-3771l
ll!!! ~.!!l!L~2Jl Qu!!!ll!!ll J!ll~!l!! !ill1!!l!1.!!1l !! !!.!!~
l!!!!ll.!!l!!! J!!!.!!l!]J! ~:U!!::6ll
This book describes the assembly error diagnostic messages
and the abnormal assembly tor min at ion messages issued by
Assembler H. Assembler H is an assembler-language processor
for the IBK system/368 operating systelli. It performs highspeed assemblies on an IBH System/36S Kodel 48 or higher
with at least 256K bytes of main storage.
This book is intended for all Assellbler H Programmers.
I t should be used in conjunction with the OPERATING SYSTE~
ASSEftBLER LANGUAGE MANUAL, Order N•• ber GC28-651~; the
1SSEftBLER H LAHGUAGE SPECIFICATIONS, Order Number GC263771; and the ASSEftBLER H PROGRAftMER' S GUIDE, Order Number
SC26-3759.
For each error message, this book describes the number
and text of the .essage, the explanation of the error,
the assembler's handling of the error, and tile programmer's
response to correct the error. The introduction to this
book describes the format, content, and placement of the
error messages.
GC26-3771
1!!!1 J!~.!!!!LJ~Jl Ql.!!!I!!l!!!i J!ll~'!!!! ASSEHBLER !!
!.llGOAGE J!!1.!!!;lllCATIONS
f!!Q§!!!JI .!!l!.l!l!.!!J! 573~-AS1
fhis manual provides language specifications for the IBK
System/368 Operating system Assembler B. Primarily intended
as a reference manual for assembler-language programmers,
it is designed to be used in conjunction with IBM 51STEK/368
OPERATING SISTE! ASSEMBLER LANGUAGE, Order NUllber GC28-

GC26-3756

!l!!! J!llTEftt361 !lfnnill lliUJ! llJ!l!I!BJ,BR i l l

f!!Q.Ill!lIl1l1B!J! !i!l!ll.!! = PROGRAn .!!l!.l!J!]J! 36l!S-AS-037
This pobl1catlon complements the :IDIl Systell/368 Operating
System. Assembler Langmage pob1ications. It provides a
guide to prograll assembling, linkage editing, e1:ecuting,
interpreting listings, assembler programming considerations,
diagnostic messages, and object output cards.
Information in this manual on IBI! System/360 Kodel
195 should be used for planning purposes only.

651~.

Sections 2 - 5 of this manual describe assembler language
extensions.
Sections 6-1 a of this lIlanual describe extensions to
the macro lang uage.

GC26-3758
l!!!! lillTEH/36Jl Ql.!!illill SYSTEft llJ!l!!!1!!A!l .L.!!l.
!1!!!!!lJ!U PRODO~ !i!ll!!!J!ll IRFORKATION

f!!Q§!\U !!.!!!!!!!lI! ~1l~-AS1
Asse.bler B is a new assembler-language processor that
extends the basic assembler langoage and the macro and
contitlonal-assembly language. It is designed to perform

GC26-3777
.!!!!!!!.Ul!!!i ru!J! Q!! ll!!! ill~37a J!NDEJl !!J! !!ll~ !!ll.llm!l
LIBRA!!1 II!I!!!!!.
UQJl!M !!!!.!!l!.!!.!! 1.§Jl!;=!!!::738
The Disk Operating System. (DOS) Emulator Program executes
under an IBM Operating system (OS) having oither an HFT or
KVT control program. It enables DOS programs to execute in
an as environment. The DOS Bmulator program lIIay be

=

high-speed assemblies on IBS system/360 ftodels ~l! and
larger that have at least 256K bytes of lIain storage.
This publication describes the language extensions.

99

CONTINUED FROI't PRIOR PAGE
multiprogrammed with other OS jobs, and it can run the
multiprogramming options of DOS.
This publication provides information for programmers
and operators to help them code and run DOS jobs with the
DOS Emulator program.
Introductory material that describes
the operations and requirements for the DOS Emulator program
is inCluded. Lists of program generated messages and sample
job streams are also provided in the reference sections.
It is assumed that readers of this publication are
familiar with os AND DOS and have a working knowledge of
their control programs.
.

GC26-3782

llHt

§MT;gl!L~~ ~ru!ATUiQ SYS~~.!1 ~IME

Gc27-6938
!!H1 2!:1!1U!Ll.§JI '£QH..'a.ngQ-H llR2l. !M I!!Z9. ~.tl!U!!Q1! RRQ!H.t!~
!:QR !ru! 2 YST miLJ.@L ~QQg12. 2!! !!iQ £2L
PROGRAM NUMBER 36e'C-EU-72S

SYSTEMS fiEFERENCELrBRARY-

provIdes

"ThI"S-publlcationinformation on the IBM 7374
Emulator Program (36.0C-EU-725), and is directed to the
user who is supplementing or replacing his IBM 7.07.0/7~74
Data Processing system with an IBM system/36.0, Model 5.0
or 65.
Emulation is a technique that utilizes both
equipment (Compatihility Feature) and programming to execute
object programs written for other data pcocessing systems.

GC27-6939

.§!!!!t!!!§ QfllQ!!

ASSEMBLER PROMPTER PROGRAM PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
.!'llQQi!M-liJlli~:nH~=S;~--- - - - - - - - - - - - - - The Program Product Specifications (PPS) describe the
warranted specifications of the subject program Product.

g~~liUJ§.!! Qf~R!1!IDi 2rg~.!1L Q1!!R.H!f
2~R!!£12 f2R !~!'! ~ill ~!~gll! !!!!l!L

ll.!1

GC26-3794
Qli 12!~~ !!A!iAQl!.H!!H:r !!!£RQ .!M~!tl!£!!Q1!2 :. 2!2!~~ .ft£dr~~~£li

='

il!!!!!!l: :. 1llR!RI HA!!Y..!~
fIiQf!RA M 1!!Hrn~R§ J&~.!1=.~h i l l
363S-1O-526
This-pUblication is intended for application programmers who
are writing in assembler language; it contains,. a brief
description of each macro instruction and a description of
each operand that can be specified in a macro instruction.
Descriptions of the macro instructions for the folloving
data management access methods are contained in this
publica tion.
o
Basic Direct Access Method (BDAft)
o
Basic Indexed Sequential Access Method (BISAH)
o
Basic Partitioned Access Method (BPA[1)
Basic Sequential Access Method (BSAM)
Queued Indexed sequential Access Method (OISAM)
o
Queued sequential Access I'tethod (OSA[1)
This publication does not contain descriptions of macro
instructions for specialized application programs such as
teleprocessing,. graphics magnetic character readers, optical
character reader-sorters optical character readers.
Before using this publication to code macro instructions
you should be familiar with the information contained in the
OS Data Management Services Guide.
GC26-3796
OS TESTRAN SYSTEM INFORMATION - SYSTEMS REFERENCE LIBRARY
PROGRA~-NOMBE~363S:PT=516--- - ------- --------- ------T'hIs-manualdescrIbesth'e-procedures for restoring TESTRAN,.
the TESTRAN macro instruction used to generate TESTRAH into
the new operating system,. and the storage needed to restore,
install, and execute TESTRAN. The manual is for system
programmers who generate and maintain the Operating system.
GC26-5929
!!!.!! llJJ!

GC27-6911
!ll!! gYSTE!!Ll§.!! £Q!!y'!;ll§'!Q1! HQ§..;. :r!!E1 1 38 3 :!:.!!!!IDQJl .!'!!.QllJ!!.!!
.E2R !§.t! §..r§.1 E I't/3 6B 1'!QR~ §h gROGR!~ li!U!gg J'§~£=ID!:.ln
SYSTEMS REFERENCE LIBRARY
machineandproqramming features expand the
capabilities of IBH System/369 Hodel 65 to include an
alternate mode of operation: operation as the IBM 7080
Emulator. The Emulator is the effective equival.ent of the
IBM 7.,8,a Data processing System,. and is capable of executing
programs written for the 7089. This publication describes
how to prepare and use a suitably configured System/360
for the ,execution of 7089 programs.
General information is provided on Emulator
characteristics, programming considerations, and operating
considerations. Complete instructions for system generation
and program use are provided, together with detailed
infocmation on error messages and corrective actions.

special"

GC27-6912

I!!! §'I21~.HLJ§l! QR~R!a:!l!Q §!§.!M ~Af1!!£ PROGll1U!!!i§. §AR VIC~
fQll !!!.!! ll§.Jl Q!§...!'kl!! 2:!:H!QM lkQfl!.!: l!:!:I!CHME1!TI.
.!'JlQllll!!! M!!1!!!Ell J~t!Q::.2l1
This publication describes programming services for using
the IBH 226.0 Display Station with the system/36.0 Operating
System. Included 'are descriptions of macro instructions
for input/output control and for Basic and Express Attention
Handl.ing, along with some general requirements for using
the display station effectively.
Although intended primarily for the programmer coding
in system/369 assembler language, portions of this
publication are also of interest to installation managers,.
system engineers, system programmers, and others seeking
general information about programming the IBM 226.0 Display
station.

§J!ID!Q!!:r!l!~ H!!ll!!!l fQJl i l l !!IT!! TI!~ 1!!g!l J!QJlllQJ!
!];ggQH ~ !!QRIFI£ll:!QJ! LEVn ~
.!'JlQllll!!! NOM!!:!:ll§. l.ll!!::OS-3J!.h llJJ!::Q§.::J!J!h
ll~a:~L

This publication describes the libraries provided with
the following programming systems:
o
o
o

f!ill!l!ill.!1J!!Q

PROGRAM NUl-IBER 36I!JS-IO-523
T"hIS-publicationdescribes macro instructions and routines
provided under the IBM System/36.0 Operating System for use
vi th the IBM 225.0 Display Unit.
These programming services are 'designed to facilitate
the assembler-language coding of programs for displaying
data in alphameric or graphic form on the 225.0 screen and
for controlling man-machine communication using the 225.0
• Included are facilities for creating the image-defining
orders and data, for con trolling input/output functions
of the graphic device, and for handling communications
from a 2250 operator. Both basic and express attention
handling are described.
Although intended primarily, for the programmer coding
in System/369 assembler language, protions of this
publication are also of interest to installation managers,.
system engineers, system programmers, and others seeking
general information about programming the IBM 2259 Display
unit.

1139 card/paper Tape
1139 Disk Monitor Version
1139 Disk Monitor Version

The programming system libraries consist of
input/output, conversion, arithmetic, functional, and
utility subroutines. Included in the descriptions are
calling sequences for the the subroutines and explanations
of the paralleters involved.
The section on conversion subroutines describes the
codes used to comllunicate with the 1139 system I/O devices.
An appendix lists these codes and shows their relationship
to each other.

GC27-6918
~!§'!li!1L12!! QtlMII1!f!. .§.xgruu. !lA!!!~lli!£~ ~QGRAHi
.!'JlQ~ll!!! l!!!1!llEll 1~2::UT-5J!§'

!!H1

This publication describes the procedure for applying IBMdistributed maintenance material, or user-provided material
in a prespecified form, to operating-system libraries.
The major portioD of this information concerns the Update
Analysis Progr.am--a program that determines the
applicability of maintenance material for the individual
system libraries, and accordingly constructs a job stream
that effects the library updating. The info.~mation
contained in IBM SYSTEM/366 OPERATING SYSTEM: SYSTEM
GENERATION,. Form GC28-6554, is prereguisite to the use
of this publication.

GC26-5999
!ll!! g!§ IT!!LMl.@ ~ll TI!A!!m..!IQll
This manual provides programming specifications for the
IBM system/369 RPG Translator. It describes the operations
necessary for converting a 1q99 RPG source program to a
System/369 RPG source program.
The information contained in this publication will
enable a 1q99 RPG programmer to determine the scope of the
Transla tor program and to formulate preliminary plans for
its use.
This manual lists the machine fea tures required and
supported, describes the fUnctional characteristics of the
program,. and provides a section on data checking and
operating characteristics. Restrictions to the program
are defined, and suggested solutions are provided. A
program example, and operating procedures are also included.

GC27-6924

!!Hi

~!~~J.§1! ~il.K Q.eru!!1lli g.§1M VOCABULARY flY UrILI!!
~EQ~~!!! FOB .rn~ I~1! 1I11. !!!Q~ RggQl!§.! !!.!ll
PROGRAM NUMBER 363N-UT-472
TiiTsdocument prOVides information on the Vocabulary File
utility Program for the IBM 1172 Audio Response Unit,. that
enables the user to create, organize, and update the file
of work represen tations from which the audible responses
of the IBM 1772 Audio Response Doi t are formed.

100

CONTINUED FROM PRIOR COLUMN
GC27-6927

Communications Adapter subrotines (in the 1130). The PTOP
subroutines are not an extension of the FORTRAN IV Language,
but are to be used- in conjunction with it ..
It is assumed that the FORTRAN user of this publication
is experienced in the FORTRAN IV language of both the IBK
System/36~ operating System and the IBM 1130 Disk Monitor
System Version 2. It is assemed that the Assembler Language
user of this publica tioD is experienced in the Assembler
Language of both systems. Detailed knowledge of binary
synchronous communications programming is unnecessary.

.!!Hl ~!?.T£l~l§.~ ~.fmA!.!1iQ ~!~n!1 !l!i.!~!!rr fli~ill!!!itl!ffi. SERli~~
EQR II!!i ~2f!f! AliQ 22!!2 !!111 !llill~ tlQ§M!1 .!B!!1!!M lM2.=!.Q=2ll

This publication contains information for writing progl:"ams
using the IBM 2280 Film Recorder or the IBM 2282 Film
Recorder/Scanner.
Fot' complete coverage of available 2280/82 graphic
programming services, this publication must be used with

IBM SYSTEI1/360 OPERATING SYSTEIi1; GRAPHIC PROGRAMMING
services for IBM 225~ Display Unit. order number GC27-69B9.

The information consists primarily of formats and
descriptions of macro-instructions that generate orders
and data that control the graphic devices.

Considerations

GC27-6938

for user's error handling routines are also included.

!~~ 2!2.'!:~J§'~ Q~TI.!fi S YSIn

Ali.!! 11:1H. .!!!§.! !!.Q1!!!.Q! §1.§.!D.
DSER'S GUIDE FOR JOB CONTROL FROM AN IBM 225£1 DISPLAY UNIT

!~i~£!!~Q-%Q!!!]:Hl1J!SYSTEtRRBQ~.H.!l

GC27-6929

!.!H1 §.!§.!]nL.;!§'f!

36~C:EU-097--360C-EU:727--36~C-EU-731--36eC-EU:72S-----

360C:Eij:72s

:36iiC:EU:733

--------

-----------

samplep-;oblemsa-;eprovided as a part of the distribution
material for IBM System/369 Emulator Programs. They are
illustra tive examples designed to familiarize the user
with the techniques required to execute object programs
written or other IBM data processing systems under Emulator
control. Sample problems are not intended to provide
detailed and exhaustive tests or demonstrations of Emulator
Programs.
Included in this publication are sample problems for
use with the following Emulators:
1401/14Q0/146.0 Model
3.0, 14.01/146.0 Model 40, 1'111:'17.011:1 Models 40 and 5.0, 162.0
Model 30, 7.040/7.0'14 Model 65, 1014 Hodels 50 and 65, 7.080
Model 65, and

709/7~9~17~94/7094II

.!!!!!rnM§

l§~=.!!~lli

- -- - - -------

!J!Q 1130-CQ-lli

This publication describes how a person at an IBM 2259
Display Unit attached to an IBM 1130 Computing system can
define and initiate jobs to be processed by the IBM
System/360 Operating system.
A job defined at the display
unit can be processed independently in the System/369 or
it can be processed in conjunction with a related program
in the 1139..
The publication descusses the job control
operations available to the 225.0 user and pl:ovides
supplementary· information to assist him at the display
unit. A complete sample job with text and illustrations
is included.
The information on job control operations is written
for a person unfamiliar with the IBM System/360 Operating
system, the IBM 113.0 computing System, or the IBM 2250
Display Unit. A series of appendixes provide information
of interest to programlllers and installation personnel
planning for this support.

AID§i. ~!t~!& R.liQill:~.tt.§. IQli !!!11
2!2!gt!L.2§~ g!l.!!~llQli PROG.B!!t§
PROGRAM NUMBERS: 36I3C-EU-07Q 36I3c-EU-726 360C-EU-129
~li!IDLgQ!:!

Model 65.
GC27-6939

!!ill §!1i.TEMa~ QRruUlIT!lli 1i.!§Ul!'- lin GUIQJl
! ggQ !!!!!!ru;!! Ql USKS 11!nl

GC27-6932

!lHi §'!~!!;!!LJ§'~ gggR!!ING §1.2IML QRARHIC .§.!!BRO!!!!!!g
f!£'!s!Q£! lQ§fl EQR FORTRAN ll..c. COBOL, !1Ul .E~L!L
PROGRAM NUMBER 36.0S-LM-537
This-publication-describes how a FORTRAN, COBOL, or PLII
programmer can write graphic programs for use with the IBM
225.0 Display Unit in association with the IBM system/36.0
operating System.
It also describes how the graphic
subroutine package may be used in a program written in
Assembler Language.
The graphic subroutine package (G SP) consists of
subroutines and functions for displaying characters or
graphic forms on the 2250 screen and for controlling
communication between the program and the 225~ operator ..
The subroutines may be called from a program written in
the E, G, or H level of FORTRAN IV, in COBOL (F), or in
PL/I (F), or from a program written in Assembler Language.
They are not an extension of the FORTRAN IV, COBOL, or
PL/I languages, but may be used in conjunction with theDl.

PROGRAM NUHBER 360S-CI-5.05
This-publicaUonprovides-informa tion concerning Version
II of l'Iultiprogramming With a Fixed Number of Tasks (11FT)
for installation personnel who are responsible for
selection, evaluation, and implementation of System/36e
Operating system configurations. The information is
presented in two major categories: CONCEPTS and
CONSIDERATIONS.. These sections describe, respectively:
The principles of operation of tiFT.
The influence of these principles on the application
and operation of the system.
The descl:iptive information is supplemented by examples
and illustrations including a sample job scheduling sequence
and sample partition configurations for systems with 128K,
256K, and 512K bytes of main storage.

GC27-6940
~l§n~n§~

Gc27-6933

l2! JOB

Q!'.g!1lli

!~t! 2llI~!1LJ§'~ Q!!~R!'II!!Q 2.l§ll!1 fLAN.!!!1!Q XQli ROLLQ!!UMLLIN
This publication descl:ibes the features and capabilities
provided by the rollout/rollin feature of the IBK System/368
Operating System.
Rollout/rollin is used in conjunction
with MVT (multiprogramming with a vaJ:iable number of tasks)
as an aid to main storage management.

GC21- 6937

1]11 2X§!]J1LJ§!! Qf.!;m!'IING ll~ID1 !@ lll!! J!I2.K !HllU:rQR
§1.'['I~.!iL g[~!UJ§'!
llJ!! DAT! !R!!~!1~2IQ!! £:QR. ~Qli!liA!!

=

36~S-LM-542

AND

36~N-EU-485

Thispubllca:tioncOntainSinformation on the Emulation
of 1401, 144.0. and 146.0 object pJ:ograms under the control
of the Disk Operating system. Compatibil.ity Support/38
and Compatibility Support/40 allow emulation of these
programs on the IBM system/3 6e 80de~s 38 and 40,
J:espectively..
Compatibility Support/30 comprises the IBM
1401/144.0/1460 E mula tOJ: Program, Number 368N-EU-484, and
applicable Compatibility Features for the Model 38_
Compatibility Support/48 comprises the 14Bl/1448/146S
Emulator program. Number 36BN-EU-485, and the applicable
Compatibility Features for the Hodel 'lB.
In addition,
the 14.01, 144.0i, and 1460 object program can be run on the
IBM System/360 Hodel 25 using the 14e1/1"4B/146B EllulatoJ:
Program for Compatibility Support/3e in conjunction with
applicable COlllpatibility Features for the Bodel 25.
General inform ation concerning machine requirements,
program generation, simulation techniques, data format,
control cards, and pJ:ogramaing considerations is included,
as are detailed explanations of Operator Service Functions,
operating procedures, console messages, and special
instructions added by the Compatibility Features for the
Models 33 and 49.
The 14.0i9 Emulator Program under DOS· allows the user
to run the 14.01/144.0/1460 programs, with little or no
reporgramming under the Disk Operating System in conjunction
with the Compatibility Features.
This allows 1""" programs
to be run in a stacked job environment, mixed with
Sy stem/368 jobs.

GC27-6935

1130-LM-~11

ThIs-publlc;;:t:ion -describessubroutin;S-Uat enable a FORTRAN
IV programmer to transmit data between a program. being
processed by the IBM System/36e Operating System and a
program being processed by the IBM 113e Disk Monitor System
Version 2. It also describes how these subroutines can
be used by an Assembler Language programmer.
The subroutines described in this publication make up
what is called the processor-to-processor (PTOP) .program.
With these subJ:outines, the FORTRAN programmer can perform
telecommunication procedures similar to those available
to Assembler Language programmers via the binary synchronous
services of the Basic Telecommunications Access Method (in
the System/360 operating system) and the Synchronous

SYSTM 1.'illlL1!!4~/14~

f..Qlttl.'!!BILITY §!!ggORT 3a/4ft

PROGRAM NUKBERS 360N-EU-484 AND

QQ!:!I~~

rgqn :rag ~~~ ~~2~ Q!2£1!! Y!lTL PROQR~ ]QH~~R J2!§=S£=2~1
This pUblication describes how a person at an IBM 2253
Display Unit can define and initiate jobs to be processed
by the IBM System/363 Operating system. The publication
discusses the job control operations that are available
at the display unit and provides supplementary information
to assist the user.
A sample job control session is
explained with test and illustrations.
The descriptions of the job control operations are
wri tten fOl: a person who is not familiar with the IBH
system/369 Operating System.

PROGRAM NUMBERS

!U.§!\

f!!1y.!!!~ PROGRA~2

!~ ~I~X!;]Ll~~ Qf~RAI!liQ SYS~ ~li~§' ~!Q~

GC27- 6 942

101

!~n

gSTEH/3M

!!!!l!l!!!£!i!

Q.f..g~ ~l!

~

INTRQDUCTION :!Q MAIN

!':l!B 1M £ill !!QQll§ 1 AND

~

2~

This publication is an introduction to programming
requirements and considorationn for the division of main
storage into two separatoly addJ:essable segments called
hierarchies.
IBI'I 2361 Core Storage is economical bulk storage that
can be attached to processor storage units.
Hain storage

CONTINUED FROM PRIOR PAGE

CONTINUED FROM PRIOR COLDMN

Hierarchy Support is programming support for the 2361.
This support allows 2361 Core Storage to be selectively
addressed, so that storage can be allocated from it for
work. areas or for loading of modules. Main Storage
Hierarchy support can be used with all configurations of
the operating system except MVT with Model 65
mul ti processing.
This publication is for planners who need to decide
on the physical configuration of an information processing
system and for systems analysts and programmers who want
to use the system lDost efficiently.
GC27-6948

ill1!!ll!!!iQ !!rn. !M 1 0 14 QH !Im IBM

g~:u1UB!!

!!2Rn

1§.a.

l!1lIl!!? QW§.i!

This publication contains planning information about the
IBM 10714 Emulator program for the Systell/378 Model 165.
The emulator program runs as a problem program under the
11FT or "VT version of the System/360 Operating System.
The Model 165 must be equipped with the IBI'! Compatibility
Feature #7117. The emulator program and the compatibility
feature enable programs written for the IBM 70714 Data
Processing System to be executed on the Model 165.
The information in this publication is for installation
personnel responsible for evaluating, selecting, and
implementing system configurations.
GC27-6949
!~!1 2!.~IHLJ§..@.

QfE.B!!Q.!t~§'

2flailING SYSTEM:

GOlm; l2R

!?!~£!&! gm2Qg~

This publication .tells system operators how to use cathode
ray tube (CnT) display devices as operator consoles to
run MFT or MVT configurations of the IBl"! System/369
operating system. The manual describes in detail' the
operating techniques for the Model 85 Operator Console
(Featuro 5ij5B), the 2256 Display unit, and the 2269 Display
station (local attachment). A summary of device
characteristics and a glossary are included. The book
must be uoed in conjunction with IBK SYSTEM/369 OPERATING
SYSTEr'!: OPERATOR'S REFERENCE, Form GC28-6691, and IBM
SYSTEIV360 OPERATING SYSTEM: OPERATOR'S PROCEDURES,. Form
GC28-6692.
GC27-6950
I!!~ ~X;;!f,~L}!;ff Q£);~!!ING

SYSTEM

PLAl!~'!'!!Q

IQ!! gSPLg

CONSOLES
Th'is-pui;licntion contains planning information about Device
Indepondent Display Operator Console Support (DIDOCS) for
system annlyntG and other personnel wbo are concerned with
planning, ovnluating, and implementing System/369 Operating
Systom configurations. DIDoes provides Uniform operating
characterh::tic5 for 2258 Display Units, r'!odels 1 and 3,
2260 Display stations, Model 1 (local attachment), and
Model 85 CRT Displays, and will supersede all existing
MVT system equipped with lIultiple Console Support (MCS)"
The information is presented in two parts:
1)
A description of DIDOeS, its capabilities, and
the environment in which it functions.
2)
A discusssion of the advantages of using display
operator consol.es, their effect on system
performance, and how they are generated into
a system ..
There are no prerequisite publications,. but the reader
is assumed to have an understanding of the system
i

configuration and the requirements for operator consoles
at his installation.
GC27-6951
~!!.!.~nl!!? :!:!!); I!!l! 1894 Q!!

UII J!Q!!g1! !!.2 !l!Q 122 illl!!? Q.§L368

This manual describes the IBM 7.09/7890/7094/1894 II Emulator
program for the IBM System/378 Model 165, and provides
information needed to use the program. The emulator program
executes object programs for the IBM 709, 7098, 7894, and
70914 II Data Processing systems, and runs as a problem
program under the MFT or I'!VT configuration of the IBM
System/36B Operating System.. The System/310 Model 165 must
be equipped with the lBf! Compatibility Feature '7119.. The
emulator program uses the compatibility feature to perform
the more complex and frequently occurring processes of
emUlation.
The manual also describes three programs that are d
distributed with the emulator: the tape preprocessor
program, the tape postprocessor program, and the emulator
system-output writer. The preprocessor and postprocessor
programs are data manipulation programs that change the
format of 7094 data. The writer prints 78914 data spooled on
the S IS OUT data set.
system planners and programmers should use this manual
for planning, generating, using, and modifying the emulator.
Programmers responsible for executing 7094 programs should
use the manual for instructions on processing 7094 data and
executing the emulator w System operators should use the
manual for instructions on how to communicate with the
emulator program. All messages issued by the emulator and

the data manipulation programs are included in an Appendix.
programmers and planners should be experienced with the
IBM 799, 7890, 7094, or 7094 II Data Processing System, and
have a working knowledge of either the 11FT or IIVT
configuration of the IBM system/360 Operating System ...
GC27-6952
!l~l!Un!!Q Ill); llll li!M Ql! :!:!I!l llll g~EM(378 !lQ!!!l.!. .1!i2
ll1!I!!!! QU;J.§i! ::. £!lQ!l!!!!l l!UMBID! 36HC-EU-737

This manual describes the IBII 708H Emulator Program for the
IBM System/370 Hodel 165, and provides information needed to
use the program. The emulator program executes object
programs for tbe IBM 7089 Data Processing System, and runs
as a problem program under the MFT or lIVT conf iguration of
the IBM system/360 Operating system. The System/370 1I0del
165 must be equipped with the IBM Compatibility Peature
'7118.. The emulator program uses the compatibility feature
to perform the more complex and frequently occurring
processes of emulation.
The manual also describes three programs that are
distributed with the emulator: the tape preprocessor
program, the tape postprocessor program, and the emulator
system-output writer. The preprocessor and post processor
programs are data manipulation programs that change the
format of 7080 data. The writer prints 7980 data spooled on
the SYSOUT data set.
System planners and programmers should use this manual
for planning, generating, using, and modifying the emulator ..
Programmers responsible for executing 7980 programs should
use the manual for instructions on processing 7"8" data and
executing the emulator. System operators shOiald use the
manual for instructions on how to communicate with the
emulator program. All messages issued by the emulator and
the data manipulation programs are included in an Appendix ..
Programmers and planners should be experienced with the
lB.!! 7880 Data processing system and with the IBM System/368
Operating System, having a working knowledge of either the
MFT or the HVT configuration.
SC27- 6 955

n!!!2Lll!!

USER.§ ru!!.Q~

=flill!M1! fR2.!H!ru 5734-RC.2L 5736-BC3*N

This manual provides the information that an operator
requires to use VIDEO/370 for data entry and verification at
the IBH 3275 Display Station.
VIDEO/370 is an IBM program product that allows data
entry from local or remote display stations to provide data
for application programs. Formats, commands, and checking
features speci!i ed by the installa tion allow dynamic error
correction by the operator.
This publication describes the operator's role in the
VIDEO/37fJ system and special VIDEO/370 aspects of the
display station; the basic commands are features available
to all operators; procedures for data verification; optional
VIDEO/379 commands that - provide iIIore extensive edi tin9
capabili ties: error recovery procedures, including
explanations of diagnostic messages sent to the operator:
and a sample VIDEO/379 data entry session. A glossary
defines terms used in the publication as they relate to
VIDEO/37H.

Prerequisi te Publication: operator's Guide for the IBM
3270 Information Display System, GC27-2739.
GC27-6966
I!!l! Q£ID!!!I!!Q g~~ y!!tEO/3 7 8
£!!Q!?!!!!l £!lQll.!!£.1: DESI!?]! Q!hl~Y~
£!l.Q!l!!!1l NUMBE!! 573!!::.!!£.2

This general overv iev is intended for system lIIanagers and
personnel responsible for the selection of data processing
systems. It describes VIDEO/370, an IBM progralll product
used for data entry and verification wit.h the IBM 3277 and
3275 display sta tions.
GC27-697H

I!!l!

ggML;J.~

QR!l!!!nl!!? SYS:!:!ll! £!!2!!!.!ll! DETERMINATION AIDS

!l!J! !!!!!l.§!!?!l!l !!lJ! £Qll!l!l fQ.!! !?£1! !l!J! !?1!F. ::. £!!Q!l!!!!! .!!.!!l!!!.!:!!!.§
!.!il! ~ESSA2B2 AND £Q!!!§. l2!! 2f.§. AliI! §g
f!!2.f!iA11 1iJ1!'mERS
~::.IO-g;J. A!!l! 36H~::1!l::.2;J.l

=

This manual contains aids for determining and solving
problears that invol.ve display programs that use either the
Graphic Programming Services (GPS) for the IBM 2250 Display
Unit and IBM 2260 Display station or the Graphic subroutines
Package (GSPJ for the IBft 2250 Display Uni t. The aids are
directed to the display operator, application programmer,
system operator, system programmer, and system llIaintenance
personnel ..
The manual is divided into an introduction and siz
sections of problem determination aids:
o
Display Operator aids
o
Application programmer aids
o
Hessages
o
Codes
o
Generalized trace facility
o
Problem-rel.ated data
The reader should be familiar with information in:

CONTINUED FROK PRIOR PAGE
GC2B-2881

IBK System/36B Operating System:
Graphic Programming services (GPS) for the IBH
2258 Display Unit, GC27-6999

!l!!!. SYSTB~/360 :!:ll1E-SHAR!.!!!! g§:!:.!!!! CO~~AND §!§!.!!l1 USER'S
ll!!!!!.!!
This publication contains information on the Command system
in Time Sharing System/36rJ.. It gives to the user the
facilities he needs for constructing, executing. and
debugging his programs; also, be can create. modl-fy. share.
and copy data sets; he can move thell to or from input/output
devices. The user can modify and add to the IBM-supplied
command system to meet his specific requicements ..

Graphic Programming Services (GPS) for the IBJ!
226" Display Station (Local Attachment), GC27-6912
Graphic Subroutine package (GSP) for FORTRAN IV,
COBOL, and PL/I, GC27-6932.

GC27-6975

!!!!1 aau ll!!1 !!!!l aill llA.!! !Q !!!!1 ~1! llll!! £Q!!ilJ!2!QJ!
!l.!!lll.!! :. ~!ii!!! !!UKBERS 369S-CQ-513. 36BN-C2::lli

GC28-2983

Users of the 226~ or 2265 display stations uD.der DOS or as
who are considering the advantages of the 3278 display
systsl!. should review this planning lIanual to understand what
is involved in the conversion and vba t assistance is
available frail. IBK. The book vill aid installation

managers, planners, and programmers.
This book brings together information on differences
both programming and hardware -- that are basic to planning
and carrying out conversion frOID 2260/2265 display stations
to 327S display stations. Dos and OS terminal control
differences (for Basic Telecommunications Access l'Iethod and
for Graphic Access Method) are summarized. Par users who do
not wish to cOllpletely rewrite their 2269 application
progralls, use of the IBtI-provided 3279 BTAll data streall
conversion macro instruction is described. Suggestions are
given for user-written modifications to the data stream
which, when used in conjunction with the con1'ersion macro
instruction. will give additional performance gains.
The 327" system is a Dev fallily of display devices that
offer illlproved response times and faster transactions at
lower costs. The system is designed for the whole range of
alphalleric display applications. including inquiry
applications. data-entry and order-entry applications. and
system console applications.
Sef ore using this publication the reader IIUst be
familiar with An 'Introduction to the ISK 3270 Information
Display System. G127-2739. and with the BTAIS or GAlS
reference material for his application progralls.
GC27-6977
Q.Q:l. f!!Q§l!AJ!!Il!!!i :l.!!~~U!!l!!!:!: Ell a:J!.!! ..1a~ !!!IQ!lll!llQ!! DISPLAY
illn!!
!!A1!!!llo
This publication contains systell generation and storage
estillate inforllation for teleprocessing applications
using the 3278 Information Display Systell and Release 26
of the Disk Operating Syste. (DOS). The information is in
the for II of supplements for these DOS Release 26
publica tions:
o
DOS System Generation. GC24-51i!J33
o
DOS J!essages, GC24-5974
o
DOS OLTBP, GC24-58B6
This publication also contains a list of other
publications required to write applications involving the
3278; the most iD.portant of these publications are DOS
Basic Telecommunications Access Bethod. GC39-5IFUJ1-9 and
IBI! 3278 'Infor.ation Display Syste. Component Description.
GA27-2749.
This publicat.ion is for system and application
programmers planning or writing teleprocessing applications
invol1'ing the 3278 and DOS Release 26. The information
in this publication vill be incorporated into other DOS
publications in releases after Release 26.

=

§Ltl.!!.!!

£.2J!£.!!U§ i l l

~.!!§

TilDe Sharing systeID/368 is a cOllpre.hensive programming
system. used in conjunction with IBM System/369 cOlI\puters
that have time-sharing features. TSSl36S comprises a
supervisocy program. a group of service programs. and a
group of user programs. The supervisory program controls
operation of the system and proviaes the tille-sharing
environment. The service programs perform task- and datamanagement functions in response to user or system requests.
The user programs perform language processing, linkage
editing. and other work defined by the user- s problem
programs.
The priaary purpose of 1'55/369 is to provide many users
vi th simultaneous conversational (on-line) access to a
computing systelll that may have a single processor. or
multiple processors. The combination of machine and program
featuces gives eacb user the illpression that he bas sole
possession of tbe system. He uses tbe system. as if it had
a directly accessible main-storage addressing space equal
to the addressing capability of the system, rathec than
its actual !lain-storage capacity.
While the systell is operating conversationally. for
many sillultaneous users, it can also operate
nonconversationally, with batch-type processing jobs.,. in
the background.
GC28-2094
!M §ill.!!!!.!.a.2.!! lIKE-SHARING illn.!! ASSEftBLER l!§n
!!A£!!Q. !!!§.IlI.!!£:!:!Ql§
illnJ!§ .!l.!!U!!l!!!£ll lllliJ!!
IBtl System/36" Tille Sharing Systelll provides comprehensive
prograll and data managellent services which. together with
communication, bulk output, and interruption handling
services. are requested through macro-instructions.. These
macro-instructions are written in the assellbler language
as an aid to programming and processing tille-shared tasks.

=

GC28-2SB5

!!!!1 §!§!rEB069 tl!!.!!::§..II!l!!J!ll llin.!! !.INKAGB lll!ill!!

:l.~:!:!J!§ .!l.!!ll!!!.!!!!£.!! Yl!!!!!!!
This pablication describes the linkage editor, an optional
service program available for the ISK system/369 Tille
shacing System (TSS/36S). The linkage editor connects and
edits program. modules that have been assembled or compiled
separately to produce a singlo program module that can be
efficiently loaded by the dynamic loader at execution tille.
Linkage oditoc facilitlos are illustrated in conversational
and nonconvocsational modes of operation.

GC2B-2U6

i l l lli1:l!.!!LJ..§.!! :!:Mk§!!!nJ!ll g§Ul1
n!!.!! §!IMl!!~ :l.!Jg.!!Q!!:!: illn.!!

GC27-697B
lliSION !I. :. ll!U£ :!:ELECOKKONICAT!!llrn !£~ !!lll!QJ!
!!A!!..!!!!.
UQ!!U!!' I!!!!!!!D. 370H-Cg-469
This publication describes the Basic Telecomllunications
Access ~ethod (BTAB) nsed with the system/370 Disk Operating
systea (DOS) control program. BUK provides the BEAD/WaUE
level macro instructions for the assembler-language
progralllD.er who is illplem.ent.ing programs for
telecolllaunications applications.
Included are aacro instruction formats and descriptions
and specific information on device-dependent considerations.
For titles and abstracts of associated publications see
the IBft System/379 Bibliography, GA22-6822.
~

!ll.!! g§.U.!!L..1.§.!! 1M.!! SHARING

=

GC28-280B

n!!. illtul360 nl1.!!::lllRIHG SISTEK ASSEKBLEl! !.!!!l!.!!Mi.!!

This publication describes the IB~ System/368 Time Sharing
system Issembler Language. a sYllbolic programD.ing language
used to write prograas for IBtI systeD/368. The language
provides a convenient lIeans for representing the machine
instcuctions and related data necessary to program. the IBIS
Systen/36S, espcially as related to Tiae Sharing Systea/369
(TSS/368). The TSS/36B Assembler Program processes the
language and provides auxiliary functions for preparing
and docuJlenting a progra.; the Asse.bler includes facilities
for processing the assembler .acco language.

103

This publication describes the Time Sharing support System
and tho commAnd language used to operate it. This system
is usod only by system pcogramllers with authority code 0
or P and in not intended to be a vailable to any other Time
Sharin9 SYDtolD/368 llsersi consequently, this lIan.ual contains
no inioraa tion required by users other than. properly
authori2.od oystem prograllllecs.
Tbo Time Sharing Support System is an on-line prograll
error O,nalyais facility that provides the capability of
collocting data from the Time Sharing System/36S for
ana1yoi6 (lnd of altering the Tille Sharing 5ystem/368 storage
and machino registecs. These functions lIIay be perforlled
on comlRand fco .. a tecminal or dynallically during TSS/369
executioni and the progralls, tables. and control blocks
of coal, virtual, and secondary storage can be referenced.
GC28-20S7
!§11 llI§.:!:.!!!!.!.a.2.!! U!!k§!!!!!!.!!!! §!§ll!! l!!.!!ll!! n
:l.l.ltl:!l!!§ !!llEBEHCJ! Y!!!W!!
This publication describes and illustrates the use of the
IDa FORTRAN IV language for the In Systea/36S Time Sharing
System (TSS/36B).
The IBK FORTRAN IV language is a symbolic programming
language that pacallels the symbolism and format of
mathellatical notation. It pro1'id~s lIany programming
features and facilities that can be used to express as a
meaningful PORTBIN prograll the method of solution of a
mil. thellatical problem.

SECTION 2:
U:r.B!E~ A!U!m:! !.Q ~!!!~ BIBLIOG!Af.!!! ARE-,mENTIll.iQ 1!! A !1!!. !1!B!£!IQ1!
:J:Q :r.!!.!! .!!IJ1l!:J: ill: :r.!!.!! Q'!!!!'!!'!! !!!!J!.!!.!!&.
CONTINUED FROM PRIOR COLUMN
GC28-29B8
Ill!! U~I.!!.!!L1§.!! U!!.!! ill.!!I!!.§ Ull!l!!
U~IfH1 .f.Rf§.R!!'!l!II!!.~ !il!.IQI
UUg!!~ .!!.!!£:.!!.!!!!!!g; Ell!!!.!!!

IBII system/360 Time Sharing system. (7'55/36.01

described. and the error recordings interpreted.
This publication is meant for use by system monitor
and/or maintenance personnel. It may be used to determine
the hardware component responsible for failures, and in
the testing of the component.

makes a

distinction between user and system programmers. This
publication is specifically intended for persons responsible
for maintaining, modifying, or extending the system and
discusses:
1.
Operating environment
2.
Program structure
3.
Coding practices and conventions
4.
Pri'liledged supervisor call instructions
5.
Serviceability aids
6.
systell macro definitions

7.

Changing TSS/366

8.

Priv!ledge class E

GC28-261S
Ill!! ~IllI.!!!!L~ Ul!.!!::§.HAPING li.I2ID li.W!!!! !<.!!1!.!!.!!!:rl:.!l!! A!!Q
!!AI!!.Ig!!ru

This po.blication explains how an installation generates
and maintains IBn System/36m Time Sharing System (TSS/36S).
'system genera tion is the process of specifying and
creating an installation adapted TSS/360. An operable
time-sharing system is necessary for system generation.
Initially, a basic systelll is provided.
system maintenance is the procedure for incorporating
changes to TSS/369.
This publication presents:
The construct ion of the basic TS5/369;
The method of specifying, through SYSGEN macro
inst ruct ions, such i Data 11a tioD-dependeD t
information as machine configuration,
task-management requiroments, and
command-language default specifications;
The application of this information to create a new

~

QJ1ERUOCli. m!ill

GC28-283~

!..!!!! Ull.!!!!:!il2@ U!!.!! ill.!!!.!!Il. li.!ll!!!!
HULTITERHIHAL UaJI !1.!!l!!ion
of tho romote 10b entry (RJE) and conversational remote
job entry (CRJE) facility.
Many technical tcrmz llrc
dof inod.
Information concorning Model 195 support in for
planning purposoG only.

GC28-6738
~!Hl g~~J§'!! OPEE!IlR!! SYSTE~
!QVANC~Q
£!!E.!tfQ!illRE STAB! .tl!!!HI NG !ill.!!!!
This publication describes the advanced checkpoint/restart
facility, which allovs automatic and deferred job restart
at the beginning of a step or at a checkpoint vithin a
step. Emphasis is on planning for the use of this facility
wi th the PCP, MFT, and MVT control prog_rams of the IBH
system/36.0 operating system.
(All statements concerning
MVT apply also to Model 65 Multiprocessing.)
It is intended for usy by programmers and system analysts
who are familiar with the information presented in:
OS Job Control Language Reference, GC28-67.04
OS Data tfanagement Service Guide, GC26-3746

GC28-6739

lIB:!

~~§j gRQQBAl11!!!!b~ X:fd!UW!ll INT~£HANg ~ 1
£Ql!;rRQ1 f!HlliR!l! Qf§!iATOfi.!.li GUII!~ illEQ~!!Q ~ §.M.l11
This manual is comprised of three self-contained parts:
ONLINE UTILITIES - Defines the utilities that run under the
APTIOS Control Program.. These utilities allow the user to
perform certain functions necessary for real-time
operations. ONLINE TESTS - Defines the test modules that
permit the user to check the teleprocessing netvork, the
2748 Console, and the 2969-1 Central Processing Element.
OPERATOR MESSAGES· - Explains the messages that may be
directed to the operator. These messages include error
messages, online test output messages, and online utility
output messages ..

GC28-6692

I1!!i

§!2~!!Ll§.f! Q£~RA1ING SYSTEH; OPER!.tQ..R!~ f.R.Qf!;!!!!Rg§
This book: is for tho operator of an IBH systom/36,O operating
system and is to be used with the OPERATOR'S REFERENCE,
GC28-6691. This book contains procedures for running the
three major system typo!>: primary control Program (PCP):
I'fultiprogr~mming vith a Fixed number of tasks (tiFT) i and
multiprogramming with a variable number of Tasks (HVT).
It also contains operator procedures that apply to all
three systems. Operator control panel procedures on tear
out shEets are provided for the operator-s console.

GC28- 6 711
~!H! ~~§j fRQQRMU1A!!b~ ~RHINAL I NTERCBANGE l!.Ql!ll 1
£QIf.:!:!iQ,b RRQQM1! !!2.ru!.!...§ @ill §QfPORTING ~~ M§.111
This manual is comprised of three self-contained parts:
SYSTEM INTERFACE - Defines the relationship that exists
between the 2969-1 and the main (host) CPU of the
telecommunications system.
SYSTEM GENERATION AND INITIAL LOADING - Provides a stepby-step method for generator a control program from IBn
supplied program modules and for initially loading this
control program (called APTIOS) into the 2969-1. This part
also discusses the use of the system generation macro
instructions for modifying system parameters.
OFFLINE UTILITY PROGRAMS - Describes the IBM supplied
utility programs that are used in system generation, system
maintenance, and library maintenance of APTIOS.
These
programs run under control of OS/36B rather than APTIOS.

SC28-6695

IM

~!~X~~LJ2.~ ~Ili~ QfliRAT!1!~ ~Ili!~!ll. ~!R'£; ![Q

~Q!iUgR§~ RRQ!H~AtiL li!~:!EltS

~Q~R!tl

NUM~£;B 21J.§=2~1

Q!2K

!!R!Ri!!!f] .tIBRAR.! =.

This publication describes how to use the IBH Systcm/36£J
Disk Operating system Tape and Disk Sort/Merge Program.
It contains the following specifications:
Minimum machine environment for sorting or merging
records with this program.
program capabilities.
Control statements required to define a specific
sort or merge application.
Facilities provided for inserting user routines in the

GC28-6712
!~.H 2!~!;1UJ§! Qf~1!!:!:!!!! ~!2U.H. ~!illl1

program.
Opera ti ng Instructions.

GC28-6698
!1!~ ~!~TIHU2§'!! Qf~!l!rING ~.t1! !~JH~

!l!lf!m,;l1ENT .r!£!LITIES
l1AH!!ll
fRQQR~ !.!!!~§2 J§'~2=g::2.!!.h 36.02=££:535
This publication provides installation managers, system
programmers, and operators with the information reguired to
plan for, install, and use SMF (System Management
Facilities). SMP is an optional feature of this IBM
System/368 Operating System 'that can be selected at system
generation for the multiprogramming with fixed number of
Tasks (8FT) or lIultiprogramming with a variable Dumber of
tasks (tlVT) option of the operating system.. snF collects
system, job-management, and data-management information ,and
links to user-written routines that can monitor the
operation of jobs or job steps. This publication introduces

R~fg~l!£!

21!!1!ll.@ Q£llQ!!

PLANNING POR TSO
ThIs-pUblIcatIon describes the concepts, features, and
capabilities of TSO, a general purpose time-sharing facility
for the I'IVT configuration of the operating system. It
is intended for use by the system manager, system analyst,
and system programmer to help them design and implement

112

=

CONTINUED FROM PRIOR PAGE

CONTINUED FROM PRIOR COLUMN

basic SKP conceptsi describes SM.F record formats, cont['ol
program exits, and data management requirements. te1ls how
to plan, write, and test user-written exit routines; tells
how to incorpo['ate SMF into the operating system.; and
describes IPL and data management procedures.

only. FUI:ther information vill be published when TSO
becomes available.
GC28-6733

l!Hi §!§I.§!Ud2!!

.QR~B!l!liQ §!§11.!!.;.
RELEASE 19 GUIDE
ThIs-pUblicatIOn contains a summary of release 19 of the
IBM System/360 OpeI:ating System. It describes:

GC28-6716

ill!

§'!§'!£!&J~ft Q~~E!:rll!Q SYST~~ lJl!I!lli~

Q!!!.QJ!

This is a guide to optional features of the IBM System/36a
operating System (MVT, MFT and PCP).. This publication
stresses imp['oving overall system performance; it endeavors
to interrelate such factors as operating system programs,
application programs, computer equipment, customer operating
procedures, customer personnel, and maintenance ..
This publication is intended for people wbo are
responsible fOI: impI:oving system performance, such as data
processing managers and system programmeI:/analysts ..
Knowledge of the IBM SYSTEM./36a OPERATING SYSTEM:
INTRODUCTION, GC2B-6534, and CONCEPTS AND FACILITIES, GC286535, is assumed_
FOI: each optional feature, the reader is given the
pu['pose of the featuI:e, performance criteria, insights
on using the featuI:e, direction toward implementing the
feature, and specific references to mOI:e detailed data
in other IBM and, if applicable, non-IBM pUblications ..
The information contained in this publication concerning
the Model 195 is fOI: planning purposes only_

New and changed system features and requiI:ements.
System maintenance acti vi ty, including APAR descr iptions, a pI:ogram symptom index, and a list of program
temporary fixes (PTFs) cor['ected.
Modules added, deleted, or modified for release 19 ..
OrdeI:ing and dist['ibution pI:ocedures fOI: release 19 ..
GC28-6747
!~n ~~~~~

Qf]E!I!liQ

§I2~~~.;.

RELIABILITY DATA EXTRACTOR USER'S GUIDE
Tilis-publTcatiOil describes the-Reliability Data Extractor
(RDE) facility of the IBM system/360 Operating System ..
The publication is intended for the users with the RDE
facility in their operating system.. Tb.is publication
describes how to use the RDE facility.

GC28-6719

IJ1!1 §!.§.'1~1U1§.! 2RIDillING SYSTID1.t ~.R!g~ J'!'!!~
~~I~M RM.!R~H9 &IBR!£X
This publication describes the major facilities for
inspecting, modifying, mapping, dumping and inteI:preting
system libI:aries and Illianstorage areas provided by the
system/360 Service Aids to the system programmer and the
IBM customer engineeI:.
Each of the seven Service Aids is described in a
separate section of the text. The Service Aids are:
IMAPTFLE--which creates JCL for use in app1ying PTPs to
system libraries
IMAPTFLS--which provides formatted lists of members of
a library to which PTE's have been applied: or of
alL members of a library ..
IMASPZAP--which allows the useI: to inspect and modify
data in a load module
IHBMDMAP--which produces formatted maps of load modu1es
previously link edited into a partitioned data set,
of link· pack or resident reenterab1e load module
areas~ and of the nucleus
IHCJQDMP--which pI:ovides formatted job queue dumps
IMDPRDHP--which formats and prints the high speed tape
output
IMDSADnp--which can dump main storage to tape at high
speed, and to either tape or a printer at low speed
GC28-6729

IBft ~!2tl.UJ§.H ~n!X!1!g ~!ID! nVT ill!!!;
This publication describes the nVT (multiprogramming with
a variable numbeI: of tasks) configuI:ation of the operating
system control program..
It contains introductory material
for programmers not familiar with nVT, planning information,
storage estimates, information on optimizing performance,
and a section on options and facilities available with
MVT.
GC28-6739

Il!!!

~!2!.ll!!Ll§.~ Q.!1Jl!!lllli SYSTEM:

GC28-6753

IIH1 §X§I~t1Ld2i! Q~JS QR~!!ll!.EQ §Y STEM.;. I!R.§ A!Q .Q!§.!
§9..RIL!1ng f.B..QQ!!!iL fli2.2!!!!i NUM~~ 5732=~!il
f!!Q~!AH

REQQY£I

2£'§f!I!fATIO!~

The Program Product Specifications (PPS) describe the
warranted specifications of the subject Program Product ..
SC28-6755

!!Hi ll§.Ili.!1Ld§J! R!.§! OPEEATI!§ SY STili llg] AND M§.!
2.X§.I!J.!1 llli.RHATIOli
~OGRAM 1!!!lUU;!!

=

§Q!!!La!!!Q~ f!!QQ.RA.t!L

5736-SM1

ThIs-pUblication contains the Disk Operating System
information that relates to the tape and disk so['t/merge
program product. It describes:
Storage, hardware, and program installation requirements
Procedures to be followed for prog ram installation
Sample prob1ems which provide a minimal test of the
57 36-S8 1 sOI:t/merge program ..
Messages generated by the 57 36-SM 1 sort/merge progra m
GC28- 6758

Iru\ g~WJ§'!! Q£.N!!!I~liQ E.!2~!i l2.!!! § I UTlb!ll~
§!!~fQ.RI lQ.R ASCII
f.RQQRA11 liQ.!i~mi ~I&!!Il
This pI:ogram Product Design Objectives (PPDO) describes
the design ob jecti ves and prov ides the estimated
availability date of the subject Program Product ..

=

GC28-6759

II!!i .fROGRAH .f.!!'QQUCT .§UfIE'ICATIO!!§.L IBM SYSTEM/36a
OPERATING SYSTEH: DATA SET UTILITIES SUPPORT FOR ASCII

fRQ@1!A!1

fRQQ.Y£1

!!!gn

~I34=UT~-

- - - - -- - -

This PPS describes the data set utilities support for the
American National Standard Code for InfoI:mation Interchange
(ASCII). This support consists basically of a load module
and fOUl: utility programs designed to support data sets
written in ASCII format ..

RELE!§Jl ~ l::£Jl:::21;!

GC30-2003

=

;t!H:! §.I§l:g!!§. R~En!;li£~ .h!BHAHY !:!!H!!!1
!~!!
liY§!!'.tl QQM!!'.!l. !ill£ll.!!J!!!.!!!fA:!:!Q.!!li
!1]§.§.!!rn fEQ£E.§§.!liQ rutQQRll aliR!!£§
R!!QQR!H !!J!tl!!gj! liW-::£O- 519

Q.nR~:U!!Q

This publication is for planning purposes only. It may
be used by applications programmers in preparing for support
for the IEM 274'1 COlBmunica tioos Terminal by the Basic
Telecommunications Access Method (BTAM) under the Opeeating
System. The terminal and the control discipline used in
terminal-to-computer communication are described, as are
the BTAM functions used for the 27Q1 (with emphasis on
Read and IJrite operations), and how to design a problem
program.
The information in this publication supplements that
in the publication SYSTEM/360 OPERATING SYSTEM, BASIC
TelecommUnications Access Method, (GC3B-2004), with which
the reader is expected to be familiar.

§!'§'I~~§'.!i

!£££;~

tl£;!!!QQ

This publication provides information on how to use the
Queued Telecommunications Access Method (QTAK) within option
2 (Multiprogramming with a Fixed Number of Tasks) or option
q (r1ultiprogramming with a Variable Number of Tasks) of the
System/360' operating System to support a telecommunications
application. Services provided by OTAK in support of a
messaqe processing program are described in detail,
including the facilities provided to establish the interface
to a QTAM message control program.
For detailed information on the OTAM facilities provided
for the construction of a message control program, refee to
the putlication, IBM System/36.0 Operating System: OTAl'!
Message Con tro1 program (GC3"-2005).

GC30- 20 12

!!11i §.!§!!~Ll£.ff £Q1i!§!i.§!IIONA 1 Rru:!Qn J.Q~ ENT.!!! .!HJ2
IA£!&!!!~§
§.!.§.1g~ !i~EgRENCE lIBRAE!

=

PROGRAM NUMBER 360S-RC-551

TbIs-pUbIICat'ioncontains-detailed infoema tion about
Conversational Remote Job Entry (CRJE). It describes the
system concepts, facilities and points out the
responsibilities of those who are involved in the overall
operation of CRJE.
An appendix of related publications and a glossary
of terminology is included.

Gc30-2034

!JHl

~!'§Ili.tllJ§!l

A£Q;~§

tl£;!.!!@

QfliR!!!!iQ SYSTg1! .§Ag£

~!!Q !Ul~tl

1i!1~£Qtlt!!!!!9a:IQM2

!!Qtlm li 0 S -c 0::2.11

This publication describes the Basic Telecommunications
Access Method (BTAH) available with the System/360 Operating
system.
BTAM provides facilities that enable an assemblerlanguage programmer to write a teleprocessing control
program that effects communications 2I.t the Read/Write level
between a System/360 and a variety of computers and
terminals connected to the System/360 over common-carrier
or private-wire communications networks.
~TAM employs
both start-stop and binary synchronous (BSC) communications
techniques, depending on the type of remote station.
Typical BTAM applications include data acquisition,
message switching, and inquiry processing.
The pUblication explains some concepts of teleprocessing
and BTAM, describes line control and message transmission
techniques, and describes each of the BTAM macro
instructions and facilities needed to construct i;l control
proqram. The READ and WRITE macro instructions applicable
for each type of remote station and line configuration are
given, along with the channel programs generated for each
type.
Prerequisite to use of this publication is a knowledge

GC33-

118

2~

14

!.!l!! ll.§.!MLJ.§.!t QU!i!!I.!i.2 2X2!£;1ii
£Q1!y.£!~~a:!QH!1 !L£;l1Q1:.g !l.Q~ ~!in! l£MID.

!~Rl1!M!! QgR~.2 ~Q!!lli

SYSTEMS REFERENCE LIBRARY - PROGRAM NUMBER 36.0S-RC-551
The-conversatIonal Remote Job-Entry (CBJE) , TeciiiInal User I s
Guide seeves primarily as a guide for the inexperienced
CRJE usee and as a reference for the expeeienced CRJE user.
The Guide describes the functions of CRJE and the
terminal commands that enable the user to perform these
functions. The commands and subcommands are described
in detail, and examples illustrate how they may be Ilsed.
Terminal messages are documented with explanations and
corresponding system and user responses ..

CONTINUED FROM PRIOR COLUMN

GC3a-2a15
~I.2.~ML~§J! Q~gR!:rUiQ [!:ITM li~MOT£1
PLANNING POR IBM 2770 RJE SUPPORT

I!!!i

iQ!! liH.TI!!

System Time Sharing Option (TSO) into his system. The
reader is expected to familiar with the contents of the
publication Concepts and Facilities, Order Number GC3~-2022.

=

This-piiblica-ti~n is-a: planning-aId only. It is intended
for use pr.ior to the availability of Remote Job Entry (RJE)
support for the. IBM 277fJ Data Communications System with
2172 Multipurpose Control Unit and will be replaced by

GC30-2025

reference documentation when that support becomes available.
It describes the control unit, the input/output devices
supported, and the RJE functions that will be available ..
Information herein applies only to the 2712 Multipurpose
Control Dnit of the 2770 system; full information on RJE
is contained in the publication IBM SYSTEM/360 OPERATING
System Remote Job Entry order number GC3fJ-2fJI36.
GC3a-2~16

l!B:! 2!§ IliliLd§.f! £2l!y,gR2A!1 0 NA L !l.MQ!g

~~

.§.!!!Sll

SYSTEMS PROGRAMMER'S GUIDE
T'hIs-publicationcontaIns-informa tion to ai d the system
programmer and the operator at the central installation
in the installation, operation, and use of conversational
Remote Job entry (CRJE) ..
This publication describes CRJE and the facilities
it provides users at remote keyboard terminals attached
by communication lines to an IBM System/360 that uses the
operating System to provide multiprogt'amming with (;;. variable
or fixed number of tasks.
Information about the CRJE task, its operating
environment, system. generation considerations, and the
central operator command facility is included. Central
messages are described with explanations and suggested
operator responses.
This publication also includes a discussion of CRJE
storage estimates and offers some performance guidelines
to aid the system programmer in using his CRJE system.
GC30-2a20
!.~t!. 2!~!'§J:!Ll2.f! Qfg~!1:I!!Q
:rg~g~Q!::Hi!!li.!fA.1'!QR2 ~~~2

SYS!IDH" flll!l!!l!§ EQ.E '!'.!i]
gTI!QQ l!£!lU.

Managers, systems analysts, and programmers can use this
publication to plan a telecommunications systems that will
operate under the IBt'! system/360 Operating System and the
Telecommunications Access Method (TeAM), when the program
becomes available ..
TCAM is a complete, centralized, real-time
telecommunications system driver that controls allocation
and use of all resources. TeAM facilities control the
transfer, editing, and processing of data from remote
terminals .. Variety. flexibility, and modularity of
facilities permit selection of the necessary support for
any telecommincations application.
This publication is a planning aid only .. It is intended
for use prior to the availability of TCAM and shall be
replaced by reference documentation when the program becomes
available.
Prerequisite to a thorough understanding of this
publica tion is a ,knowledge of IBM System/360 machine
concepts and of the IBM system/3M' Operating System. For
titles and abstracts of appropriate publications, see IBM
System/360 bibliography ot'der number GA22-6822.
GC30-2a22

I.§.!1

Q2

~.f}1'§£Q!11llil!1£~11QB§ !!§11l!!.~ ¥!!.!~..§

fl!Qf!!!AJ!

JH!~~!l.

J.2J!§::£2=:!.'!!!

The TCAM User's Guide is for systems analysts and
programmers who must design, write, and install a TeAM
program.
It is both a guide for diagnosis and·a problem
determination handbOOk.. Information provided includes:
o
An overview of TeAM
o
Functional checklists for coding and diag nosing
sections of a TCAM program
o
Coding considerations
o
Checklists of possible errors
!low and when to dump TCAM and its service aids
o
1I0w to read TCAM dumps
o
Relationships between OS and TCAM control blocks
a
A summary of TeAM macros and operands
1\ detaileel descl:iption Ot each field in a TCAM
fOL"matted dump
Prt!ccqui!3i tos:
nnl systoru/360 Operating System Telemcommunica.tion Access
Method (TCAt'.) Concepts and Facilities, GC30-2022 OS
TCAM Programmer's Guide and Reference Hanual, GC30-2024.

GC3a-2026

"H!tl

§lg!~.!iL1'§'@ Qg~li!!I1!~ g!§I~.!1 £QM.!~§lQH Q!!!Q~

QY~[~Q 1~1~£QMMUB!£!1!.Qli~ ~££li2~ tl~liQQ

TELECOMMUNICATIONS ACCESS

~IETHOD

QR

.§!§!~

UQl1

TO TELECOMMUNICATIONS

!££~§:§-ii~!RQQ-g§I£!ii-i!lliMli~i-1!~i~!!------------­
R!!Q~R!tl lig~§§R J.§Q§::£Q::~.'!~

This publication provides a summary of the information
needed to convert a QTAH or BTAH system to TCAM. It bciefly
describes the similarities and differences between QTAM and
TCAM. and between 8TAM and TCAH.
The first section describes QTAM macros, macro operands,
service facilities, internals, and their TCAM replacements.
A working knowledge of OTAM is required for understanding
this part of the puolication.
The second section describes BTAM [lIacros, macro
operands, additional facilities, and their TCAM aquivalents.
Concepts of TCAM as they relate to BTAM ace provided as
reprogramming aids.
A working knowledge of BTAH is cequired
for understanding this part of the publication.
80th sections ace meant to be used in conjunction wi th
the IBM

SYSTEM/36~

OPEHTING SYSTEM TELECOMMUNICATIONS

ACCESS METHOD (TCAM)
(GC3~-"a24)

PROGRAMMER'S GUIDE AND REFERENCE MANUAL

•

GC3a-2028

PLANNING FOR TCAM WITH THE IBM
£2lifiQll§g---- ---- -- ---

ll&~

£Q!i!t!!l!IfATIQ1!2

~E.Q~R!l1 1!!!Ji~~R 1§&'§='£Q.=.~.!:@

This publication is a planning guide for managers and system
programmers who wish to add the IBM 3705 communications
Controller to an eXisting TCAM system, or to install a TCAM
system using the 3705 as a control unit ..
GC3"-30tht

£Q!!£]f:!:§

AR~ X!£l~!I!];§L

ProvIdes-the-Inforrua"tIon necessary to-(1)define-and

R.BQ~gM .!!!!.tl~£;S .12!i§'=fQ::.2~

This publication provides a basic introduction to the
concepts of (and the facilities provided by) the IBM
System/3613 Operating System Telecommunications Access
Method (TeAM). It also briefly describes the
characteristics and operating concepts of a compu ter-based
t.elecom munica tion s sy stem ..
TCAM is a complete, centralized, real-time
telecommunications access method that controls allocation
and user of al],. 'system resources.
TCAM facilities control
the transfer, editing, and processing of data from remote
sta tion s..
Variety, fle xibili ty, and mod ulat'i ty of these
TCAM facilities permit selection of the necessary support
for any telecommunications application.
A basic knowledge of system/360 machine concepts and
data management techniques is required for understanding
this publication.
GC3~-2~24

OS TeAM

R!!Q9.R!tl

g]QQliAt!!lliR!..~ ill!IQ~

Q!UtIDLR 2§'~~=-~Q=2.9.!!

llQ

.B..§n!L~l!£]

*N

~~~E ~t~~ o~Q~fl%Jj~¥~H¥~~s f~~1~1~*~ ~~~~~~C i!1~~~~~L

§,X.~T1!.!iLl§'~ Q~~!l.!1:llQ 2~1]1:! !"§b~£Q1H!!!1!!£!!!'Qli2

A..££~~§' @!tl@

!HL!!!!!1

This book is a reference manual and coding guide for the
prograillmer who must constt"uct or modify a TeAM Message
Control Program (MCP), OJ:" who must write a TCAM-compatible
application program. It explains how to write a TCAM I1CP,
how to write a TCAM compatible application program, Clnd how
to use a variety of auxiliary service facilities..
Also
included is information that might be of use in planning and
setting up a teleprocessing system incorporating TeAM, and
information for designing message-handling facilities for
the user who incorporates the IBM System/360 Operating

119

generate a network control program for the IBM 37115
Communicatior.s CantrolleI", (2) load the program into the
controller, and (3) dump the contents of controller storage ..
The network control program controls the transmission ot
data betlleen the central processing unit to which the
communications controller is attached, and the remote
stations of a teleprocessing network. The program also
perfocms liwited message processing, such as l.nserting date
and time information in message blocks.
This publication is directed to the systems analyst or
systems pI"ogI"ammer responsible for defining and genecating a
network control program and loading it into the
communications controller. Note: This publication is a
preliminary edition, and is to bo used for planning purposes
only. Any portion of tbe content is subjoct to chanlje.
The publicat ion is organized a!i follow!;:
Chapter 1 - introduces the nutwork control program and
summarizes the content of tho book.
Chapter 2 - assists tho proqrammor in dofinilll] a networK
control program.
Chapter 3 - gives cictailod aOGcription:; Ot tbo macro
instructions with which thO progrolmmer dcfino!i the network
control pl:ogram.
Chaptet' ij - describes the program generation procedure ..
Chapters 5 and 6 - expla.in how to use tile Loader dnd Dump
utility programs, respectively.
Tho a(JpendixE;s list the teleprocessing devices with
which the communications controller can communicate using
the network control program, and list the messages produced
by the progI."am genE::!ration procedure and utility programs.
Betore using this publication the reader should .be

CONTINUED FROH PRIOR COLUMN

CONTINUED FROM PRIOR PAGE
familiar with the contents of Introduction to the IBM 3795
Comllunications Control1er~ GA27-3BS1.

GC39-3SS2
!.!!Ii .l1J!a

*B
£.!l!!.!!!!!1!.H l!.!!!!J.ll!.!!.!! gUBRll!Q.!! A.!ill
!<.!!!!!" E!!H!!ENCJ! .!!!.!!JW. = !J!Q!k Operating System Sort/Merge Program
Product. It describes:
o
program organization
a
Co,)nttol Statement Formats
User Exit Facilities
o
Label Handling Requirements
o
Program Performance Characteristics

The program Product specifications (PPS) describe the
warranted specifications of the subject program Product.

SC33-4007

19t1. 212TI.11L~!! Q.R§R ATDill ~IDiL §'Q.B!.L!1]B.Q!;
PROGRAMMER'S GUIDE - PROGRAM NUMBER 5734-SM1
Thls-m:anual-descrlbes hOW-to usethe -IsHsy~tem/360
operating system Sort/Merge program (program Number 5734SM11. It is intended for programmers who wish to sort
(arrange in a given order) or merge t'ecords (create one
sorted sequence of records from two or more sorted
seq uences) ~
The major topics covered in this manual are: sort/merge
program control statements and job control language (JCL)
statements t'equired by the program; linking user exit
routines to the sort/merge program; and achieving maximum
program efficiency.
To use this manual you should already have a basic
understanding of the operating system and its job control
language. You should have the following manuals available
for refet'ence or review:

GC33-4022
~.x2TEHa§.& Qg~R!n!lli 2!~!:g11 ~BItt!g.R2g !ig!!]!H~b .!..!!FORtl.!.1!.Q1!
MANUAL - PROGRAM NUMBER 573~-SMl
ThIs-publicatIon provideS-ali-Introduction to the IBM OS
Sort/Merge program Product (Program # 5734-SM1).
It is
intended as a source of general information for people
involved in planning, managing, system support, or
programming at an installation.
This publication gives a general description of the
sort/merge program -- how it is installed, the functions it
provides, and the control statements used to request these
functions -- as well as its relationship to os, and the
machine environment. This manual also includes
compatibility and conversion considerations and timing
estimates.

IBM SYSTEM1360 OPERATING SYSTEM:

CONCEPTS AND FACILITIES, Order Number GC28-6535
JOB CONTROL LANGUAGE USER'S GUIDE,
Order Number GC28-6103

SC33-4023
QQ2 §Q.R~L.!igRQg INSTALLATION REFERENCE MANUAL

GC33-Q008

!].t!

§'!!i~E;&J§.!!

R!lQ~!!!tt

!!.!W!HdR

QfE;!l!!ING SYSTEtl.

SORTLlrn!lli~

tl!1!!ill

*N

PROGRAM NUMBER 5143-s"H1- - - - - - - - - This-;a:nu~I-p:rovides-the information necessary to install
and test program number 5743-5(11:
a) Hardware requirements
b) Installation procedures, including a list of the
relocatable modules and an explanation of the use
of the calling books
c) Sample problems: how to use them, and wnat they do~
The user should have a good understanding of the Disk
Operating system and of DOS and TOS assembler language ..

fl~X!.!iATI~L

211!!=§'~1

This publication contains total execution times of the
sort/merge program (5734-SM1) for over 56,"130' sorting
applications. Times are for sorts o;!xecuted on the IBM
system/360 Models 3", 49, 50, 65, and 75 and on the IBM
system/370 Model 155 with various amounts of main storage
assigned to the program. Typical input data set sizes,
record lengths, and I/O configurations are shown.
GC33-4014

I1!!i ~!~~EH1Ld§g Q~RB.!Tlli 2illIDi ASSEl11!1]] 1~1..
INSTALLATION GUIDE PROGRAM NUMBER 36135-AS-936
This-publicat ron-co iitaIiiS iilfOr~ tionn ee de(i fo r
incorporating the Assembler (E) contained in the Assembler
(E) Independent Component Release package into the Operating
5ystem.
It describes the distribution tape and gives
detailed instructions for including the component into
the system. The publication is intended for system support
personnel with a good knowledge of the IBM System/36.0'
Opet'ating system.

GC33-

50~O

l!Hi ~!~li£1Ll'§!! Q'!'§~ QR.ll.!.X!J!Q ll§1:M' !.§~!! 1:UGNE:E!£ :tAPE
Y1!~!11]§

PROGRAM NUMBER 5136-UT2
ThIs-proqi:am-produC"t"'Design Objectives (PPDO) describes
the design objectives and provides the estimated
availability date ot the subject Program Product.
SC33-5i301
~!2I&&J2..!! Q!& !~£!! l1!Q!!.£i!!~ :ugg Q!.!hlTil~
PROGRAM GUIDE - PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-UT2

11!11

The~e-AsCII-Magn€tic-Tape-utIlitY-Pco9rams provide the

Gc33-4015

11H1

2!2T]!UJ1~ ~Qm;:b

g:bARtl.!J!.Q lli!llli

l2.2 §.Q.BU1iflRQfl

DOS user with a set of utility programs for data files
coded in ASCII (the American National Standard Code for
Information Interchange). The functions provided by these
programs include comparing tape files on one or more reels,
and file-to-file transfer between magnetic tape, DA5D ..
printer, and card devices.. Translation between ASCII and
EBCDIC is automatically performed by the system where
necessary.
This [Jrogramminy guide is intended for use by
programming personnel responsib.1e for utility applications.
It explains how to prepare the utility modifier and field
select statements and the control information necessary
to run these utilities. Job control examples, program
messages, operator messages, and the ASCII/EBCDIC conversion
tables are inclUded. The programs discussed are the cardt.o-tape, data cell-to-tape, disk-to-tape, tape-to-card,
tape-to-data cell, tape-to-disk., tape-to-printer, tapeto-tape, and tape compare utility programs.

~!!i!!Q ES TIMI£;2

~RQ.fi!!.!~

!!!U1!WB. l§!I2::.§.t1=!ll
This publication gives estimated execution times of the
sort/merge program (36"5-S11-"23) on the IBM System/37.0'
Model 155 Central processing Unit. Times are shown for
sorting applications using various main-storage sizes and
record lengths~
Tne assumptions made in calculating the
timing estimates are described.
GC33-4017
;t~.!1 §'!!i!:~11LJ.§'!! .QQ.§. ~Q!tl:

~!iQ!H\lltl

l!l!.!!!!.!m

2n~=~!!1

!iilliQ]

Q~!Q! Q..§il~~!Y.~

The Program Product Design Objectives (PPDO) describe the
design objectives and provide the estimated availability
date of the subject Program Product.
SC33-4018
J)Q~ ~QEU!gE\l'!!

*N

EEQIl!iA!!.!!.!!!l!.a IlQIDE =

~!!QIl.!l!n l!!!nBER aI!!~=§l!l

GC33-5302

This manual enables a programmer to pt'epare input to
perform a sort or merge using program product 5743-XM1,
and to link to the program his own assemblf!r-language

~!2:r~t!LJ§& Q.Q§

A2£!I t!a@.!!g!I~ !!gg .!!.T!ll!.!f~ fI!QQB!.tl
gnQQ!l~.I §.t~£!.E.!£!1IQ!!2 :. gRQQR!tl !!!!1H!1Hl 2Il£::!!U

The Program Product Specifications (PPS) doncribo tho
warranted specifications of the subject Protjram Product~
123

CONTINUED FROM PRIOR COLUMN
GC33-5~34

o
Console File
Not included in this publicat10n is operating information
for related software and peripheral devices.
This manual is intended primarily for sY5tem/37.0 Model
1q5 operators who have:
1.
Basic computer knowledge and experience, or
2.
Operated other related data processing equipment. or
3.
Had previous cOlllputer operating experience on a
similar system.

ll!l!!l.!!LJ§! !!Q1l ll!!!!!I!!.!l. ~ FOR f!!Qlli!!.!!1!I!!.!l. I!g, JJJ!
Q!!L~£I A~22 ~~!i!Q~

fA£I1ilX

This publication is a planning guide for programmers,
programming manageJ:s, and system.s analysts who are intending
to use an IB!'! 5Y5tem/373 configuration with the IBM 3339'
Direct Access storage Facility under the Disk Operating

System.

The information in this document is divided into the
following three sections:
o

An introduction that explains the fUnctions of
the IBM 3330 DASF supported by the Disk Operating

GC5H-~~Hl

1M ~I.tl QUA l.QAfTER !l!!ll: MQ A~~ll AUTOQ!! ADAPTER
1!l.!!2 !.1§ll!!U. f~INcr.!!gll Q! OPEllAUQ!!
This manual provides information concerning the operation
of the IBM 27101 Data Adapter unit and the ASCII Adapter
RPQ F16124.
The manual is divided into five sections,
a glossary. and six appendices.
The first section gives a general description of the
27.01 and the AUTODIN Adapter. the functional organization
of the 2701 and the configuration of the 21.01.
The second section describes the operation of the 27.01
with System/360 Model 2.0. Subjects discussed here include
communications line addressing, channel operation. and
I/O instructions concerning the 2701 for the nodel 29.
The third section describes the operation of the 2781
with System/369 for Kodels 25 and above. Subjects discussed
here include communications line addressing, multiplexor
and selector channel operation, and I/O instructions
concerning the 27.01 for Rodels 30 and above.
The fourth section covers the ASCII AUTODIN Adapter.
A complete description of the operation of the adapter
is made which includes transmit and receive operation
seguences, status and sense bytes, line interfaces, and
the operators panel.
The fifth section covers the operating procedures of
the 27,,1 Data Adapter Unit and the ASCII AOTOD.IN Adapter.
The glossary contains definitions of certain terms
used in this manual which may not be in common use.
The appendices include charts OD the ASCII code,
representation of the ASCII code to System/360 codes,
specifications on the 2781,. and two electrical interface
drawings.

system

A section explaining the changes to DOS IOCS to

o

support the 3339' DASF
1 section describing the changes required to other

programming components
This publication explains only the changes to current DOS
IDeS,. wbich is described in full in IBM System/360 Disk
Operating system. Supervisor and Input/Output liacros (GC245~37) •
Gc33-5~37

ll§.!gl!lJI!

DISK OPERATING a!~n;!1

No abstract -avaiLiiiTc:---

!ll§.12!! ! =.

~l!!!!u'

GC33-59~8

DOS VERSION 4 SYSTEM GENERATION

ThIs-reference -iiu'blicatlo'ildescribes the planning and the
procedures necessary to generate and to maintain an
in!>tallation-tailored IBH Disk Operating System (DOS) that
provides support for IBH-nupplied DOS programs you desire,
as well as for your own programs.
The major topics
discussed are:
Planning the inntallation-tailored DOS supervisor
Planning the inntallation-tailored DOS operational
pack (s)

o

Procedures for generating and for maintaining the
DOS system
o
sample problems for testing the IBM-supplied DOS
programs
The information in this publication is of particular
interest to anyone responsible for the planning and/or
implementation of system generation and maintenance for DOS.
This includes installation managers. system analysts.
programmers. and machine operators.
GC33-5~~9

.QQ~

Yll2.!21! !

!1~aMi£!'§'

= '§'llH.t!~

llll!til.H££l

il~!!\!

!I!~ 2X§I~!U:l!!! !1Q~1

ll2

Q.f~H!Iu!!!. .fR~~l!.B1!§'

=

!lli!.!!!l! !;Q!!!!.!!!!illY!lli !!ll!!l.1!

This manual describes an on-line customer accounting and
customer service system using direct access storage devices
and terminals. The system provides for:
customer
inquiries. service orders. transmission of payments, offline
batch billing. and accounts receivable processing.

1!l!f..!!A!

PROGRAM NUMBER 369N-CL-Q53
ThIs-reference pUblication provides guick access information
for operators and programmers who encounter DOS messages and
use DOS commands and job control language.
This publication does not include:
o
Any message issued by IBM program Products.
o
Any language message issued during compilation or
assembly.
o
RPG messages.
o
OLTEP messages.
o
Emula tor messages. .
For detailed DOS operating information, see the companion
publication, DOS Operating Guide. GC24-5022. For a list of
associa ted publications, refer to the IBM system/368 and
System/31B Bibliography. GA22-6822.

Ge38-0005

GE2H-aH22
!!!!!!J,J;!; !!lliI:!:! !;.!l1lIQ1!1l!! Ag;OUNTI!!li. llI!! I!!!l IBM §.!llIEML369

GE2~-9188

!!H!ll I!!f!g:
lI!!YllNTORY 1!!.!!Ali.ll!!.!l!!I f~QJ;!!Al! !.!!!! 9l.!!I!!Qb. TECHNIQ!!m ::
APPLICATION DESCRIPTION

fRQ!!.!!~jf~Jl£l.H~i.JM!=Q.!!=~!!!L ~!A::1Ht:!!.2.L. illA::J2~L.
J§J!!:::!!.!l::lli

The purpose of this manual is to describe the Retail IHPACT
Syste. for the retail industry. The Betail IliPACT System
actually consists of two separate systems, one for staple
and one for fashion merchandise. Either or both of these
systems may be complemented. programs for the systems are
enumera ted in the manual.
The manual is divided into chapters which cover topics
such as a general statement of the problems of retail
inventory management; simulation and its uses; ordering
parameters. methods of forecasting and forecasting
techniques; rec~rd maintenance. purchase order generation,
and operating and management reporting, design
considerations; and implementation.
Where appropriate, these topics are discussed separately
for the fashion and staple systems. Also, graphic and
report examples supplement the text. and a glossary of
terms peculiar to the retail environment is included in
the manual.

§'~I£!l1

H!!Il!!!.I !I!!!!!!!.
This manual provides operating and reference information for
operators of the .IBH systolD/370 Hodel 135. The reader is
assumed to have a working knowledge of Introduction to IBf!
Data Processing Systems. GC2B-16SQ, and some previous
operating experience on either a similar system or related
Data Processinq Equipment.
The manual describes bow to operate the system hardware:
rOM 3135 Processing Unit - The System CPU IBH 3046 Power
Unit - The major source of electrical pover for the CPU IBM
32H' and 3215 Console Printer-Keyboards Input/output devices
that are attached to the CPU-integrated adapters.
The principal Diagnostic Procedure in the manual
requires IBM System/37B Model 135 Diagnostic Report, GX33-

GE2G-~228

6~e3.

GC38-~~15

QggR!XQR!..§
RRQ~,giu!.R,g.§.

l!!~Rll!.L

!I!!1 § YSTg11Lill !!QJml! 1!2

Qfn!II!H~

'l'his reference manual provides information necessary to
operate the following units of the IBM system/379 Hodel 145:
o
IBH 31q5 Processing Unit
Console Printer-Keyboards:
IBM 3210 Models 1 and 2
IBM 3215

124

Qf.!!~J!H

I!Qli!!

~il.!!!!!2

=.

!l.,g,~§

!tAl! UlL

PROGRAM NUMBER 368A-FI-e6X
Th'is-proqraiihas been-deSigned to help underwriters
determine the coupon schedule and associated values for
a bid on a new bond issue. .l lIathellatical procedure is
used which develops an optimal set of coupon rates.
The
optimization procedure minimizes the net interest cost of
effective rate, whichever is applicable, while remaining
within the constraints established by the issuer and those
established by the underwriter. A number of options are
provided which help the user obtain bidding information
for issues with various characteristics.
This aanual contains a general description of the
prograa, including all mathematical formulas,. machine
configuration,. general systems chart, input/output
description, sample problem, operating instructions, and
halt and message list. IBM (GX28-1736) facilities
preparation of input data for the program.

GE2e-e246

GE2e-335e

§.r§'TgUl§'~ Q£;!i!!!~ ~~gQ§'!T !££Q!H!Tll§ gr1'!~!!IQ!! Qg§.~nn!Q1!
PROGRAM NUMBER 361JA-FB-1SX

Thi~-manua:iis an-i~troductory text describing the scope
and capabilities of the IBM System/36.0 Demand Deposit
Applica tieD programs..
It deals with the requirements for
a demand deposit application in either a single bank or
a multi-bank environment, describes the results and
advantages a bank may expect from using the application
programs, summarizes the accomplishments of each of the
programs provided, contains information on how to get
started .. and illustrates some of the record layouts and
repoJ:ts produced..
The appendix descl:ibes machine
requirments .. the use of othel" programming products, sample
timings, and disk pack requirements.
GE2e-e256
~!~!~~l~~ !~!! gBQ£li~QR
tlg1I~!TIQ1! Q~£!!!g!!Q1!

==

A PREFACE TO LINEAR PROGRAMMING AND ITS APPLICATIONS
ThIs-manual- attempts to-motivate-the -reader-s-interest
in an important, general purpose tool called lineaJ:
programming. The stress is on examples, benefits, and
applications in a Wl.de spectrum of industries and
disciplines; the literature refex:ences are especially
extensive..
Included is a simple nontechnical glossary
of basic concepts ..
GF2e-6ess

PLANNING FOR AN IBM DATA PROCESSING SYSTEM
ThIs-pubIIC;atiOn
an-excellentguidetor answers to many
preinstallation planning problems.
It is oriented to
assist in the installation of intermediate and larger data
processing systems, with emphasis on commercial
installations.
The subjects covered in separate sections
of this manual include the dat.a processing organization,
selection and education of personnel, planning and progress
control, systems design, program preparation, documentation,
standardization, program testing, conversion, physical
site preparation and operatl.ng the installation.
There
is also a diSCUssion on the considerations of a scientific
installation.
Hany planning and operating forms are
illustrated and a brief glossary of data processing terms
is included.

-is

£Q~!lQliLJ§~L

PROGRAM NUMBER 369A-DP-.08X
COHPOSITION/36£1-a:C;ts-iii-C;onjunction with user-supplied
programs and the full facilities of the Disk Operating
system for System/36£1.
It consists of control and
functional routines that accept input from a user-prepared
disk-resident file, produces generalized justified output
records, and stox:es them in a specified disk ax:ea.
If
wox:d division capabilities are J:equiJ:ed, tne HYPHENATION/369
program is linked with COHP05ITION/360.

GF2e-8172
~J~~1QQB!fli!

GE20-1iJ257

=

~I~!~J1LJ.~!! !~!! ~!!Q~!;~~QR
!!!f!!l:!l!A!!Q!!a§~ A£R~ICA!IQ1!
~~~R:li1!.Q!:!L fR.QQR!.tl lH!!1~1! J§JZk.!?f=!!l!

HYPHENATION/36B provides division of words for text
pJ:ocessing applications in which the addition of word
syllables to a line to meet justification requirements is
preferable to forcing the line to end with a complete word.
This hyphenation capability is provided in the form of a
module that can be linked with a user's system/360 textprocessing program or the COMPOSITION/360 module of the
IBM System/36.0 Text Processor ..
Through program linkage, HYPHENATION/360 accepts a
word from the user's program and determines the division
points.
The word, with the division points indicated, is
returned to the userl s program, where the portion to be
retained on the line can be selected on the basis of the
userl s graphic requirements.
This publication contains descriptions of the
application and program, a general system chart, programming
system, minimum machine, core, and disk re'luirements.
For more detailed information, see the program
Description Manual (GH2~-0525).
GE 2e- e3e 6

l£f!Z !!!ggI

fQ1!!~~!Q!!

RRQ.21!!1!L

.!flli~ll!QN Qli§~!!!R1!Q1!

PROGRAH NUMBER 36.0A-DR-~7X
The-IBM input-conversion Program translates cut-form
document information from the IBH 1281 Optical Reader into
computer-processable data.. The program is designed to
enable a user to utilize the IBM 1287 Optical Readet" in
implementing input convet"sion in an efficient and economical
manner without the need of additional programming..
The
input conversion process is an essential link between the
data sources and utilization in an integrated data
processing system.
GE2e-e312
R!u;!K!~!;;

XQ R1LI RRQ!!R!!1.tll1!Q I I 5.£lg!!!!1!£ !;Q1!l!!lllm

In a brief and simple manner, this manual:
-Lists some problems arising in industry, business,
science, and engineering
-Survey the mathematical, statistical, and
operations research (OR) by which these
problems are solved
-Tells how a few of such techniques and models
are programmed for computers using the PL/I
language
The major portion of the manual concentrates on PL/I. The
essentials are brought out mostly by the many short examples
and the summary exhibits.
GE2e-3324
5.!~T~.!iL1Q!! I~!X ~.RQ9,§,§,Q!~

Q§£R!~!!Q1!

!:1!!!!!A1

=

MlW§!!L !ff~!£ll!Q1!
211&=Kll

Qf Q!!!

PRO£~~~I1!Q !~B!QQ~~

This bibliography and associ.ated classification system
provide a means to identify selected IBM publications
which, either wholly or in part, document data processing
techniques information.
THE LISTING OF ANY GIVEN
PUBLICATION IN THIS BIBLIOGRAPHY, HOWEVER, DOES NOT PRECLUDE
ITS APPEARANCE IN OTHER REFERENCE BIBLIOGRAPHIES SUCH AS
THE SYSTEMS REFEBENCE LIBRABY.
Part I of this bibliography lists publications within
major subject classification..
Note that a publication
may appear in more than one classification.
Part II
contains abstracts of the publications in form-number
sequence.
GH 1 2- 5 1 33

IEB:! ~!~.!gt!LJ§Q !@ ~!§!§'!ialf!L !!Hl 11lQ lHi.Q lQ!!.Q. SUBROUTJB,§
!!!.lH!!R!=!1!X!!EHAT!£§ l§k11!!!!l ~§ill!M1 ll!fQ]HAT!Q1! !i!Bill

The Subroutine Library-Mathematics (5L-MATH) is a collection
of subroutines dealing with matrix algebra and numerical
mathematics.
The subroutines are written in FORTRAN IV ..
SL-MATH consists of input/output-free computational building
blocks which may be combined with the userls input OJ:
computation routines to meet his individual requirements.
The subroutines in this library can be applied to the
solution of many pL'oulctu:J in industry, science, and
engineering.
This manual pr(~~;ol\t:.; an introduction to SL-MATH, a list
of the capabilitic~; 01 the library, rules of usage, system
configuration, pL"o'JruClmlu'J :;y:;tums, and a list of reference
matex:ial.
5H12-5437

!gl1

*N
~!~!!tlLl§'~

!1!Q !!1:i!1;.t!Ll1~L ,;l1QB!Q~ !B.Q INFOR1:!!!IQ1!
l1!l'A!.!!.!iLL ~!!Q~!!!L!1 fg ODU £1 llKID!!NCE
rliQ21!!ft !!!1.!:W,!:;g 2Z1!!:M!l

.R]IR!.ln~!1 ~!§!g

ftA!B!,!1

=

The IBM system/36U oJ.IlLl !.iy:;lutll/J.,,, Storage and Information
RetJ:ieval System (!iTAI!!!)) i!; 'l terminal-oriented system that
offers the user ..t v., riuty 01 J:u:;ources fOJ: data-base
creation and maintolltlUCIl, .llId H!;pecially for data-base
searching and dOClllUunt output.
The system L:.; u:;11d to rutJ.:iuve stored documents which
contain unformatted tu;(tu,ll dnd/or formatted data ..
Documents are L'utL"invtHl in dn on-line dialogue between the
system and the U:JCL".
l'he u:.;ct:' formulates queries in
extended Booloan lo!)ic und/o&: comparison operators.
This manual cOlltilin:.; the general program description, a
description of the tlata-base creation and data-base merge
programs, of all input/output and intermediate data sets,
and of the tCL"minal oporations..
It also includes
installation requirulDcnts and the messages supplied by
STAIRS ..
For further information on STAIRS, the reader is
referred to the following publications:
o
General Information Manual, Form GU12-SUn
o
Operation Guide, r'orm SH12-55.09

R!!QQ,!!!] 1!!!.!:t~ID!

The EDIT/360 component of the IBM System/363 Text Processor
consists of control and functional routines which retrieve
input from a user prepared disk-resident file.
Input.
consists of textual material, text fOJ:matting commands,
and output requests.
Aftex: the output text has been
proofread, alterations can be made to stored textual data
through the use of text modification commands without reentering the original text input..
Completely justified
and corrected text is written as generalized disk records ..
The user must provide routines to retrieve specific
composition device on which final printing will occur, and
vx:ite i t to the appropriate systems output device ..

SH12-55e9

If!!:! ~!~!"!ttLJ§~ !'!!Q ~!~:!:li.!1aZQL ~!Q!!'@'§ !]Q
RliI~!!"!!!~ ~~~~t! l§T!~.R~lL Q~gRATIQ~ GUI~

*N

J1!IQ!1!!!!!Q]

PROGRAM PRODUCT 5734-XR3
Th'is-iitanuaI-contaiiiS-aII information reguiJ:ed to install the
Storage and InfoJ:mation Retrieval System (STAIBS) and to
incorporate it into an IBM System/360 or systom/370 for
subsequent execution under control of tho IBM Customer
Information Contx:ol System CCICS).
It include:; information
on the data-base creation and data-base cwrge programs as

125

CONTINUED FROM PRIOR PAGE
well as on systell maintenance and utilities.
The reader of this manual should he familiar vi th the
principles of teleprocessing" the IBH Operating System, and
the IBf! customer Information control System (eleS).

GH19-2983
1M !.!ll!!£Ll! §£!!.!ll!!ll!!l1 f!!Ql1!!!'!!
illENDED .trul§!.
§f.!l£!U£!UQ!!§
fJ!Q!l.!!M !!!!!llil1!! ~~::!JQ
The Program Product Specifications (PPS) describe the
warranted specifications of the subject Program Product.

GH19-3314
I.!lll §I.§.:!:ML1§l! !!.! 0
l:Q!! f!!2!l.!l£:!: £2!!:!:!!
Aff!.!£HIQ!! Q!1§CR
f!!QJlBM !!.!lm!! ~ 6-XP2
REAL/363 co.plements the Project control system/363 (PCS).
Present conventional PERT/CPH-type scheduling programs
provide project schedulers or managers with an efficient
tool for planning, evaluating, scheduling, and controlling
the activities to be managed; unlimited availability of

GH19-5312
!!!:!:!!H 1l.!l!!!l!!!:!:2!! !l!!! !!l!f!l.!!:!: !!!ll!1!! l!l!llli
lll!!!UAL I!!l:!!!!!!llI2.!! !!A!!.!!AL
f!!Qilll! fJ!QJl]!g !!ll!l:!l!£
"Gall is a language for rapid error-iree generation of
mathematical programming lIodels. and for producing clear
reports to individual requirements from the optimal
solutions to these problems. This manual describes briefly
the facilities of the language, and examines the advantages
and savings made possible by the use of "GRY.
Readers should have some knowledge of Mathematical
Programlling.

=

resources, however, is assu.ed.
REAL/360 enables users to define project schedules,
based aD pes results, while at the same time taking various
resource limitations aDd ti.e constraints into account.
The reader should be knowledgeable in PERT/CPH techniques
and be familiar with Project Control system/369 (J63A-CP"6X. Version 2).
5819-3926
1M g[:!:!1!!L~l! !!.!§2.!!Il£!! !!..!&£!I!Q!! l!!!!ill!i!!l.
l:21l f!!Q!l.!l£!
!!!. ·.§YSTEM/363
Q!! !!!!! OPERATIQJl§ .!!A!!.!!!!.
fJ!Qll!!!H Q.!l~
fJ!Qll!!M !!.!!H!!l:1!!i. ll6-XP2
REAL/360 performs the resource allocation in a projoct
control system.. It enables users to define project
schedules. based on the results of the Project control
Systell/36a (pes), while at the same time taking various
resource limitations and time constraints into account.
This manual provides information necessary for understanding
the functions of RElL/369 and for preparing and operating
the system.
The reader should be familiar with the following
publica tions:
P~OJECT

CONT~OL

=

=

SYSTEft/360 APPLICATION DESCRIPTION MANUAL,

Form GH2D-3222
PROJECT CONTROL SYSTEM/363 PROGRAM DESCRIPrION AND
OPERATIONS RANUAL, Form GH28-3976
IBH SYSTEM/368 RESOURCE ALLOCATION (BEAL/3U) FOR PROJECT
CONTROL SYSTER/369 APPLICATION DESCRIPTION RANUAL,
Form GH19-991Q.
GH19-2893
!!!H !':!1U£'.~ :i£Hf of
insurance: new business, renewals, endorsementG - money
and non-money, cancellations, direct billing, premium
collections, claims arising, claiDls upda ting, and status
inquiries.
Programs are .. ritten in a modular fashion to
permit ease of understanding" maintenance, and modification"
thus permitting each user to modify the system to his own
specific needs.

GH2e-e254

1l.!!'.1

lli~kf~ll =

GO 29- e263
..§.!STEMLlif! QM!.!!~ lrnfQ§!:E A££Q!!!!1:.!~ .1d.2.0A-FB-15!1
PROGRAMMER'S HANUAL - PROGRAH NUMBER 36.0A-FB-15X
This program IS-~aptablebY cOmmercialbank"StO accomplish
demand deposit accounting in either a single or multi-bank
environment. The program provides for conversion of IBM
, q4ij series disk and tape balance and name/address records ..
Also included are programs to collect and display historical
profit and loss information for selected accounts or groups
of accounts.
Por each progJ:am, this lIIanual presents a program
abstract" program systems chart, and general description.
WheJ:e applicable, some pJ:ogram modification aids are
included.
The input/output section includes a summary for all
files by type (card" disk, tape, printer, and MICR) and
a visual record layout and description of file functions.

GH2e-e246

~n§.!l.

ACCO!!!!TI!l&

This manual contains operating instructions for the runs
that make up the system/36~ Demand Deposit Accounting
application program. I~ includes instructions for
preparation of all I/O units, and, for each program, a
program. setup sheet, operating instructions" operator
message list, an d core map.

fl§.!l.!::!!tl§.!l !ill!!!!! <-

OPERATOR'S MANUAL
consIstsofbasic program modules to create and maintain
the part number master and the product structure files,
program revisions required to create and lIIaintain
manufacturing routing and work center master files, and
file re-organization modules.
This program represents a continued support by IBl'! in
the areas of manufacturing application defini tiOD and
implementation. The package provides manufacturing
organizations with easy-to-modify programs that establish
and maintain basic information files describing the
structure of products and t.heir manufacturing procedures
and logic diagrams explaining the retrieval of this
informa tion in fundamental applications.

129

CONTINUED FROM PRIOR PAGE

CONTINUED FROM PRIOR COLUMN
2.
Keep flowcharts up to date continually.
3.
Standardize flowcharting techniques.
This reference publica tion gi ves the specifications
and detailed information for operating the System/360
Flowchart program. It contains the console operating
instructions, job control card deck key, job control card
details, halt and message list, a file and storage map,
and restart procedures.
A knowledge of DOS operating procedures, including the
use of job control card, is a prerequisite for reading and
usin g this manua 1.

The heart of this system is the detailed policy master
file stored on the IBM 2321 Data Cell Drive or the IBM
2314.. Since the file will be updated daily, every record
will be current as of the last transaction processed and
applied to the policy. For homeowners with private
passenger automobile, the system provides rating for new
business, renewals, endorsements, and cancellations; it
also maintains the policy record.
This manual contains a general description of the
system.
It is intended to define for the reader the amount
of information needed to evaluate PALlS initially.
GH20-0285

GH20-0297

!!!llil! Ilk

2!~~~ttLl.Q.!! !H.:r~ ~QRllMlON
!:RQQRM!g.R~2 11!!!1!!1 11§.~!::SE-.ftll

Y~R.2.IQl!

l

:l.X§n1!tL".§.!! A!l!!IlmlTIlATIVl! J:ERMIMll gSTEM-oS lll§LllID..

illJ!A:.£!:.12.!l. A!!.!!.HfllIQlt l!!<§£.RHJ:IQ1! !!Al!.!!!!:

This system consists of control and functional programs
that permit many different text-processing and data-handling
activities to be carried on simultaneously through different
typewriter terminals attached to an IBM System/360. Written
to operate under 05/360, the Administrative Terminal System
runs in a multiprogramming environment. It viII run
concurrently with and independently of other tasks in other
parti tioDs/regions.
This publication contains a general discussion of the
features of the program, an indication of some of the areas
in which it may be applied, and the machine configuration
required. Three appendices are included dealing with data
formats, core storage estima tes, and communication line
requirements.

These macros will be helpful in converting IBM 7.05/14.01
1410/1440/1460/1620/701017 040/7044/7070/7 074/7080/7090/7094

card or tape data files to system/36.0 tape or DASD data
sets.
This manual presents a general and detailed description
of the program and its operation under the IBM System/36.0
Tape operating system and the IBM system/36.0 Disk Operating
System.
In addition, the macro capabilities, standard
program interfaces, and incorporation of user instructions
are discussed ..
The reader should be familiar with the corresponding
Manual, (GH2.0-0286), and with those IBM System/369 manuals
listed in the application directory.

GH20-0286
~!~1~HLJ2~

GH20-B302

QA1!

~Q~Y~~!Q! g:r~1I!! !~lL Y~R2!QM ~

§!lA!!!ite to reading portions of this
manual is a ba.::;ic undur!itanding of the 369 Operating System
Job Control LolIIIJuuIjO ..
GH2S-B479
lli~l!J!LJ!!!! !!!l.!!lH b\.!!ll!!!.!lll j!!!!!.!.!!l j36S!-CH- Sl l i
!El1b!£!!IQl! lll!§.£!l!l1!IQ!!
KATLAN if> a programming system that is designed to simplify
bandling of and computation vith matrices. This publication
dCGcribos the KATLAN language and its general capabilities.
Matrices may consist of real or complex, .single- or
double-precision numbers. Segmenting algorithms are used
if the storage requirements of the matrices exceed available
core size.
MATLAN is useful in may scientific and technical
applications..
It is of special interest in the aerospace
industry, as vell as in electrical and civil engineering
mathematical statistics, and econometrics.

GH2S-a4SB

1M Rl!!!!!. ill!£! !!l!!!.!Q.!! SYSTEM !!1!!!!!.!! Qlllll!U.!!.!l l!!l!!lI!!L:l.§!!
ill!!A::!l.!!=IDl = ]1.!!Q!!.!!!!! lll!§.£ill!!Q.!! l!!!!.!!!!.
The IBM Betail ItiPACT Fashion systelll consi!lts of programs
and procedures designed to provide the retailer vith timely
and accurate inf orma tion for fashion merchandising. The

133

CONTINUED FROM PRIOR PAGE
system provides reorder recommendations, return
recommendations, and other action reports to assist the
fashion merchandi ser in responding to changes in the
volatile fashion market.
This manual describes the concepts, characteristics,
and implementation of the Fashion system.. Operational
controls, report interpretation, and complete file
specifications are included. Tbe programs are described
conceptually and specifically. Input, output, and
processing information are included along with program
modification aids.. This manual provides the information
and guidance necessary for planning and installation of
the system.

GH20-0490

b!1!QllAQ1! !HAllgR 1J!b!1!L APPllcATIQl! ,!!ESC!lll..'!:IQ!
PBOG!!!1! !!!l1!!ll~ 1!1!~!=2.2! J§~!=f!=l§! J§0A-CX-£1!
This manual provides a description of the scope and purpose
of the Problem Language Analyzer. It allows the reader
to measure the applicability of this system to the solution
of his problems and provides a description of the PLAN
approach to modular problem solution.

gB.Q~b£;~

GH2l1-0492
2X§!gt!a£~ Ql1~lliQl!

LOG!£ !RAHSLATQ!!
APPLICATION DESCRIPTION

PROGRiM-NUMBER~60i=CX-32X

rheDecisioii-iogkTranSlator is a program that accepts
decision tables punched in cards in a prescribed format
and translates these tables into a FORTRAN program. The
FORTRAN source program is punched in cards or stored on
disk or tape ready for compilation.
This manual describes the format of the input decision
tables, features of the Decision Logic Translator, and
program output ..

GH2G-0481
!t£;IA[!~ I.tl.fA£I EA2!!LQ!! ~lllll1 .!!]Q]B .Qg£;R!IU~ g§'!~l1LJ2!!
11~g~~~R=~!!t ~ ~f~!!!Q~ MANUAL

This manual provides instructions and guidance for operating
the programs in the IBM Retail IMPACT Fashion System. The
major components of the manual describe (1) preparatory
informa tion and procedures, (2) operations, and (3)
retrieving the programs from the distribution tape ..
preparing the system, and running the sample problem ..

GH20-0496
MRVEL/36~ fll!!!!~-'l=.lill

!QY!li£~Q
gQb!~!

1!EE

!lifQR~~~ §!2!~tt jQQ~t

!i~IgR R~QRQ £Q!!~

!'.R~!i!!!.~ l!!!tt!!~R

BOOli

211£::lill

This policy master record code book describo::;: every section
and trailer of the policy master record, each field in
every section and trailer, and the codes and values
applicable to each field. There is a table of contents
at the beginning of the manual and one for each section
and trailer. The table of contents at the boginning of
the manual identifies only the location of sections and
trailerz. The table at the beginning of oilch [;cction or
trailer indicates the location of each field.
G1I20-0487

2Igg!!nl!!! nEQy!g!!),;M~ f1!l!!!!!!!i! !!'.fHfhIlQU
g!!.Q!!llMt !!!!nrr!;ll J.§.!!~::11l::..05X

Q"!i£g!~I!Ql!

A manuf acturing organization requires that nIL parts, both
Qanufacturod and purcbased, be available to ceet production
schedules demanded by finished product due dntes, nnd that
a sufficient quantity be available to satisfy deaand.
Manufacturing also must be able'to adjunt thoee requirements
quickly to react suitably and in time to forecnet any
custom~r ordor changes.
In addition, thoro ie a noed to
maintain inv(~ntorien at an optimum level so as not to incur
the costs of obsolescence, unneeded warehouso spnce,
unn ecessary i nvnn tory, insurance, and purchase charges.
IBM SystoM/J60 Requirements Planning is designed to
meet these noedi.i. Tho system is capable of:
Determining net finished product requirements
Determining not component part requirements
Planning economic lot size or order quantities
Offsetting requirements by considering lead times
Maintaining and updating the requirements plan by
processing changes to forecasts and orders (referred
to as Itrequiremen t5 al terations ll )
Providing for review of planned orders at tho end of
each level: "interrupt" and adjustment of these planned
orders; "reentry" (referred to as "conversational
planningll)
providing for management review through detailed
requirements reports and exception notices

GH20- 0497
PRO~llIT b.l!Q lIAB!YIT !NFOR!!!nQR 2I!>lll! QUill
.!!.!!ill W!i!!!!~ !360A-!f::jgn f!!.Q!i!!!!~ Q)';g;!!.!R!ION !l!!!
SYSTEM MANUAL

T'hIsmanuaI-provides a description of the functions and
logic of those programs and modules making up the PALlS
Basic Program. All logic common to both the automobile,
homeowners, and other lines processing has been grouped
together in the PALIS Basic Program.
GH20- 0498

l111Qf)';RTY !l!Q LIAID:gJJ: !lifQRMAnQ!! 2I!>TEM (PALISt
.!!.!!2!£ PROGRAl! fl.§!!!=!f::jgn Qf),;ll!!!Ql!!> l!!NUAL

This manual prov ides information for the generation and
operation of PALlS under Disk Operating System/360
(DOS/36.0). It cont ains instructions for link editing the
system, the console operating instructions, examples of
job control decks, halt and message lists, storage diagrams,
and restart procedures.
A knowledge of 00S/360 operating procedures, including
the use of job control cards, is a prerequisite for reading
and using this manual.

GH20-0489

gSQQSA!! .EQ,S Qf!!g!!! ~~1'£;11 '!!'£;~1Q.HL11
1~~~L!!L !f!'.1!£!nQR Q~CRlf:rION
f~Q!i!~!~ l!!!~~~ 1!l~~~Q~1!!

POSD/II consists of an interrelated set of programs
providing a complete and flexible facility for the geometric
analysis of image-forming optical systems, together with
a means for automatically correcting such systems.
Particular emphasis has been placed on creating an efficient
man-machine relationship. The evaluation techniques
available to the designer encompass both ray tracing and
thi&:d-and fifth-order aberration analysis with ray-tracing
speeds in tbe order of 1/10 second per ray surface. The
program has the capacity to analyze systems containing
prisms, toric surfaces, and diffraction gratings, in
addition to the usual refracting or reflecting elements.
POSD/II is an extension of 1130 POSD (1130-EO-11X and
113a-EO-12X) with increased operating speeds and additional
program capabilities. Two new POSO/II programs are provided
to operate under the IBI1. Problem Language Analyzer (PLAN*)
program to support both the 1130 system and System/3M'.
Additional utility features are incorporated to provide
greater flexibility for the user. Significant improvements,
such as provision for varying glasses, broaden the scope
of the automatic design program.
POSO/II utilizes input formats and operating procedures
identical to 1130 POSD.
PLAN operates as a submonitor providing simplified
user modification of programs and design languages.

f!lil!)';!!

MARVEL is a language processor for the data preparation,
matrix generation, output analysis, and management report
writing functions associated with tbe Mathematical
Programming System/36.0 (36.0A-CO-14X). MARVEL was designed
and implemented to provide powerful functional capabilities
in this fast growing area of mathematical programming.
In providing such a comprehensive language and processor
capability, "trade-offs" vere made that reduced execution
speed.
MARVEL will provide maximum customer utility as an
input/output system for the development of new linear
programming applications, because tbis is an area where
extended function is more significant than high performance.
In a production environment where emphasis is on execution
speed, MARVEL will be less suitable.
This MARVEL language primer is designed to acquaint
the reader witb the basic notation employed in MARVEL.
Further, by constructing a sample program, it is hoped to
introduce the potential user to a variety of MARVEL
statement. The discussion of statements in the primer is
limited to those features of each statement that are
applicable to the specific problem presented.. Therefore,
the reader should consult the S/360 MARVEL Program
Description Hanual where a comprehensive discussion of all
MARVEL statements is provided ..

GH20-0483

GH20-0499

134

fll~gll!!.IT

ll!!Q 1!AJlIlH! !!!!.Q!!.!!!!!Ql! !>llTI1l! Q!illt

~g~i~~~~u~E~~d:a~~~~=~~~~~p~~Ig~~~~Ni~O

The purpose of this manual is to describe the property
and Liability Information System insurance logic programs
to rate and prepare a declarations sheet extract for both
the family combination policies and the special automobile
(single limit liability) policy for all 50 states (with
the exception of Massachusetts). the District of columbia
and Puerto Rico. The rating plans supported are both the
classification plan in effect prior to January 1. 1965
(henceforth referred to as the old class plan), and the
new six-digit classification plan dated January 1, 1965,
(henceforth know n as the new class plan). Both plans will
rate a maximum of four vehicles (including pickups, panels,
sedan deliveries, and antiques), and five drivers per
policy.

SECTION 2:
£;lITRIE§ ~Qn XQ :r!!!~ ]llLI OGBAf!!! !R~ ll.§1tl:ll!~ !!! ~ !1!!. !.H~ill!Q.B
!Q .TI:!!d RIGHT .QX I!!! .QmR .!H!l!1!]~

CONTINUED FROM PRIOR COLUMN
GH2e-eSee
R!!QR1H!I.! !l!ll H!llllTI! INPORMATION SYSTl!!1 1tlH!ll.
AUTQ~Q!!I1ll J;1A~.!lli ]1!!QggING l]ful.t!!::111L

In a production environment where emphasis is on execution
speed, IURV'EL will be less suitable.

PBOGRAft DESCRIPTION AND SYSTEM MANUAL
Tbepurpose oftiiis iiianuaIisto describe the property
and Liability Information System insurance logic for
processing automobile claims. open claim information,
taking the place of the traditional outstanding loss file,
is stored in detail. Transactions for an open claim. are
entered into the system along with premium transactions,
and the automobile master record is updated with the new
information. If all claims are closed, they are summarized
at purge time and carried forvard to the renewal policy.
As with the premium data, closed cases are also retained
for historical purposes.
Premium and claims data for a policy 'are sto['ed together
so a historical picture of 'a risk. experience available
in one place. Thus, underwriters have information required
for individual risk experience.
Another signifigant portion of the PALlS approach to
automobile claims is the processing of recoverable
reinsurance. Excess reinsurance, if not input with the
transaction, vill be calculated by using the excess of
loss reinsurance table. Other types of reinsurance
applicable to a given coverage will be added into the
calcula ted ex:cess reinsurance recoverable.

GH2e-9Se1
RROP.!!l!I! !l!ll 1!!llIHn I!!FORM~IQli
PROGRAM DESCRIPTION MANUAL

!l!~ID!

1tlHllL

i~QQjll NU"g:n§1~i.kiF=tiL. 1§BA-IP-l.lL. 36BA-IP-13X,

21ll::!!£l

This manual contains information relating to the concepts,
inputs. and processing methods used in the property and
Liabili ty Information System (PALlS). This manual provides
the info['mation required to understand the functions of
PALlS and considerations for implementation of the system.
It is designed as a guide to the user of other PALlS
documentation and serves as pre-PALlS class ..

GH2e-9S93
R!!QRl!llI! !l!ll 1Hl!!1ITY INFOl!.!!ATlO.!! !l!~ID! 1tlH!ll.
!!I!!.!H! 1!.!!E§. gREMI!!!! !'.l!Q£]lSSIl!!l (36eA-g::.llXL
~ROGRl!1 DESCH.!~!lQ1i AIm §YST~ ~~
The purpose of this manual is to describe the property
and Liability Information system other lines master record
and the insurance logic necessary to accommodate the policy
and premium information for single location risks in all
lines of business normally written by a property and
liability insurance company. While other lines policies
are not rated by PALlS, they are maintained in historical
fashion and contain detailed descriptive io.formation and
statistical data. The master record is designed to provide
information on the status and history of all policies.

GH2e-e596
g~l!!!L1fu!

GH2e-9S07
BIBLIOGRAPHY OF APPLICATION PUBLICATION FINANCE INDUSTRIES
The purpose of-this iiibiiographYand-Ue associated---classification system is to list and categorize IBM
application publications that a:t'e pe:t'tinent to finance and
securities indUstries. Section I lists these publications
by application or industry. Section II contains an abstract
of each publication, in form numbe:t' sequence ..
As an aid to the reader, Section III lists promotional
publications and Section IV' lists field developed p['ogram
availability notices pertinent to the finance and sec uri ties
industries.
A periodic Bibliograpby of Application Publications
(BAP) Newsletter (GN2B-2486) is publisbed to keep the
bibliography up to date.

GH20-9Sea
g~ID!ml! !.!l!1Illi1!!!.'ll!lll :rnl!W!!1 §l§ll.!! JlQ§ JATS/DO!ll.
1369A::£!::1lli g]!Q!i.!!!!!! ill.£!!IllIQ.!! !!l!!!.!!l!1

This manual may be used as a reference manual by application
p:t'ogrammers that are concerned with the Administrative
Terminal. System, iTS/36B functioning under the IBM
System/368 Disk Ope:t'ating Systelll (DOS). ATS/36"
applications consist of control and functional programs
that permit the simultaneous pe:t'formance of many different
tex:t processing and data-handling activities on different
terminals. This publication desc:t'ibes tbe principles and
techniques of storage and real-time processing control fo:t'
each of the programs that make up ATS/368. as well as
inform.ation pertinent to their organization, scope. and
planning for system applications and/or modifications to
those applications. System. generation procedures are also
described and information regarding storage estimates and
system tim.ing is given.

GH2e-eSe9
§X§!ll!!t;lful

GH29-9seQ
Rl!QR1H!I! !l!ll 1IAB!1ITY Il!PORMATIQ'!! g~ID! 1tl1!!ll.
Q:J:Bllll PNES £!.!!!!§ g]!QggI!!!< 1~ll::1l!l.
PROGRU DES~BI~IIQ!! i l l ~.llll1! M!!!!ll

!lEHIC1ll §9lEDULI!!!< m!Qli.!!!!!! (36H-ST-e6!1.. ]1ROGlW!

R~§£.RIPTION !!i1! 2fMATION§ MANQA1
This manual contains specific information about the
preparation for, the functions of. and the use of the IBH
System/360 Vehicle Scheduling p:t'ogram, as well as its
operation unde:t' the IBM System/361!1 Disk Operating System.
Detailed data preparation suggestions are ex:plained under
the program section to which they apply. The operations
section contains a description of program setup and restart
p:t'ocedures, console operating instructions. and card
layouts. In addition, the manual presents input/output
descriptions, suggestions for option usage, lists of
messages. and a sample problem.

A.!l!W!I§1!!~lll! TIll!.!!!M!. §:f§TIl!!
1.ll~::cX-1aXL .!l!l!.!!Il!!1 QRl!.!lA!Qll!.§ l!.!.!!UAL

The purpose of this manual is to describe the Property
and Liability Information system other lines master record
and the insurance logic necessary to accommodate tbe loss
informa tion for single locations risks in all lines of
business normally written by a property and liability
insurance company. open claim information, taking the place
of the traditional outstanding loss file, is stored in
detail. Transactions for an open claim are entered into
the system along with premium transactions, and the master
record is updated wi th the new info:t'ma tion. statistical
data is prepared as an output. In addition, closed claills
are summarized a purge time and carried fo:t'ward with the
premium information. As with the premium data, closed cases
are also retained for historical purposes.

GH2e-eS9S
!1A!tYl!U;lful l]§.l!!::£Q::12!L .!'!!Q!ill.!!1 ill.£llItllQ.!! l!.!!!Ja!.

This publication provides the information required to use
the MARVEL programming language. It is a basic reference
document for any user interested in the problems with which
tbis system can help him. It is ex:pected that the reader
is thoroughly familiar with the contents of tbe MABVEL/369
Primer.
lURVEL is a language processor for the data preparation,
matrix: generation, output analysis, and management ['eport
writing functions associated vith the Mathematical
programlling Systelll/369 (369A-CO-14X). M.ARVEL was designed
and implemented to provide powerful functional capabilities
in this fast growing area of mathematical programming.
In providing such a comprehensive language and processo:t'
capability, "t['ade-offs" were made that reduced execution
speed.
M.ARVEL will provide maximum customer utility as an
input/output system for the development of new 1inea:t'
programming applications, because this is an area where
extende d function is more significant than high perfo:t'mance.

13S

.!lQ§ IATS/DOS)

This manual contains procedures for operating the IBM.
Administrative Terminal System (ATS) /36". Operation
consists of manipulating the keyboard on the IBM 2141
Communications Terminal to send commands to the computer,
enter docuJllents into the system for storage, and p:t'int
documents whicb have been previously stored.
Procedures are provided for using the terminal to send
and receive messages in the form of documents from one
terminal location to another, to transfer stored documents
onto magnetic tape or punched cards. and to accomplish
high-speed printing of stored documents at the computer
center. Procedures are also included to bring documents
into the system that a:t'e stored on punched cards and
magnetic tape ..
Tbe procedures are arranged so that the operator can
begin with the most basic commands and i.mediately sta:t't
using the terminal while prog:t'essing through the remaining
text and examples to understand the operating principles.
A summary is included at the end of some sections to
provide a quick review for operators who only use the
ATS/36" occasionally, or infrequently after ex:posure to
the initial t:t'aining period ..
Four appendices a:t'e included. Appendix A provides a
listing of operator commands. Appendix B p:t'ovides a listing
of computer responses. Appendix C provides a glossa:t'y of
terms that are used throughout the manual. Appendix D
consists of punched card codes and reference data for
entering special characters and hexadecimal values at the
terminal.

GH2e-e51a
§X§TIlW!!l! A.!l!1I!!.!§Il!!1ill TERMINAL §X§TEM llQ§ lATS/DO!ll.
136e!::CX-1aX) l!fg!,li~IQ!! ill.£J!ll1:IQ'!!

This system consists of cont['ol and functional programs
that permit many diffe:t'ent tex:t-processing and data-handling
activities to be carried on simultaneously through different
terminals attached to an IBM System/36". Written to operate
under DOS/36", the Administrative Torminal Sy~tcm vill

CONTINUED FROM PRIOR PAGE

CONTINUED FROB PRIOR COLUBN

programs supplied with the Advanced Life Information systell..
The user sboul.d be familiar vi th the Operations Hanual
(H29-0517) to gain the necessary supplellentary infor.ation
in order to include the utility progralls on his library
and to execute them ..

allow background programs to run concurrently with, and
independently of, normal terminal operation.
This publication contains a general discussion of the
features of the program, an indication of some of the areas
in which it may be applied,. and the machine configuration
required.

GH29-9521
g.§I.!:!!.LJ§@ GENERA!.il.!:!! !.!!!:!!.!!!!..!IlQ1! .§.!.§:r..!!!! 11!ASICI
AflllmlOH Ql.§£RIPTIQ1! MASUA!.
R!!QQ!!!!! HUM!!~!! 573J!::Q1

GH29-9511
~!~:!:ll!!tJ2H !Q!!!!!!~!!!ll.!ll llRUNAJ, ~ QQ§.
lAIUQQ'§l. lM!!!!::£!::~lU. £Q!!fQll.!! ill.Im! Q~1!UQ'!!!'§

This manual surveys the operational concepts and system
capabilities of the Generalized Information syste. (Basic) •
provides an introduction to the language of GIS and
describes the file organization and processing actions
supported by GIS.
The systelll/368 Generalized Information System (Basic)
operates under control of the System/36B Operating System
and supports a wide variety of applications by providing
inforllation handling capabilities against Dlany typical
data base organizations. 1s a system, GIS provides
faci1i ties for defining, maintaining, and retrieVing data
from user files under direction of the using installa tiOB
and its personnel.

MANUAL

ThIs-manual describes operating procedures for the IBtI
Administrative Terminal system. ATS/368. These procedures
are designed for computer centers using the Disk Operating
System. (DOS) version of the IB8 5Y5telll/36.0 I!odel 39, 40,
or SaF.
ATS/369 computer centers using a different machine
configuration lIay use this manual as a reference for
establishing procedures for use with the system.
These procedures are intended for the compu ter center
operator or other personnel using the equipment during
scheduled operating periods to set up the system for I.TS/368
applications, maintain the real-time capability while the
system is in use, and shut down the system to terminate
ATS/363 operations ..
Any deviation from these procedures must be carefully
considered to avoid introducing errors which could
jeopardize the effectiveness of the system ..
Special handling instructions and other computer center
(ee) operator duties are described for servicing the
requests of remote terminal (RT) operators, lIaintaining
the security of records, off-line machine operations for
peripheral equipment, and error recovery techniques.
The manual is divided into sections, each of which
describes the overall system application, arrangement of
equipment, and procedures for its use.

.It

GH29-9522
!!lJ!!.I..QillPHY
DISrRIBUTIOB

(BAP)
GH29-9512
!!ARV!!!, Ql :!:!!!!!l.l!-DIHE!!gm!.. DATA 1!l!!l 2l~2::ill

This publication contains information that will enable
the user to link-edit and incorporate the GPSS/36e program
into a system for subseguent execution under the control
of DOS/36a.
A method (REALLOCATION) whereby the user can reallocate
the quantity of GPSS/369 entities and effectively use all
available core storage is described and illustrated .. The
various data sets required by GPSS/36H are also listed
and described.
Three extended features of GPSS/36.0' are explained in
detail in this publication. Specifications and
considerations for use of the Run Length feature, the LOAD
feature, and examples of independently compiled user-written
FORTRAN routines used in conjunction with GPSS/36B are
also included ..

of the syste~/36" Text Processor (360A-DP-137X) ..
This publication contains detailed preparatory systems
procedures: operating instructions, error messages, and
restart procedures for the component programsi and
programming system and machine requirements.
A detailed knowledge of DOS operating procedures is
a prerequisite for reading and using this manual.

GH2a-a699
~ll!.Llla-os J>!§!~

l!?!!!l@l!!.!l .!!.!!.!l1!.!!1l

1ANGOAGE

1!ll~

l!!lli!.

~~B::f!.::!!l!l.

CALL/36e-os is a system designed to operate under Operating
system/36a (OS/36B). It provides the facility (tool) of
personal computing for a user at a remote terminal. ..
CALL/36B-OS is applicable for a vide range of users,
including those vith little or no computer experience,
as veIl as experienced prcgrammers.. It consists of a
TerDlinal Command Language, plus language processors.
CALL/36B-OS emphasizes problem solution at the convenience
of the terminal user. Thus, a terminal user will be provided
with improved turnaround, ease of use, and increased
availability of the computer resources ..
GH2B-B7BB

CALL/l2!!=Qa

na

SH2a-a712
§I2TEH/36!! !:g!,! f!!Q£~2Ql!
PROGRAM DESCRIPTION MANUAL

ihe-EDIT/360Componen't-of the IBts System/360 Text Processor
consists of control and fUnctional routines which retrieve
input from a user-prepared disk-resident file. Input
consists of textual material, text-formatting commands,
and output reguests. After the output text has been
proofread, alterations can be made to stored textual data
through the use of text modification commands without
reentering the original text imput .. Completely justified
and corrected text is written as generalized disk records.
The user must provide routines to retrieve this generalized
informa tion, con vert it into coding acceptable to the
specific composition device on which final printing will
occur, and write it to the appropriate systems output
device .. If word d;ivision capabilities are reguired, EDIT/360
uses the HYPHENATION/360 component of the System/360 Text
Processor (360-DP-137X).
This publication contains an explanation of the
composition control languages supported, processing and
file descriptions, system and examples, and preinstallation
requirements for use of the EDIT/360 module and its
associated utility programs. A detailed knowledge of DOS
operating procedures is a prerequisite for reading and
using this manual ..

Hllill!!.!i.!! !!.!!FERE!!Q M!!l!!1

CALL/36B-OS is a system designed to operate under Operating
systell/369 (05/369).. It provides the facility (tool) of
personal computing for a user at a remote terminal.
CALL/36.0-0S is applicable for a wide range of users--persons
with little or no computer experience as well as experienced
programmers. It consists of a Terminal Command Language,
plus Language processors.. CALL/36"-OS emphasizes problem
solution at the convenience of the terminal user. Thus
a terminal user will be provided with rapid turnaround,
ease of use, and general availability of computer resources.
This manual provides a description of the features
available in the CALL/36e-os PL/I language. CALL/36"-OS
PL/I is designed -to me-et the needs of the terminal user ..

= E;Q1UJ&!

PROGRAM "NuiBiR-S736-K11---

GH2a-a719

J.§!!

J2Q§ POWER II AtlLICATION DESCRIPTION MANUAL
-----This is a general introduction to POWER II (Priority Output
Writers, Execution processors, and Input Readers), an
automatic SPOOLing processor and priority scheduler for
normal batch processing under DOS. POWED II operates under
DOS, providing significant improvement in syntcm throUghput~

~Q~BA~ liQH~g-J§~D-~~~~~~ --~--~----

GH2B-a7B9

§1l!l!gQ 1H2M!QJl! !l!fQ.!\!!!llQ.!! ~!§.TEM lail2\.
Af!?1!!anQ!! l!ll§£H!?nQ.M llANO!!. !?!\Q.l1!!!.!l NUMB.!!!! a1J2::l!H

The IBH Shared Laboratory Information System (SLIS) provides
data processing support for hospi tal clinical laboratories.

147

CONTINUED FROM PRIOR PAGE
SH20-0727

and many additional functions. It is a Type III Class A
Program ..

!!!!!LJ§!l::.QQ~

fQ1i2Qg Q~li.R!!Q!L~_2 Q!!!.Q~
PRELIMINARY VERSION PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-XS2

ThIS-manual presrults-(1)--a- procedure-£or-ini tializing the
DATA/3M:! system, (2) a description of DATA/360 utilities
and proceduL-es for using them, and (3) a complete and
detailed description of all files and their associated
formats.

G1I28-0723
£Q!IS~M.S!X~!! I!! ~Q!! ~,!~ll;!1LJ.§!! !~R2!Q!:! ~ Q.E~E!!Q!!~~ !ill!!!]
PROGRAM NUMBER 360A-UX-01X
ThI'S-publlcat"iondescribes operations to be performed by the
Coursewriter III system console operator. These include:
A brief section on system components with a sample
machine configuration.
A detailed step-by step procedure to prepare the
Coursewriter III, Version 2, system ..
IBM terminal line code and EBCDIC tables ..
Prior knowledge of Disk Derating System/360 and Basic
Telecommunications Access Method operating procedures is
assumed.

SH20-0728

*N

!1bQfA!IQM ~!2!li~ QfliR!!!Ql!2 ~!NUA1
PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-D41
The-orderAllOcaUOii-system assists apparel and shoe
manufacturers in allocating and shipping stock to customers.
This manual describes the operating procedures and job
control cards regu~red for retrieving programs from the
distribution tape, preparing the system, operating the
system, and running the sample problem ..
QE]~li

GH20-0721

SYSTEM 1£QQ2l.
1QQ21. 1Q~ !\.~~Jf!!!Q1! !!]2£!ilR!!2l! !!l!l!!!!1

!ilii!~!u12~ £Qli§'llii~!i ~QQQ.§

!!!tQ~!I!Q1!

!:!!Q.!H\!!! 1!!!!!ll.!m;; l!!Q.a 2.136-D 3h

J221

2.1l.'!~1"

This manual describes the techniques of service point and
variable interval allocation as they apply to the
distribution function of the consumer goods industry ..
Consumer Goods System (COGS) - Allocation handles allocation
of finished products to warehouses or distribution centers
on the basis of forecast usage, current stock status,
shipping restrictions, and management's policy for service
and inventory.
COGS - Allocation also provides a means
of simulating the distribution process for up to one year ..
The audience for this manual includes executives,
system analysts, and programmers.
The manual provides
an overview of the application with information for the
prospective customer to use in determining applicability
and begin planning for implementation of the program.
Included in the manual are a general description of the
program, common elements of the push and pull policies,
elements unique to a pull policy, elements unique to a
push policy, user responsibilities, system considerations,
and input/output formats.

SH20-0729
!!!!!Ll.2~::.QQ2

l'li!U111!!1 Qfli.R!!Q!!!..!i Q!!!Qli
1RRQQli!l1 liQ.:.. ~U§- xs l1.
This manual describes the entire command structure for
DATA/36fJ .. Each command (both primary and secondary) is
explained in sufficient detail to enable an experienced
keypunch operator to quickly acquire the skills necessary
to exploit the advantages offered by the DATA/360 system.
This manual is organized to facilitate teaching of
inexperienced operators as veIl as to serve as a reference
guide.
g!l~h!tl.!.E!!!! ~R.§'!Ql!

GH20-0730

GH20-9722

;;X;;1!H!L1§1!

~1!~!!!!"-!! ~ SYSTE!! l£.Q~a K.Q!!~l!~ll!!!i

APPLI~!I!Ql! !!~~~.BI~!IQl!

=

J!!Q.;;l

Ml!Q!b
g1!Q~!!M M!!1t~.!;~
Q2 2Ili.::l!ll
COSG-Porecasting is a general purpose forecasting system
applicable to the distribution, manufacturing, and process
i nd ustr ies ..
This manual provides an overview of the forecasting
application and an introduction to COGS-Forecasting.
Major
topics include forecasting concepts, the techniques used by
COGS-Forecasting, a description of the operation of the
system, and preliminary installation planning ..
The audience for this manual includes executives,
inventory control personnel, systems analysts, programmers,
and all others who require an introduction to the system ..
There are no prerequisites to this manual.. However, an
understanding of this manual is a prerequisite to the use of
COGS-Forecasting program Description Hanual (SH20-0804),
COGS-Forecasting Operations Manual (S829-0803), COGSForecasting System Manual (LY20-0621), Licensed M.aterial.

1Q!i1. =.

.Q~ ~n6-DJ~

GH20-9723
!!!t!.!~0-DQ!i A~~I~!!1Ql! !!~~!i!tlru

MNUAL

!'.!!Q.!l!!!!! NUM.!!!!!! 2.112=!2"

This describes DATA/369, a teleprocessing program# written
in Assembler Language to operate under the Disk Operating
System (DOS). The purpose is to provide a method of entering
data by means of 2q local 2260 Display station Model 2
terminals to a 231Q. Direct Access storage Facility and
of verifying this data to produce input to a user's program,
bypassing all unit record operations.

R!!!!!t!§.1!!NQ g~TEM 1 BOU !iQ :ll.R.Rlfa
TRAFFIC PROFILE ANALYSIS SYSTEM
]RQl~~O=PQl.R! !i!UU-!!]t! SEL~~!IQl!l.
APPLICATION DESCRIPTION MANUAL
~!Err~

RiWGB:!~NUMB~~~~=T21~~r~!ll

The Tariff Publishing System is a computer program designed
to assist the tariff publishing agent in supplementing,
reissuing, and distributing bound tariffs. The principal
outputs of the system are magnetic tapes for distribution
and camera-ready taI"iff material for reproduction. These
magnetic tape tariffs may be used by shippers and carriers
for cO'mputerized analysis.
The Traffic Profile Analysis System provides a
computerized means of specifying and selecting point-topoint tariff matter based on a user's interest profile.
The interest profile identifies the commodities a tariff
user ships, the carriers via which freight may be
transported, and the points which are of interest to the
user-. The Tariff Publishing system is a prerequisite for
the use of the Traffic Profile Analysis System ..
The graphics, codes, and formats for entry and display
of tariff matter have been standa.t"dized to improve the
operating efficiency of the Tariff Publishing system and
the consistencey and readability of the tariff for users ..
The standards meet the requirements published in Interstate
Commerce commission circulars and, in addition, follow
the best of today's tariff publishing practices.
The Tariff Publishing system and the Traffic Profile
Analysis System use IBM System/360 Disk operating System ..
The audience for this manual includes executives,
system analysts, and programmers. The manual provides the
potential user with information necessary to begin planning
for the installation of these programs.
This manual provides a general description of the
Tariff Publishing System and the Traffic Profile Analysis
System and describes the extent of coverage of the programs,
highlights the advantages that may be realized through
their use, and provides preliminary planning information
for users ..
GH29-0735

i l I !Q!! g§'!~!!LJ§~ 1Q2 Mill QQ.§l 'y~~l..Q1i l
.ru;~!!IR!IQ'!:! .t!l!lB!M 1~1~=E!~1.
This publication describes the Coursewriter III system
developed for system/3M'..
Included are comments on the
value, L-ange, and capabilities of computer-assisted
instruction systems in general, as well as descriptive
material relating to the computing equipm.ent and programming
systems used by System/361J ..

fQURSEWR!.!~R

SH20-0726
g2!~!!LJ§! QRQ~!!

!I!!tOCATION
PBOGRAM DESCRIPTION MANUAL

PROGRAM

l!f£1.!fll!Q!!

~YSTE1i

NUM8Ei-5736-D4~--

The-orderiiiocat:Ioii-system is designed to assist apparel
man ufacturers in alloca ting a vailable in ventory to open
orders in a manner consistent with management objectives
and direction.
Input to the system consists of the user's order and
inventory files and the rules to be followed in performing
the allocation function.
Output from the system consists
of picking documents and updated order and inventory files.
as veIl as various listings, reports, and control totals.
This manual describes the programs in the system and
provides guidance for the installation and use of the Order
Allocation System. The reader should be familiar with
the Application Description Manual for the order Allocation
System

SH20-0736
~!2!li~J§!! ~ll~MI.?&!! U!.EQ!!1!l!1IQ1! 2!~!~.tl

§J!!iJ!R!hl~li.Q

!Q.1!!1:!J! III.;..

1]121£1..

SYS!~Ji fRQilli!1i .Q~2£~If!IQ1!
r.RQf~Q!!R!b tl!1!Q.!!!&~

I!iffi.E.!:!l!!!QR

SYSTEM~

.!:lANUA.!!.

PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-CX1
ThTs-manual descrIbeS-procedural language facilities for
specifying file-processing tasks to be performed by the
program product--short title GIS and GIS (BASIC) --under
the overall control of the System/360 operating system.
P.t"ocedural language statements provide for
interrogating, modifying, and updating data files previously
defined by means of the GIS data description language.

(GH20-0604).

148

SECTION 2:

ENTR!~ AQ.!2!Q 1:2 Ifill !!!!!1!.QgRA~!iR~-!121B!I!Kl~ Il! A !Ji! llQ!912B
A.Q i l l R!!lliI .21 III 2.R12£iR !!jHlru;.R~
CONTINUED FROM PRIOR PAGE

CONTINUED FROK PRIOR COLUMN

Input statements use English keyvords and extension words,
and common arithmetic symbols. to express the systell llser 1 s
procedu ral logic.
All elements of the procedural language, and all task
statement formats are identical for both GIS and GIS
(Basic). Examples and appendix entries show how procedural
languaqe elements cOllbine to form statements, and how the
statements appear in a task specification.

safety stock and order point. and (4) projection of demand
on the basis of historical data ..
This manaul gives information for determining the
applicability of the programs, and includes a general
description of the programs. the lIachine configuration,
general systems charts. sample reports. and a discussion
of inventory control concepts applicable to the use of
the programs. The audience for this manaul includes
customer executives, systems analysts, and programmers.

GH29-9737
ill! ll!.§.:1.!l!!l1§.!I. .!lQJl. IDl!l!ll H lliQ!!!!! l!ESCRIPTIQ!! !.!!l!
Q.fR.RAnID§ 11!HY.!1
PROllE!l! .!!Jll!ltilll 1§..!!l!=l!5. 2. 896
POWER II (PRIORITY Output Writers, Execution Processors,.
and Input Readers) is an automatic SPOOLing processor and
priority scheduler for normal batch processing under IBH
System/36" Disk Operating System.. This manual describes
the general concepts and facilities of POWER II.. It
includes operational and functional characteristics,
installation procedures, and maintenance and performance
guidelines ..

GH2e-9753

§.I2I.E!:!.lill

SHOf, [100R £Q!!ROL !!!.~!£~ DESCRIPTION HANUAL
RllQll!!l!!! !!!!~ll~!! lill.§=!!ll
The system/36B Shop F.loor Contro.l System is designed to
provide substantial information about the status of orders
moving through manufacturing faci.lities so that proper
control can be maintained thro ughout the production cycle.
To accomplish this. System/360 Shop Fl.oor Control performs
the following:
Determines when orders should be released
Prepares exception notices when material for an order
is not availa.lbe
creates files containing open order information
prepares data for output to shop and management
personnel
Provides retrieval of pertinent files for the user to
update upon receipt of infor.ation frolll the
shop floor
'Provides retrieval report capability pertain.ing
to the status of orders in the shop
Provides the priority calculation. and preparation of
a work list in priority sequence.
System/369 Shop Floor Control is designed to provide
current information about production orders and facilities,.
therby providing management the abil.ity to exert the proper
control over shop floor activity_ fhis control is
attainable by determining the orders to be released to
the shop,. creating and maintaining records pertaining to
these orders,. and quickly accessing report inforllation.
This manual describes system/360 Shop .floor Control
and provides informa tion to enable the reader to determine
applicability and to begin planning for the program product.
The audience includes executives, systems analysts,. and
programmers.

GH29-9743
ill! lllllIll!!l.1§.!! llQli. RQ!l!Jl H llIDlOTE !!Q!l ll1!~! PROGRA!!
llf1!!aIl2! ~2g!fnQ1! H.A!!.!l!,L
RllQll!l!!! ll!!.!!!l.!!!! 1§.l!ll=!I..:hl.99§
IBM System/369 POWER II Remote Job Entry (POWER II/RJE)
offers the ability to submit jobs via remote IBH 2780 Data
Transmission Terminals for normal batch processing under
DOS. This docullsnt presents the general concepts and
facilities of RJE. Knowledge of IBM System/369 POWER II
is a prerequisite to understanding POWER I1/RJE.
SH29-e744
~Q!!!!li.ll!!!:n;!! H! [Q!! aIllru!Lill 1Qll VERSIQ!! ~
ill.R!!Q..R~ 2!!.!!l! .f!QQRAK illm ~
This po blication describes operations to be performed
by the couresvriter III System console operator. These
include:
1.
A brief section on system components with a sample
machine configuration ..
2.
A detailed step-by-step procedure to prepare the
coursevriter III. Version 2. System ..
3..
IBM terminal line code and EBCDIC tables ..
Prior knowledge of Operating System/369 and Basic
Telecommunications Access Method operating procedures
is assumed.

GH2e-9745
llllI!!!!l1§.l! Qli.

!.~!lll!

GH2B-9754
li.!li.IEM/369 Jl.!!QR lJ.QQJ! £Q!!.I.!!!!!o IDA llill .!!!.!!l!ll
R!!Qll.!!l!!! !!!!!!!!!!! li 736- M31
This manual. describes the data base records and fields
that are used by the System/369 Shop Pl.oor control program
product. The following records are included:
Item .aster subordinate item master
Product structure
Work center master
standard rou ting
Open order summary
Open order detail
A separate section of this manual shows the other IBIS
appl.ication progralls and program products that use the same
following IBM programs a.re referenced:
System/360 Bill of aaterial Processor
Systeo/360 Inventory Control
systea/360 Requirements Planning
Systea/360 capacity Planning
syst8a/368 Shop Floor control
'l'his publication is intondod to assist the user's system
personnel in the planning of data base requirements for
prograll product System/36" Shop Ploor Control ..

U!!!I!!.!§.I.!!llIVE Ill!!!!!!!ll llli.:t!l!!
!!!.!!!!!!. (PROG§!!! l!Q. 573!:!!~l

~Rf!.!~~I.!Q!! ll~li.~gIfI.!Q!!

as LEARN Administrative Terllinal System is designed to
help ATS/OS installations teach their terminal operators
to use the system/36" Administrative Terminal. System ..
It consists of nev and replacement macro~ and application
programs to be incorporated into the existing ATS and eight
lessons to be stored as ATS perllanent storage documents.
This publication contains a general diSCUssion of the
features of the product and the application for which it
is designed ..

GH23-9746
lllli.Il!!!l1§.l! llQll !Jl!!!l! !Jll!!!!m!l!I.ll§ IM!W!!!. SY
llRfHgI.!Q!! !!~~~!!!U.!!!!! !!!!!!!ll RllQll!l!!! !!!!!!~!!! li
DOS LEARN Adllinistrative Terminal System is des
help ITS/DOS installations teach their terminal operators
to use the System/360 ld.inistrative Terminal System.
It consists of new and replacement macros and application
programs to be incorporated into the existing ATS and eight
lessons to be stored as ATS permanent storage docum.ents.
This publication contains a general discussion of the
features of the product and the application for which it
is designed ..

GH29-9757
£l!!!!1!!!.§UIQ!!ll PROQB!!!l!!.!!ll §!li.:t!l!! .!£ill
ll§U!! R!!!!2!l!!!J!ll!!!.li. ill!!!!
This publication provides information and descriptions
of internal functions of the conversation Programming
System (CPS). Intornal logic and fl.oll is described as
vel.l as individual program modu.le description. It is
assumed that the users of this publ.ication aJ:'e thoroughly
fami.liar with tho externals of the Conversational
Programming system.

GH2e-e751
QU.1§l!. !!.!!2!!.!!!.!!!!.!!!!I§ R!:!l!.!!ill =
!~!.lgI!Q!! ll~§£!!llI.!Q!! !!!.!!!!.ll
RllQll!!!!! !!!!l!!l~!! l!:r:!!!=!!.2.1
No abstract available.
GH29-9752
Q§L.1§l! Il!Y..!!!!IQ!!! £Q!!.I!!Q1 !l!llICATION m;SCB!UIQl! 1!!l!!!ll
ill.1!!=!ll!11
The 1BK 05/369 Inventory control program product consists
of a group of integrated programs and techniques designed
for the selection and illplellentation of order point
inventory control where it applies in manufacturing
organizations ..
The programs provide for (1) classification of inventory
items for deterllining the type of control. (2) calculation
of econollic order quantities on the basis of usage
information or future requirements. (3) computation of

149

GH29-9758
£l!!!H§Jl.!ll!!!!!!. R!!Q!ll!!!!!!!!!!l li..!Jl.TEH 1!;R§.l. Il!illlli ~
.!!!.!!!!!1
g!!QllllA.!! .!!!!J!.!l.!!!! 369D-8,h!!::.!!l§
The Conversational Prograaming System (CPS) is a til1esharing system which runs in a partition of the IBK
system/360 Operating System 8PT II or HVT. It gives reaote
terminal users an interactive probl.ell solving facility using
modified subsets of either the PL/J: or BlSIC languages. A
remote job entry facility is also provided.
This publication is a reference manual for tho terminal
user that contains descriptions of:
o
Hov to call the computer from a tormiDal
o
The CPS PL/I language
o
CPS PL/I built-in fUnctionG
o
Hethods f or program opti miza tion

=

SECTION 2:

1I1!~.B!1I§' !!mlIQ 1.Q I!!!~ ~!~bI.QQEAftl!-Mi-!Q:gliIIlljQ .§! ! !l!!. !l!]!~!:!:Q~
IQ I1:!.§ IiI!!.!:!! .Ql .'!:!rn Q!W.RR l!!L!H~.~lt!.
CONTInUED FROM PRIOR PAGE

CONTINUED FROM PRIOR COLUMN

o
The remote job entry facility
o
Terminal error messages
The CPS BASIC language is not describes in this manual.

the installation and maintenance of LEARN ATS under ATS/OS.
It contains informatio.n on the fUnctions and commands of
the program and may be used as a reference manual.

GH20-0759

SH2H-H767

!!!tt ~X§.!~tlLJ~ QQ§ 1~!Rli lill.!!!Jl!§!B.ll.!.TI. !~RHIl!ll ~M
PROGRAM DESCRIPTION MANUAL .fRQQRAH NUMBER 5736-XX3
ThIs-prograiii-isusedto-assist ITS/DOS-installations in
teaching their terminal operators to use the System/36"
Administrative Terminal System. It functions under ATS
by incorporating additional and modified macros and
application programs into the existing system.
This manual contains the instructions necessary for
the installation and maintenance of LEARN ATS under ATS/DOS.
It contains information on the functions and commands of
the program and may be used as a reference manual.

£Ql!Y£1R§ATIQ!{!b fRQ!!.R!M!!!Q ~xrul! l£ga
11!.§1!!d:=.AI!Q!!' AliI! A1H1!.1!!~IR!!IQ!! l!!.!!!!A1

This publication provides a description of the procedures
necessary to tailor a conversational programming system
(CPS) as distributed for a particular computer installation.
It includes descriptions of necessary OS/36" support, the
SYSTEIV369 hardware support, the CPS Generation procedure,
additional data set support and geneI:"al. operating
techniques.
It also contains general informa tioD considered
to be advantageous to computer installations using the
conversational Programming system (CPS). The reader is
assumed to be thoroughly familiar with the externals of
the conversational programming system (CPS), as presented
in the Terminal User's Manual.

SH2H- G768

l!!l! gg.!;W!;! HJ\lll! AI§. ~Q!lli!!QQ!S
gj!Qll!l!.l! l!.!!l!!!.!l!!.!l .21J.l!::~l!L ~11&=J[!1

The workbook is intended as a complement to the LEARN ATS
package. It introduces A'l;'S and LEARN ATS to the student
and guides her through the procedures required to sign
on ATS and begin taking LEARN ATS, which consists of seven
lessons aimed at providing the basics of ATS/360 operations
from a terminal standpoint. Appendices contain illustrative
material for the lessons.

GH2H-3761

Q!2[ QEElEA!!1!!! :rrgMil.!H! r.QR~ !! l!~1iQ!j !!2!! ~H.'!:!iX
fRQ.!!E!tl. .Q~£[If.!!Q!! l!.@ QgERATloNS .H!.lli!!1
.fRQ!!Rl!.!1 !!.!1!1!!gg J..§!!.Q=i!5. 2-=-i!~
IBM System/36" POWER II Remote Job Entry (POWER II/RJE)
offers the ability to submit jobs via remote IBM 2780 Data
Transmission Torminals for normal batch processing under
DOS. rhis lI1anunl describes the general concepts and
faciliticn of nJE. It includes operlltional and functional
characterifitic:J, installation procedures, and maintenance
and performanco guidelines. Knowledge of System/36B POWER
II is a prorcquinite to understanding POWER II/RJE (see
the POWER II Program Description and operations Manual,

SH2H-D769

illR!Q 1!~.Q1!!!.Q1!! l1!£.Q!!.tlll!.Q!! :li§TEM 1.21!.21.
LABORAT0!i! !1!li!!!1 fJ.!QQRAM !!!HH!El! .all&::!!.1l
The IBM Shared Laboratory Information System (SLIS) provides
data processing support for hospital clinical laboratories.
Operating under the Shared Hospital Accounting system
(SHAS) executive. the programs handle batched input of
labora tory requisi tioDs and test results, producing
executive, the programs handle barched input of laboratory
requisitions and test results, producing
The program design allows tailoring fo formats and
procedures to meet the separate needs of several hospitals
sharing a common computer~
Input and output of the system
lIIay optionally use the SHAS teleprocessing executive,
allowing remote data entry and report production. The
laboratory application programs complement the SHAS
accounting application programs through the use of a common
admission procedure and automatic charge generation.
This basic publication provides specific information
for installation planning and operation of the Shared
Laboratory Information system.
Detailed discussions cover
available system options and user options, preparation
of master file data. preparation of daily input to the
system, and interpretation of output from the system.
This document should be used as a reference guide by
both user-hospital personnel and central operations
personnel during the entire life of the system ..
Discussions in this manual pertain to the Shared
Hospital Accounting System (SHAS) and the Automated
Chemistry program (ACP). For more detail on these systems,
refer to SHAS PROGRAM DESCRIPTION HANUAL, (GH2a-9533).

GH2D-3737) •

GH2H-H763
El!!!!!£!A~ na.ug!!l!.~ 2!STE!'I !ff!!ICATIOl! QESCR!.f!!Ql! E!~~
£RQQ!!!ll lH.!lH![;B 27J§=fll
Frs is a sYfitem/360 DOS processing program designed to
facilitate implementation of a fast response,
telecollllJunicntions system4
FrS acts as the controller
of a BrAM partition, coordinating the DOS Multitasking
Supervisor with a communications network.
Thn FTS uner invokes FTS services and resources to
assist hifi application-oriented processing tbrough the
medium of tho DOS Assembler Language macro facilities.

GH23-D764
2!~!E;ttLl!!.Q A!!.R!.n1!'§!.~'§2

.l!.Er.~!£!!!Q.t! rr!;'~£!!~~I!.QJf
~RQQR!H B!!!1!lfiR 21d§::Q2.1

l!ANAGEHill!! !!!!.QRHAT!QJ!
l1ANUA1

g.2!~~

The Agribu!Jinc~fi Management Information System (AMIS)
provides a computer-oriented cost accounting system for
farmers, rnnchors, and grovers.
A distinguishing feature
is the emphasis this system places on management accounting
by cost center.
At the same time, the system produces
financial accountinq records necessary for fiscal control.
The system representn a significant step in organizing
and presenting necessary for fiscal controL The system
represents a significant step in organizing and presenting
the information needed for sound management decisions.
This manual contains a general description of the
system and the systems approach taken.
It is intended
to introduce the reader to the system and to serve as a
guide for early planning.

SHAS OPERATIONS MANUAL (GH2G-H534). ACP APPLI.CATION
DESCRIPTION MANUAL (GH2H-H475). ACP PROGRAM DESCRIPTION
MANUAL (GH2H-3525). and ACP OPERATIONS MANUAL (GH2H-H516).

GH23-H771
§X2.;r~~a.2~ QAIA Mg Q!iQA!!!~ll!.Q!! Al!fl !lA.!l1~l!flI mtQ£!.§§Q!!
!tlb!£ll.!Q!! Q1!§£ll.f!ION lll!!!ll f!!Q§.RAl1 !!.!ll!~ 21.36-I!~

GH23-H765

!lfE.QR!!l!!!Ql! HA!!!§~HEl!:I: Sys.'r~tlLl2H [Qft Itrn !1!!1 :!X2!~!1L369
1.§.!2;tM ~§£E!f.'r!Q1!l. APP~ICA1!Q1! !lli.§£.RIR.!'!Ql! Ml!Y!1

lYll!!UQl! lL J:!!Qll!!M l!!!.!!!!.!ll!

~IJ!::~!;

The Information Management System/36U is an Operating
system/369 processing program designed to facilitate the
implementation of medium to large common data bases in
a multiapplication environment. This environment is created
to accommodate both online message processing and
conventional batch processing, either separately or
concurrently.
The system permits tae evolutionary expansion
of data processing applications from a batch-only to a
teleprocessing en vironmen t.
This manual includes a general description of the
system and its various facilities and programs, lisings
of typical and minimum configurations, and sample
applica tions.

SH23-H766

I1H1 [!2!g&d§.!!

Q~

bEl!Eli

!!U1!l!ll~gATly'~ !!!Rtl!!!!~

.2!2!£;11

PROGRAM DESCRIPTION MANUAL PROGRAM NUMBER 5734-XXa
This-program-i"S-used -to-assiS"t-iTs/os-Installat"iOns in
teaching their terminal operators to use the System/36"
Administrative Terminal system. It functions under ATS
by incorporating addi tional and modif ied macros and
application programs into the existing system.
This manual contains the instructions necessary for

150

The System/36B Data Base Organization and Maintenance
Processor is a programming system designed to create.
maintain, and reorganize the central data base in a
multiapplication environment. It provides the framework
for a computer-oriented information system. Primarily
batch-oriented, the system operates under DOS/3M'.
This manual provides an overview of the system,
specifies the functions, options, and featUres included
in the system, and provides information necessary to begin
planning for implementation.
The content includes a
description of the data structure facilities of the system,
system flowcharts, a description of the programs in the
system,. machine configuration reguirements. performance
estimates, and user responsibilities for implementation.
The manual is data processing-oriented vith a variety of
application examples.. The primary audience is intended
to be data processing executives, systems analysts, and
programmers.
This program is a modified and extended version of
the IBM system/369 Bill of Material Processo.r. Appendix
A contains a discussion of this application.
Appendix
B of this manual enumerates the improvements and conversion
considerations.

CONTINtJED FROM PRIOR PAGE
capabilities of the IBM 18~0 Data Acquisition and Control
System to the problems of the clinical laboratory. It
is a system of files and procedures designed to satisfy
basic information processing requirements of clinical
laboratories. tJtilizing the Clinical Laboratory Data
Acquisition System (CLDAS) Program Product (5718-H11) or
its equivalent for the data acquisition function, it
provides a broad base for an information manageDlent system.
CLMS directs and contJ:ols the flow of informa tion from
receipt of the initial requisition for a test until the
final result has been developed and is ready for reporting.
eLMS operates under the IBM 189" Time Sharing Executive
System (see GC26-31B3) on the IBM 1800 Data Acquisition
and control System.
The purpose of this manual is to pJ:ovide a general
description of the application, to outline the system
advantages and to provide information useful in planning
for installation of the a.pplication.
GH2B-B775
~X2:r~!1Ld'§'! !£:r!.!~ ~~~ !NFORI1!ll2l! R!mQ!!!J1
!:e~k!£!I!Q!i !!~2QllllQ] l1 ANtJAL, £.lliHi.HAl1 1m..!1!!!.!! ll.J§=ln

This application program is designed to assist the
securities industry by automating the active box section
of the cashier l s department using IBM 2260 display terminals
for both inguiry and security move recording.
This manual is intended for the use of customers and
IBM sales and systems engineering personnel. It gives
a general description of the background, purpose, and
intended market of the Active Certificate Information
program, followed by sections on processing opera tioDs,
installation planning and requirements, and modes of
operation. A glossary is appended.
SH23-B116

QUd§.!! I!!ll1!!:QSX .£Q!ITM.1 .f!illQ.RA11
.H!!1!!rnR .2Il!!=11.2~

]~£R!fI!Q.H

~!tQQR!.!1

!1!NUAL

The OS/36.3 Inventory Control program product consists of
a group of integrated programs and techniques designed
for the implementation of order point inventory control
where it applies in manufacturing organizations.
The programs provide for (1) analysis and classification
of inventory items, (2) calculation of economic order
quantities on the basis of usage information or future
requirements, (3) computation of safety stock and order
point, and (4) projection of demand on the basis of
historical da ta.
This manual enables the user to understand the functions
of, prepare for," and install the program product. Included
are descriptions of the programs and the processing,
definitions of input, output, and files; a discussion of
the program options, program macros, and program
input/output; and tables and formulas utilized within the
programs. The audience for this manual includes systems
analysts and programmers.

SH2B-B180
19.!.~L 2 736 =!U£
PROGRAM DESCRIPTION MANUAL
The-IBM sharedLaboratory-Information system (SLI5) provides

§!!!R].Q &!M.R!IQ!L! llI2S.!1!.I!QN §!§.'Illi1

data processing support for hospital clinical laboratories.
Operating under the Snared Hospital Accoun ting systec
(SHAS) executive, the programs handle batched input of
laboratory requisitions and test results, producing
laboratory reports for use throughout the hospital.
The program design allows tailoring of formats and
procedures to meet t.he separate needs of several hospitals
sharing a common computer. Input and output of the system
may use the 5HAS teleprocessing executive, allowing remote
data entry and report production. the laboratory
application programs complement the SHAS accounting
application programs through the use of a common admission
procedure and au toma tic charge generation.
This basic publication provides information on the
Shared Laboratory Information System, enabling the user
to understand the function of all SLI5 programs as a guide
for preparing to install SLIS. This document is written
as a reference manual and not as a study text. For
educational purposes this manual should be used in
conjunction with the SLI5 APPLICATION DESCRIPTION MANUAL
(GH20-1J709), the SLIS OPERATIONS MANtJAL, and the 511S
LABOBATORY MANUAL, 5H21O-10169.
SH2B-B181

.§!!!gl! HllQRilQR! !J!!QR!!!nQ!! §!21:M .1§1!§J..
QfER!I!Q!§ tl!.HY!1

~1.1§':;;!!1£J..

Tbe IBM. Shared Laboratory Information System (SLIS) provides
data processing support for hospital clinical laboratories ..
Operating under the Shared Hospital Accounting System
(SHAS) executive, the programs handle batched input of
laboratory requisitions and test results, producing
laboratory reports for use throughout the hospital.
The program design allows tailoring of formats and
procedures to meet the separate needs of several hospitals
sharing a common computer. Input and output of the system
may optionally use the SHAS teleprocessing executive,
allowing remote data entry and report production. Tbe
laboratory application programs complement the SHAS
accounting application programs through the use of a common
admission procedure and automatic charge generation.
This basic publication gives the specifications and
necessary information for operating the SL15 programs.
It includes a description of retrieving data from
distribl1ted machine-readable Dlaterial and cataloging
programs in the user's core image library. tJse of this
manual requires an operating knowledge of the IBM Disk
Operating system (DOS) job control cards and operating
procedures.
SH2B-0182
~§Ll§J!

g2l!.!!lg!!.!HIT§ f1!.!!.!!.!R!l fllilll.!!!.!l R1!Q.!H!Q 2134-H51

2fl!R!lll§ l1!!!!!!1
SH23-B111
Q~L1§l! R"2l!!!l.ru!"liI.'? flllili.!!ffi f!!Q!1RAM Q]l§CRI!'J:!Q'!!
f!l~§!l.!!1 !!l!.!!!l.!l.!l. ll34-Mll

H!!!!ll

OS/360 Requirements Planning determines planned orders
by time period for finished products, assemblies,
SUbassemblies, parts, and raw materials based upon the
input of orders and forecasts. OS/360 Requirements Planning
consists of three components, the requirements generation
program, the print exception program, and the chained file
management system.
The chained file management system creates and maintains
the direct access files, consisting of the item master,
product structure, work center master, and routing files,
used by a central manufacturing system. The chained file
management system is required by, and is provided with,
the OS/361:1 RequireDlents Planning program product.
This manual includes (1) discussions of system
definition, (2) descriptions of all input/output files,
(3) a detailed description of the requirements generation
program, (4) a detailed description of the print exception
progralll, (5) a detailed description of the chained file
management system program modules, (6) a detailed
description of customizing procedures to generate various
chained file management system program modules, (7) a
detailed description of customizing procedures to generate
the requirements generation and print exception programs,
and (8) information regarding the two sample problems.
SH2B-B118
O~360

INVENTORY CONTROL OPERATIONS I1ANtJAL

r:!!Qiiil~-!iJ!!!.gil234-H52- - - - - - -

OS/360 Inventory Control consists of seven programs designed
to assist in the implementation of order point inventory
control in manufacturing organizations.
This manual contains information regarding preparatory
and operating procedures for the programs. It includes
a complete list of the messages that can be produced by
the programs.

151

OS/360 Requirements Planning consists of three components:
Tho requirements generation program, the print exception
program, and the chained file management system ..
05/3610 Rcquirements Planning offers a mechanized
approach to detailed requirements planning.. It uses item
master and product structure files created and maintained
by the chained file management system.
This manual contains information regarding preparatory
and operating procedures for the programs.. It includes
a complete list of system messages that can be generated
by the programs.

GH2B-B786
.£!b~LJ§!::2.§. !U!£Q1ill !!iQ .!!I!ill!~2 .F1!QQ!!!.H
!!.!\!!J!!!,. .1f!l.Q!i.Ml! 1!!!.!!l!.!;.!! l§J!!=.£!::!illJ..

!!]~~!.Q1!

This publication describes the facilities provided by
CALL/36J3-0S to installation personnel who are responsible
for the selection, evaluation, and implementation of the
systems engineers, installation programmers, marketing
representatives, and customer systems personnel.
CA1L/360-0S is a terminal-oriented, time-sharing system
designed to. function under the control of the IBM System/36J3
Operating System with either of two options:
Multiprogramming with a Fixed Number of Tasks (8FT), or
Multiprogramming with a Variable Number of Tasks (MVT).
From the terminal user standpoint, the CALL/360-0S service
environment approximates that of a dedicated, in-house,
data processing installation ..
Subjects discussed in this manual cover system concepts,
executive and utility function, data base management,
system installation, run-time options, and diagnostic aids.
Error messages available to the user system are described
in a separate manual: CALL/360-0S, OPEBATORI S M.ANUAL (GH20B188) •

GH2B-B781
£!llL.J.2~=Q§ .I~!!11!.!i!b Qf~Slli.Q]§ !!!.llil~b

360A-CX:-42X

"ThIS-manual

R!ill.!!.!!..!11

.!!~

discusses those element5 of torQinal

CONTI HUED FROI'! PRIOR PAGE

CONTINUED FROM PRIOR COLUMN

characteristics, operations, and maintenance pertaining
to terminals used by the CALL/360-OS time-sharing system.
It is addressed to the individual terminal user.
Additional operating techniques covering specific
CALL/369-0S language statements, system commands, and
terminal correction procedures can be found in tbe three
separate language reference manuals: CALL/36B-OS BASIC
LANGUAGE REFERENCE MANUAL

(GH2B-B699)

SYSTEM/360 REQUIREMENTS PLANNING, OPERATIONS MANUAL
(GHU-3583)

SYSTEH/360 CAPACITY PLANNING -- FINITE LOADING, APPLICATiON
DESCRIPTION MANUAL (GH2.0-0621)
SYSTEI1/36.0 REQUIREMENTS PLANNING INTERFACE, PROGRAM
DESCRIPTION MANUAL

(SH20-B793)

CALL/36B-OS FORTRAN

LANGUAGE REFERENCE MANUAL (GH29-01HI), and CALL/360-0S

SH23-0792

!!!!!U f!!1!.tISHl!!§ 2!2l!l.tl l!!Q!H:!!! llllUll FORHAI AND

PL/I LANGUAGE REFERENCE MANUAL (GH2B-373B).

STANDARD CODES MANUAL PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-T21
Th~-iiianuaI-contaIiiS- iDformitionr:ela tingto-the concepts,
outputs, and processing functions provided hy the Tariff
Publishing system.. It provides complete description of
the system features including, formatting, editing, error
correction, and maintenance controls.
Prereguisite informa tion is contained 'in these
pu bl ications:
1..
Tariff Publishing System - Data Preparation

GH2B-3788
~!~1L.l!H!=~ Q~~ft!!Q~ ~ANUA1 ~OGRA1! l!~lHHl J2.!!!=f!=!!.~!

This publication described the online operating procedures
for the CALL/363-0S time-sharing system to computer center
operator personnel responsible for day-to-day system
operation. CALL/360-:-0S is a terminal oriented, time-shared
system designed to function under the control of the IBM
system/360 Operating System using either of the two
available options: Mulitprogramming with a Fixed Number
of Tasks (MFT) or Multiprogramming with a variable Number
of Tasks (MVT). Subjects discussed in this manual cover
startup procedures and options, the Oper·ator command
Language, shutdown and restart procedures, and runtime
operating techniques.
An entire section is devoted to
a complete listing and explanation of all diagnostic
messages available to the system user.

Manual

(SH20-3798)

2..

Tariff Publishing System program
Description/operations Hanual (SH2.0-0812)
It is assumed that the reader of this manual is f amil.iar
with the information concerning formats and processing
contained in these two pul?lications.
SH20-3795

£AmUX fbANNlliQ QU!!!llQl§ 1!!NUAL
RRQ!!!!£! 21J&::1111£ fRQQRM ~ODUC.'! .2136-812
System/360 Capacity Planning consists of programs designed
to assist in the implementation of work center loading
in manufacturing organizations ..
This manual illustrates the control cards for fUnctions
that are recommended at various points in the procedure ..
It also contains a complete list of the console messages
generated by System/3613 capacity Planning, as well as
information on restart and reentry procedures and ,program
halts requiring operator action.

~mll~

R.BQ~!t!1'!

GH20-0789
~lm!i~Rl!Q~

!££Q!U:!1:!.!:!§

2.!~!1;l! ~E;.!ti;lIT~

1!!!§ID. mllQ'!:!

~

APPLICATION DESCRIPTION - PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-F31
The-i3rokerage-iccountIng- systemElemcnts (BASE)program
provides a comprehensive foundation for the back office data
processing applications required by today's brokerage firms.
The extensive series of application areas covered by BASE
includes Purchase and Sale (PSS), Stock Record, Dividends,
Bookkeeping, Interest, Customer Statements, and such
critical cashier functions as Fails and Transfers.
The BASE system is general enough to permit various
options and modifications to suit the individual
require ments of a particular brokerage firm..
However, the
processing in the application areas is so extensive that
most programs will require little or no modification by the
typical brokerage firm.. The integrity of the data as it
flows through BASE is maintained by a series of balancing
checks, tight control over the master files, and extensive
input data editing before any transaction processing or file
updating occurs ..
Files 'containing pending items and master files are
updated. daily, prod ucing over 75 reports encompassing the
day's trade and related activity.

Customizing procedure for generating the system/368
Capacity Planning programs
Functional description of all programs ..
Description of all I/O files
Explanation and operating instructions for the sample
problem

SH2B-079B
§x§.,n;~t!J.§'~ B~2!:!!!L~~]Nll

R1ANNJ1!Q INT!H!f!££; 2736-K13
PROGRAM DESCRIPTION MANUAL
~QiiiiM jjilli:§iii-~:m::iill The system/36B Requirements Planning Interface is a program
product which, when added to System/36B

SH20-3798

.'r!R;[U PUBLISHIHQ gg.!l.tl (BOUND llllUm..

Requirements Planning (360A-MF-05X), provides the ability
to generate connection records.. These connection records
are required as input to System/360 Capacity Planning-Finite Loading (5736-1112).. This manual includes information
covering the functions and use of only this program product
and must be used in conjuction with SYSTEM/3613 REQUIREMENTS
PLANNING, PROGRAM DESCRIPTION HANUAL (GH20-0584). It is
intended for use by systems analysts, programmers, and
operating personnel. The user is presumed to have studied
the following manuals:
SYSTEM/363 REQUIREMENTS PLANNING, APPLICATION
DESCRIPTION MANUAL

(GH2B.3487)
(GH20-3584)

SYSTEM/360 CAPACITY PLANNING--PINITE LOADING,
APPLICATION DESCRIPTION MANUAL

(GH20-0627)

SH20-0791
gg!;!!D.§». !!!;Ql!!!!!;H~:!'.!i gj,ANNllili INT!;RPAC~ 1211§::!!ldl

OPERATIONS MANUAL
systeiii/360 Requirements Planning Interface is a program
product which, when added to System/360 Requirements
Planning (360A-MF-05X) provides the ability to generate
connection records.
These connection records are required
as input to system/360 Capacity Planning -- Finite Loading
(5736-M12). This Hanual contains information regarding
preparatory and operating procedures for only this program
product. It must be used in conjunction with SYSTEM/36.0
REQUIREMENTS PLANNING, OPERATIONS MANUAL (GH2.0-0583) ..
The information in this manual is intended for systems
analysts, programmers, and operating personnel, who are
presumed to have studied the following manuals:
SYSTEM/3613 REQUIREMENTS PLANNING, APPLICATION DESCRIPTION
MANUAL

GH23-0802
£QJITM1 PROGRA.!!::fl L. £!!!jH!!!!li~ !!Q!!llQ!! !i!.§Ull:!:l!~ MUl!MP. lJ!Rill...
2!'.!lR!!!2!!§ !!llMb :: !'.!!Q!lM!! .!!l!!!E!! .:!734-XM!!

Tbis manual contains informtion on the preparatory and
operating procedures for the Mathematical Programming
system Extended (MPSX) and its Mixed Integer programming
(HIP) featUre.

SH29-0914

I.Hf2El1ATI 01! !1A.!!!!H;!1£a~~ ~!§.I~HLJ~L X~.B.§!.Q.H
ill! £QQ~~ .R£;UBJ!£l !iA1!!!&L
.!!!!~.!l~!! 2IH::Hl!

:i:M!Y1:ii!ii!1 Mm1!b: - -

PROGRAM NUMBER 5799-AAE

ThTsdocument describes characteristics of the operating
environment of the programs of the On-line COBOL Symbolic
Debug Program RPQ.
This programming RPQ is available on
special quotation only (see inside front coverJ.
General guidelines for running OS/360 under CP-67
control are given. specific information is given for
running the programs classed as OSAIDS in the on-line COBOL
Symbolic Debug program RPQ. This document is directed
toward system programmers, and assumes knowledge of 05/360.

~L

~~§'§'Ag§.

!'.!l2"!!AH

Information Management system/36B (IMS/360) is a processing
program (control system) designed to facili ta te the
implementation of medium to large common data bases in
a multi-application environment. This environment is
created to accommodate both on-line message processing
and conventional batch processing, either separately or
concurrently. The system permits the evolutionary expansion
of data processing applications from a batch-only to a
teleprocessing environment.
This manual lists, explains, and suggests appropriate
responses to the completion codes, status codes, and
message s produced by the IBH-supplied components of the
IMS/369 system.

SH20-0915

SH29-3925

Q!!!LJ§!::22

rul..li!L.

(LY29-9638) •

SH2H-0926

!!!r2!!!!!:!IQ.!! !!!!!!.!i.!:!!ID!! gSTEMLl§J! ll!!H2l!
!,!!Q"!!M .!!!!~!!l!!! 2I1 4-X!2

~

SH20-0919
Q!§.g~ll l1A!!!g£;.H£;H~ ~!~j~ Qgl!J!ATO!l!.~

!'J!Q"!!M .!!l!!!.El!

.:!I;!!!::~£1

l!!li!!!t.

No abstract available.

GH29-0920
!;.Q!i~RQL ~RQgli!tl="§'1. Ql!~ ~~ ~illQli£ .Q~BUG

NJ!!i'§'~~ lli2~!~

=. !fRil9llQR QM9!RnQl!

9!~OLE OPERATO~ GUI!!!L
PROGRAM NUMBER 5734-XS3
ThIs-ma:nuaI-contains~tailed reference information for

.!l!!!L1§!-OS

This manual explains how to execute the IMS/360 utilities
programs under Operating System/369. Described are data
base description generation and program specification block
generation, data base recovery and data base reorganization,
and system log analysis.

EB.Q2RA!1

I~Mll!1 OPER!.tQ~

PROGRAM NUMBER 573Q-XS3
DATA/369is-a-method-for entering data directly into a
computer. This manual describes the commands of DATA/360.
This manual is intended for those persons entering and
verifying data and can be used as both a learning guide
and a reference guide.
Technical information pertaining to generating and
operating the DATA/36B-OS system is found in the DATA/36Bas console operator's Guide (SH29-B926), and detailed
reference information is in the DATA/360'-OS system Manual

H!H!!!~

The online COBOL Symbolic Debug program RPQ for COBOL F
and AN5 COBOL provides an interactive debugging facility
for OS/369 COBOL programmers who operate in the virtual
machine environment of CP-61. The programming RPQ is
available on special quotation only (see inside front
cover).
The publication describes the Online COBOL Symbolic
Debug system.
General design concepts and the interfaces
with CP-61, CMS, and OS/360 are discussed. It is assumed
tha t the reader is fa miliar with the basic concepts of
the IBM Control Program-61 (CP-61) and CMS.
Both are
described in CP-61/CMS System Description Manual, GH200802.

using the DATA/369-0S system and includes inst.ructions
for:
o
Generating the system
o
Building documents on the master file
operating the system
Running the utilities
o
Responding to internal messages
It is intended for those persons responsible for
generating the system (systems programmers and data entry
supervisors) and operating the system (computer operators
and scheduler and systems personnel) •
Detailed descriptions of the DATA/36B-OS files and
internals are located in the DATA/36B-OS System Manual
(LY2B-0638J. The DATA/36B Terminal operator's Guide (S6290'925) describes the IBM 2260 Display Station keyboard and
DATA Terminal Operator Language (DATA/TOL) and contains
an operatorls training guide.
SH2H-0932
~!I!L~l1.uI£ll PROGRAH~!1lli

§.!§.!!!:! ll!.U{QgQ .!11f.§!l
&'A!!illlA~ ygR!.§. I'lANUAh g~ !!!llW 2lJ.!!=!~
This manual is one of a series of manuals which describe
the use of the· IBM Mathematical Programming System Extended
(HPSX). It is a prerequisite of MP5X LINEAR AND SEPARABLE
PROGRAMMING PROGRAM DESCRIPTION MANUAL and assumes that
the user is familiar with the INTRODUCTION 'I'O HPSX (GH2B-

£QURQk

0849)

and SYSTEM/360 JOB CONTROL LANGUAGE

(GC28-6539).

This manual describes the organization of the components

160

CONTINUED FROM PRIOR PAGE

CONTINUED FROM PRIOR COLUMN

of MPSX and their interface with Operating System/36U
(OS/36"). It also describes in detail the control language
used to communicate a sollltion strategy for solving a
mathematical programming problem to HPSX, and the OS/3613
job control language statements necessary to execute MPSX.

LANGUAGE USER'S MANUAL (SH211-1:l932), the MPSX LINEAR AND
SEPARABLE PROGRAMMING PROGRAM. DESCRIPTION MANUAL and the
FORTRAN programming language ..
GH2B-B961

lH1b

rn.!:!

K!~1.!Illi! .B£;EQB1:~!i.. !~~~ICA!!Q.li !!!d~CRIP!!Ql!

E!!.QCES~Q.R ~!'§~1i~

!Rg1!£!!!Qli

GH2B-B935

.1i!1!!!!l!L

PROGRAM PRODUCT - PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-011
DISTBIBUTio~BETAIL-S736=D"---- -------IBM-pashion-Reporter-iSdesigned to assist the retail
merchant in maintaining accurate inventory records and to
provide merchandise operating reports. The reports provided
are a stock sti!..tus, a class/priceline, a style page, and an
aging report ..
The user controls the level of detail for stock records
and repot'ting criteria.
It is primarily designed for
fashion/softgoods merchandise reporting,",
IBM Fashion Reporter Program Number 5736-011 consists of
a group of programs designed for the implementation of this
applica tion on IBH System/369 using Disk Operating System
(DOS) or on IBM System/3713 subject to the compatibility
constraints announced for System/37". System/3713 support
will be concurrent with the availability of the DOS release
supporting System/370.
This Application Description Manual inCludes a general
description of these programs, the machine configuration
needed to run them, general system charts, and sample
reports.. A general discussion of tb.e retail environment is
included ..
The manual is intended for use in determining the
applicability of this program product and for planning its
implementation.. The audience includes retail merchandise
Illanagellent and data processing personnel.
SH2B-3936

::. !!i&l§&

BRIQQ~L

~2~li!~!Q! ~liQ!bL fliQQB!1i liQ1i~~B 213q-!!2
This program product is designed to allow a user of a DOS
or OS bill processor system to implement Info['mation
Management System/36e (1HS/36e) Version .2 iJata Base System
with minimal changes to programs accessing bill processor
system files.
It provides the necessary logic to·:

Unload the bill processor system files into a format
suitable for loading as IMS/360 data bases
Load the unloaded bill processor system files as IMS/360
hierarchic direct data bases
Interpret bill processor system calls and converts them
to 1MS/360 calls to perform the same logical function
against the data bases
This manual contains a general description of the
prog['ams, the Illachine configuration, and the general system
charts for the program product. It is intended for use
in deterlllining the applicability of the program product
and in planning for its implementation. The audience
includes customer executives, systems analysts, and
programmers. Knowledge of the· concepts and terminology
discussed in the INFORMATION MANAGEMENT SYSTEH/36e VERSION
2 GENERAL INFORMATION MANUAL (GH20-.0765) is a prerequisite
to an understanding of this manual.
SH20-0963

E!!R£!!Ql!§' Q.RQ.ilARY II 1£12 III §'!~!lil!
PROGRAK DESCRIPTION MANUAL - VOLUME III - MISCELLANEOUS

BASIC COURTS SYSTEH - PROGRAM PRODUCT DESCRIPTION MANUAL

~!lli~Q~I~!~!!

giQgi~1fgiQB!!~!hl:ll=gl§----

PROGRAM DATi-=-PROGRAHNUMBER -5736-N13 - -------------

------- ------- - -

No abstract available.

Thi"s-prellmInary-manual contains information for use in
advanced planning and implelDenting consolidated Functions
O['dinar y II (CPO II) ..
Part I of this manual contains the formats of the
input, output, rate file, and miscellaneous CFO II records.
Pa['t II contains descriptions of customer constants,
customer tables, transaction codes, preparation of input
and rate file data, and output records.
GH2B-B967
~I~~'£;!! ~~~£liIPTIQ!'!

III

= gJl2fHt!!!

Operating System/36e-HVT. The .feature bas heen developed
to help ensure the secut"i ty and privacy of data stored
in systems such as OS/HVT.

NUK~ ~736-N13

Part I of this manual contains the formats of the input,
output" rate file, and miscellaneous CFO II records. Part
II contains descriptions of customer constants, customer
tables, transaction codes, preparation of input and rate
file data, and outPllt records.
SH23-3938
!~L;!§'~
~!!Q!l!!!!!

ru!!

ThIs-manuar-ae~ribeS-th~-Resource security~eature to

CON'§'Q!!!J2A!!Q E!!1!£:L!Q.!!§' QRQ.!!!Alcr ~!.§'~!1 !! lCFOII)
.u~~g~~!1'!]Q!!'§ J:liQ§R~ DATk
.f!illli!iM1 !!~£!!Ig!IQ1! !l!!!!!Jb
'yQ!dIl1~

ljll!!!b XQ!! Q.eL!!ll

RESOURCE SECURITY - PROGRAM NUMBER 36flA-SY-007

SH2B-3937

= ~Q'§'

Q~~RlnQJ§

!!J!.!!!1l!!! 2I1§::!!!&

An

SH20-0968
~f2.K LIN~!.R

rum

§]f!B.A!!~]

R.{!.9Q1A!11il1.!!!gL

EgQ§.RAl1 .QG§£llIT!Q1! l1!1i!!!~L !!E.9§1!!.H l!Ql!!!]!! 2n.!t:l~
This manual provides the system user with the information
requit'ed to prepare input data and control cards and to
interpt'et the system's output.
It is a basic reiecence
document for any I1PSX usor.
All procedures are explained.

!1!~!~!nQ.li ~!!!!!!h

This lIanual is in three parts.
Part I gives instructions for operating the APL/360
time-sharing system. suggestions for good practice in
time-sharing and remote-computing operation are included.
Part II gives instructions for operating the APL/360
utility prog-grams.
Part III describes the procedure for incorpot"ating
APL into an existing installation.. It includes instructions
for preparing the HOST system for APL, allocating resources,
and restoring the APL distributed library. Common problems
encountered during system installatioD are noted and
analyzed.

GH20- 397B

.§llllQ.Q.ll!!R! Ql ARfb.!fA!!2..!! fY.§b!£!!!ONS 11lli£!b

SH2B-B978
Q~

PROGRAK NUKBERS

!uTIl~M!!£!L ~RQQ.R!M!1!§ ~ t!!.ID!QgQ l!1M!l
l1]§§!g£; !!!!!!!1L Elillill!!J! liQ!:!M,g 2134 -!~
This manual contains the messages generatei by the
procedures and subroutines of the Mathematical programming
System Extended and its Mix.ed Integer programlling Feature

=
!!!f.ilU~ !&!Q!!!QL
= n!!!!!
1Q!.Q..!!§...
5734-853 AND 5734-854

£!ti£lll !!illllillli
!!bA1!ll!!f!

Q~ £A!!.A~!!!

SH2B-B959

!!!QQ~

The purpose of this bibliography.is to list and categorize
rBM application publications that a['e pertinent to the
medical industry ..
A periodic Bibliography of Application publications
(BAP) Newsletter is published to keep the bibliography up to
date ..

QU!!ATION~

*N

.H!!!UAL

capacIty pIaiiDIngcoiiSistsofprograiiis designed to assist
in the implementation of work center loading in
manufacturing organizations.
This manual contains information regarding procedures
for the preparation and operation of the program!.;, illcluding
sample job control cards for link editing dnd I:)x(~cuting
all programs. Also inCluded is d comploto li::;t c·£ th~
mes:.aqes that can be produce(l by tho proljr<1w.s.
An explanation of tho !;.:lClplo prohlom and tho operating
procedures are also provided.
The audience for thiu miAnual includos operati.ng
personnel, systems ..lu<1lysts, .

(KIP) •
SH23-096B

!l!1!UH1AT!£l!1 fliQQH!MHING 5 YST~ £;!!tlH!§!! 1~~!L
!!ll!! m!!!!!!!!.!!;!TlllJ!§. ~!ll!Jl!T JJ!.!l!!!.£Q!!J!l
fRQ2R!!l !!~£RgllQM !tU!Mh .f!!9~!!A!! !!UH~.~!! 211~.!1~

This manual provides the system user with the information
necessary to use the Read Communications Format (REAOCOMM)
feature of MPSX. READCOMK is a subroutine that enables
the user to augment MPSX with procedures written in the
FORTRAN language ..
This manual assumes that the user is familiar with
the INTRODUCTION TO KPSX (GH2B-BB49), the KPSX CONTROL

S1l2a-0979
Q!!.Q!&!~ii!!J! !!£!U~! !!2.E;H.!.2 ill!!.QE;
PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-T11
TITS"-document-descrIbes the agent terminal inputs required

f!!!li

161

CONTINUED

PRO~

PRIOR PAGE
GH29-3987

to automatically price aod print, on demand, standard
airline tickets based on Passenger Name Necord (PNR)
informa tiOD, and the resulting responses.

~ru!Hg,!!!!Ull!! III ... !llM!Q.!! 1 AtlH£ll!Q.!l llllgl!!fUQ.!! !!!!!.!!ll
f!!Q\!g!!! !!!!!ti!ll!!T211.'l=Ul.L 2ll2=ll11

This publication descl:ibes the coursevri ter III,. Version 3
system. Included are comments on the value,. range, and the
capabilities of computer-assisted instruction syste/ls in
general, as veIl as descriptive material relating to the
computing equipment and programming systems used.

SH2~-3983

!llgg!
!!~llg!~

1!llI!!~ll!!A.!l~ll

!1!!.I!!ll..

~gQ\!gll~

!!MU!! 2ll2::1:11

This document describes the process required to create and
maintain on-line records for the fare quote and ticketing
packages:

o
o
o

SH23-3981
!':ll!!ll

fllQrn!!!!ll !.!.!!!!llll! = !!U!!ll.!!llU£~ lfJ.::llU!!l
2fll.!!llUQl§ !!ll.!!!!llh EgQ.!1!!ll!! !!M.!!~!! 2134-X!!1

This .anual provides the user with preparatory and operating
procedures for the PL-IiATH library.

SH2~-9995

Q~QlliI!~Klln!!.!l ggll~

!!!f!&~ll.!lr.ll!Q!!

!i!!!llllL f.!!.Q.!l!!llll

!!~.§.ll.!!.

211&=Hl

H!!!fll~ J1!!Q211ll!! !!ESCBIfUQ!! ll.!!ll Qtl!!lliill .!!A!!!!U
fllQ.!lgJl!! .!!.!!!!U.!! ill.'t:UJ

This document describes the tasks necessary to integrate the
Fare Quote/Ticketing package in to an existing programmed
Airline Reservation System (PARS) installation.
SH2~-~982

.HA!1!!~1!AN£E
Qg~R!:rQIi!..§' QQ.!I!L. fR.QQll!! liJ1H!!~.R

T.!R!ll

5732::1:11

This manual describes the control cards that must be
provided by the programmer for compilation and execution of
a program written using 1130 COBOL. Additionally, programming suggestions, techniques, and certain language features
and capabilities are described in some detail to assist
programmers in understanding com pilation exec ution results.
1130' COBOL is a defined subset of American National standard
COBOL (formerly USA standard COBOL).

This manual contains detailed information for using the

MINIPERX Program Product (5734-XP3).

SH23-3997
'!!.!!.QJI1lM.!l1l ~£QJ!!!.ll.!!.!l ill!ll.!! ~ lMgl.. !lllli.Q.!! £
f!!Q.!l!!!ll llllillln!Q.!l !!ll.!!.!!U lliill .ll NARl!!rIVE
PROGRAM NUMBER 5736-P31
ThiS-iiianualcontaiiiS-a:-detailed description of the Brokerage
Accounting system Elements (BASE) system from the point of
view of the user. The BASE system is composed of a number
comprehensive foundation for back office data processing
applications in today's brokerage firm.
Both the overall
system and the individual programs are discussed in this
volume, together with the production of, and printer
layouts for, the more than 75 BASE reports associated with
daily security activity.
Application areas covered by BASE include Purchase and
Sale (P&S). Stock Record, Dividends, Bookkeeping, Interest,
Customer Statements, and such critical Cashier functions as
Fails and Transfers. The BASE system is general enough to
permit various options and modifications to suit the
individual requirements of a particular brokerage firm.
However, the processing in the application areas is
extensive so that most programs vill require little or no
modification by the typical brokerage firs.
This manual should be used in conjunction with Volume 2
(SH2B-B998), vhich contains detailed information on the BASE
system record layouts.

GH2~-3983

!!g~r.!!Q!!!~ Q!!£!!!! AllillH~ lli\!!!ll!! g
gg!!!!L:!§..!! All!! 11:!!! £Q!lf!!!ll2 g~!ll!!
a.ff1~~~IIQ!! J1~~£R!fnQ] I1A NUA1

.l.ll£!f lIt lQg

These program products provide engineers and scientists
with powerful tools for performing direct current (DC)
and transient analysis of linear and nonlinear electrical
networks, or analysis of any physical system that liay be
represented by a network model. The programs provide a
simple, user-oriented input language for describing the
Ret work components and their iote rconnections.
A lDodel library feature stores models of cOllaonly used
devices and/or circuits for recall in network problems.
Through the usc of improved analytic and programming
techniques, much larger problems can be analyzed and in
less time than has heretofore been possible.
This manunl contains a general description of the
application, the machine configuration requirelilents, an
overall systems chart, and a sample problem whicb
illustrates input and output, and demonstrates the system's
capabilities and techniques for problem solving.

SH2JHI998 see page 228
SH2B-3999
!!l!QJSERAGll ll££Q.!!.I!!H.!l g~~ llbll!!ll!!~ lBASEI lllli.Q.!!.6
PRO\!RAH fgQll!!~! 1!ll.!!.!!1l = fgQ.!l!!ll!! !!~!!ll.!! 5736-F31

This manual contains information on the generation and
operation of the Brokerage Accounting system Elements
(BASE) system.
It is intended to be read in conjunction
with the other documentation on the BASE system ..
The BASE system comprises a number' of closely interrelated programs that provide a comprehensive foundation for
back office data processing applications in today's
brokerage firm. Application areas covered by BASE include
Purchase and Sales (peS), Stock Becord, Dividends, Bookkeeping, Interest, Customer statements, and such critical
Cashier functions as Fails and transfers. the BASE system
is general enough to permit various options and modifications to suit the individual requirements of a particular
brokerage firm. However, the processing in the application
areas is extensive so that most programs lIill require little
or no modification by the typical brokerage firm ..
The manual contains information that the user must take
into account before doing a system generation for BASE. It
also contains operational information for BASE system
generation and daily operating procedures.
A glossary and a
sample problem are included at the end of the manual.

SH2~-~985

fgQ£!!~l!ll

ON

SH23-~988

Input preparation
Error List Interpretation
General Process Floil

H.!!l!llgr =

!!ll1!~!~

lfkllll!!l

£!QQ.RA!1 !!E.2£!!I~!IQl! HA1H!A~.c. RROG,g!H. !!M!tKR 2Ll9.=.!1!~
The Procedure Library - Mathematics (PL-l'lATH) is a
collection of mathematical procedures written in the PL/I
language. It consists of input/output-free computational
building blocks, written completely in PL/I, Which may be
combined vi th a user's input, output, or computational
routines as needed. The procedures in this library may be
applied to the solution of many problems io industry,
science, and engineering.
This manual contains sufficient information to permit
the reader to understand and use the Procedure Library l1athematics.

SH23-3986
.Q~ §!!2f .E1.QQR £2!!:rRQ! QR~§' "ADYll
PROGRA~ !!~.!!ll!! 2Il!!.=!!11

GH2~-1~a2

.!!!!!!.!lll!

OS-Shop

Floor Control consists of programs designed to
handle planned order release, open-order file maintenance,
general information retrieval, and work list preparation.
Each application consists of one or more programs. This
progralll product is designed to assist in the implementation
of a shop floor control application in manufacturing
organizations.
This manual contains information regarding preparatory
and operating procedures for the programs. It includes
a complete list of the error messages that can be produced
by the programs.. The audience for this manual includes
customer operating personnel, systems analysts, and
programmers. The prerequisite for the use of this manual
is a knowledge of the operating system and the Chained
File Management System of OS/36" Requirements Planning.

ll££Q!!.!!~H\! H~!!!!lln!!!! ill!ll!! 1Mf,;!.!!l
:. ~~~!1 !u'Qi!l!UQ1! M!!l!1
~n§=.!l£~

INST~

!Q.!!

f!!.!!H~

fJ!Q.!ll!1l!! NUM.!!ll!!

BASIC performs budget preparation and appropriation
accounting applications for public institutions. This
general information manual describes (1) the purpose, extent
of coverage, and advantages offered by this program product;
(2) the budget preparation and appropriation accounting
features that have been implemented, (3) source data entry;
(4) control and audit procedures; (5) data processing
facilities; and (6) installation planning considerations.
It provides customer executives, systems analysts, and
programmers with the basic information they need regarding
this pr-ogram product.
SH2~-1337

I!!~Qg!!ll~!Q!! !llll!!.!lll!!ll!!! gHll.!!Lill
f!!Q\!!!ll!! NUHBll.!! ill!!=!!§.

!lll!~!Q!!

.6 MAS'fER !!!Jlll!

This is a consolidated alphabetic index to all the documents
in the set of eleven I8S/363 Version 2 manuals.. The titles

162

CONTINUED FaOM PRIOR COLUMN

CONTINUED PROM PRIOR PAGE

of the individual manuals, along vith abbreviated titles and
order numbers, are as follows:
General Information Kanual -

GIR

SH29-U12

system/Application Design Guide - SADG (5820-9919)

,gQ..!!.M~J!!!llID! !ll... .!F1!i§!..Q!! J. Q,flliI..Q!!.!.§. ill!Illli
DISK OPERATING SYSTEM - PROGRAK NUMBERS 5136-El1
This pUblicationdescrlbesoperatIOiisto-be performed by the
Course writer III System console operator. These include:
o
A brief section on system components with a sample
machine configuration
o
A detailed step-by-step procedure to prepare the
coursewriter III, Version 3 system
o
IBM terminal lioe code and EBCDIC tables
Prior knowledge of Disk Operating System and Basic
Telecommunications Access Method operating procedures is
assumed.

Application programming Reference Kanual - APRH (5H20-9912)
system PI:ogramming Reference Hanual -

SPRH (SH20-0i911)

operator's Reference Manual OPRl'! (5820-0913)
Utilities Reference aanual - UTRM (5H20-8915)
Messages and Codes Reference Hanual -

K &- C (5820-091'1)

system Hanual, Volume I - Text - SK (LY20-9629)
System Manual,. Volume II -

Flowcharts - SK-II (LY2121-063I?J)

SH2B-1915
llLECTRO!!!£ fllil!IT !1!!lIgJ! PROllRAM H ilfll lll. fQ.!! l!!ll !.!!!!
Q£ERA::1!.!!ll SYS:!ll!! !!!.!l ~ £!!!!glITllll SYSTEM
PROGRAM DESCRIPTION HANUAL - PROGRAH NUMBERS 5734-EE1,

Systelll Kanual, Volume III - DP Kicrofiche - SI! III
ILY B9-9 631)
System Kanual,

Vo!uDle IV -

DC Microfiche -

58-IV

(LYB0-I?J632)

attention is called to the fact that many of
the commas in the index are used in the SORT program and do
not necessarily indicate a reversal of word sequence.

The reader'

The publication is intended for use as a reference
manual and assumes prior Coursewriter III knowledge.

(GH20-~165)

5

GB2B-1 BBS
*N
£.!IE;£K ~!!CCE~;rnQ CONT!Q1. ll3.lM lCPcn
!l.!l!!ll!!!!. ill!lli!!!TI.Q.!! MANUAL
~!!!!! NU8BER ~11!!=111
The IBK Check processing Control system(CPCS) is designed
to perform the processing functions associated vi tb entry,
distriblltion, proof, adjustlllent, and control of Kagnetic Ink
Character Recognition documents in commercial or Federal
Reserve banks. Advanced check processing techniques are
used to provide a system accommodating a vide range of check
handling requirements. Control of data is maintained from
original log-in of items through preparation of cash letters
and kill lists.
A powerful data base facility permits user
extension into rala ted application areas such as proof of
deposit and float analysis.
This publication describes the features of the IBtI Check
processing Control System and is designed to give the reader
an overall knowledge of the system without reference to
prograll detail.

=

SB29-1B99

£Q.!l.B~Ii!tITE.R IlL. !ERSIO!! d !!!!!!Q~ GUIDE =- OPERllING
ill:!ll!! A!!.!l .!l!Ji.!\ QRlli:!!!!!! ~ll!!
PROGR!l1 !!Y!!!!l!!lli ~l1ij-E11.. 5736-E11
This publication describes the Coarse writer III, Version
language fro II an author's viewpoint. The language and
author cOllmands are presented in detail. Included with the
description of each operation code and author command are
examples of their use and possible error messages.
Conversational sequences between cOJlputer and author are
included for further assistance. Additional course
facilities are also described, and examples of their use are
given.
The reader with no prior Course writer III language
experience is referred to Coursewriter III, Version 3
student Text IGC20-17ijij). This publication is intended for
use as a reference enual.
Experience with cOllputers is not required to understand
the inform.a tioD in this publication. However, new authors
should receive instruction in the use of the terminal they
are using before preparing course material.
Operational characteristics of all Coursevriter III,
Version 3 terminals are contained in Coarse writer III,
Version 3 Student/Honitor Userls Guide (S82"-19'9).

SH20-191B
~Yl!§IHl!ln.R !llL !ERSION d ~lli!lQ!!ITOR y.~ mllR~
QRll!!!:!i!!ll J!!§:!!!.!! !!!~ .!l.!J!!\ OPERATING J!!§:!llJ!
R.!!!l!l!!!!! !!Y!!!!l!!!J! 211ij-E13 L 2136-E11
This publication describes Course writer III, Version 3,
terllinals as used with the Coursewriter III system.
The publication contains necessary information for the
student and monitor to use the terminals to receive course
material from the computer and to lIonitor results. Also
described are the standard terminal features and operation.

571i=EE1------- - - - - - - - - -----

EcAPIlis an IBM program which performs DC and transient
analysis of linear and nonlinear electronic circuits. It
provides a user-oriented input language that permits a
circuit designer to describe a circuit using familiar
electrical terminology.
This manual is intended for the program user (circuit
designer) • It contains a general description of the
program's capabilities and a detailed description of the
input language. A description of the mathelRatical
techniques employed by the program is provided in the
appendix.
SH29-1916
f!ll!§m.ID1Tll~ E.!!.!!£:!!Q!!J! ~!!!! II ill:!!!!! J£XQ!ll
~!!ill!Q!!J! .!!!!!.!!!1
£!!!l!lM.!! !!!!!1!!§!! ~736-ill
This manual presents the information required to set up the
consolida ted Functions ordinary II (CFO II) system and to
execute the ero II progralils. This system operates under (1)
the IBM System/360 Hodel 2" TPS (Tape Programming System),
(2) IBM System/369 Hodel 20 DPS (Disk programm.ing System),
(3) IB1I System/360 DOS IDisk operating system). lij) IBH
System/360 OS (Operating System), or (5) Compatible
System/37'" s. The CFO II programs are presented in tbe
suggested running sequence. suggestions for integrating
user programs with CFO II are also made. The information
applicable to all CPO II programs is presented once at the
beginning of this manual. Following tbat information is a
control card description, and console operating, message,
error, restart, and external control information for each
CFO II program under TPS/DPS, DOS, and os.
Operating
instructions for the CFO II maintenance utility program are
also in this manual.

=

SH29-1B17
£Q!!J!QH~Hll~ D/!!£:!!Q!!J! Q!!.!l!.!!!!!! SISTll.!! II l£FOII)
lITllill R!!!l!l!!!1! DESCI!!!'1:!Q!! MAN!!.!!.
rull!!!.!! NUMBER ~112=.!!1:!
The CPO II maintenance utility program maintains CPO II
source programs and CPO II macros on tape. This program is
vritten entirely in Assembler Language ..
The CPO II conversion utility program reformats data
tapes processed by • 62 CPO to the format processed by CPO
II. This program is written entirely in DOS Assembler
Language.

GH2a-1921
QJ!l!1ll WITH RESO URCE SECURIT! .!.!!J!:!.!!.1!1.lQ.!! A!!.!l ~mll!!
PROGRAMMERS GUIDE - PROGRAM NUHBER 360A-SV .... 001
ThIspublICatIOil-contaiilSInformationrelating to the
installation of the IBH Resource Security System (BSS) vith
05/369 MVT and methods necessary to interface RSS to a
terminal environment.
Additional information is provided to aid the system
Programmer in performing those services which might be
requested by the security Office.
SH2B-1922

SB29-1911

~g~gHlll§~irJ~R~~~ ~P~~~;:~~~;E~qII!~

R!!QQ!!!l1 NUMBE!!J! 211!!=E13 L lli6-E11
This publication describes operations to be performed by the
Coursewriter III System supervisor. These include:
o
An introduction section describing supervisor
operations.
o
Complete descriptions of all supervisor commands
including examples and comlland sequences
o
An IBM terminal code table

163

m&.§

=

~Q!!!i§EWBI:!~
!g.M!.Q!! J.
OPE!!!!Q!!.!..§. GUIDE
PROGRAH NU8BER 5734-E13 .
ThIs-pubITcationdescrIbes operations to be performed by
the coursevriter III system consolo operator.. These
include:
A brief section on system components with a
1.
sample machine configuration ..
A detailed step-by-step procedure to prepare
2.
and install the Coursevriter III, Version 3
System.
.
Job control language exalll.ple seqllences. The
3.
notation used in these sequences may require
change to accomodate tne userls installation.
J3.efer to IBM System/369 Operating system Job

CONTINUED FBOM PRIOB PAGE
control Language Reference

4.

(GC28-67£l4) ..

SH28-1038

Code table for terllinals.

!!l!! lim!!!H?;'!;!! .!J!l!!J!ftAT!!!!! g!1m !EBS!QH A ~
f!.Q!!!!! Q~'[£!!f!!Q! !!!1!!!!~L !2~!lg .1.,; ll-U.§1I Q~
!H!! COST.!!QJ, :: U!!.!i.!!!J! llQ!!!!£! !!!.!!!!!I.
f!!Q!l!!!!! .!!!!!!!!ll!! ~Zl!!.::ill
The IBn Generalized Information System, Version 2,
abbreviated GIS/2, consists of an integrated set of programs
to provide general-purpose information handling. Oser input
statements initiate and direct the system functions of
creating" querying, and maintaining form.atted data files
variously structured. GIS routines are completely coded in
the Assembler Language and operate under the overall control
of os with liFT or IIVT.
This manual is presented in three volumes, the first of
Ifhich describes the GIS monitor prograll and the capabili ties
associated with it. Data Description (file de£inition)
facilities and Procedural Language facilities are specified
in Volumes 2 and 3, respectively ..

Prior knowledge of Operating System and Basic
Telecommunications lccess Plethod operating procedures
is assumed.
SH2a-182~

£QHll.QH!!ill!! fl!J!£I!!!Hll. Q!!!w!!!!! II j£l!! Hl
UQli!!!!! !!.!lll.£!llfU!!H !!!.!!!!!!. :: !Qill~ !
f!U!£'!;ll.UHli !!~ll.£llfnQ.!! :: f!!29.!!!1! .!!!l.!!!!.!;!! ~n~::Hn
The purpose of this manual is to provide sufficient
information to enable the user to understand the concepts,
input, output, and

proce~sing

of the CODsolidated Functions

Ordinary II (CPO II) system ..

The CFO II system represents a successfully proven
information systems approach to the maintenance, processing,
and servicing of individual life insurance contracts. This
manual provides the information required to understand the
functions of CFa II and considerations for its
implementation. It is also designed to serve as a guide to
the user of other CFO II dOCUmentation.
Processing Description, Volume I of the progralll
description III an ua 1, contains a system-orieR ted description
of CPO II and serves as an installation quide. Voluille II,
the Policy Master Record Code Book, cont.lins a detai1ed
description of the contents of the policy master record.
Volume III, Miscellaneous Program Data, contains formats and
descriptions of frequently used input and output records and
associa ted rate files.

G1I28-1031
~JH! Q.f!!AtI NG :U~ID1 ill.!!!! Al!~ ~QY@'£I Qil.! DIll
U£!!!!!2!!.!;!1 r!!!! llMilj! !!.l!TI!ilYAL :: 8ULTITHRll.l/ .!ill! FASTEB !!!J..
lillH.!;!!!!, !!il!!!!!!A!ION J!ANUAL :: U29.RU !!!!!lill 21i!.!!::ill
OS FASTER HT is a generalized set of macros and a teleprocessing monitor which aid in and simplify the
implementation of a te1eprocessing system. Terminals
supported are IBM 105B" 2140, 22608, and 2265. The system
incorporates facilities for installing inquiry, update.
message routing, and data entry applications. OS FASTER liT
ell ploys a set of macro instructions that generate the line
thereby eliminating the need for a detailed knowledge of
BTAlt. This macro-instruction capability makes the system
adaptable to a wide variety of applicat~ons. The program is
designed to operate in a minimum main storage al10cation of
120K bytes on a J'todel 4BGF or larger System/36a, or on a
Model 135GF or larger SY5te./370.
The principal featUres are described, along with a
discussion of the system design. Planning information is
provided to assist in determining the applicabi1ity of
OS FASTER KT to any particular operational environment.

SH23-1825

Hll£!!l!!!!.'!;!; £!!!£~!! !H!!.!gll. fBOG!!!!! g
OPERATING SYSTEM - OPERATIONS ~ANUAL
Ei!Q~i!M-ruriigi!-2J:~ll----

jll£A~

Hl l!!!! !!Ill .!!!!!

--

This manual contains procedures for installing and operating
-the Electronic Circuit Analysis Program II (ECAP II). In
addition, instructions are given for adding user-written
subprograms, and diagnostic messages are explained.
GH28-1027

SH2B-1B32

!?!!U!!All.!£ r!!R !?!ll.!llW !@ i l l :: .!i.!;!!.!;!!!!. IHr!!!!!!ll!Q!! !!l!!!!U
UQli!!!!! !!.!!!!!!.!l!!!? ~lll::.!!lL 21l'!.:::!!1
STAT/BASIC is a comprehensive set of interactive statistical
progralls for System/3 Model 6 and ITF (DOS, OS, or TSO). It
consists of 40 BASIC programs, providing the user with
procedures for data generation, elementary statistics,
regression and correlation analysis, multiVariate analysis,
analysis of variance, nonparametric statistics, time series
analysis, and biostatistics. The interactive features
include instructional messages, flexible control of
calcula tions, extensive error check.ing, and data edi tinge
This manual provides an overview of STAT/BASIC,.
describing the program features, usage, maxilllum problem
sizes, precision, timing, system requirements, and customer
responsibilities.. It also includes a sample problem to
illustrate the use of STAT/BASIC.

11U! i!.HleiAil!i-R lll.QruU.~!Ql! ll~L ll1!llQ.! .£
QU!!!!!!!!!'§ !!!.!!!!U :: f!l!!.!i!!!.!! !!!!!l!!.!l!! E1!!::!!l

SH28- 1m33

@!!.!;!!!illll!! !!!l!!!!l!!!ION !?!ll.ll!1 !.!;!!ll.!Q!! A illll.al
!!!.!.!!lL!< h UQ£M!!!!!I. .!.!!!.!i!!!!l.!; :: f!l!!.!i!!!l! ~!l!U!QH !!!!!l!!.!.
!1!l!!.!i!!!1! !!!!!l!!.!l!!. ~Zl!!.::gl
This aanual descI:ibes the executive-inforllation handling
capabilities of statements written in the procedural
language of the Generalized Information System, Version 2
Generic statement formats, examples, and detailed
constraints specify the syntax and use of the various task
statements.
Although the abbrevia ted ti tIe GIS/2 refers formally to
version 2 of an earlier GIS release. the expressions GIS and
GIS/2 are synony IIOUS as they may appear herein.

GH28-1028

£!!!?'!Q!!!';!! !!!l!!!!!l!HQ.!! CONT.!!Q!' SYS:!:!!! l£!£ll.l llQ!1::!l!!TI!!
l£I£!1L!!Qgl !!Q!1::ll.!l!!l!!.!!.!! JCICS/DOlli .9.§::ll.!!!!l!!!l!! n
J£I£[L!!ll.l !l!l!!!l!!!!. !!!r!!!!.!!!H!!H mill
f!!Q!l!!.!!! !!!!!!!!.!l!!ll. ~n.'!::l[.n.. 573§::!l[h ~736::l[E
The IBM customer Information Control system (CleS) is a
Transaction-oriented, Dlultiapplication data base/data
communication interface between a System/36B or Systell/370
operating system and user-written application programs.
Applicable to lIost online systems, CICS proV'ides many of the
facilities necessary for standard terminal a.pplications:
message switching, inquiry, data collection, order entry,
aDd con versational data entry.
CICS is availallle in three systells--two for DOS users
ani one for OS USERS. Because the two CrCS/DOS systems are
compatible with e,ach other and Ifith the eICS/OS system, it
is possible to start with a sllall DOS data base/data
communication configuration and move up through DOS into OS.
This manual is designed for persons interested in a
general description of eICS and 1 ts data base/data
communication capabilities.

12~

This manual addresses operations personnel intending to run
the Generalized Information system, Version 2 (GIS/2), under
the Operating system with J'tultiprograaming with a Fixed
Number of Tasks or Kultiprogramming with a Variable Humber
of Tasks. Contents include SYSGEN procedures, execution
procedures. and diagnostic aessages avai1able to the system
user.

SH28-183~

GH23-1829

iigm
~~!l~~~~H~£~~~~~ r~;~~ ~Hm m~~~~~~~!!~
General guidelines for running 5/360 operating systems under
CP-67 are discussed in this manual. The main orientation is
toward 05/363, althougb some other systems characteristics
the- CP-67 utility program.s I'IINIDASD and SAVEOS.
This document is directed toward system programmers, and
aSSUMes knowledge of 05/363 as well as CP-61ICMS ..

£!!ll.!!!!!'!;!! !!!lQ!!J!!U!!H £Q'!!UQ'!' !1UU!! J£!£ll.l !ll!mUQ..!!!1
li!!!!!ll
f!lQ!l!!!'!! !!.!!!!!!'!;!!ll. llQll.::!lJ!.!l!! 5736-Xll !!QS-STlNDA!!J!
5736-XX7
TheIBii-Customer Information control system (CICS) is a
highly responsive, transaction-oriented, lIultiapplication
data base/da ta communica tiOD interface between a Syste8/360
or systelll/310 operating" system and user-Ifritten application
programs. In addi tioD to the functions required for inquiry
and conversational data entry, this open-ended, tablecontrolled, event-driven system provides many of the
facilities necessary for, standard terminal applications such
as message switching, broadcasting, data collection,. and
order distribution.
CICS is available in three systems--tllo for DOS users
and one for OS users. Because the tvo CICS/DOS systems are
compatible with eacn other and with the CICS/OS system" it
is possible to start with a small data base/data
communication configuration aod lIove up through DOS into OS.
This manual provides infor.ation of interest to persons
responsible for the definition, preparation, and execution
of CICS. Included is the information necessary to generate
and operate CICS.

=

GH2l1-1835

fBB NI Ni! ll.U!:ll.!! @!!M!!!!!! II jfll..!i!.!l i!!l!!.!;!!!!. !!!.E!!!!!!!!!QJ!
.!!!!!!!!!. UQ.!i!!!.!! !!!!!!.!In 213~-Xtl
Planning systells Generator II (PSGII) gi,es the user the

164

OS

CONTINUED PROK PRIOB PAGE

CONTINUED FROM PBIOR COLU8N

lIeaDS to rapidly produce and evaluate a variety of financial
plans. It offers the user a simple method for orqanizing
plannning data, establishing computational logic to be
applied to the data, and for generating data displays and
reports.
PSG II may be applied to the solution of planning
problells for financial management and also for any division
or department of a cOlDpaoy with a planning function (silch
as,. personnel or manpower allocations, lIarketing
projections, sbort-range budgeting, etc.) ..
This manual contains an introduction to aSG II, as vell
as a discussion of PSG II capabilities, usage, required
systems,. reference material, and a sample problell.
The PSG II OS and the PSG II DOS programs haye Virtually the
the salle capabilities. The minillium partition size
requirellent has been reduced from 130iK in the os program to
1S3K in the DOS program.. In order to achieVe this redUction
for the DOS progralll, it was necessary to reduce the number
of data lines that can be processed. llso, some facilities
of the OS program vere deleted or modified for the DOS
prograll.
GH2B-1836
]lAT AL1§.! ~ !! !!!f!.lCAT1Q]!: .!!ESC!!!PTIQ]!: !!A!!!!!!. f!!.Qll!!!!
1!!!!!!!ll!! 573_-X~§

DATA/363 OS-II is a key-to-disk data entry systes designed
to operate under the SY8te./360 operating System liFT II or
[iVT. Its purpose is to provide a method of entering data by
Ileans of local IBM 2268 and local IBM 3277 Display Stations
to IBM 2311, 231Q, or 3339 direct access storage devices and
of verifying this data to produce input to a IIserls progralll,
bypassing all peripheral equipment· operations.. Anticipated
users are those currently using card equipment, lIIagnetic
tape, and/or paper tape recording equipment.
The purpose of this publication is to present the
functions and capabilities of DATA/36S OS-II, including
input/output descriptions, report formats, machine
requirellents, and user responsibilities.
GH28-1837
illU1§.! !!Q~ H !f!!llg~!Q!! DESCRIPT!Q!! !!!!!!!!!.
f!!QllU!! NU8BER " ll36-Xl!2

DATA/368 DOS-II is a key-to-disk data entry system designed
to operate under the Systell/360 Disk operating System. Its
purpose is to provide a method of entering data by means of
local lSI! 2263 Display Stations and IBH. 3277 Display
stations to IBM 2311, 231Q, or 3338 direct access storage
devices and of verifying this data to produce input to a
user's program, bypassing all peripheral equipment
operationse Anticipated users are those currently using
card equipment, magnetic tape, and/or paper tape recording
equipment.
The purpose of this publication is to present the
functions and capabilities of DATA/368 DOS-II, including
input/output descriptions, report formats, machine
requirements, and user re sponsibili ties.

indi vidual requiremen.ts.
This manual describes the pl1rpose and fUnctions of
securities order Matching.
SH2B-IB4a
ll!tiOO!llllm!. .!J!lQl!!!.ll!QJ! ll~TEH ll.!!§!Q!! 1 ..lGIS121 !!Q.!.J!.!!J! 1..;.
]l!ll lli£l!!flll!!! !.JIJ!Ji!!M1.!!
f!!Qll!!!!! lli£!!!fllQJ! !!!!!!!!!.
f!!!!llill J!.!!J!!!.!!!! 7H- XX l

=

a

This voluille specifies the forllat and content of computer
input statements defining data files to be processed. Data
description language facilities are discussed in a sequence
generally corresponding to a system user's need for those
facilities. Descriptive language statellents are illustrated
as input lines in keyword format representative of puncbedcard fields.

S828-1941
f!.JI!!!!!!!ll Sf STE!!ll 1l.!!.!!l!!!!I!!!! !! Hall i l l
Qf!!!!!llQ!!.§ !!!!!!!!!.
fJ!QllJ!!!! 1!!!.!!!!.!!!! a2.ll::ll!

=

Planning systems Generator II (PSG II) gives the user the
plans. It offers the user a simple lIIethod for organizing
planning data, establishing cOllputationa.l logic to be
applied to tbe data, and for generating data displays
and reports.
PSG II may be applied to the solution of planning
problells for financial management and also for any
division or department of a company with a planning
function such as personnel or lIanpower allocations,
lDarketing projections, short-range budgeting, etc.
This Operations Guide provides the information
needed to install and operate PSG II ..

S828-1842
fUNNING

!!!!!lli

ll!!!!EBATOB !! .1fall ! l l PBOGRAM
=f!!!!lll!!!! !!J!.!!!!!!!!
5734- XT 1
~

BEPEBENCE

Planning systems Generator II (PSG II) gives the user the
means to rapidly produce and evaluate a variety of financial
plans. It offers a sillple method for organizing planning
data, for establishing computational logic to be applied to
the data, and for generating displays and reports.
PSG II may be applied to the solution of p.lanning
problells for financial lIanagement and also for any division
or department of a company with planning responsibilities
such as. personnel or manpower allocations, marketing
projections. short-term budgeting, etc.
This manual describes the functions provided by PSG II
and explains their use. It also includes information for
writing planning logic programs in the FORTRAN programming
language. A aore detailed description of FORTRAN lIay be
found in the IBM Programlled Instruction Texts, FORTRAN IV

for IBK System/368 (B29-8888 through B29-8887).
S828-1843
£USTOKEB !J!lQ!!J!!lll!!!

£!!!!~!!Q!. ~!Ji!'!!!!

(CICS)

SYSTEK

PROGR1I\IMER'S REFERENCE "ANUAL PROGRAM NUMBERS

iiQ.§::!!NT BY-~d§.=l!;~L DOS=§TAiiiiAIDl-S 7 3 6- XXh
OS-STANDABD 5734-XX7

GH28-1838
!!~!£Q!!J1!!J!!g!I ON ~

£Ql!ll2J:

ll!!!!l!!!ll mOB!!Ill!!! !!ANUAL

1!£.a
=f!!!!llill
.!!l!1!!!.ID! a7H-P31
~I~l.!!1

The Telecoallunica tions control Systell (TCS) provides the
securities industry user with a highly efficient collputerbased system for controlling all traffic in a
telecomllunications network, based upon current operational
requirements and teleprocessing equip.ent in use.
The Telecommunications Control System runs under the
full System/36B operating systell and is cOllpatible with
systell/378_ Its flexibility facilitates the addition of
user routines and programs to tailor the system t.o
individual requirements.
"essage traffic accepted and processed includes orders,
executions, cancels, corrections, and report status requests
for all listed securities, as well as administrative
messages.
other types of traffic--such as data collection, data
distribution, inquiry, and similar application messages--can
be handled via Tes, TCl", and OS facilitiese
This manual describes the purpose and functions of the
prograll.

T~~tOier Information Control System (CICS) is a
transaction-oriented, iIlultiapplication data base/data
cOllllunication interface between a Systell/360 or sY5tem/378
operating system and user-Written application programs.
Applicable to most on-line systems, CICS provides lIany of
the facilities necessary for standard terminal applications:
message switching, inquiry, data collection, order entry,
and conversational data entry ..
CICS is available in three systems--tvo for DOS users
and one for OS users. Because the two CICS/DOS systems are
cOllpatible with each other and vith the CICS/OS system, it
is possible to start with a sllall data base/data
cOllmunication configuration and 1I0ve up through DOS into OS.
This manual provides information essential fOJ: persons
who have the responsibility to define, prepare, and
administer CICS in the environment it supports ..

SH28-1SQ4
£!!~!Q!!l!!!. ~Q!l!!!.nl!!! £.QJ!I!!Q!. ~!JiU!!
QfI!llQ!.!.~

2!!IDE

=PROGRAK

NOK.DII§

..l£!£ID. !.!!!!.!!!J!ll
5736-XX6,

~Q.2=.f!l!a:i!

DOS-STAN.!!A!!.!! a736-llh Q§:;g!!!l!!!!.!! a734-ll1
GH2B-1839

*N

~~!!ill1l!~

PROGJ!!!!

Q!!'!!!!!! .!lATCH!J!!! GEU.IDlJI!. !J!ll!!!!!!n!!!!

.!!!!!!ll!! aI.!'!=l.ll

JIll!!!!.

The securities Order Katching program product provides the
brokerage industry System/369 or system/378 user with online, 8utollatic recording and matching of most security
orders and execut.ions. In addi tiOD, off-line processing
functions generate input to purcbases and sales (P&S)
accounting systells and order rOOIl, branch office, stock
exchange floo'r, and custoller reports.
Securities Order l'latching operates with the IBM program
product, Telecollmunications Control System ('rCS), under the
full Operating System (OS) in a multiprogramming
environ.ent. Its flexibility "facilitates the addition of
user rou~ines and/or prograas to tailor the system to

The IBK CustOller Inforlla tion Con trol System (CICS) is a
transaction-oriented, multiapplication data base/data
communication interface between a System/368 or Systelll/378
operating system and user-Written application programs.
Applicable to most on-line systellls, CIeS provides lIany of
the facilities necessary for standard terlllinal applications:
mcssaqe switching, inquiry, data collection, order entry,
and conversational data entry.
eICS is available in tbree systems--two for DOS users
and one for os users. Because the tvo CICS/DOS systems are
compatible with each other; and with the CIeS/OS system, it
is possible to start with a small data base/data
comllunications configuration and move up through DOS into
OS.

This manual provides information of interest to persons
involved with terminal operation. fhese persons include

165

CONTINUED PROft PRIOR PAGE
terminal operators, terminal supervisors,. master terminal
operators, application programmers, system programmers, and
systelll administration.

SH2B-1954

U!! ll!l!!!lQ'!! .!!.!!lll.!!I.!!.!!L Q!1.!!.!!lliQ!!§. !!ANUAL
PROGRAM HUMBER 5736-011

ThIS-OperatIons -iaiiUar- provides instructions and guidance
for operating the programs in the IBM Fashion Reporter. The
major components of the manual describe (1) preparatory
information and procedures .. (2) operations .. and (3)
retrieving the programs frolll the distribution tape,
intializing the system .. and rUDning the sample problem.

S828-1047
£MIQl!!t.!! !!!!tQ.!!!!Il!2.!! £l!n.!!Ql, ~~M g~
~HI.!!! 1£!l1.
!!.Qll = llU.!!!!A.!!!! .L£!£UpOSSI Ql!
llTAHDA.!!!! !I!!!l